Table of contents 1MRK 580 231-XEN Technical reference manual Page … · 2018-05-09 · Table of contents Technical reference manual REB 551 Version: 2.2-00 1MRK 580 231-XEN Page

Page 1 – 1Table of contentsTechnical reference manualREB 551

1MRK 580 231-XEN

Version: 2.2-00October 1999

Section Name of document Page Document number Version

2 Revisions 2–3 1MRK 580 240-XEN Version 2.2-00

Service notes 2–5 1MRK 580 311-XEN Version 2.2-00

3 Requirements 3–3 1MRK 580 282-XEN Version 2.2-00

Technical data 3–7 1MRK 580 249-XEN Version 2.2-00

Ordering data sheet 3–23 1MRK 580 283-XEN Version 2.2-00

4 Installation and commissioning 4–5 1MRK 580 289-XEN Version 2.2-00

Local human-machine interface 4–25 1MRK 580 290-XEN Version 2.2-00

LED indication module 4-41 1MRK 580 676-XEN Version 2.2-00

Menu tree 4–43 1MRK 580 291-XEN Version 2.2-00

Appendix – Menu tree structure for REx 5xx termi-nals

4–53 1MRK 580 292-XEN Version 2.2-00

5 Terminal identification 5–3 1MRK 580 294-XEN Version 2.2-00

Activation of setting group 5–7 1MRK 580 295-XEN Version 2.2-00

Restricted settings via human-machine interface 5–11 1MRK 580 296-XEN Version 2.2-00

I/O system configuration 5–15 1MRK 580 297-XEN Version 2.2-00

Configurable logic 5–25 1MRK 580 298-XEN Version 2.2-00

Self-supervision 5–45 1MRK 580 299-XEN Version 2.2-00

Blocking of functions during test 5–49 1MRK 580 300-XEN Version 2.2-00

Time synchronisation 5–51 1MRK 580 302-XEN Version 2.2-00

Internal events 5-55 1MRK 580 303-XEN Version 2.2-00

6 Introduction to functions 6–17 1MRK 580 313-XEN Version 2.2-00

Pole discordance protection 6–21 1MRK 580 338-XEN Version 2.2-00

Breaker-failure protection 6–29 1MRK 580 339-XEN Version 2.2-00

Loss of voltage check 6–41 1MRK 580 355-XEN Version 2.2-00

Overload supervision 6–49 1MRK 580 356-XEN Version 2.2-00

Current circuit supervision 6–55 1MRK 580 357-XEN Version 2.2-00

Fuse failure supervision (negative sequence) 6–61 1MRK 580 358-XEN Version 2.2-00

Fuse failure supervision (zero sequence) 6–71 1MRK 580 359-XEN Version 2.2-00

Command control 6–81 1MRK 580 382-XEN Version 2.2-00

Synchro- and energising check for single circuit breaker

6–87 1MRK 580 363-XEN Version 2.2-00

Synchro- and energising check for double circuit breakers

6–113 1MRK 580 362-XEN Version 2.2-00

Synchro- and energising check 1 1/2 CB arrange-ment

6–131 1MRK 580 364-XEN Version 2.2-00

Phasing, synchro- and energising check, single CB 6–153 1MRK 580 365-XEN Version 2.2-00

Phasing, synchro- and energising check, double CBs 6–183 1MRK 580 366-XEN Version 2.2-00

Autorecloser, single, two and/or three phase 6–209 1MRK 580 367-XEN Version 2.2-00

Autorecloser, three phase 6–239 1MRK 580 368-XEN Version 2.2-00

Single or two pole trip logic 6–263 1MRK 580 379-XEN Version 2.2-00

Binary signal transfer to remote end 6–273 1MRK 580 381-XEN Version 2.2-00

Serial communication 6–311 1MRK 580 301-XEN Version 2.2-00

Table of contents Technical reference manual REB 551

Version: 2.2-00

1MRK 580 231-XENPage 1 – 2

Command function 6–325 1MRK 580 353-XEN Version 2.2-00

Communication channel test logic 6–329 1MRK 580 332-XEN Version 2.2-00

Event functions 6-337 1MRK 580 393-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Introduction 6–349 1MRK 580 383-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Settings 6–355 1MRK 580 384-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Indications 6–365 1MRK 580 386-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Disturbance recorder 6–367 1MRK 580 387-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Event recorder 6–375 1MRK 580 385-XEN Version 2.2-00

Disturbance report - Trip value recorder 6–377 1MRK 580 389-XEN Version 2.2-00

Monitoring of AC analogue measurements 6–381 1MRK 580 390-XEN Version 2.2-00

Monitoring of DC analogue measurements 6–399 1MRK 580 391-XEN Version 2.2-00

Pulse counter 6–419 1MRK 580 394-XEN Version 2.2-00

7 Hardware design 7–3 1MRK 580 395-XEN Version 2.2-00

Construction and hardware characteristics 7–9 1MRK 580 396-XEN Version 2.2-00

Remote end data communication modules 7–21 1MRK 580 397-XEN Version 2.2-00

Serial communication module 7–25 1MRK 580 398-XEN Version 2.2-00

8 Terminal diagrams and default configurations 8–1 1MRK 580 405-XEN Version 2.2-00

Terminal diagram N/A 1MRK 001 452-AA Rev. ind. 2

Default configuration N/A 1MRK 001 697-19 Rev. ind. 01

9 Index 9–3 1MRK 580 414-XEN Version 2.2-00

Section Name of document Page Document number Version

Page 2 – 1

Contents Page

Revisions .....................................................................................................2–3Revised documents........................................................................................ 2–3

Service notes...............................................................................................2–5

Revision and service notes

Revision and service notesPage 2 – 2

Page 2 – 3Revisions

1 Revised documentsSince this is the first version of this manual, no documents are revised.

1MRK 580 240-XEN

Version 2.2-00October 1999

Revisions

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 240-XENPage 2 – 4

Page 2 – 5Service notes

Currently no service notes are issued.

1MRK 580 311-XEN


Service notes

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 311-XENPage 2 – 6

Page 3 – 1

Contents Page

Requirements ..............................................................................................3–3Requirements ................................................................................................. 3–3

General ................................................................................................ 3–3Voltage transformers............................................................................ 3–3Current transformers ............................................................................ 3–3

Classification.............................................................................. 3–3Conditions .................................................................................. 3–3Fault current............................................................................... 3–4Calculating transformer requirements........................................ 3–4

Serial communication........................................................................... 3–4SPA............................................................................................ 3–4LON............................................................................................ 3–5IEC 870–5–103.......................................................................... 3–5

Personal computer for human machine interfacing.............................. 3–6

Technical data .............................................................................................3–7Introduction..................................................................................................... 3–7

General data................................................................................................... 3–7AC measuring accuracy (DA01-DA15) ................................................ 3–7DC (mA) measuring accuracy (MI11-MI66) ......................................... 3–7Configurable logic ................................................................................ 3–8

Additional configurable logic ...................................................... 3–8Contact data......................................................................................... 3–8Energising quantities............................................................................ 3–9Environmental influence..................................................................... 3–10Electromagnetic compatability ........................................................... 3–10Insulation............................................................................................ 3–10Vibration............................................................................................. 3–11CE compliance................................................................................... 3–11Size and weight.................................................................................. 3–11Dead line detection (DLD).................................................................. 3–11

Current, phase wise ..................................................................................... 3–12Pole discordance (PD) ....................................................................... 3–12Breaker faílure protection (BFP) ........................................................ 3–12

Power system supervision............................................................................ 3–13Loss of voltage check (LOV).............................................................. 3–13Overload supervision (OVLD) ............................................................ 3–13

Secondary system supervision..................................................................... 3–14Current circuit supervision (CTSU) .................................................... 3–14Fuse failure supervision (FUSE) ........................................................ 3–14

Control.......................................................................................................... 3–15Syncro- and energising check (SYN1-SYN4) .................................... 3–15Autoreclosing (AR01-AR04)............................................................... 3–15

Logic............................................................................................................. 3–16Trip logic(TRIP) .................................................................................. 3–16Communication channel test logic (CCHT) ........................................ 3–16Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC) ....................................... 3–16

Product introduction

Product introductionPage 3 – 2

Binary signal interbay communication (CM01-CM80)........................ 3–16Serial communication......................................................................... 3–17Remote end data communication ...................................................... 3–18

Monitoring..................................................................................................... 3–19Disturbance recorder (DREP) ............................................................ 3–19Event recorder (EVR)......................................................................... 3–19Increased measuring accuracy .......................................................... 3–20

Metering ....................................................................................................... 3–21Pulse counter ..................................................................................... 3–21

Ordering data sheet ..................................................................................3–23Ordering ....................................................................................................... 3–23

Page 3 – 3Requirements

1 Requirements

1.1 General The operation of a protection measuring function is influenced by distor-tion, and measures need to be taken in the protection to handle this phe-nomenon. One source of distortion is current transformer saturation. Inthis protection terminal, measures are taken to allow for a certain amountof CT saturation with maintained correct operation. This protection termi-nal can allow relatively heavy current transformer saturation.

Protection functions are also affected by transients caused by capacitivevoltage transformers (CVTs) but as this protection terminal has a veryeffective filter for these transients, the operation is hardly affected at all.

1.2 Voltage transformers Magnetic or capacitive voltage transformers can be used.

Capacitive voltage transformers (CTVs) should fulfil the requirementsaccording to IEC 186A, Section 20, regarding transients. According to thestandard, at a primary voltage drop down to zero, the secondary voltageshould drop to less than 10% of the peak pre-fault value before the shortcircuit within one cycle.

The protection terminal has an effective filter for this transient, whichgives secure and correct operation with CVTs.

1.3 Current transformers

1.3.1 Classification Current transformers should be of type TPX or TPY with an accuracyclass of 5P or better. The characteristic of the linearised current trans-former type TPZ is not well defined as far as the phase angle error is con-cerned, and we therefore recommend contacting ABB Network PartnerAB to confirm that the type in question can be used.

The current transformer ratio should be selected so that the current to theprotection is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults thatare to be detected. The minimum operating current is 10% of the nominalcurrent.

1.3.2 Conditions The requirements are a result of investigations performed in our networksimulator. The tests have been carried out with an analogue current trans-former model with a settable core area, core length, air gap and number ofprimary and secondary turns. The setting of the current transformer modelwas representative for current transformers of type TPX and TPY. Theresults are not valid for TPZ.

1MRK 580 282-XEN


Requirements

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 282-XENPage 3 – 4

All testing was made without any remanence flux in the current trans-former core. The requirements below are therefore fully valid for a corewith no remanence flux. It is difficult to give general recommendationsfor additional margins for remanence flux. They depend on the reliabilityand economy requirements.

When current transformers of type TPY are used, practically no additionalmargin is needed due to the anti-remanence air gap.

For current transformers of type TPX, the small probability of a fullyasymmetrical fault, together with maximum remanence flux in the samedirection as the flux generated by the fault, has to be kept in mind at thedecision of an additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current will beachieved when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0°). Investigations haveproved that 95% of the faults in the network will occur when the voltageis between 40° and 90°.

1.3.3 Fault current The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum faultcurrent for faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occurfor three-phase faults or single-phase-to-earth faults. The current for a sin-gle phase-to-earth fault will exceed the current for a three-phase faultwhen the zero sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than thepositive sequence impedance.

When calculating the current transformer requirements, maximum faultcurrent should be used and therefore both fault types have to be consid-ered.

1.3.4 Calculating transformer requirements

The current transformer secondary limiting emf (E2max) should meet therequirements below:

(Equation 1)

Ikmax Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for for-ward and reverse faults

Ipn Primary nominal CT currentIsn Secondary nominal CT currentIR Protection terminal nominal currentRCT CT secondary winding resistanceRL CT secondary cable resistance and additional load

1.4 Serial communication

1.4.1 SPA The optical fibres that are supplied by ABB Network Partner AB fulfil allthe requirements for the communication in the station. Both plastic fibresand glass fibres can be used. For distances up to 30 m, plastic fibres and

E2max

Ikmax Isn⋅

Ipn------------------------------- 1,5 RCT RL

0,25

IR2

------------+ +

⋅ ⋅>

Requirements 1MRK 580 282-XENPage 3 – 5

Version 2.2-00

for distances up to 500 m, glass fibres are suitable. Glass and plastic fibrescan be mixed in the same loop. The transmitter and reciever connectors atthe bus connection unit has to be of corresponding types, i.e. glass or plas-tic connector. See also table 2 on page 6.

For communication on longer distances, telephone modems are used. Themodems must be Hayes-compatible ones using “AT” commands withautomatic answering (AA) capability. The telephone network must com-ply with the CCITT standards.

For connection of the optical fibre loop to a PC or a telephone modem, anopto/electrical converter is required. The converter uses RS–232C and ithas a D25 connector on the electrical side. The converter is supplied byABB Network Partner AB.

1.4.2 LON The protection terminal can be used in a substation control system (SCS).For that purpose, connect the LON communication link to a LON StarCoupler via optical fibres. The optical fibres are either glass or plasticwith the following specification:

A PC can be used as a station HMI. The PC must be equipped with a com-munication card for LON (e.g. Echelon PCLTA card). Control functionsin the station HMI that is used with REC 561 are available as the High-voltage MicroLibrary (HVLib) functions, which is a library of standardapplication functions and images for the application engineering inS.P.I.D.E.R. MicroSCADA ver. 8.4 or later.

To configure the nodes in a SCS, the LON Network Tool is needed.

1.4.3 IEC 870–5–103 As an alternative to SPA communication, the terminals can use theIEC 870–5–103 standard protocol for protection functions. The terminalscommunicate with a primary station level system. In IEC terminology aprimary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The commu-nication is based on a point to point principle, where the terminal is aslave. The master must have a program that can interpret the IEC 870–5–

Table 1: Cable connection requirements for LON bus connection

Glass fibre Plastic fibre

Cable connector ST-connector Snap-in connector

Cable diameter 62.5/125 µm 1 mm

Max. cable length 1000 m 30 m

Requirements

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 282-XENPage 3 – 6

103 communication messages. The IEC communication link is connectedvia optical fibres. The optical fibres are either glass or plastic with the fol-lowing specification:

For more detailed requirements refer to the IEC 870–5–103 standard.

1.5 Personal computer for human machine interfacing

The PC shall comply with the following requirements:

• 100% IBM compatible running with DOS 5.0 or higher• 640 kb RAM or more (at least 450 kb available)• VGA screen and floppy disk drive 3 1/2” (1,44 Mb)• 3 Mb disk space required for the HMI program SM/REx 500 with

SMS-BASE for communication to the front port• Additional disk space required depends on the application, see Buy-

ers Guide for Rex 5xx, requirements for SMS 010• one serial port (COM) available.

Table 2: Cable connection requirements for SPA/IEC connection

Glass fibre Plastic fibre

Cable connector ST connector Snap-in connector

Cable diameter 62.5/125 µm 1 mm

Max. cable length 500 m 30 m

Page 3 – 7Technical data

1 IntroductionAll setting values are related to the rated voltage or current of the termi-nal, in order to simplify tables. However, in section 6, where functions aredescribed, setting values are related to the base voltage or current, in orderto increase flexibility at system design. See the section “Terminal identifi-cation” for details concerning base values and their definition.

2 General data

2.1 AC measuring accuracy (DA01-DA15)

Note: The actual number of available function blocks may be less than thenumber referenced, depending on ordered options.

2.2 DC (mA) measuring accuracy (MI11-MI66)

Note: The actual number of available function blocks may be less than thenumber referenced, depending on ordered options.

Function Setting range Accuracy

Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fr ± 0.2 Hz

Voltage (RMS) (0.1-1.5) x Ur ± 2.5 % of Ur,at U ≤ Ur± 2.5 % of U,at U > Ur

Current (RMS) (0.2-4) x Ir ± 2.5 % of Ir,at I ≤ Ir± 2.5 % of I,at I > Ir

Active power *)

Reactive power *)at |cos ϕ| > 0.9at |cos ϕ| ≤ 0.8

± 5 %± 7.5 %

*) Measured at Ur and 20 % of Ir


mA measuring function ± 5, ± 10, ± 20 mA0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20 mA

± 0.1 % of set value

Max current of transducer to input, I_Max

(-25 to +25) mA in steps of 0.01

Min current of transducer to input, I_Min


High alarm level for input, HiAlarm


High warning level for input, HiWarn


Low warning level for input, Low-Warn


Low alarm level for input, Low-Alarm


Alarm hysteresis for input, Hys-tereses

(0 - 20) mA in steps of 1

Amplitude dead band for input, DeadBand

(0 - 20) mA in steps of 1

Integrating dead band for input, IDeadB

(0 - 1000) mA in steps of 0.01

1MRK 580 249-XEN


Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 249-XENPage 3 – 8

2.3 Configurable logic

2.3.1 Additional configurable logic

2.4 Contact data

Timers

Function Number Setting range Accuracy

Timer, TM 10 (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Long timer, TL 10 (0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Pulse timer, TP 10 (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Pulse long timer, TQ 10 (0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Logic

Function Number Description

AND 30 4 inputs (1 inverted),2 outputs (inverted and non-inverted)

OR 60 6 inputs, 2 outputs (inverted and non-inverted)

XOR 39 2 inputs, 2 outputs (inverted and non-inverted)

INV 20

SR 5 2 inputs, 2 outputs (inverted and non-inverted)

Timers

Function Number Setting range Accuracy

Pulse timer, TP 40 (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Logic

Function Number Description

AND 239 4 inputs (1 inverted),2 outputs (inverted and non-inverted)

OR 159 6 inputs, 2 outputs (inverted and non-inverted)

INV 59

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays

Max system voltage 250 V ac, dc 250 V ac, dc

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min

1000 V rms 800 V dc

Current carrying capacitycontinuous1 s

8 A 10 A

8 A10 A

Making capacity at induc-tive load with L/R>10 ms

0.2 s1.0 s

30 A10 A

0.4 A0.4 A

Breaking capacity for ac, cos ϕ>0.4

250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for dc with L/R<40ms 48 V/1 A

110 V/0.4 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A

48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A

Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Technical data 1MRK 580 249-XENPage 3 – 9

Version 2.2-00

2.5 Energising quantities

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Current

Operation rangePermissive overload

Burden

Ir = 1 or 5 AIr = 1 or 5 A for I5(0.004-100) × Ir4 × Ir cont.100 × Ir for 1 s *)

< 0.25 VA at Ir

(0.2-30) x Ir

Ac voltage Ph-Ph

Operation rangePermissive overload

Burden

Ur = 100/110/115/120 VUr = 200/220/230/240 V

(0.001-1.5) x Ur1.5 × Ur cont.2.5 × Ur for 1 s< 0.2 VA at Ur

(80-120) % of Ur

Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz ± 5 %

Auxiliary dc voltage EL

power consumptionbasic terminaleach output relay

power dissipationRL24 = (24/30)VRL48 = (48/60)VRL110 = (110/125)VRL220 = (220/250)V

EL = (48-250) V

≤ 16 W≤ 0.15 W

max. 0.05 W/inputmax. 0.1 W/inputmax. 0.2 W/inputmax. 0.4 W/input

± 20 %

Binary input/output moduledc voltage RL

power consumptioneach I/O-moduleeach output relay


RL24 = (24/30) VRL48 = (48/60) VRL110 = (110/125) VRL220 = (220/250) V

≤ 1.0 W≤ 0.15 W


± 20 %± 20 %± 20 %± 20 %

Binary input moduledc voltage RL

power consumptioneach input module


RL24 = (24/30) VRL48 = (48/60) VRL110 = (110/125) VRL220 = (220/250) V

≤ 0.5 W


± 20 %± 20 %± 20 %± 20 %

Binary output modulepower consumption

each output moduleeach output relay

≤ 1.0W≤ 0.25 W

mA input moduleinput range

input resistance

power consumptioneach mA-moduleeach mA-input

± 20 mA

Rin = 194 Ω

≤ 4 W≤ 0.1 W

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 249-XENPage 3 – 10

2.6 Environmental influence

2.7 Electromagnetic compatability

2.8 Insulation

Ambient temperature 20 °C -5 °C to +55 °C

Ripple in dc auxiliary voltage max. 2 % max. 12 %

Relative humidity (10-90) % (10-90) %

*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBIFLEX test switch included together with the productI2t = 10 kAs

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Dependence on: Within nominal range Within operative range

Ambient temperature 0.01 % / °C Correct function

Ripple in auxiliary dc voltage Negligible Correct function

Interruption in auxiliary dc voltagewithout resettingcorrect functionrestart time

< 50 ms0 - ∞< 100 s

< 50 ms0 - ∞< 100 s

Test Type test values Reference standards

1 MHz burst disturbanceFor short-range galvanic modemFor galvanic interface *)

- common mode- differential mode

2.5 kV2.5 kV

1 kV0.5 kV

IEC 60255-22-1, Class IIIIEC 60255-22-1, Class III

Class IIClass II

Electrostatic dischargeFor short-range galvanic modemFor galvanic interface *)

8 kV8 kV-

IEC 60255-22-2, Class IIIIEC 60255-22-2, Class III

Fast transient disturbanceFor short-range galvanic modemFor galvanic interface *)

4 kV4 kV1 kV

IEC 60255-22-4, Class IVIEC 60255-22-4, Class IVClass II, level 2

Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance

10 V/m, (25-1000) MHz

IEC 60255-22-3, Class IIIIEEE/ANSI C37.90.2

*) For FOX6Plus the following modes are not applicable:- V.36/V11 Co-directional according to CCITT- RS530/RS422 Co-directional according to EIA

Test Type test values

Dielectric testFor short-range galvanic modemFor galvanic interface *)

2.0 kV ac, 1 min2.5 kV ac, 1 min1.0 kV ac, 1 min

Impulse voltage testFor short-range galvanic modemFor galvanic interface *)

For other circuits

5 kV, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J1 kV, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J5 kV, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J

Insulation resistance >100 MΩ at 500 V dc

Reference standard:IEC 60255–5


Version 2.2-00

2.9 Vibration

2.10 CE compliance

2.11 Size and weight

2.12 Dead line detection (DLD)

Test According to Reference standards

Vibration Class I IEC 60255-21-1

Shock and bump Class I IEC 60255-21-2

Seismic Class I IEC 60255-21-3

Test According to

Immunity EN 50082-2

Emissivity EN 50081-2

Low voltage directive EN 50178

Weight approx. 1/2 of 19" rack: ≤ 8.5 kg3/4 of 19" rack: ≤ 11 kg

Dimensionswidth

heightdepth

1/2 of 19" rack: 223.7 mm3/4 of 19" rack: 336 mm

267 mm245 mm

Storage temperature -40 °C to +70 °C


Automatic check of dead line condition

operate phase voltageoperate phase current

(10-100) % of Ur in steps of 1%(5-100) % of Ir in steps of 1%

± 2.5 % of Ur ± 2.5 % of Ir

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 249-XENPage 3 – 12

3 Current, phase wise

3.1 Pole discordance (PD)

3.2 Breaker faílure protection (BFP)


Operate current 10% of Ir ± 2.5 % of IrTime delay (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Auxiliary-contact-based function - time delay

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms


Operate current (one measuring element per phase)

(5-200) % of Ir in steps of 1 % ± 2.5 % of Ir,at I ≤ Ir ± 2.5 % of I,at I > Ir

Retrip time delay t1 (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Back-up trip time delay t2 (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Value

Trip operate time max 18 ms

Operate time for current detec-tion

max 10 ms


Version 2.2-00

4 Power system supervision

4.1 Loss of voltage check (LOV)

4.2 Overload supervision (OVLD)


Operate voltage U< (10-100) % of Ur in steps of 1% ± 2.5 % of Ur


Operate current I>

Time delay

(20-300) % of Ir in steps of 1 %

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms

± 2.5 % of Ir,at I ≤ Ir ± 2.5 % of I,at I > Ir ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 249-XENPage 3 – 14

5 Secondary system supervision

5.1 Current circuit supervision (CTSU)

5.2 Fuse failure supervision (FUSE)


Operate current I> (5 - 100)% of Ir in steps of 1% ± 2.5 % of Ir


Zero-sequence quantities:operate voltage 3U0operate current 3I0

(10 - 50)% of Ur in steps of 1%(10 - 50)% of Ir in steps of 1%

± 2.5 % of Ur ± 2.5 % of Ir

Negative-sequence quantities:operate voltage 3U2operate current 3I2

(10 - 50)% of Ur in steps of 1%(10 - 50)% of Ir in steps of 1%

± 2.5 % of Ur ± 2.5 % of Ir


Version 2.2-00

6 Control

6.1 Syncro- and energising check (SYN1-SYN4)

Note: The technical data includes data for the phasing function, whichcannot be present without the syncro-check function.

6.2 Autoreclosing (AR01-AR04)


Synchro check frequency difference limit, FreqDiffvoltage difference limit, UDiffphase difference limit,PhaseDiff

(50-300) mHz in steps of 10 mHz

(5-50) % of Ur in steps of 1 %

(5-75)° in steps of 1°

≤ 20 mHz

± 2.5 % of Ur

± 2°

Energisingvoltage level high, UHighvoltage level low, ULowauto-energising period,tAutoEnergmanual energising period,tManEnerg

(50-120)% of Ur in steps of 1%(10-100) % of Ur in steps of 1%

0-60) s in steps of 1 ms

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms

± 2.5 % of Ur ± 2.5 % of Ur

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Phasingslip frequency, FreqDiffSynchbreaker closing pulse dura-tion, tPulsebreaker closing time, tBreaker

(50-500) mHz in steps of 10mHz

(0-60) s in steps of 1ms

(0-60) s in steps of 1ms

≤ 20 mHz

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Phase shift ϕline - ϕbusVoltage ratio Ubus/Uline

(0-360)° in steps of 5°(0.20-5.00) in steps of 0.01

Operate time Value

For synchro check functionFor energising check function

typical 190 mstypical 80 ms


Number of autoreclosing shots 1 - 4

Number of autoreclosing pro-grams

8

Auto-reclosing open time:shot 1 - t1 1phshot 1 - t1 2phshot 1 - t1 3phshot 2 - t2 3phshot 3 - t3 3phshot 4 - t4 3ph

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms(0-9000) s in steps of 0.1 s(0-9000) s in steps of 0.1 s(0-9000) s in steps of 0.1 s

± 0.5 % ±10 ms± 0.5 % ±10 ms± 0.5 % ±10 ms± 0.5 % ±10 ms± 0.5 % ±10 ms± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Reclaim time - tReclaim (0-9000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Inhibit reclosing, reset time -tIn-hibit

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Duration of reclosing pulse - tPulse

(0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Synchro-check/Dead line time limit - tSync

(0-9000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Breaker closed before start - tCB 5 s ± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Resetting of “AR Started“ after reclosing - tTrip (0-60) s in steps of 1 ms ± 0.5 % ±10 ms

Wait for Master release - tWait (0-9000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 249-XENPage 3 – 16

7 Logic

7.1 Trip logic(TRIP)

7.2 Communication channel test logic (CCHT)

7.3 Binary signal transfer to remote end (RTC)

Note: The RTC function uses internal logic signals and/or a binary I/Omodule as a data source, and remote end data communication links forcommunication with remote end terminal(s). See “Introduction” on page 7for specifications of the binary I/O module, and “Remote end data com-munication” on page 18 for specifications of the remote end data commu-nication links.

7.4 Binary signal interbay communication (CM01-CM80)

Note: The CM01-CM80 function blocks uses internal logic signals and/orbinary I/O modules as a data source, and the LON protocol based commu-nication bus for communication with other terminals and/or a station con-trol system. See “Introduction” on page 7 for specifications of the binaryI/O module, and the following section for serial communication specifica-tions. The actual number of available function blocks may be less than thenumber referenced, depending on ordered options.


Tripping action 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph


Time interval for automatic start of testing cycle, tStart

(0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Time interval available for suc-cessful test of an external func-tion, tWait

(0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Minimum time interval for repeated tests of an external function, tCh

(0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Duration of CCHT-CS functional output signal, tCS

(0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Duration of a CCHT-CHOK func-tional output signal, tChOK

(0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms

Duration of an inhibit condition after the CCHT-BLOCK input sig-nal resets, tInh

(0-90000) s in steps of 0.1 s ± 0.5 % ± 10 ms


Version 2.2-00

7.5 Serial communication

Table 1: SPA protocol

Function Value

Protocol SPA

Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bit/s

Slave number 1 to 899

Remote change of active group allowed yes/no

Remote changed of settings allowed yes/no

Connectors and optical fibres glass or plastic

Table 2: LON protocol

Function Value

Protocol LON

Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s


Table 3: IEC 870-5-103 protocol

Function Value

Protocol IEC 870-5-103

Communication speed 9600, 19200 bit/s


Table 4: Front panel connection

Function Value

Protocol SPA

Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bit/s

Slave number 1 to 899

Remote change of active group allowed yes

Remote changed of settings allowed yes

Connectors special electric/optic cable

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 249-XENPage 3 – 18

7.6 Remote end data communication

Function Value

Data communication between the terminals

transmission typedata transfer rate

synchronous56 or 64 kbit/s, For G.703 only 64 kbit/s

Galvanic interface Connection

Interface type V.36/V11 Co-directional

V.36/V11 Contra-direc-tional

X.21/X27

RS530/RS422 Co-direc-tionalRS530/RS422 Contra-directionalG.703

According to CCITTAccording to CCITTAccording to CCITTAccording to EIAAccording to EIAAccording to CCITT

Connector type D-sub 15 or 25 pins (G.703 screw)

Short-range galvanic modem

RangeCableLine interfaceConnectorIsolation

max 4 kmTwisted pair, minimum 2 pairsBalanced symmetrical three-state current loop5-pin divisible connector with screew connectionGalvanic isolation through optocouplers and isolating DC/DC-converter

Optical interface

Type of fibreGraded-index multimode 50/125µm

Single mode9/125 µm

Optical connector

Wave length Optical transmitter

injected power Optical receiver

sensitivityTransmission distance

Type FC,e.g. Diamond HFC-131300 nmLED-16 dBmPIN diode-40 dBmmax 20 km

Type FC-PC,e.g. Diamond HPC-101300 nmLED-21 dBmPIN diode -40 dBmmax 30 km

Interface type ABB FOX specific protocol

Short-range fibre optical modem

Transmission distanceOptical fibreOptical connectorsOptical budgetInterface type

max 5 km1300 nm, multimode fibreST15dBFiberdata specific protocol


Version 2.2-00

8 Monitoring

8.1 Disturbance recorder (DREP)

8.2 Event recorder (EVR)

Function Setting range

Number of binary signals 0 - 48

Number of analogue signals 0 - 10

Sampling rate 2 kHz

Recording bandwidth (5-250) Hz

Overcurrent triggering (0 - 5000) % of Ir in steps of 1 %

Undercurrent triggering (0 - 200) % of Ir in steps of 1 %

Overvoltage triggering (0 - 200) % of Ur in steps of 1 % at 100 V sec

Undervoltage triggering (0 - 110) % of Ur in steps of 1 %

Pre-fault time (10 - 300) ms in steps of 10 ms

Post fault time (100 - 3000) ms in steps of 100 ms

Limit time (500 - 4000) ms in steps of 100 ms

Number of recorded disturbances Max 10 disturbances

Total recording time with 10 analogue and 48 binary signals *) recorded

maximum 40 s

Voltage channelsdynamic rangeresolutionaccuracy at rated frequency fr

U ≤ Ur U > Ur

(0.01-2.0) x Ur at 100 V sec.0.1 % of Ur

± 2.5 % of Ur ± 2.5 % of U

Current channelsdynamic range

without dc offsetwith full dc offset

resolutionaccuracy at rated frequency fr

I ≤ Ir I > Ir

(0.01-110) x Ir(0.01-60) x Ir0.5 % of Ir

± 2.5 % of Ir ± 2.5 % of I

Built-in calendar for 30 years with leap years

*) The amount of harmonics can affect the maximum storage time

Function Value

Time tagging resolutionEvent buffering capacity

Max. number of events/disturbance reportMax. number of disturbance reports

Time tagging error with synchronisation once/1sTime tagging error with synchronisation once/10sTime tagging error with synchronisation once/60s

(minute pulse synchronisation)Time tagging error without synchronisation

1 ms

15010± 1.5 ms± 1.5 ms

± 1.5 ms± 3 ms/min

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 249-XENPage 3 – 20

8.3 Increased measuring accuracy


Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fr ± 0.2 Hz

Voltage (RMS) (0.8-1.2) x Ur ± 0.25 % of Ur,at U ≤Ur± 0.25 % of U,at U > Ur

Current (RMS) (0.2-2) x Ir ± 0.25 % of Ir,at I ≤ Ir± 0.25 % of I,at I > Ir

Active power *) at |cos ϕ| > 0.90.8 x Ur < U < 1.2 x Ur

0.2 x Ir < I < 2 x Ir

± 0.5 % of Pr,at P ≤ Pr

*)

± 0.5 % of P,at P >Pr

*)

*) Pr active power at U = Ur , I = Ir and |cos ϕ| = 1


Version 2.2-00

9 Metering

9.1 Pulse counter


Cycle time for pulse counter (0.5-60) min in steps of 30 s ± 0.1 % of set value

Technical data

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 249-XENPage 3 – 22

Page 3 – 23Ordering data sheet

1 OrderingThe basic version of REB 551 is a breaker protection terminal withbreaker failure, current based pole discordance protection and synchro-check. System supervision functions and event recorder are also includedin the basic version.

1MRK 580 283-XEN


Ordering data sheet

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 283-XENPage 3 – 24

Basic functions

Self-supervision with internal event recorder

Real-time clock with external time synchronisation

Four groups of setting parameters

Local Human Machine Interface (HMI)

Configurable logic

Service value reading

Monitoring of ac analogue measurements

Monitoring of dc analogue measurements

Ordering Number: 1MRK 002 498-AA Quantity:

Includes basic functions and the selected functions and hardware options below

Basic data:

Frequency, fr 50/60 Hz

Dc voltage, EL 48/60/110/125/220/250 V

Basic data to specify:

Ac inputs

1 A, 110 V 1MRK 000 157-MA

5 A, 110 V 1MRK 000 157-NA

1 A, 220 V 1MRK 000 157-VA

5 A, 220 V 1MRK 000 157-WA

Interface dc voltage

24/30 V 1MRK 000 179-EA

48/60 V 1MRK 000 179-AB

110/125 V 1MRK 000 179-BB

220/250 V 1MRK 000 179-CB

Factory configurations

Standard configuration, single or two pole tripping Quantity:

Customer-specific configuration Quantity:

Ordering data sheet 1MRK 580 283-XENPage 3 – 25

Version 2.2-00

Functions;

= function always included

Current, phase wise

Pole discordance protection (current and contact based) 1MRK 001 456-PA

Breaker failure protection 1MRK 001 458-AA

Power system supervision

Loss of voltage check 1MRK 001 457-VA

Overload supervision 1MRK 001 457-FA

Secondary system supervision

Current circuit supervision (current-based) 1MRK 001 457-XA

Fuse failure supervision (Negative sequence) 1MRK 001 457-YA

Fuse failure supervision (Zero sequence) 1MRK 001 457-ZA

ControlNote: Only one alternative for Command control, Synch-check and Autorecloser can be selected respectively.

Command control (16 signals) 1MRK 001 458-EA

Synchro-check and energising-check, single CB 1MRK 001 458-GA

Synchro-check and energising-check, double CB 1MRK 001 458-FA

Synchro-check and energising-check, 1½ breaker arrangement (per breaker) 1MRK 001 458-HA

Note: This function requires binary inputs/outputs

Synchro-check with phasing and energising-check, single CB 1MRK 001 458-KA

Synchro-check with phasing and energising-check, double CB 1MRK 001 457-HA

Autorecloser logic, 1 and/or 3 phase, single CB 1MRK 001 458-LA

Autorecloser logic, 1 and/or 3 phase, double CB 1MRK 001 457-KA

Autorecloser logic, 3 phase, single CB 1MRK 001 458-MA

Autorecloser logic, 3 phase, double CB 1MRK 001 457-LA

Logic

Single or two pole tripping logic 1MRK 001 458-XA

Additional configurable logic 1MRK 001 457-MA

Communication channel test logic 1MRK 001 459-NA

Binary signal transfer to remote endNote: See Communication module alternatives for selecting a comm. module

1MRK 001 458-ZA

Binary signal interbay communication, high speed (protection application) 1MRK 001 455-RA

Monitoring

Disturbance recorder, 40 s 1MRK 001 458-NA

Event recorder 1MRK 001 459-KA

Trip value recorder 1MRK 001 458-SA

Increased measuring accuracy for U, I, P, Q 1MRK 000 597-PA

Metering

Pulse counter logic 1MRK 001 458-TA

Ordering data sheet

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 283-XENPage 3 – 26

Hardware options;

Casing

Case size 3/4 x 19" (max. 8 I/O)1MRK 000 151-GA

Standard

1/2 x 19" (max. 3 I/O)1MRK 000 151-FA

Optional

Combined binary input/output and output modules (max)4 3

mA input module (max) 1 1

Note: The communication module option, if selected, occupies one I/O position

I/O modules

8 modules are available in the 3/4 x 19" case and 3 modules are available in the 1/2 x 19" case.

InterfaceDC voltage

Quantity Ordering number

Binary input module(16 inputs)

24/30 V 1MRK 000 508-DA

48/60 V 1MRK 000 508-AA

110/125 V 1MRK 000 508-BA

220/250 V 1MRK 000 508-CA

Binary input/output module (8 inputs and 12 outputs)

24/30 V 1MRK 000 173-GA

48/60 V 1MRK 000 173-AB

110/125 V 1MRK 000 173-BB

220/250 V 1MRK 000 173-CB

Binary output module (24 single outputs or 12 command outputs)

1MRK 000 614-AA

mA input module (6 channels) 1MRK 000 284-AA

Remote end data communication module alternativesNote: Applicable only when function Binary signal transfer to remote end is selected. Only one alternative can be selected. Optical fibre or electrical wire is not included.

V.35/V.36 contra-directional galvanic interface 1MRK 000 185-BA

X.21 galvanic interface 1MRK 000 185-CA

RS 530/422 contra-directional galvanic interface 1MRK 000 185-EA

Fibre optical modem 1MRK 000 195-AA

Short range galvanic modem 1MRK 001 370-AA

Short range fibre optical modem 1MRK 001 370-BA

V.35/V.36 and RS 530/422 co-directional galvanic interfaces On Request

Serial communication modules

Serial communication for SMS and SCS; (one alternative per port)

SMS, port SPA/IEC 870-5-103 (location X13)

Plastic/Plastic 1MRK 000 168-FA

Glass/Glass 1MRK 000 168-DA

SCS, port LON (location X15)

Plastic/Plastic 1MRK 000 168-EA

Glass/Glass 1MRK 000 168-DA

Ordering data sheet 1MRK 580 283-XENPage 3 – 27

Version 2.2-00

Engineering facilities

HMI languageSecond language besides English

German 1MRK 001 459-AA

Russian 1MRK 001 459-BA

French 1MRK 001 459-CA

Spanish 1MRK 001 459-DA

Italian 1MRK 001 459-EA

Customer-specific ordering

Customer-specific order number

Combiflex

COMBITEST test switch module RTXP 24 mounted withthe terminal in RHGS6 case with window door 1MRK 000 371-CA

Internal earthing RK 926 215-BB External earthing RK 926 215-BC

On/Off switch for the dc supply RK 795 017-AA

Mounting details with IP40 degree of protection from the front:

19" rack 1MRK 000 020-BR

Wall mounting 1MRK 000 020-DA

Flush mounting 1MRK 000 020-Y

additional for IP54 (protection terminal only) 1MKC 980 001-2

Semi-flush mounting 1MRK 000 020-BS

additional for IP54 (protection terminal only) 1MKC 980 001-2

Accessories:

User documentation

Technical reference manual, REB 551 Quantity: 1MRK 606 008-UEN

Combiflex

Key switch (for locked Settings) Quantity: 1MRK 000 611-A

Resistor unit for creation of 3Uo voltage (RXTMA 1) Quantity: 1MRK 000 486-AA

Communication (remote terminal communication)

Interface converter (dc voltage 48 V)

RS 530/422 contra-directional to G.703 co-directional converter 1) Quantity: 1MRK 001 295-AA

Optical/electrical converters for short-range optical modems (dc voltage 48-110 V)

V.35/V.36 Quantity: 1MRK 001 295-CA

X.21/G.703 / RS 530 Quantity: 1MRK 001 295-DA

Fibre optic repeater and multiplexer (FOX 20)2) available from ABB Network Partner Ltd (Turgi, Switzerland)

1) For dc-supply 110-250 V an extra dc/dc converter type RXTUG 22H is needed, see 1MRK 513 001-BEN.2) Compatible with Fibre optical modem according to 1MRK 000 195-AA.

Ordering data sheet

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 283-XENPage 3 – 28

Configuration and monitoring tools

Front connection cable for PC (Opto/9-pol D-sub) Quantity: 1MKC 950 001-1

CAP 531, Graphical configuration tool (IEC 1131-3) Quantity: 1MRK 000 876-KB

CAP/REx 500, CAP software module Quantity: 1MRK 000 876-PA

LNT 505, LON configuration tool Quantity: 1MRS 151 400

SLDT, LON configuration module REx 500available on our website: www.abb.se/net

1MRK 001 700-4

SMS-BASE, Basic program for all SMS applications Quantity: RS 881 007-AA

SM/REx 500, SMS software module Quantity: 1MRK 000 314-MA

REPORT, program for event and alarm handling in SMS Quantity: RS 881 011-AA

RECOM Disturbance collection program Quantity: 1MRK 000 077-DC

REVAL Disturbance evaluation program, English version Quantity: 1MRK 000 078-AB

MicroSCADA tools

LIB 520, MicroSCADA engineering tool Quantity: On request

For our reference and statistics we would be pleased to be provided with the following application data:

Country: End user:

Station name: Voltage level: kV

Page 4 – 1

Contents Page

Installation and commissioning ................................................................4–5Receiving and storage.................................................................................... 4–5

Installation ...................................................................................................... 4–5Mechanical installation ......................................................................... 4–5

19" rack installation.................................................................... 4–5Rack mounting - Example 1 ............................................... 4–6Rack mounting - Example 2 ............................................... 4–6

Flush mounting .......................................................................... 4–8Semi-flush mounting .................................................................. 4–9Wall mounting .......................................................................... 4–10Wall mounting .......................................................................... 4–10

Electrical connections ........................................................................ 4–11Voltage connectors ............................................................................ 4–13Fibre optic connections ...................................................................... 4–14

Setting and configuration.............................................................................. 4–15Local human-machine interface (HMI) ............................................... 4–15Front communication.......................................................................... 4–15Serial communication......................................................................... 4–16Configuration of inputs and outputs ................................................... 4–17

Commissioning............................................................................................. 4–18Test of internal circuits ....................................................................... 4–19Secondary injection test ..................................................................... 4–19Check of external connections ........................................................... 4–19

COMBITEST test-switch RTXP 24 .......................................... 4–19Functional test.................................................................................... 4–20Test termination ................................................................................. 4–20

Fault tracing.................................................................................................. 4–21Using information on the local HMI .................................................... 4–21Using front-connected PC or SMS..................................................... 4–22

Repair instruction ......................................................................................... 4–23

Maintenance................................................................................................. 4–24

Local human-machine interface ..............................................................4–25Introduction................................................................................................... 4–25

Human-machine interface module - design.................................................. 4–25LEDs .................................................................................................. 4–26LCD display........................................................................................ 4–26Buttons............................................................................................... 4–26

HMI modes ................................................................................................... 4–28Idle mode ........................................................................................... 4–28Reporting mode.................................................................................. 4–28Configuration mode............................................................................ 4–28Test mode .......................................................................................... 4–28

Menu window ............................................................................................... 4–29

Dialogue windows ........................................................................................ 4–31Starting a dialogue ............................................................................. 4–31

Installation, commissioning and human-machine interface

Installation, commissioning and human-machine interfacePage 4 – 2

Idle mode ........................................................................................... 4–32Confirming a command ...................................................................... 4–32Selecting a command......................................................................... 4–32Cancel a command ............................................................................ 4–33Selecting and cancelling a command................................................. 4–33Commands with parameter settings................................................... 4–33

Data window................................................................................................. 4–34Reading and setting values................................................................ 4–34Reading and setting of non-numerical parameters ............................ 4–35Reading and setting strings................................................................ 4–36Setting local terminal time .................................................................. 4–36Additional information......................................................................... 4–37Saving the settings in a setting group ................................................ 4–37

LED indication module............................................................................. 4-41Introduction.................................................................................................... 4-41

Design ........................................................................................................... 4-41LEDs ................................................................................................... 4-41Acknowledgment/reset ................................................................................................... 4-41Description text ................................................................................... 4-41

Menu tree...................................................................................................4–43General......................................................................................................... 4–43

Disturbance report menu.............................................................................. 4–44Disturbances ...................................................................................... 4–44Calculate distance to fault .................................................................. 4–44Manual trigg ....................................................................................... 4–44Clear disturbance report..................................................................... 4–44

Service report menu ..................................................................................... 4–45Service values.................................................................................... 4–45Phasors .............................................................................................. 4–45Functions............................................................................................ 4–45I/O ...................................................................................................... 4–45Disturbance report.............................................................................. 4–45Active group ....................................................................................... 4–45Time ................................................................................................... 4–45Internal signals ................................................................................... 4–45

Settings menu .............................................................................................. 4–46Disturbance report.............................................................................. 4–46Functions............................................................................................ 4–46Change active group .......................................................................... 4–46Time ................................................................................................... 4–46

Terminal report menu ................................................................................... 4–47Self- supervision................................................................................. 4–47Identity number .................................................................................. 4–47Modules.............................................................................................. 4–47Analogue inputs ................................................................................. 4–47

Configuration menu ...................................................................................... 4–48Analogue inputs ................................................................................. 4–48I/O modules........................................................................................ 4–48Differential function ............................................................................ 4–48

Installation, commissioning and human-machine interface Page 4 – 3

Terminal communication .................................................................... 4–48SPA communication................................................................. 4–48IEC communication.................................................................. 4–49LON communication ................................................................ 4–49Remote terminal communication ............................................. 4–49

Time synchronising source ................................................................ 4–49Local HMI blockset............................................................................. 4–49Identifiers............................................................................................ 4–49

Command menu........................................................................................... 4–50

Test menu .................................................................................................... 4–51

Appendix – Menu tree structure for REx 5xx terminals ........................4–53Introduction................................................................................................... 4–53

Menu tree structure ...................................................................................... 4–54Disturbance report.............................................................................. 4–54Service report..................................................................................... 4–55

General .................................................................................... 4–55Functions, part I ....................................................................... 4–56Functions, part II ...................................................................... 4–57Functions, part III ..................................................................... 4–58Functions, part IV..................................................................... 4–59Functions, part V...................................................................... 4–60Functions, part VI..................................................................... 4–61Functions, part VII.................................................................... 4–62I/O ............................................................................................ 4–63Remaining menus.................................................................... 4–64

Settings .............................................................................................. 4–65Functions, part I ....................................................................... 4–66Functions, part II ...................................................................... 4–67Functions, part III ..................................................................... 4–68Functions, part IV..................................................................... 4–69Functions, part V...................................................................... 4–70Functions, part VI..................................................................... 4–71Remaining menus.................................................................... 4–72

Terminal report................................................................................... 4–73Configuration...................................................................................... 4–75

Part I ........................................................................................ 4–75Part II ....................................................................................... 4–76Part III ...................................................................................... 4–77

Command........................................................................................... 4–78Test .................................................................................................... 4–79

Page 4 – 4Installation and commissioning

1 Receiving and storageRemove the terminal from its transport case and perform a visual inspec-tion to see any possible transport damage. Check that the delivered termi-nal has the correct data concerning rated current, rated voltage and rateddc voltage on the rating plate at the front of the terminal.

If storing the terminal before installation, it must be done in a dry, dust-free place and preferably in its original transport case.

2 InstallationThe terminal is assembled in a closed case of 1/2, 3/4 or full width of astandard 19-inches wide rack. The height is 6U.

If a COMBITEST test-switch is included an additional box type RHGS isused. It has the same principal design as the terminal case and the width1/4 of 19-inches. It is possible to mount the RHGS-box by the side of aREx 5xx terminal smaller than 19-inches.

2.1 Mechanical installation

The REx 5xx terminal is designed with the mechanical packaging andconnecting system described in the “Buyer’s Guide Series REx 5xxMechanical design and mounting accessories”.

Most of the REx 5xx terminals can be flush, semi-flush, rack or wallmounted with the use of different mounting kits. Semi-flush mountingcannot be applied for the 1/1 of 19-inches wide terminals which have ven-tilating openings at the top and bottom part. The mounting details forsemi-flush installation cover the ventilating openings.

The degree of protection is IP 40, according to IEC 529, for terminalswith the widths 1/2 and 3/4 of 19-inches. For the 1/1 of 19-inches wideterminals IP 30 is valid for the top and bottom part.

IP 54, for the front area at flush installations, can be obtained with acces-sories. The accessories are mounted at the production of the terminalwhich means that it must be specified at the ordering. The rear side fulfilsIP 20.

For different types of mounting, special mounting kits are available. Allmounting kits contain assembly instructions.

A protective cover for the rear side of the terminal is available.

Avoid dusty, damp places or conditions that cause rapid temperature vari-ations, powerful vibrations or shocks.

2.1.1 19" rack installation

For installation of the terminal in a 19-inches rack structure, mountingangles are needed. If two terminals are mounted side-by-side, an addi-tional side-by-side mounting kit is needed as well. All necessary screwholes in the box are already prepared.

1MRK 580 289-XEN


Installation and commissioning 1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 5

Version 2.2-00

2.1.1.1 Rack mounting - Example 1

One terminal mounted in a 19-inches structure

• If the size of the terminal is 1/2 of 19-inches: One set of mounting details for 1/2x19” terminal width (including eight screws/TORX T20).

• If the size of the terminal is 3/4 of 19-inches: One set of mounting details for 3/4x19” terminal width (including eight screws/TORX T20).

• If the size of the terminal is 1/1 of 19-inches: One set of mounting details for 19” terminal width (including eight screws/TORX T 20).

Figure 1: One terminal mounted in a 19” structure.

2.1.1.2 Rack mounting - Example 2

One terminal with an additional box size 1/4 of 19-inches mounted in a19-inches structure.

• If the size of the terminal is 1/2 of 19-inches: One set of mounting details for 3/4x19” terminal width (including eight screws/TORX T20) and one side-by-side mounting kit (including eight screws/TORX T 20).

(98000037)

1

2

3

4

Installation and commissioning

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 6

• If the size of the terminal is 3/4 of 19-inches: One set of mounting details for 19” terminal width (including eight screws/TORX T20) and one side-by-side mounting kit (including eight screws/TORX T20).

Figure 2: One terminal with an additional box size 1/4 x 19”.

(98000030)

Mounting angle

Mounting angle

Screws (TORX T20)

Screws (TORX T20)

Side-by-side mounting plate

Side-by-side mounting plate


Version 2.2-00

2.1.2 Flush mounting For flush installation of the terminal in a panel cut-out a mounting kit isavailable. It includes:

• Four side holders.

• Four small screws (grip type TORX T10).

• Four big screws (grip type TORX T25).

• Assembly instruction.

• A sealing strip.

Figure 3: Flush mounting.

(98000031)

1

2

3

4

5

6


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 8

2.1.3 Semi-flush mounting

For semi-flush installation of the terminal in a panel cut-out a mountingkit is available. It includes:

• Four side holders.

• Four small screws (grip type TORX T10).

• Four big screws (grip type TORX T25).

• Assembly instruction.

• A sealing strip.

• A distance frame.

Figure 4: Semi-flush mounting.

The mounting kit for semi-flush mounting consists of the same parts asfor flush mounting, except for the additional distance frame. The distanceframe shall be mounted around the REx 5xx terminal case before placingthe terminal in the cut-out.

Rear view

Wall


Version 2.2-00

2.1.4 Wall mounting For projection mounting of the terminal on a wall, a mounting kit is avail-able. It includes:

• Two side plates.

• Screws (grip types TORX T20, T25 and T30).

• Two mounting bars to be mounted on the wall.

Figure 5: Wall mounting

Two rails provided with screw terminal blocks can be attached to themounting bars (one above the terminal and one below). Depending on thewidth of the case there is room for 40-75 screw terminals on each rail.Screw terminal blocks and rails for the blocks are not included in themounting kit.

(98000038)

1

2

3

45

6


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 10

2.2 Electrical connections Make the external connections on the screw terminals according to theterminal diagram. All connections are done on the rear side of the casewith a screw-compression type of terminal blocks.

There are two types of connectors for electrical cables:

• Current connector, for connections to the current transformers. One conductor up to 4 mm2 or two conductors up to 2.5 mm2 can be con-nected to the external side of each screw terminal.

• Voltage connector, for the other connections. One conductor up to 2.5 mm2 can be connected to each screw terminal.

Each connector has an identification number, for example X11. Thefemale connectors can be marked in the same way. The individual termi-nals are numbered from top to bottom with 1, 2, 3,... (see a voltage con-nector in Figure 7:). At installation, all wiring to the female part of theconnector is preferably performed before plugging it into the male part.

Identify the cables from the current and voltage transformers regardingphases and connect the cables to the proper screw terminal, according tothe terminal diagrams.

The current connector is located on position X11. This connector consistsof so called feed-through terminal blocks with flat tabs on the internalside.

The voltage connector, X12, is a dividable connector with two parts:

• A female part for conductor connections.

• A male part mounted inside the case on a circuit board.

Connect a separate 2.5 mm2 earthing wire from the earthing screw(TORX T20 grip type) on the rear of the REx 5xx terminal, to the panelearthing bar.

Since there are three possible sizes for a REx 5xx terminal, some of theconnector identities vary depending on actual size. Figure 6: (a and b)shows typical rear views for the 1/1- and the 3/4 of 19-inch rack. The 1/2of 19-inch rack size is only equipped with less connectors and I/O-boardsthan the 3/4. All designation identities are the same between them.


Version 2.2-00

Figure 6: Rear view of REx 5xx, full size (a) and 3/4 size (b).

Note: The use of connectors for external connections are specific for thedifferent sizes. The 3/4- and the 1/2 of 19-inch units have the same usage.Below are the lists of designations for different connectors, valid for theunits.

a) b)

Table 1: Connector designations for 1/1 of 19-inch casing

Connector: Designation:

X11 Current transformer inputs

X12 Voltage transformer inputs

X13 Optical fibre connectors for serial communication SPA/IEC 870-5-103

X15 Optical fibre connectors for serial communication LON

X16, X17... Input/output connectors for I/O modules

X40, X41 Input/output connectors for digital communication module, if ordered. Can also be as X16 etc.

X44 Connector for the power supply module, (in Figure 6:a)

Table 2: Connector designations for 3/4 and 1/2 of 19-inch casing

Connector: Designation:

X11 Current transformer inputs

X12 Voltage transformer inputs

X13 Optical fibre connectors for serial communication SPA/IEC 870-5-103

X15 Optical fibre connectors for serial communication LON

X20, X21... Input/output connectors for I/O modules


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 12

(Note that the maximum number of optional I/O modules depends onchoosen size of the REx 5xx terminal.)

2.3 Voltage connectors

Figure 7: Voltage connector, showing connection point X20:5.

Above all external connectors, on the rear side of the case, the position(e.g. X12) for the connector is marked. The screw terminals of the con-nectors are numbered from 1 to 12 (current connector) respectively 1 to18 (voltage connector).

Apply these rules when connecting to the voltage connector:

The ferrule (ABB Network Partner’s order no. 1MKC 840 003-4 or Phoe-nix type AI-TWIN 2 ⋅ 1,5 - 8 BK) is applied with ZA3 crimping plierstype from Phoenix (see Figure 8:).

X34,X35 (3/4)X24,X25 (1/2)

Input/output connectors for digital communication module, if ordered. Can also be as X20 etc.

X18 Connector for the power supply module, (in Figure 6:b)

Table 2: Connector designations for 3/4 and 1/2 of 19-inch casing

If you connect to the voltage connector... Then...

One conductor It can be 0.2-2.5 mm2

Two conductors Can be 0.2-1.0 mm2

Two 1.5 mm2 conductors Use a ferrule. One fer-rule is contact crimped on the two conductors.

X20

X20:5

(98000035)


Version 2.2-00

No soldering is needed.

If a COMBITEST test-switch is added, COMBIFLEX wires are used.

Figure 8: Connected cables with ferrules.

2.4 Fibre optic connections

On each REx 5xx terminal, one or two optical ports can be equipped witha fibre optic bus connection module for serial communication. The con-nections are done on the rear side of the case by fibre optic connectorstype Hewlett Packard (HFBR) for plastic fibres or bayonet type ST forglass fibres.

Each channel consists of one pair of fibres, where one fibre is used forreceiving and one for transmitting data. They are distinguished by thecolour of their fibre contact. Receiver fibre contacts (blue for plastic, darkgrey for glass) must be plugged into the receiver sockets (blue for plastic,dark grey for glass). Transmitter fibre contacts (grey or black) must beplugged likewise into the transmitter sockets (grey or black).

Note: Plug the correct fibre contact into the correct socket.

Fibre optical cables are sensitive to mechanical damages. Never bendthem! As for the curvature radius, these minimum values are valid:

• 5 cm radius for plastic fibre.

• 15 cm radius for glass fibre.

When the optical fibre shall be connected or disconnected, the terminationand not the optical fibre must be used for pulling.

In case the optical fibre is too long and cable straps must be used, thecable strap must not be applied too hard. Always leave some spacebetween the optical fibre and the cable strap.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 14

The Serial communication modules are inserted into slots on the Mainprocessing module. There are four different types of cards — with plasticconnections for SPA/IEC 870-5-103, with plastic connections for LON,with glass connection for SPA/IEC 870-5-103 and with glass connectionfor LON. SPA/IEC 870-5-103 communication can only be applied with amodule intended for SPA/IEC 870-5-103 inserted in the SPA/IEC 870-5-103 slot (X13) on the Main processing module. In the same way, LONcommunication can only be applied with a module intended for LON,inserted in the lower slot (X15).

3 Setting and configurationAll settings can be done in the following ways:

• Locally, via the local human-machine interface (HMI) module.

• Locally, on a PC via the optical front connector (using SMS in the PC).

• Locally or remotely, via one of the communication ports on the rear (using SMS or SCS).

All configuration is performed with CAP 531.

3.1 Local human-machine interface (HMI)

The setting access on the local HMI can be blocked by the binary inputsignal HMI--BLOCKSET. When this signal is active, the LEDs can stillbe cleared from the front.

3.2 Front communication When a PC is used for connection to the front, you need the SMS-BASEand the SM/REx 5xx softwares. For the collection of disturbances to afront connected PC, RECOM is not required because necessary function-ality is included in the SM/REx 5xx.

A special cable is needed when connecting a PC to the front of the REx5xx terminal. This cable can be ordered from ABB Network Partner, orderNo. 1MKC 950 001-1. It must be plugged into the optical contact on theleft side of the local HMI. The other end of the cable shall be pluggeddirectly into the COM-port on the PC. The cable includes an optical con-tact, an opto/electrical converter and an electrical cable with a standard 9-pole D-sub contact. This ensures a disturbance-free and safe communica-tion with the terminal.

When communicating from a PC, the slave number and baud rate (com-munication speed) settings must be equal in the PC-program and in theREx 5xx terminal. For further instructions on how to set the parameters inthe PC-program, see the User’s Guide of SMS-BASE and of the SM/REx5xx.


Version 2.2-00

The slave number and baud rate settings of the front port for the REx 5xxterminal is done on the local HMI at:

ConfigurationTerminalCom

SPAComFront

3.3 Serial communication Settings can be performed via any of the optical ports at the rear of theREx 5xx terminal. When a PC is connected to the SMS system, the SMS-BASE and the SM/REx 5xx softwares are used. For the collection of ana-logue data to a PC, RECOM is also required in the PC. Settings can alsobe done via the SCS system, based on MicroLIBRARY.

For all setting and configuration via the SPA communication bus, theSPA/IEC 870-5-103 port on the rear, it is necessary to first inactivate therestriction for settings. Otherwise, no setting is allowed. This setting onlyapplies for the SPA/IEC 870-5-103 port during SPA bus communication.The already limited communications on the IEC 870-5-103 bus and theLON bus, the LON port, are not affected. The parameter can only be seton the local HMI, and is located at:


SPAComRear

SettingRestrict

It is also possible to permit changes between active setting groupswith ActGrpRestrict in the same menu section.

When communicating with SMS or SCS via the SPA/IEC 870-5-103 port,the slave number and baud rate (communication speed) settings must beequal in the PC-program and in the REx 5xx terminal. For further instruc-tions of how to set these parameters in the PC-program, see the User’sGuide of SMS-BASE and of the SM/REx 5xx.

The slave number and baud rate settings of the rear SPA/IEC 870-5-103port on the REx 5xx terminal, for SPA bus communication, is done on thelocal HMI at:


SPAComRear


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 16

The slave number and baud rate settings of the rear SPA/IEC 870-5-103port on the REx 5xx terminal, for IEC 870-5-103 bus communication, isdone on the local HMI at:


IECComCommunication

When communicating via the LON port, the settings are done with theLNT, LON Network Tool. The settings are shown on the local HMI at:


LON Com

From this menu, it is also possible to send the “ServicePinMsg” to theLNT. For further instructions, see “Remote communication(1MRK 580 142-XEN)”.

3.4 Configuration of inputs and outputs

The REx 5xx terminal has a default configuration for all functions, sincethere is a default internal configuration of the terminal. All input and out-put contacts are also wired to functions in the terminal.

A new configuration is performed with the CAP 531 configuration tool.The binary outputs can be selected from a signal list where the signals aregrouped under their function names. It is also possible to specify a user-defined name for each input and output signal.

When downloading a configuration to the REx 5xx terminal with the CAP531 configuration tool, the terminal is automatically set in configurationmode. When the terminal is set in configuration mode, all functions areblocked. The red LED on the terminal flashes, and the green LED is litwhile the terminal is in the configuration mode.

When the configuration is downloaded and completed, the terminal isautomatically set into normal mode.


Version 2.2-00

4 CommissioningBefore testing, set the REx 5xx terminal into test mode. This can be doneon the local HMI at:

TestTestMode

Operation

Test/TestMode/Operation = On sets the terminal in test mode, but is notactivated until the setting has been saved and the yellow LED starts toflash. The test mode can also be activated via a binary input connectedto TEST-INPUT. So select the Operation above to BinInput in that case.

When the terminal is in test mode, the setting of the disturbance reportparameters have the effects:

Table 3:

Test

/Mo

de

Op

erat

ion

Test

/Mo

de

Dis

turb

Rep

ort

Test

/Mo

de

Dis

turb

Su

mm

ary

Then the results are...

On Off Off - Disturbances are not stored.- LED information is not displayed on the HMI and not stored.- No disturbance summary is scrolled on the HMI.

On Off On - Disturbances are not stored.- LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) are displayed on the local HMI but not stored in the terminal.- Disturbance summary is scrolled automatically on the local HMI for the two latest recorded dis-turbances, until cleared.- The information is not stored in the terminal.

On On On or Off

- The disturbance report works as in normal mode.- Disturbances are stored. Data can be read from the local HMI, a front-connected PC, or SMS.- LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.- The disturbance summary is scrolled automati-cally on the local HMI for the two latest recorded disturbances, until cleared.- All disturbance data that is stored during test mode remains in the terminal when changing back to normal mode.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 18

Events occurring while the terminal is set in test mode can be reported tothe SCS system as below:

• All event are reported.

• No events are reported.

• Events are reported according to the event mask.

This selection is done in SMS or in SCS.

4.1 Test of internal circuits

The A/D conversion module, the power supply module, the main process-ing module, the signal processing module and the I/O modules are contin-uously supervised and internal signals present the result (OK, Warning, orFailure). If an internal fault is detected, it will be indicated on the localHMI. In the front-connected PC or SMS, the fault creates an event in theinternal event list.

The power supply of the REx 5xx terminal is supervised continuously andif a failure occur, the internal signal INT--FAIL is activated and a specialoutput contact on the power supply module is activated (Internal fail).

4.2 Secondary injection test

Secondary injection testing is a normal part of the commissioning work ofa terminal with analogue inputs. Check the operate value of all functions.The test equipment should be able to provide a three-phase supply of volt-ages and currents. The magnitude of voltage and current as well as thephase angle between voltage and current must be variable. The voltagesand currents from the test equipment must be obtained from the samesource and they must have a very small harmonic contents. If the testequipment cannot indicate the phase angle, a separate phase-angle meteris necessary.

In the distance protection, the time-lag elements need not to be switchedoff to record the operating characteristic for the different zones. Operationfor each zone can be read as indications on the local HMI.

Note! This terminal is designed for a maximum continuous current of fourtimes the nominal current.

4.3 Check of external connections

When a REx 5xx terminal with line protection functions included is to beswitched into service, it must be checked that the intended voltages andcurrents reach the relay. Also check the phase sequence and identify eachphase in both the voltage and the current circuits.

Tighten all screw terminals firmly.

4.3.1 COMBITEST test-switch RTXP 24

The REx 5xx terminal can be equipped with a test-switch of type RTXP 24.The test-switch and its associated test plug handle (RTXH 24) are a partof the COMBITEST system, which is described in the “Buyer’s GuideCOMBITEST Test system”.


Version 2.2-00

When the test-handle is inserted into the test-switch, all current circuits onthe transformers side are short-circuited and all voltage circuits and tripcircuits are opened, except for terminal 1 and 12. They are used for dcsupply of the REx 5xx terminal. The test equipment connected to the test-handle is automatically connected to the terminal.

The test-handle can be plugged into the test-switch or withdrawed fromthe test-switch to the intermediate position. In this position, the trip cir-cuits are blocked, but the voltage and current circuits are connected to therelay. The test-handle can be plugged into the test-switch or removed fromthe test-switch completely by releasing the top and bottom latches on thehandle.

4.4 Functional test All included functions are tested according to the test instructions in eachfunction description. The functions can be blocked individually during thetest, so only the function which is to be tested is active. In this way, it ispossible to test slower back-up measuring functions without the interfer-ence of faster measuring functions. The REx 5xx terminal can also betested without changing the configurations and settings.

The functions are blocked on the local HMI at:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions alt. BlockEventFunc

The setting is only valid in test mode. If the functions are blocked in thismenu, they are blocked only while the terminal is in the test mode. Whentesting a function in this blocking feature, remember that not only theactual function must be activated, but the whole sequence of intercon-nected functions (from measuring inputs to binary output contacts),including logic and so on.

4.5 Test termination When the test is finished, reconfigure the REx 5xx terminal into normaloperating mode on the local HMI at:

TestTestMode

Operation

Set Test/TestMode/Operation = Off, and save the test mode setting. Theyellow LED is turned off.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 20

5 Fault tracing

5.1 Using information on the local HMI

If an internal fault has occurred, the local HMI displays informationunder:

TerminalReportSelfSuperv

Under these menus are the indications of eventual internal failure (seriousfault) or internal warning (minor problem) listed.

Shown as well, are the indications regarding the faulty unit according to table 4.

Also the internal signals, such as INT--FAIL and INT--WARNING can beconnected to binary output contacts for signalling to a control room.

In the Terminal Status - Information, the present information from theself-supervision function can be viewed. Indications of failure or warn-ings for each hardware module are provided, as well as information aboutthe external time synchronisation and the internal clock. All according totable 4. Loss of time synchronisation can be considered as a warning only.The REx 5xx terminal has full functionality without time synchronisation.

Table 4: Self-supervision signals

HMI information Status Signal nameActivates summary signal

Description

InternFail OK / FAIL INT--FAIL Internal fail summary

Intern Warning OK /WARNING INT--WARNING Internal warning summary

CPU-modFail OK / FAIL INT--CPUFAIL INT--FAIL Main processing module failed

CPU-modWarning OK /WARNING INT--CPUWARN INT--WARNING Main processing module warning (failure of clock, time synch., fault locator or distur-bance recorder)

ADC-module OK / FAIL INT--ADC INT--FAIL A/D conversion module failed

Slotnn-XXXyy OK / FAIL INT--IOyy INT--FAIL I/O module yy failed

Real Time Clock OK /WARNING INT--RTC INT--WARNING Internal clock is reset - Set the clock

Time Sync OK /WARNING INT--TSYNC INT--WARNING No time synchronisation


Version 2.2-00

5.2 Using front-connected PC or SMS

In this case, two summary signals appear. Self-supervision summary andCPU-module status summary. These signals can be compared to the inter-nal signals as:

• Self-supervision summary = INT--FAIL and INT--WARNING

• CPU-module status summary = INT--CPUFAIL and INT--CPU-WARN

When an internal fault has occurred, extensive information can be retrievedabout the fault from the list of internal events. The list is available in theTERM-STS Terminal Status part of the PC program. This time-tagged listhas information with the date and time of the last 40 internal events.

The internal events in the list do not only refer to faults in the terminal, butalso to other activities, such as change of settings, clearing of disturbancereports and loss of external time synchronisation.

These events are logged as Internal events:

Table 5:

Event message: Description: Set/reset event:

INT--FAIL Off Internal fail status Reset event

INT--FAIL On Set event

INT--WARNING Off Internal warning status Reset event

INT--WARNING On Set event

INT--CPUFAIL Off Main processing module fatal error status Reset event

INT--CPUFAIL On Set event

INT--CPUWARN Off Main processing module non-fatal error status Reset event

INT--CPUWARN On Set event

INT--ADC Off A/D conversion module status Reset event

INT--ADC On Set event

INT--IOn Off In/Out module No. n status Reset event

INT--IOn On Set event

INT--RTC Off Real Time Clock (RTC) status Reset event

INT--RTC On Set event

INT--TSYNC Off External time synchronisation status Reset event

INT--TSYNC On Set event

DREP-MEMUSED On >80% of the disturbance recording memory used Set event

SETTING CHANGED Any settings in terminal changed

DISTREP CLEARED All disturbances in Disturbance report cleared


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 289-XENPage 4 – 22

The events in the internal event list are time tagged with a resolution of1 ms.

This means that when using the PC for fault tracing provides informationon the:

• Module that should be changed.

• Sequence of faults, if more than one unit is faulty.

• Exact time when the fault occurred.

6 Repair instructionIf a module in any REx 5xx terminal needs to be repaired, the whole ter-minal can be removed and sent to ABB.

An alternative is to open the terminal and send only the faulty circuitboard to ABB for repair. When a printed circuit board is sent to ABB, itmust always be placed in a metallic, ESD-proof, protection bag. The usercan also purchase separate modules for replacement.

Note! Follow all safety rules for utility power network companies.

Before disassembling the REx 5xx terminal, remember the consequencesof the ESD phenomenon. Most electronic components are sensitive toelectrostatic discharge and latent damage may occur. Please observe usualprocedures for handling electronics and also use an ESD wrist strap. Asemi-conducting layer must be placed on the workbench and connected toearth.

Disassemble and reassemble the REx 5xx terminal accordingly:

1. Switch off the dc supply.

2. Short-circuit the current transformers and disconnect all current and voltage connections from the terminal.

3. Disconnect all signal connectors.

4. Disconnect the optical fibres.

5. Unscrew the main back plate of the terminal.

6. If the transformer module is to be changed — unscrew the small back plate of the terminal.

7. Pull out the faulty module.

8. Check that the new module has correct identity number.

9. Check that the springs on the card rail have connection to the cor-responding metallic area on the circuit board when the new module is pushed in.

10. Reassemble the terminal.

If the REx 5xx terminal has the optional increased measuring accuracy, afile with unique calibration data for the transformer module is stored inthe Main processing module. Therefore it is not possible to change onlyone of these modules with maintained accuracy.


Version 2.2-00

7 MaintenanceThe REx 5xx terminal is self-supervised. No special maintenance isrequired.

Instructions from the utility power network company and other mainte-nance directives valid for maintenance of the power system must be fol-lowed.

Page 4 – 24Local human-machine interface

1 IntroductionThe local human-machine interface (HMI) provides local communicationbetween the user and the REx 5xx terminal.

Local communication can also be performed by using a PC connected tothe local HMI via the special optical interface. Using a PC gives the samefunctionality as using remote communication within the station monitor-ing system (SMS) described in corresponding documents.

This chapter describes in detail the structure of the local HMI, basic prin-ciples of local human-machine interfacing and basic structure of the ter-minal menu tree.

The “Menu tree appendix” contains the detailed menu tree for theREx 5xx terminal with its all options.

2 Human-machine interface module - designThe local HMI module is equipped with three light emitting diodes(LEDs), a liquid crystal display (LCD), six membrane buttons and anoptical connector, for galvanic separation to a RS232 connector, whichenables communication with a personal computer (PC).

Figure 1: Local human-machine interface module, front panel.

E

C

green red

LEDs

yellow

Optical connectorfor local PC

Push buttons

Liquid Crystal Displayfour rows16 characters/rowREx 5xx *2.0

C = QuitE = Enter menu

Start TripReady

064.ai

1MRK 580 290-XEN


Local human-machine interface 1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 25

Version 2.2-00

2.1 LEDs The three LEDs provide primary terminal status information when lit orflashing.

The HMI has an automatic entry to an idle mode. The idle mode is a kindof screensaver for the LEDs and the LCD display. When everything isnormal but no operation has been ordered for a period of time, the HMIenters this idle mode. See section 3.1 for details.

The green LED will be lit and the others switch off when the terminal is inthe idle mode. The LEDs will be activated if a disturbance occurs or if anykey is pressed during idle mode.

2.2 LCD display The back-lit liquid crystal display (LCD) provides detailed informationabout the REx 5xx terminal and the parameter setting. Normally, the back-light is off and no text is displayed. Pressing any button will activate thedisplay. See section 5.1 for details.

The display shuts down after exiting the menu tree (pressing the C buttonin the highest level) or if no button is pressed for more than 45 minutes.

If a disturbance occurs, the display will be activated and display the dis-turbance summary until acknowledged. The summary shows short-handconditions of the last two occurred disturbances.

2.3 Buttons The number of buttons used on the HMI module is reduced to the mini-mum acceptable amount to allow a communication as simple as possiblefor the user. The buttons normally have more than one function, depend-ing on actual dialogue.

Table 1:

State Indicates that…

Green LED, steady light The operating condition of a terminal is nor-mal.

Green LED, flashing light An internal error is detected. The terminal can be blocked or operate with reduced functionality, depending on the type of error and the internal configuration.The LED will also flash during start-up.

Yellow LED, steady light One or more disturbances are recorded and stored in the terminal.

Yellow LED, flashing light The terminal is in test mode.

Red LED, steady light At least one of the protection functions issued a trip command during a disturbance recording.

Red LED, flashing light The terminal is in configuration mode or is blocked by an internal or external com-mand.

Local human-machine interface

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 26

Pressing any button in idle mode will activate the LEDs and the display.See section 3.1 for details.

The C button has three main functions, it will:

• Cancel any operation in a dialogue window.

• Exit the current level in the menu tree. This means, it cancels the current function or the current menu selection and moves one step higher (back) in the menu tree.

• Clear the LEDs when the start window is displayed.• Bring the LEDs and the display into idle mode if pressed when the

idle window is displayed (Quit function).

The E button mainly provides an Enter/Execute function. It activates, forexample, the selected menu tree branch. Further it is used to confirm set-tings and to acknowledge different actions.

The left and right arrow buttons have three functions, to:

• Position the cursor in a horizontal direction, for instance, to move between digits in a number during the parameter setting.

• Move between leafs within the same menu branch.

• Move between the confirmation alternatives (yes, no and cancel) in a command window.

The up and down arrow buttons have three functions, to:

• Move between selectable branches of the menu tree. This function also scrolls the menu tree when it contains more branches than shown on the display.

• Move between the confirmation alternatives in a command window.

• Change parameter values in a data window.


Version 2.2-00

3 HMI modesWhen the terminal is left unattended (no HMI button pressed) for a periodof time, two things might occur:

• The display exits to the idle mode.

• A disturbance occurs and the HMI enters the reporting mode.

The REx 5xx terminal is automatically set into configuration mode when-ever a configuration is downloaded from CAP 531 (the configurationtool).

3.1 Idle mode When the latest disturbances has been acknowledged or no disturbance isstored in memory, no one has operated the HMI for more than 45 minutesand the terminal is in normal operation, the yellow and red LEDs togetherwith the LCD will be turned off. The green LED will remain active. TheHMI has entered the idle mode. This only affects the HMI and does notaffect the control and protection functions of the REx 5xx terminal.

The display and the LEDs will be activated if any button is pressed orwhen a new disturbance occurs.

3.2 Reporting mode The HMI enters the reporting mode whenever a new fault is issued by anyprotection function since the latest acknowledged disturbance. In thereporting mode, the green LED will be lit and the yellow LED will be lit ifa disturbance is recorded. The red LED will be lit only if a protectionfunction issued a trip command.

The display will show a disturbance summary, a short-hand list of the dis-turbance conditions for the two latest faults.

3.3 Configuration mode The REx 5xx terminal will automatically be set in configuration modewhenever a configuration is downloaded by the CAP 531 configurationtool. In configuration mode the green LED will be lit and the red LEDflashes. No configuration is possible from the HMI.

Note: In the configuration mode, the control and protection functions areinactivated.

3.4 Test mode The REx 5xx terminal will be set to test mode when the test functions inthe test menu branch is selected. In test mode the green LED will be litand the yellow LED flashes. During test mode it is possible to block anyor all of the control and protection functions respectively, as well as theSMS communication.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 28

4 Menu windowThe menu window is displayed when the E button is pressed in the start-up or idle window. The menu window displays a part of the menu tree.

A menu tree is a hierarcial way of presenting selectable alternatives andfunctions grouped in a logical manner.

Figure 2: The menu tree.

The tree is divided into branches. The lowest level, usually a command, iscalled a leaf. Sometimes the menu structure is also called a cascadingmenu.

Figure 3: Menu window, generalised operation (a) and typical example (b)

Row one always contains:

• pbranch, the name of the previous menu branch. A dot is displayed in front of pbranch if the previous menu branch is below the top level

• cbranch, the name of the current menu branch, command or data window.

If the top level menu branch is reached, the terminal product name, REx5xx, will be displayed instead of pbranch.

The remaining three rows always display three instances of the selectablemenus or commands of the current menu branch. The up arrow appears inrow two when more menus are available before the n:th menu. The downarrow appears in the bottom row when more menus are available after then+2:th menu. Scroll the menu by pressing the up or down button.

Top level menu

First level menu First level menu First level command

Second level menu Second level command Second level command

Third level menus and commands

Menu branch

Menu leaf

.pbranch/cbranchMenu nMenu n+1Menu n+2

V

Va)

.Set/FuncGroup2Group3Group4 V

b)

V


Version 2.2-00

The currently selectable submenu or command is indicated with invertedtext. In the example above, Menu n (or the Trip function) is the selectablealternative. Use the up or down buttons to select the appropriate submenuor command. Then press the E button to display the new menu branch orcommand window.

As an example, Figure 3:b shows the submenu Functions of the Settingsmenu branch.

Pressing the E button will select settings of Group2 for editing, since thealternative Group2 is displayed inverted. The up and down arrows informthat additional menu alternatives, currently not displayed, are in the list. Inthis case Group1 and Group4.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 30

5 Dialogue windows

Figure 4: Dialogue windows, typical examples.

The dialogue window displays instructions and selectable alternatives.Normally a dialogue window is displayed whenever a menu leaf isreached. If numerical parameter values are to be set, the dialogue windowis replaced by the data window, as described in the next section.

Further, the dialogue windows inform how to perform the actions definedin the third and fourth text rows. The first and second rows usually displaya headline to provide more information about the proposed action or aboutthe terminal.

The REx 5xx terminal has several different dialogue windows included,depending on the choosen options. The different windows are:

• Start window.

• Idle window.

• Command without a selection.Simple decision commands - Yes/No.

• Command with a selection.Alternative command selections.

• Command with a cancellation.

• Command with a selection and a cancellation.

• Parameter setting window.

5.1 Starting a dialogue The start dialogue window, Figure 5:, is displayed if the C button ispressed in the reporting mode (during disturbance report summary dis-play).

Figure 5: Start dialogue window.

Press the:

• C button to clear the LEDs (if required).

RE.5.. VER 2.0C=Clear LEDsE=Enter menu

a) b)

TripStartReady RE.5.. VER 2.0C=QuitE=Enter menu

TripStartReady

RE.5.. VER 2.0C=Clear LEDsE=Enter menu

TripStartReady


Version 2.2-00

• E button to enter the menu tree.

The text Ready Start Trip in the dialogue’s top row describes the LEDsabove the display.

5.2 Idle mode The local HMI will enter the idle mode when the latest disturbances hasbeen acknowledged or no disturbance is stored in memory, no one hasoperated the HMI for more than 45 minutes and the terminal is in normaloperation.

In the idle mode is the display and the yellow and red LEDs turned off, thegreen LED still active. The HMI is in a standby mode.

The display and the LEDs will be activated if any button is pressed orwhen a new disturbance occurs.

5.3 Confirming a command

Figure 6: shows a typical example of a dialogue window with simple deci-sion commands. The instructions in the first two rows describe possibleactions. The confirmation alternatives, YES and NO, appear in the bottomrow. Move the flashing cursor from one to another alternative by pressingthe right or left arrow. After selecting desired alternative, it must be con-firmed by pressing the E button.

Figure 6: Dialogue window for a command without selection.

Move the cursor to YES and press the E button to confirm the actions(commands) in rows one and two.

Move the cursor to NO and press the E button to exit the dialogue windowwithout doing any changes, or press C with the same result.

5.4 Selecting a command Figure 7: shows a typical example of a dialogue window with alternativecommand selections.

Figure 7: Dialogue window for a command with a selection.

Instruction 2Instruction 1

NOYES

AlternativeInstruction 1

NOYES

V


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 32

Use the up or down buttons to move the cursor to desired alternative of acommand. Select YES and press E to execute the command. Select NO tocancel and exit the dialogue window.

5.5 Cancel a command Figure 8: shows a typical dialogue window with the possibility to cancel acommand. Use the right or left arrow to move between YES, NO andCANCEL. Then press E to confirm. The alternative CANCEL togetherwith a confirmation, will close the dialogue window and the previous win-dow will be shown.

Figure 8: Dialogue window with a command with cancellation.

5.6 Selecting and cancelling a command

Figure 9: Dialogue window for a command with a selection.

In this dialogue window it is possible to select either the Instruction, rowone, or the Command, row two. This is indicated by the up or down arrowat the end of the row.

Use the right or left arrow to move the cursor to YES, NO or CANCEL.Select YES to execute the command. Select NO or CANCEL to canceland exit the dialogue window.

5.7 Commands with parameter settings

This category applies to commands where a certain numeric value, eg. atrip current, must be set. These settings are done in a data window,described in the next section.

Instruction 2Instruction 1

NOYES CANCEL

Command Instruction V

NOYES CANCEL


Version 2.2-00

6 Data window The data windows and branches are used to read information and to setparameters.

Figure 10: Data window, general setting (10a) and typical example (10b).

Row one has the same information here as in the menu windows. Rowtwo displays the name of a particular parameter and the rows three andfour provide more information about the value in the parameter.

The left and right arrows in the bottom row indicate that more data isavailable in the same menu branch. Press the right or left arrow button toscroll the data.

Figure 10:b shows the data window which appears on the display duringthe setting procedure for Impedance Zone 1 of the distance protection.Only one value is relevant for the impedance (X1 = 15.00 Ohms). Theright arrow indicates that additional parameters are available for Zone 1(reach in resistive direction, time delay etc.).

6.1 Reading and setting values

The setting procedure is identical for all different types of parameters.Figure 11: shows a typical example of such a procedure.

The top row shows the previous and present menus (.path1/path2). Whenthe parameter name is highlighted, it is possible to enter a new value asdescribed below.

Press the E button to switch from Figure 11:a to Figure 11:b. Row three ofthe data window displays the current value with corresponding unit (sec-onds, Ohm etc.) for the parameter.

Figure 11: The procedure of setting a real value for a parameter.

.path1/path2Data name=Data 1Data 2

a)

.Imped/Zone1X1=15.00 Ohm

V

b)

V

V

.path1/path2Parameter=xx.xx unit

a)

xx.xx unit

b)

.path1/path2Parameter=xx.xy unit

d)

zx.xy unit

e)

.path1/path2

xx.xy unit

c)

.path1/path2

zx.xy unit

f)

E

.path1/path2Parameter=


Parameter=

Parameter=E

V

V


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 34

It is only possible to change a digit of the current value when the actualdigit is underscored by the cursor (second window). The up arrow anddown arrows respectively are used to increase or decrease the value.Release the arrow button when desired value is reached. Use the left andright arrows to switch between the digits (Figure 11:c and d).

The new parameter value must be confirmed by pressing E. Thereafter isthe parameter changed and the parameter name is highlighted (Figure11:f), as from the beginning of the procedure.

Note! The new parameter value does not immediately appear in the corre-sponding setting group because all setting procedures are performed inseparate editing areas.

New setting values for a setting group are activated after saving all set-tings in one of four groups of setting parameters and then exit from theediting area. See “Saving the settings in a setting group” on page 36.

6.2 Reading and setting of non-numerical parameters

Non-numerical parameters can be set to predefined non-numerical values,for example, On - Off to activate or deactivate a certain function.

Figure 12: Setting and reading the non-numerical parameters.

The top row shows the previous and present menus (.path1/path2). Whenthe parameter name is highlighted, it is possible to enter a new, pre-defined, value as described below.

Press E to switch from Figure 12:a to Figure 12:b. The current non-numerical value appears in the third row.

Press the up or down arrow to switch between the predefined, non-numer-ical, values (Figure 12:b, c, and d). When desired value is displayed, pressE to enter it (transition from Figure 12:d to Figure 12:e).

.path1/path2

ABC

a)

ABC

b)

.path1/path2Parameter=XYZ

d)

XYZ

e)

.path1/path2

XBA

c)

E



Parameter=

E

Parameter=

V

V

V

V


Version 2.2-00

6.3 Reading and setting strings

The strings are the parameters within the REx 5xx terminal that can haveuser-defined names. Typical examples of strings are identities of substa-tions, lines within substations and names of different input signals con-nected to the binary inputs of the terminal.

Figure 13: Setting a string.

Each string is displayed in one row and contains a maximum of 13 charac-ters.

Row one in the data window displays the last two branches of the menutree. Row two displays the present parameter. Row three displays thestring (Figure 13:a). A highlighted parameter can be changed.

Press E (Figure 13:a) and a character is underscored by the cursor (Figure13:b).

Press the up or down arrow button to change the character, or use the leftand right arrows to switch between characters in a string (Figure 13:c).

After the string value is set (user-defined value, Figure 13:c), press E andthe data window changes as shown in Figure 13:d. This indicates a newvalue for the string.

6.4 Setting local terminal time

Local date and time for the REx 5xx terminal is set from the Time sub-menu in the Setting menu, according to Figure 14:..

Figure 14: Setting local date and time within the REx 5xx terminal.

Row one in the data window displays the last two branches of the menutree. Row two displays the date and time parameter. Row three displaysyear, month and day. Row four displays hour, minutes and seconds.

.path1/path2Parameter=LIMbft34ytr7nlhd

a)

Line 37ytrnlhd

b)

.path1/path2Parameter=Line 37

c)

Line 37

d)

E


.path1/path2Parameter=E

V

V

V

V

.Set/TimeDate & Time=YYYY-MMM-DD

a)

YYYY-MMM-DD

b)

E.Set/TimeDate & Time=

hh:mm:ss hh:mm:ss


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 36

When the parameter is highlighted (Figure 14:a), press E to change thedata window from Figure 14:a to Figure 14:b and enable setting of thedate and time. The first digit in the seconds will be underscored by thecursor (Figure 14:b).

Press the up or down arrow button to change the digit, or use the left andright arrows to scroll in the date and time string.

After a new date and time is set, press E and the data window changes tothe previous window. A new local time will be displayed.

Real time in the REx 5xx terminal uses the following values:

• YYYY, year.

• MMM, first three letters of the month’s name.

• DD, day in the month.

• hh, hour.

• mm, minutes.

• ss, seconds.

Apply the rules for setting a string when to set the month. All other valuesare real values.

6.5 Additional information The REx 5xx terminal provides information about its operation, configu-ration and service conditions. The following information is available:

• Phasors of primary and secondary voltages and currents and other measured values.

• Logical signals activated during the communication procedure.

• Summary of the recorded disturbances under observation.

• Time of the disturbances under observation.

• The software version in the terminal.

• The hardware version in the terminal.

(Also see the Menu tree - Appendix).

6.6 Saving the settings in a setting group

The parameter settings as described in the previous sections are alwaysdone in a temporary editing area. After editing, a possibility to discard thenew settings will be given. If accepting and confirming them, all settingswill be saved in appropriate setting group.

After changing one or more parameter, climb up the menu tree by repeat-edly pressing C until the Save As Group n dialogue window is displayed.

If, accidentally, pressing the C button once too much, the terminal willdisplay a dialogue window which requires a confirmation. In this windowit is necessary to confirm the cancellation of the previous setting activity


Version 2.2-00

by pressing the E button. Otherwise, if pressing C again, the menu treewill return to the previous dialogue window. No settings will be dis-carded.

The terminal prompts a saving of the changed settings in the same settinggroup as started with (setting group n in Figure 15:). Confirm the savingor request that the settings shall be saved in another setting group, whichis available within the current menu window.

Figure 15: Saving the settings in desired setting group.

Use this function to copy the setting parameters from one setting group toanother when it is necessary to change only a few parameters for differentoperating conditions. Just select and edit appropriate setting group andsave it as another.

It is also possible to do a straight copy by selecting a parameter for editingwithout changing its value. Then press C appropriate number of times,followed by a save with a new name.

Press the E button to save the values which were set in the editing area forthe selected setting group.

.Set/FuncGroup (n-1)Group n

V

Group n

.Func/Grp n

Function mV

.Set/FuncGroup n-1

Group (n+1) Function (m+1)

E

V

V

Function (m-1)

Group nSave as:

NOYES CANCEL

Group n+1Save as:

NOYES CANCEL

Group (n+1)

V

V

E

C

C2 x

Setting procedure as described inthe instructions for setting and readingof different variables and parameters

Group nSave as:

NOYES

V

V

E C E C

CANCEL

Group nSave as:

NOYES CANCEL

E

C

procedureSaving

cancelled

V

VGroup nSave as:

NOYES

V

V

CANCEL

V

V

V

V

No settingssaved

Settingssaved


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 290-XENPage 4 – 38

Confirm the saving when prompted in the dialogue window. Press the Ebutton and the first menu window, for selection of setting groups, is dis-played. Then new parameter values appear in the desired setting group.

Page 4 – 39LED indication module

1 IntroductionThe LED indication unit is an additional feature for the REx 500 terminalsfor protection and control and consists totally of 18 LEDs (Light EmittingDiodes). It is located on the front of the protection and control terminal.

The main purpose is, to present on site an immediate visual informationsuch as protection indications or alarm signals.

This chapter describes the use and the design of the LED. The function isdescribed in section “LED indication function”.

2 DesignThe LED indication module is equipped with 18 LEDs, which can light ineither red, yellow or green color. The LED is also equipped with adescription text for each of the LEDs.

Figure 1: LED indication module, front panel

2.1 LEDs The color of the LEDs is selected in the function block. The input signalfor an indication has separate inputs for each color. If more than one coloris used at the same time, the following priority order is valid; red, yellowand green, with red as the highest priority. The flash frequency is fixed at0.5 Hz.

The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power forthe terminal, so that the latest LED picture appears immediately after theterminal has restarted successfully.

2.2 Acknowledgment/reset

Manual acknowledgment/reset of indication signals is performed from theC-button on the local HMI. The acknowledgment/reset has the same func-tion as Clear LEDs and can be performed when the start window is dis-played.

2.3 Description text The description text is written on a paper label with dimensions accordingto figure 2. Two labels are needed for one LED module. The labels areinserted into slots on the upper side of the LED module.

Indication descriptionLED

1MRK 580 676-XEN


LED indication module

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 676-XENPage 4 – 40

The figure 2 shows a layout example of a label made in a word processoras a table for one column and 10 rows with dimensions and text sizeaccording to the figure.

Figure 2: Layout of text label for LED module

27.00

6.10

6.40

8.25

66.0

0

81.5

0

25.00

START L1

Example:

16 pt

23 pt

24 pt

23 pt

24 pt

23 pt

24 pt

23 pt

24 pt

27 pt

Text: Arial, Bold, Size 10

6 pt

Page 4 – 41Menu tree

1 GeneralThis chapter presents the main layout of the menu tree for the localhuman-machine interface (HMI). The menu tree includes menus for:

• Disturbance report• Service report• Settings• Terminal report• Configuration• Command• Test

Use SMS or SCS to activate or deactivate menus on the local human-machine interface (HMI).Note! It is possible to completely turn off parts of the menu tree!

Figure 1: Menu tree for REx 5xx.

HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACEMENU TREE

DISTURBANCE REPORT

SERVICE REPORT

SETTINGS

CONFIGURATION

TERMINAL REPORT

TEST

COMMMAND

Service valuesPhasorsInformation of all functionsInformation of I/O modulesDisturbance reportActive groupInternal time and date

Information of 10 latest disturbancesCalculation of distance to faultManual triggering of adisturbance recordingClearing of the disturbancereporting memory

Disturbance report settingsFunctions: Parameters within the four set-ting groups for different functionsChange of active groupInternal time

Self supervision reportTerminal identityInformation of modulesAnalogInputs

[Functions] - Access with CAP 531[I/O] - Access with CAP 531Analogue inputsI/O modules (operation etc.)Line differential functionTerminal communicationTime synchronising source[Disturbance report]- Access with CAP 531Local HMI (BLOCKSET)Identifiers (station, object, unit)Language

Activation and present status of command

Test mode

OperationBlock protection functionsBlock event functionsDisturbance reportLine diff. prot.

Configuration mode

1MRK 580 291-XEN


Menu tree

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 291-XENPage 4 – 42

2 Disturbance report menuUse this menu to display the information recorded by the REx 5xx termi-nal for the 10 latest disturbances. In this menu, these commands are avail-able:

• Display information of a disturbance.

• Calculate the distance to fault.

• Manually trigger the disturbance reporting unit.

• Clear the disturbance report memory.

To view the complete disturbance report, including the result of the eventrecorder and the disturbance recorder, use a front-connected PC or theSMS or SCS.

2.1 Disturbances A disturbance instance will show:

• The time of disturbance, which is defined as the local terminal date and time when the first triggering signal started the disturbance recording.

• The trig signal, which started the recording.

• Indications, activated during the recorded disturbance. Indications to be recorded are selected during the terminal configuration proce-dure.

The fault locator will also report:

• Fault location, provides information about the distance to the fault and the fault loop used for the calculation.

• Trip values, are displayed as phasors (RMS value and phase angle) of the currents and voltages, before and during the fault.

2.2 Calculate distance to fault

Possible to recalculate the distance to fault with a different fault loop orwith different fault locator setting parameters. The recalculation isenabled since trip values are available for each disturbance that caused aphase-selective trip of the distance protection function.

2.3 Manual trigg Using the manual trigger creates an instant disturbance report. Use thisfunction to get a snapshot of the monitored line.

2.4 Clear disturbance report

The disturbance report has a dedicated storage memory, sufficient enoughto save the ten latest disturbances. The memory operates by the first-in –first-out principle (FIFO). This means that when the memory is full, theoldest recorded disturbance will be deleted from memory when a new dis-turbance occurs.After clearing, the entire disturbance memory will be empty.

Menu tree 1MRK 580 291-XENPage 4 – 43

Version 2.2-00

3 Service report menuThe Service report menu displays the operating conditions of the terminalas well as measured and calculated values and internal signal status.

3.1 Service values Presents the mean values of measured current, voltage, active and reactivepower and frequency. Available when the transformer module option isinstalled.

3.2 Phasors Presents the primary and secondary phasors of measured currents andvoltages. Available when the fault locator option is installed.

3.3 Functions Presents the presently measured values and other information of the dif-ferent parameters for included functions.

3.4 I/O Displays present logical values of all binary inputs and outputs of allinstalled I/O modules in the REx 5xx terminal.

3.5 Disturbance report Provides information about the below listed items concerning the distur-bance recording.

• Available free memory for further disturbance recording.

• The sequence number for the next possibly recorded disturbance (can be viewed or set).

• The present status of analogue triggers that can start the disturbance recorder.

3.6 Active group The present setting of active groups can be viewed here.

3.7 Time The current internal time for the REx 5xx terminal can be viewed here.The time is displayed in the form YYYY-MMM-DD and hh:mm:ss. Allvalues but the month are presented with digits. The month is presentedwith the first three letters in current month.

3.8 Internal signals Presents information about all functional outputs and internal signals inthe terminal.

Menu tree

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 291-XENPage 4 – 44

4 Settings menuUse this menu to select and set the different parameters for included pro-tection and control functions in the REx 5xx terminal. There are fourselectable and editable settings group, each independent of the other, tostructure desired functions and applications.

4.1 Disturbance report This menu includes all setting parameters for the disturbance report. Thefollowing features are available:

• Activate or deactivate the disturbance report by setting the opera-tion to On or Off.

• Sequence number can be set for each recorded disturbance.

• Sampling rate is fixed at 1000 Hz.

• Recording times for pre-fault, post-fault and time limit shall be set.

• Triggering and masking of binary signals selected in the configura-tion menu shall be set. Up to 48 binary signals are possible.

• Triggering and recording of analogue signals shall be set. Up to five voltage signals and five current signals are possible.

• Fault locator settings shall be done here. It includes measurement duration and presentation of the result.

4.2 Functions Settings of the parameters for the included protection and control func-tions are done here. Four separate setting groups are avaible. First selectdesired group and then desired function. One group can contain one orseveral functions.

4.3 Change active group Select and change the active group setting. Each of the four groups can beset independently of each other.

4.4 Time To set the internal time in the REx 5xx terminal. The time is set in theform of YYYY-MMM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values but the month arepresented with digits. The month are presented with the first three lettersin current month.


Version 2.2-00

5 Terminal report menuUse this menu to display information of the self supervision, terminalidentity, software version, modules and the analogue inputs.

5.1 Self- supervision The REx 5xx terminal has extensive built-in self-supervision functions todetect if internal faults occurs. If an error occurs, the green LED on thefront panel will flash and a warning signal will be activated. Use the self-supervision report to get information about detected faults.

The self-supervision report can also be used to check the status of eachinstalled module as well as CPU, memory and clock operation.

5.2 Identity number The terminal identity feature contains information as serial number andthe software version installed in the terminal.

5.3 Modules This menu includes information about all included modules, such as I/O-modules and MPM-module (CPU).

5.4 Analogue inputs Includes information about the analogue inputs, voltage and current, con-cerning nominal and rated values.

Menu tree

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 291-XENPage 4 – 46

6 Configuration menuUse this menu to make a general configuration of the REx 5xx terminal.The CAP 531 configuration tool must be used to configure protection andcontrol functions and the I/O modules. The following can be set and con-figured:

• Identifiers.

• Analogue inputs.

• I/O modules (operation and oscillation).

• Time synchronising source.

• Local HMI blockset.

• Terminal communication.

• Differential function.

6.1 Analogue inputs Use this menu to configure general analogue input settings, such as:

• general data about the power network, such as rated voltage, current, frequency and the position of the earthing point.

• CT and VT ratio.

• user-defined labels for the analogue inputs and for the measured voltage, current, active and reactive power and frequency.

6.2 I/O modules In this menu it is possible to:

• reconfigure added or replaced I/O modules.

• set the level for blocking of oscillating binary inputs.

6.3 Differential function Use this menu to configure the differential protection functions as a partof networked terminal system. Possible to change:

• the differential synchronisation scheme

• the master terminal identity

• the remote (slave) terminal identity.

6.4 Terminal communication

Use this menu to configure the REx 5xx terminal communication buses, ifany connected.

6.4.1 SPA communication

Use this menu to set the parameters for the front and rear ports used forSPA communication. Each communication channel must be set sepa-rately.


Version 2.2-00

Slave number and baud rate (communication speed) must be set for boththe ports. These settings must correspond with the settings in the used PC-program. For the rear port it is possible to set permission of changesbetween active setting groups, ActGrpRestrict, and the setting restrictions,SettingRestrict, as well. Also see section 6.6.

6.4.2 IEC communication

Use this menu to set slave number and baud rate when to communicate onthe IEC 870–5–103 communications bus, also known as Schnittstelle 6 orVDEW 6. The IEC bus uses the same rear optic port as the SPA bus, butthe settings must be done separately. Other settings and blocking of somefunctions can also be done.

6.4.3 LON communication

Use this menu to view node information as address and location, whichare set from the LON Network Tool, as well as the Neuron identity. Func-tions for address setting during installation (ServicePinMSG), LON con-figuration reset (LONDefault) and session timers are also available.

Note: Session timers are for advanced usage and should only be changedupon recommendation from ABB Network Partner AB.

6.4.4 Remote terminal communication

Use this menu to configure the different protection fiber optics communi-cation bus. This communication requires certain digital communicationmodules. The parameters to set are:

• the bit rate

• the fiber optics transmitter output power

• the terminal master/slave operation.

6.5 Time synchronising source

The internal terminal time can be synchronised with an external unit con-nected to the SPA/IEC 870-5-103 port or the LON port. It is also possibleto use a minute pulse synchronisation signal asserted on a digital input.

6.6 Local HMI blockset The HMI--BLOCKSET includes the SettingRestrict parameter. The set-ting restriction enables and disables external settings via the SPA commu-nication bus connected to the rear SPA/IEC 870-5-103 port. Thisparameter can only be changed from the local HMI.

6.7 Identifiers Use the identifiers to specify the location of and to define a terminalwithin the power system. All identifier names are typed as strings, maxi-mum 16 characters, and the identity numbers are typed with digits. Typi-cal usage are:

• name and number of the station.

• name and number of the bay or object.

• name and number of the actual REx 5xx terminal.

Menu tree

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 291-XENPage 4 – 48

7 Command menuUse this menu to manually select and execute any single or multiple sig-nal command, as defined from the configuration menu or the CAP 531configuration tool. The signal(s) can be connected to any internal functionor to a binary output of the terminal. It is possible to assign a user-definedname to these binary signals.


Version 2.2-00

8 Test menuUse this menu to enable easier secondary injection tests of the REx 5xxterminal. It is possible to block functions to prevent trip of circuit breakersand activation of alarm signals etc. to the control room during the testingactivities.

The selectable modes, from the HMI, is the TestMode and ConfigMode.

The test mode allows:

• Setting the terminal in test mode operation.

• Blocking of one or several protection and control functions (select-able) during test operation.

• Blocking of one or several event functions (selectable) during test operation.

• Setting the disturbance report and the disturbance summary to On or Off during test operation.

• Special test mode to facilate the testing of the line differential protec-tion function. This Diff. TestMode disables the trip-out from the remote terminal and enables test from one end.

The configuration mode allows:

• Setting the terminal in configuration mode operation. This will auto-matically be done when down-loading a configuration from the CAP 531 configuration tool. When the down-loading is completed, the terminal automatically enters the normal mode.

Menu tree

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 291-XENPage 4 – 50

Page 4 – 51Appendix – Menu tree structure for REx 5xx terminals

1 IntroductionThis appendix describes the menu tree structure for the complete REx 5xxseries of terminals. This means that the menus in a certain terminal is onlya part of what is shown in this appendix. What is shown in a terminaldepends on:

• the type of terminal• installed terminal options.

In some terminals, the menu tree can be partly hidden (programmable).

To operate the local human machine interface (HMI), refer to the section“Local human-machine communication”.

The text “According to function block”, present at menu leafs, is meant asa reference to the corresponding function block description that can befound in the sections “General functions” and/or “Functions” .

1MRK 580 292-XEN


Appendix – Menu tree structure for REx 5xx terminals

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 52

2 Menu tree structure

2.1 Disturbance report

REX 5XX/DistRep .DistRep/Disturb .Disturb/Dist1 .Dist1/Time .TripVal/PreFlt

Disturbances Disturbance1 TimeOfDisturb TimeOfDisturb U11

CalcDistToFlt Disturbance2 TrigSignal U21

ManualTrig Disturbance3 Indications .Dist1/TrigSig U31

ClearDistRep Disturbance4 FaultLocator TrigSignal U41

Disturbance5 TripValues U51

Disturbance6 .Dist1/Indic I11

Disturbance7 CalcDistToFault,command with confir-mation according to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

Indications I21

Disturbance8 I31

Disturbance9 .Dist1/FltLoc I41

Disturbance10 FltLoop I51

Dist Frequency1

.DistRep/CalcFlt

Disturbance1 .Dist1/TripVal .TripVal/Fault

Disturbance2 PreFault U11

Disturbance3 Fault U21

Disturbance4 U31

Disturbance5 U41

Disturbance6 U51

Disturbance7 I11

Disturbance8 I21

Disturbance9 I31

Disturbance10 I41

I51

Manual Trig,command with confir-mation according to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

Clear DistRep,command with confir-mation according to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

1. User name. Default name is shown


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 53

Version 2.2-00

2.2 Service report

2.2.1 General

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/ServVal .Phasors/Primary

ServiceValues U1 U11

Phasors I1 U21

Functions P1 U31

I/O Q1 U41

DisturbReport f1 U51

ActiveGroup I11

Time .ServRep/Phasors I21

Primary I31

Secondary I41

I51

U1U2

U2U3

U3U1

.Phasors/Second

U11

U21

U31

U41

U51

I11

I21

I31

I41

I51



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 54

2.2.2 Functions, part I

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/HLED HLED/Outputs .ZGEN/ImpVal GFC/Outputs

ServiceValues HMI LED FuncOutputs Signals according to function block

.ZGEN/ImpVal Signals according to function blockPhasors Impedance XL1

Functions Differential .Func/Imp RL1

I/O InstantOC General .Imp/ZGEN XL2 .PHS/Outputs

DisturbReport TimeDelayOC GenFltCriteria ImpValues RL2 Signals according to function blockActiveGroup InvTimeDelayOC PhaseSelection ImpDirection XL3

Time DirInvTDelayOC HighSpeed RL3

OverLoad HighSpeedBO .Imp/GFC .HS/Outputs

Stub Zone1 FuncOutputs .ZDIR/ImpDir Signals according to function block: Zone2 L1

: Zone3 .Imp/PHS L2

: Zone4 FuncOutputs L3 .HSBO/Outputs

: Zone5 Signals according to function blockTimerSet1 ComLocal .Imp/HS

SRWithMem1 ZCommunication FuncOutputs

LocalHMI Com1P .ZM1/Outputs

ComIRevWei .Imp/HSBO Signals according to function blockPowerSwingDet FuncOutputs

PowerSwingLog

SwitchOntoFlt .Imp/ZM1 .ZM2/Outputs

FuncOutputs Signals according to function block

.Imp/ZM2

FuncOutputs .ZM3/Outputs

Signals according to function block.Imp/ZM3

FuncOutputs

.ZM4/Outputs

.Imp/ZM4 Signals according to function blockFuncOutputs

.Imp/ZM5 .ZM5/Outputs



1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 55

Version 2.2-00

2.2.3 Functions, part II

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/Imp .Imp/ZCLC .ZCLC/Outputs

ServiceValues HMI LED General FuncOutputs Signals according to function blockPhasors Impedance GenFltCriteria

Functions Differential PhaseSelection .Imp/ZCOM

I/O InstantOC HighSpeed FuncOutputs .ZCOM/Outputs

DisturbReport TimeDelayOC Direction Signals according to function blockActiveGroup InvTimeDelayOC Zone1 .Imp/ZC1P

Time DirInvTDelayOC Zone2 FuncOutputs

OverLoad Zone3 ZC1P/Outputs

ThermOverLoad Zone4 .Imp/ZCAL Signals according to function block: Zone5 FuncOutputs

: ComLocal

: ZCommunication .Imp/PSD .ZCAL/Outputs

: Com1P FuncOutputs Signals according to function blockTimerSet1 ComIRevWei

SRWithMem1 PowerSwingDet .Imp/PSL

LocalHMI PowerSwingLog FuncOutputs .PSD/Outputs

SwitchOntoFlt Signals according to function block.Imp/SOTF

FuncOutputs

.PSL/Outputs

Signals according to function block

.SOTF/Outputs



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 56

2.2.4 Functions, part III

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/DIFL .DIFL/DiffVal .ChInfo/ChInfo

ServiceValues HMI LED DiffValues IDiffL1 TransmDelay

Phasors Impedance DiffCom IBiasL1 NoOfShlnterr

Functions Differential FuncOutputs IDiffL2 NoOfMedlnterr

I/O InstantOC IBiasL2 NoOfLonglnterr

DisturbReport TimeDelayOC .Func/IOC IDiffL3 CommStatus

ActiveGroup InvTimeDelayOC FuncOutputs IBiasL3 NoOfTXD

Time DirInvTDelayOC NoOfRXD

InternalSignals OverLoad .Func/TOC .DIFL/ChInfo SyncError

ThermOverLoad FuncOutputs DiffCom

Stub ClearCounters Clear Counters, command with confir-mation according to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

PoleDiscord .Func/OVLD

BreakerFailure FuncOutputs .DIFL/Outputs

EarthFault Signals accordingto function blockTimeDelayUV

TimeDelayOV

LossOfVoltage .IOC/Outputs

: Signals accordingto function block:

:

: .TOC/Outputs

TimerSet1 Signals accordingto function blockSRWithMem1

LocalHMI

.TOC2/Outputs

Signals accordingto function block

.TOC3/Outputs


.OVLD/Outputs



1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 57

Version 2.2-00

2.2.5 Functions, part IV

REX5XXServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/THOL .THOL/Temp .TEF/Outputs

Service Values HMI LED ThermOverLoad T LineT Amb

Signals accordingto function blockPhasors Impedance FuncOutputs

Functions :

I/O : .Func/STUB .THOL/Outputs .EF4/Outputs

DisturbReport : FuncOutputs Signals accordingto function block

Signals accordingto function blockActiveGroup :

Time DirInvTDelayOC .Func/PD

OverLoad FuncOutputs .STUB/Outputs .WEF1/Outputs

ThermOverLoad Signals accordingto function block

Signals accordingto function blockStub .Func/BFP

PoleDiscord FuncOutputs

BreakerFailure .PD/Outputs .EFC/Outputs

EarthFault .Func/EarthF Signals accordingto function block

Signals accordingto function blockTimeDelayUV TimeDelayEF

TimeDelayOV 4StepEF

LossOfVoltage WattmetrEF I .BFP/Outputs .EFCA/Outputs

DeadLineDet EFCom Signals accordingto function block

Signals accordingto function blockBrokenConduct ComIRevWei

CTSupervision

: .Func/TUV EarthF/TEF

: FuncOutputs FuncOutputs

:

: .EarthF/EF4

TimerSet1 FuncOutputs

SRWithMem1

LocalHMI .EarthF/WEF1

FuncOutputs

.EarthF/EFC

FuncOutputs

.EarthF/EFCA

FuncOutputs

.TUV/Outputs



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 58

2.2.6 Functions, part V

REX5XXServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/TOV .TOV/Outputs .AR01/ARCount1 .ARCount/Count

Service Values HMI LED FuncOutputs Signals according to function block

Counters 1ph-Shot1

Phasors Impedance ClearCounters 3ph-Shot1

Functions : .Func/LOV 3ph-Shot2

I/O : FuncOutputs .LOV/Outputs .AR01/Outputs1 3ph-Shot3

DisturbReport : Signals according to function block


3ph-Shot4

ActiveGroup : .Func/DLD NoOfReclosings

Time EarthFault FuncOutputs

TimeDelayUV .DLD/OutputsClear Counters, command with confirmation according to the section ”Local human-machine interface”

TimeDelayOV .Func/BRC Signals according to function blockLossOfVoltage FuncOutputs

DeadLineDet .SYN1/SyncVal2

BrokenConduct .Func/CTSU .BRC/Outputs UDiff

CTSupervision FuncOutputs Signals according to function block

FreqDiff

FuseFailure PhaseDiff

AutoRecloser .Func/FUSE

SynchroCheck FuncOutputs .CTSU/Outputs .SYN1/Outputs2

1. AR02 to AR06 as AR01

2. SYN2 to SYN4 as SYN1

Trip Signals according to function block

Signals according to function blockComChanTest .Func/AutoRec

FaultLocator AutoRecloser1

ActiveGroup AutoRecloser2 .FUSE/Outputs

: AutoRecloser3 Signals according to function block: AutoRecloser4

: AutoRecloser5

: AutoRecloser6 .AutoRec/AR011

TimerSet1 Counters

SRWithMem1 .Func/Sync FuncOutputs

LocalHMI SynchroCheck1

SynchroCheck2 .Sync/SYN12

SynchroCheck3 SyncValues

SynchroCheck4 FuncOutputs

.Func/TRIP TRIP/Outputs


.Func/CCHT

FuncOutputs CCHT/Outputs



1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 59

Version 2.2-00

2.2.7 Functions, part VI

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/FLOC .FLOC/Outputs Count/Count

ServiceValues HMI LED FuncOutputs Signals accordingto function block

Counter1

Phasors Impedance Counter2

Functions : .Func/GRP Counter3

I/O : FuncOutputs .GRP/Outputs Counter4

DisturbReport : Signals accordingto function block

Counter5

ActiveGroup : .Func/CN01 Counter6

Time Trip Count

ComChanTest .CN01/Count

Clear Counters, com-mand with confirma-tion according to the section ”Local human-machine interface”

FaultLocator .Func/ICOM Counters

ActiveGroup Signals accordingto function block

ClearCounters

Counters

IEC103Command

DisturbReport .Func/DREP

InternSignals Signals accordingto function blockTest

Time

MI11--61error .Func/INT

CD01--11 Signals accordingto function blockAND1A

AND1B

: .Func/TEST

: Signals accordingto function block:

:

TimerSet1 .Func/Time

SRWithMem1 Signals accordingto function blockLocalHMI

.Func/MI11Err1


.Func/CD012

Signals accordingto function block 1. MI12Err to MI61Err

as MI11Err2. CD02 to CD11 as

CD01


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 60

2.2.8 Functions, part VII

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/Func .Func/AND1A .Func/TQ1 .CtrGts1/Outputs

ServiceValues HMI LED Signals accordingto function block


Signals accordingto function blockPhasors Impedance

Functions :

I/O : .Func/AND1B .Func/TQ2 .TimSet1/Outputs

DisturbReport : Signals accordingto function block


Signals accordingto function blockActiveGroup :

Time Time

MI11--61error .Func/OR1A .Func/CtrGts1 .SM1/Outputs

CD01--11 Signals accordingto function block

FuncOutputs Signals accordingto function blockAND1A

AND1B .Func/TimSet1

OR1A .Func/OR1B FuncOutputs

OR2A Signals accordingto function blockXOR1 .Func/SM1

INV FuncOutputs

SR .Func/XOR1

Timer Signals accordingto function blockTimerLong

Pulse

Pulse2 .Func/INV

PulseLong1 Signals accordingto function blockPulseLong2

ContrGates1

TimerSet1 .Func/SR

SRWithMem1 Signals accordingto function blockLocalHMI

.Func/TM


.Func/TL


.Func/TP



1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 61

Version 2.2-00

2.2.9 I/O

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/I/O .I/O/BIM1 .BIM1/Outputs

ServiceValues Slot12-BIM11 FuncOutputs Signals accordingto function blockPhasors Slot14-IOM21

Functions Slot16-BOM31 .I/O/IOM2

I/O Slot18-MIM11 FuncOutputs .IOM2/Outputs

DisturbReport Slot20-BIM51Signals accordingto function blockActiveGroup Slot22-IOM61 .I/O/BOM3

Time Slot24-BOM71 FuncOutputs

Slot26-MIM21 .BOM3/Outputs

Slot28-BIM91 .I/O/MIM1 Signals accordingto function blockSlot30-IOM101 FuncOutputs

Slot32-BOM111

Slot34-MIM31 .I/O/RTC1 .MIM1/Outputs

Slot36-BIM131 FuncOutputs Signals accordingto function blockRemTermCom1

RemTermCom2 .I/O/RTC2

FuncOutputs .RTC1/Outputs


.RTC2/Outputs


1. This is an example of a full framework


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 62

2.2.10 Remaining menus

REX 5XX/ServRep .ServRep/DREP .DREP/Memory

ServiceValues MemoryUsed MemoryUsed

Phasors SequenceNo

Functions AnalogTrigStat .DREP/SeqNo

I/O SequenceNo

DisturbReport .ServRep/GRP

ActiveGroup ActiveGroup .DREP/AnaTrig

Time U1>1

.ServRep/TIME U1<1

Date&Time U2>1

U2<1

U3>1

U3<1

U4>1

U4<1

U5>1

U5<1

I1>1

I1<1

I2>1

I2<1

I3>1

I3<1

I4>1

I4<1

I5>1

I5<1

.INT/Outputs




1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 63

Version 2.2-00

2.3 Settings

.REX 5XX/Set .Set/DREP .DREP/Oper .Binary/Input13

DisturbReport Operation Operation UserName2

Functions SequenceNo PostRetrig TrigOperation

ChangeActGrp SamplingRate TrigLevel

Time RecordingTimes .DREP/SeqNo IndicationMask

BinarySignals SequenceNo SetLed

AnalogSignals

FaultLocator .DREP/SRate .Binary/Input483

SamplingRate UserName2

TrigOperation

.DREP/RecTime TrigLevel

tPre IndicationMask

tPost SetLed

tLim

.Analog/U13

.DREP/Binary UserName2

Input11 Operation

Input21 >TrigOperation

- >TrigLevel

- <TrigOperation

Input471 <TrigLevel

Input481

.Analog/I13

.DREP/Analog UserName2

U11 Operation

U21 >TrigOperation

U31 >TrigLevel

U41 <TrigOperation

U51 <TrigLevel

I11

I21

I31

I41

I51

.DREP/FltLoc

DistanceUnit 1. User name. Default name is shown

2. Read only3. User name will not be

shown


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 64

2.3.1 Functions, part I

REX 5XX/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/HLED .Imp/ZGEN

DisturbReport Group1 HMI LED Settings accordingto function block

Settings accordingto function blockFunctions Group2 Line Reference

ChangeActGrp Group3 Impedance

Time Group4 Differential .Grp1/LRF .Imp/GFC

InstantOC Settings accordingto function block

Settings accordingto function blockTimeDelayOC

InvTimeDelayOC

Save as Grp1 DirInvTDelayOC .Grp1/Imp .Imp/PHS

Save as Grp 2 OverLoad General Settings accordingto function blockSave as Grp 3 ThermOverLoad GenFltCriteria

Save as Grp 4 Stub PhaseSelection

Command with Confir-mation according to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

PoleDiscord HighSpeed .Imp/HS

BreakerFailure Direction Settings accordingto function blockEarthFault Zone1

TimeDelayUV Zone2

TimeDelayOV Zone3 .Imp/ZDIR

LossOfVoltage Zone4 Settings accordingto function blockDeadLineDet Zone5

BrokenConduct ComLocal

CTSupervision ZCommunication .Imp/ZM1

FuseFailure Com1P Settings accordingto function blockAutoRecloser ComIRevWei

SynchroCheck PowerSwingDet

Trip PowerSwingLog .Imp/ZM2

ComChanTest SwitchOntoFlt Settings accordingto function blockContrGates1

TimerSet1

SRWithMem1 .Imp/ZM3

Counters Settings accordingto function block

.Imp/ZM4

Settings accordingto function block

.Imp/ZM5



1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 65

Version 2.2-00

2.3.2 Functions, part II

REX 5XX/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/Imp .Imp/ZCLC

DisturbReport Group1 HMI LED General Settings accordingto function blockFunctions Group2 Line Reference GenFltCriteria

ChangeActGrp Group3 Impedance PhaseSelection

Time Group4 Differential HighSpeed .Imp/ZCom

InstantOC Direction Settings accordingto function blockTimeDelayOC Zone1

InvTimeDelayOC Zone2

DirInvTDelayOC Zone3 .Imp/ZC1P

Save as Grp1 OverLoad Zone4 Settings accordingto function blockSave as Grp 2 ThermOverLoad Zone5

Save as Grp 3 Stub ComLocal

Save as Grp 4 PoleDiscord ZCommunication .Imp/ZCAL


BreakerFailure Com1P Settings accordingto function blockEarthFault ComIRevWei

TimeDelayUV PowerSwingDet

TimeDelayOV PowerSwingLog .Imp/PSD

LossOfVoltage SwitchOntoFlt Settings accordingto function blockDeadLineDet

BrokenConduct

CTSupervision .Imp/PSL

FuseFailure Settings accordingto function blockAutoRecloser

SynchroCheck

Trip .Imp/SOTF

ComChanTest Settings accordingto function blockContrGates1

TimerSet1

SRWithMem1

Counters


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 66

2.3.3 Functions, part III

REX 5XX/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/Diff

DisturbReport Group1 HMI LED Settings according to function blockFunctions Group2 Line Reference


Time Group4 Differential .Grp1/IOC

InstantOC Settings according to function blockTimeDelayOC

Save as Grp1 InvTimeDelayOC

Save as Grp 2 DirInvTDelayOC .Grp1/TOC

Save as Grp 3 OverLoad Settings according to function blockSave as Grp 4 ThermOverLoad

Command with Confirma-tion according to the sec-tion ”Local human-machine interface”

Stub

PoleDiscord .Grp1/TOC2

BreakerFailure Settings according to function blockEarthFault

TimeDelayUV

TimeDelayOV .Grp1/TOC3

LossOfVoltage Settings according to function blockDeadLineDet

BrokenConduct

CTSupervision .Grp1/OVLD

FuseFailure Settings according to function blockAutoRecloser

SynchroCheck

Trip .Grp1/THOL

ComChanTest Settings according to function blockContrGates1

TimerSet1

SRWithMem1 .Grp1/STUB

Counters Settings according to function block

.Grp1/PD

Settings according to function block

.Grp1/BFP

Settings according to function block


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 67

Version 2.2-00

2.3.4 Functions, part IV

REX 5XX/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/EarthF .EarthF/TEF EF4/GEN

DisturbReport Group1 HMI LED TimeDelayEF Settings accord-ing to function block

Settings accord-ing to function block

Functions Group2 Line Reference 4StepEF

ChangeActGrp Group3 Impedance WattmetrEF I

Time Group4 Differential EFCom

InstantOC ComIRevWei .EarthF/EF4 EF4/Step1

TimeDelayOC General Settings accord-ing to function block

Save as Grp1 InvTimeDelayOC Step1

Save as Grp 2 DirInvTDelayOC Step2

Save as Grp 3 OverLoad Step3

Save as Grp 4 ThermOverLoad Step4 EF4/Step2

Command with Confirmation according to the section ”Local human-machine interface”

Stub Direction Settings accord-ing to function block

PoleDiscord 2ndHarmStab

BreakerFailure SwitchOnToFlt

EarthFault

TimeDelayUV .EarthF/WEF1 EF4/Step3

TimeDelayOV Settings accord-ing to function block


LossOfVoltage

DeadLineDet

BrokenConduct

CTSupervision .EarthF/EFC EF4/Step4

FuseFailureSettings accord-ing to function block


AutoRecloser

SynchroCheck

Trip

ComChanTest .EarthF/EFCA EF4/Dir

ContrGates1 Settings accord-ing to function block


TimerSet1

SRWithMem1

Counters

EF4/2ndHarm


EF4/SOTF



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 68

2.3.5 Functions, part V

REX 5XX/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/TUV

DisturbReport Group1 HMI LED Settings accordingto function blockFunctions Group2 Line Reference


Time Group4 Differential .Grp1/TOV

InstantOC Settings accordingto function blockTimeDelayOC


Save as Grp 2 DirInvTDelayOC .Grp1/LOV

Save as Grp 3 OverLoad Settings accordingto function blockSave as Grp 4 ThermOverLoad

Command with Confirma-tion according to the sec-tion ”Local human-machine interface”

Stub

PoleDiscord .Grp1/DLD

BreakerFailure Settings accordingto function blockEarthFault

TimeDelayUV

TimeDelayOV .Grp1/BRC

LossOfVoltage Settings accordingto function blockDeadLineDet

BrokenConduct

CTSupervision .Grp1/CTSU

FuseFailure Settings accordingto function blockAutoRecloser

SynchroCheck

Trip .Grp1/FUSE

ComChanTest Settings accordingto function blockContrGates1

TimerSet1

SRWithMem1

Counters


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 69

Version 2.2-00

2.3.6 Functions, part VI

REX 5XX/Set .Set/Func .Func/Grp1 .Grp1/AutoRec .AutoRec/AR011

DisturbReport Group1 HMI LED AutoRecloser1 Settings accordingto function blockFunctions Group2 Line Reference AutoRecloser2

ChangeActGrp Group3 Impedance AutoRecloser3

Time Group4 Differential AutoRecloser4 .Sync/SYN12

InstantOC AutoRecloser5 Settings accordingto function blockTimeDelayOC AutoRecloser6


Save as Grp 2 DirInvTDelayOC .Grp1/Sync

Save as Grp 3 OverLoad SynchroCheck11. AR02 to AR06 as

AR012. SYN2 to SYN4 as

SYN1

Save as Grp 4 ThermOverLoad SynchroCheck2


Stub SynchroCheck3

PoleDiscord SynchroCheck4

BreakerFailure

EarthFault .Grp1/TRIP

TimeDelayUV Operation

TimeDelayOV

LossOfVoltage .Grp1/CCHT

DeadLineDet Settings accordingto function blockBrokenConduct

CTSupervision

FuseFailure .Grp1/CtrGts1

AutoRecloser Settings accordingto function blockSynchroCheck

Trip

ComChanTest .Grp1/TimSet1

ContrGates1 Settings accordingto function blockTimerSet1

SRWithMem1

Counters .Grp1/SM1


.Grp1/Count



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 70

2.3.7 Remaining menus

REX 5XX/Set .Set/GRP

DisturbReport Settings accordingto function blockFunctions

ChangeActGrpChangeAct Grp, Command with confirma-tion according to the sec-tion ”Local human-machine interface”

Time

.Set/TIME



1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 71

Version 2.2-00

2.4 Terminal report

.REX 5XX/TermRep .TermRep/SelfSup

SelfSuperv InternFail

IdentityNo InternWarning

Modules MPM-modFail

AnalogInputs MPM-modWarning

ADC-module

Slot12-BIM11

Slot14-IOM21

Slot16-BOM31

Slot18-MIM11

Slot20-BIM51

Slot22-IOM61

RemTermCom

RealTimeClock

TimeSync

.TermRep/IdentNo

SerialNo

SW-Version

.TermRep/Modules

Slot12-BIM11

Slot14-IOM21

Slot16-BOM31

Slot18-MIM11

Slot20-BIM51

Slot22-IOM61

I/O-diff

.TermRep/AnInp

Ur

Ir

U1r

U2r

U3r

U4r

U5r

I1r


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 72

I2r

1. Follow the IdentNo installed on each pos. in the framework

I3r

I4r

I5r


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 73

Version 2.2-00

2.5 Configuration

2.5.1 Part I

REX5XX REX5XX/Config .Config/AnInp .AnInp/GeneraI

DisturbReport AnalogInputs General fr

ServiceReport I/O-modules U1 CTEarth

Settings DiffFunction U2

TerminalReport TerminalCom U3 .AnInp/U1

Configuration Time U4 Name

Command BuiltInMMI U5 U1b

Test Identifiers I1 U1Scale

SelectLanguage I2

I3 .AnInp/Q

I4 Name

I5

U .AnInp/f

I Name

P

Q

f .AnInp/TRM

TrafoInpModule Ur

Ir

U1

U2

U3

U4

U5

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 74

2.5.2 Part II

REX5XX REX5XX/Config .Config/I/O-mod .I/O-mod/Oper .Osc/BIM5

DisturbReport AnalogInputs Operation Slot11-PSM12 BIM5-OscBlock

ServiceReport I/O-modules Reconfigure Slot15-IOM32 BIM5-OscRel

Settings DiffFunction Oscillation Slot17-BOM42

TerminalReport TerminalCom Slot19-BIM52

Configuration Time .Config/DIFL 2. This is an example

Command BuiltInMMI DiffSync Reconfigure, command with confir-mation according to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

Test Identifiers

SelectLanguage .Cmd/ARBlock

Operation

.Config/TermCom .TermCom/SPA/IEC

SPA/IECCom X13Com .Cmd/ZComBlk

SPACom .I/O-mod/Osc Operation

IECCom .TermCom/SPACom Slot19-BIM52

LONCom Rear .Cmd/BlkFun

RemTermCom Front .SPACom/Rear Operation

SlaveNo

.TermCom/IECCom BaudRate .Cmd/LEDRes

Commands ActGrpRestrict Operation

Measurands SettingRestrict

FunctionType .Cmd/SetGrp1

Communication .SPACom/Front Operation

BlockOfInfoCmd SlaveNo

BaudRate .Cmd/SetGrp2

Operation

.IECCom/Cmd

ARBlock

ZCommBlock .Cmd/SetGrp3

BlockFunctions Operation

LEDReset

SettingGrp1 .Cmd/SetGrp4

SettingGrp2 Operation

SettingGrp3

SettingGrp4


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 75

Version 2.2-00

2.5.3 Part III

REX5XX REX5XX/Config .Config/TermCom .TermCom/IECCom .IECCom/Meas .NodeInf/AdrInfo

DisturbReport AnalogInputs SPA/IECCom Commands MeasurandType DomainID

ServiceReport I/O-modules SPACom Measurands SubnetID

Settings DiffFunction IECCom FunctionType .IECCom/FunType NodeID

TerminalReport TerminalCom LONCom Communication Operation

Configuration Time RemTermCom BlockOfInfoCmd MainFuncType .NodeInf/NeurID

Command BuiltInMMI NeuronID

Test Identifiers .Config/Time .TermCom/LONCom .IECCom/Com

SelectLanguage TimeSyncSourc NodeInfo SlaveNo .NodeInf/Locat

ServicePinMsg BaudRate Location

.Config/MMI LONDefault

SettingRestrict SessionTimers

BlockOfInfoCmd,command with sta-tus and confirma-tion according to the section ”Local human-machine interface”

.Config/Ident .TermCom/Comm

StationName TerminalNo

StationNo RemoteTermNo

ObjectName BitRate

ObjectNo OptoPower

UnitName CommSync

UnitNo .LONCom/NodeInf

AdressInfo

.Config/SelLang NeuronID

ActiveLanguage Location

Save Language,command withconfirmationaccording to the section ”Local human-machine interface”

.LONCom/SesTime

SessionTmo

RetryTmo

IdleAckCycle

BusyAckCycle

ErrNackCycle

ServicePinMsg,LONDefault, Com-mandwith confirmationaccording to the section ”Local human-machine interface”


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 76

2.6 Command

REX5XX .REX5XX/Cmd .Cmd/CD01CD01-CmdOut1 to CD01-CmdOut16,commands with status and confirmation accord-ing to the section ”Local human-machine inter-face”

DisturbReport CD01 CD01-CmdOut11

ServiceReport CD02 CD01-CmdOut21

Settings CD03 CD01-CmdOut31

TerminalReport CD04 CD01-CmdOut41

Configuration CD05 CD01-CmdOut51

Command CD06 CD01-CmdOut61

Test CD07 :

: :

CD09 CD01-CmdOut141

CD10 CD01-CmdOut151

CD11 CD01-CmdOut161

(CD02 to CD11 conforms with CD01, only present in REC 561)

CD01-CmdOut111. User name. Default

name is shown


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 77

Version 2.2-00

2.7 Test

REX5XX .REX5XX/Test .Test/Mode .Mode/TestOp

DisturbReport TestMode Operation Operation

ServiceReport ConfigMode BlocktFunctions

Settings BlockEventFunc .Mode/BlkFnc

TerminalReport DisturbReport Signals accordingto function blockConfiguration Differential

Command

Test .Test/CnfMode .Mode/BlkEv

ConfigMode Signals according to function block

.Mode/DistRep

Operation

DisturbSummary

.Mode/Diff

DiffTestMode

ReleaseLocal


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 78

HMI LED HMI LED

Line Reference Line Reference

Impedance Impedance

Differential Differential

InstantOC InstantOC

TimeDelayOC TimeDelayOC

InvTimeDelayOC InvTimeDelayOC

DirInvTDelayOC DirInvTDelayOC

OverLoad OverLoad

ThermOverLoad ThermOverLoad

Stub Stub

PoleDiscord PoleDiscord

BreakerFailure BreakerFailure

EarthFault EarthFault

TimeDelayUV TimeDelayUV

TimeDelayOV TimeDelayOV

LossOfVoltage LossOfVoltage

DeadLineDet DeadLineDet

BrokenConduct BrokenConduct

CTSupervision CTSupervision

FuseFailure FuseFailure

AutoRecloser AutoRecloser

SynchroCheck SynchroCheck

Trip Trip

ComChanTest ComChanTest

FaultLocator ContrGates1

ActiveGroup TimerSet1

Counters SRWithMem1

IEC103Command Counters

DisturbReport

InternalSignals

Test

Time

MI11--61error

CD01--11

AND1A

AND1B

OR1A

OR2A

XOR1

INV


1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 79

Version 2.2-00

SR

Timer

TimerLong

Pulse

Pulse2

PulseLong1

PulseLong2

ContrGates1

TimerSet1

SRWithMem1

LocalHMI


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 292-XENPage 4 – 80

Page 5 – 1

Contents Page

Terminal identification................................................................................5–3Application...................................................................................................... 5–3

Parameters..................................................................................................... 5–3

Setting ............................................................................................................ 5–4

Reports........................................................................................................... 5–4

Appendix ........................................................................................................ 5–5Setting tables ....................................................................................... 5–5

Activation of setting groups ......................................................................5–7Application...................................................................................................... 5–7

Design ............................................................................................................ 5–7

Configuration and operation ........................................................................... 5–7

Testing............................................................................................................ 5–8

Appendix ........................................................................................................ 5–9Function block...................................................................................... 5–9Signal list.............................................................................................. 5–9

Restricted settings via human-machine interface .................................5–11Application.................................................................................................... 5–11

Installation and setting instructions .............................................................. 5–12

Testing.......................................................................................................... 5–13

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 5–14Function block.................................................................................... 5–14Signal list............................................................................................ 5–14Setting table ....................................................................................... 5–14

I/O system configuration..........................................................................5–15Application.................................................................................................... 5–15

Design .......................................................................................................... 5–16General .............................................................................................. 5–16Binary input module ........................................................................... 5–16Binary output module ......................................................................... 5–17Input/output module ........................................................................... 5–18mA input module ................................................................................ 5–18Power supply module......................................................................... 5–19Differential communication module .................................................... 5–20I/O position ......................................................................................... 5–20

Configuration ................................................................................................ 5–21

Setting .......................................................................................................... 5–22

Testing.......................................................................................................... 5–23

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 5–24Signal list............................................................................................ 5–24Setting table ....................................................................................... 5–24

Configurable logic ....................................................................................5–25Application.................................................................................................... 5–25

General functions

General functionsPage 5 – 2

Design .......................................................................................................... 5–26Additional configurable logic .............................................................. 5–26Inverter (INV)...................................................................................... 5–26OR...................................................................................................... 5–27AND.................................................................................................... 5–27Timer .................................................................................................. 5–28Pulse .................................................................................................. 5–30Exclusive OR (XOR) .......................................................................... 5–31Set-Reset (SR)................................................................................... 5–32MOVE................................................................................................. 5–32

Setting .......................................................................................................... 5–35

Reports......................................................................................................... 5–36

Configuration ................................................................................................ 5–37

Testing.......................................................................................................... 5–38

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 5–39Function blocks .................................................................................. 5–39Signal lists .......................................................................................... 5–42Setting tables ..................................................................................... 5–43

Self-supervision........................................................................................5–45Application.................................................................................................... 5–45

Design .......................................................................................................... 5–45

Blocking of functions during test............................................................5–49Application.................................................................................................... 5–49

Design .......................................................................................................... 5–49

Time synchronisation...............................................................................5–51Application.................................................................................................... 5–51

Theory of operation ...................................................................................... 5–52

Setting .......................................................................................................... 5–53

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 5–54Function block .................................................................................... 5–54Signal list............................................................................................ 5–54Setting table ....................................................................................... 5–54

Page 5 – 3Terminal identification

1 ApplicationSerial number, software version and the identification names and numbersfor the station, the object and the terminal (unit) itself can be stored in theREx 5xx terminal. Also the serial numbers of included modules are storedin the terminal. This information can be read on the local HMI or whencommunicating with the terminal through a PC or with SMS/SCS.

The base currents, voltages and rated frequency must be set since the val-ues affect many functions. The input transformers ratio must be set aswell. The ratio for the current and the voltage transformer automaticallyaffects the measuring functions in the terminal.

The internal clock is used for time tagging of:

• Internal events.

• Disturbance reports.

• Events in a disturbance report.

• Events transmitted to the SCS substation control system.

This implies that the internal clock is very important. The clock can be syn-chronised (see Time synchronisation) to achieve higher accuracy of the timetagging. Without synchronisation, the internal clock is useful for compari-sons among events within the REx 5xx terminal.

2 ParametersUxr and Ixr (x = 1-5) are the rated voltage and current values for the ana-logue input transformers within the REx 5xx terminal. UxScale and IxS-cale are the actual ratio for the main transformer at the protected object.These values will be used to calculate the present voltage and current inthe protected object. Uxb and Ixb defines base voltage and current values,used to define the per-unit system used in the terminal for calculation ofsetting values.

The current transformer secondary current (IsSEC) is:

(Equation 1)

where ISEC is the secondary rated current of the main CT and IPRIM is theprimary rated current of the main CT. The relay setting value IP>> isgiven in percentage of the secondary base current value, Ixb, associated tothe current transformer input Ix:

(Equation 2)

The value of Ixb can be calculated as:

(Equation 3)

Name is possible to set for respective analogue input, to easily identifyand refer the values within the disturbance report to the correspondingobject.

IsSEC

ISEC

IPRIM------------ Is⋅=

IP>>IsSEC

Ixb------------- 100⋅=

IxbRated primary current

CT ratio----------------------------------------------------------=

1MRK 580 294-XEN


Terminal identification

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 294-XENPage 5 – 4

3 SettingThe identification settings (station, object and terminal names and num-bers) are done and displayed at:

ConfigurationIdentifiers

The analogue input settings Uxb, Ixb, UxScale, IxScale, names, f andCTEarth are done at:

ConfigurationAnalogInputs

The Uxr and Ixr are configured at delivery and can only be reconfiguredthrough the CAP 531 configuration tool.

The settings of the internal clock is done at:

SettingsTime

4 ReportsThe serial number of the terminal and the software version can be dis-played at:

TerminalReportIdentityNo

The serial number of included modules in the terminal can be displayedat:

TerminalReportModules

The Uxr and Ixr configurations can be displayed at:

TerminalReportAnalogInputs

The present primary and secondary voltage and current phasors can beviewed at:

ServiceReportPhasors

Primary or Secondary respectively

UxScale, IxScale and the identifiers are displayed at the same place aswhere they were set.

The present internal time is read at:

ServiceReportTime

Terminal identification 1MRK 580 294-XENPage 5 – 5

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Setting tables

Table 1: Identifiers

Table 2: AnalogInputs - General

Table 3: AnalogInputs - Voltage

Parameter Range Unit Default Parameter description

Unit No 0 - 99999 Int 0 State an identity number for the terminal

Unit Name 0 - 16 char Unit Name State an identity name for the terminal, 16 characters

Object No 0 - 99999 Int 0 State an identity number for the protected object

Object Name 0 - 16 char Object Name State an identity name for the protected object, 16 characters

Station No 0 - 99999 Int 0 State an identity number for the station

Station Name 0 - 16 char Station Name State an identity name for the station, 16 characters


CTEarth 0 - 1 Int 1 Direction of CT earthing,0 = In = towards the bus, 1 = Out = towards the line

fr 0 - 1 Int 0 Select system frequency: 0 = 50 Hz, 1 = 60 Hz


U1r 10.000 - 500. V 63.509 Rated voltage of transformer on input U1

U1b 30.000 - 500. V 63.509 Base voltage of input U1

U1Scale 1.000 - 20000.000

2000.000 Scale for nominal primary voltage, input U1

Name 0 - 13 char U1 State an user-defined name of input U1, 13 characters



U2Scale 1.000 - 20000.000





U3Scale 1.000 - 20000.000





Terminal identification

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 294-XENPage 5 – 6

Table 4: AnalogInputs - Current

U4Scale 1.000 - 20000.000





U5Scale 1.000 - 20000.000





I1r 0.1000 - 10. A 1.0000 Rated current of transformer on input I1

I1b 0.1 - 10.0 A 1.0 Base current of input I1

I1Scale 1.000 - 40000.000

2000.000 Scale for nominal primary current, input I1

Name 0 - 13 char I1 State an user-defined name of input I1, 13 characters



I2Scale 1.000 - 40000.000





I3Scale 1.000 - 40000.000





I4Scale 1.000 - 40000.000





I5Scale 1.000 - 40000.000



Page 5 – 7Activation of setting groups

1 ApplicationDifferent conditions in networks of different voltage levels require highadaptability of the used protection and control units to best provide fordependability, security and selectivity requirements. Protection units oper-ate with higher degree of availability, especially, if the setting values oftheir parameters are continuously optimised regarding the conditions inpower system.

The operational departments can plan different operating conditions forthe primary equipment. The protection engineer can prepare in advancefor the necessary optimised and pre-tested settings for different protectionfunctions. Four different groups of setting parameters are available in theREx 5xx terminals. Any of them can be activated automatically throughup to four different programmable binary inputs by means of external con-trol signals.

2 DesignThe REx 5xx control and protection terminals have four independentgroups (sets) of setting parameters. These groups can be activated at anytime in five different ways:

• Locally by means of the local human-machine interface (HMI).

• Locally by means of a front-connected personal computer (PC).

• Remotely through the Station Monitoring System (SMS).

• Remotely through the Station Control System (SCS).

• Locally by means of up to four, programmable binary inputs.

In the document “Local human-machine interface”, the procedure of howto change the active setting group from the local HMI is described. Oper-ating procedures for the PC aided methods of changing the active settinggroups are described in the corresponding SMS documents and instruc-tions for the operators within the SCS are included in the SCS documenta-tion. This document deals with the option to change the active settinggroup by means of the control signals connected to the programmablebinary inputs of the terminal.

3 Configuration and operationThis function has four included input signals, as shown in Figure 1:. Eachis configurable to any of the binary inputs in the terminal. Configurationmust be performed under the menu:

ConfigurationFunctions

ActiveGroupFuncInputs

The submenu Functions is only accessible for service personnel, so theconfiguration must be done by an authorised service person.

1MRK 580 295-XEN


Activation of setting groups

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 295-XENPage 5 – 8

The number of the signals configured must correspond to the number ofthe setting groups to be controlled by the external signals (contacts).

The voltage need not be permanently present on one binary input. Anypulse, which must be longer than 200 ms, activates the corresponding set-ting group. The group remains active until some other command, issuedeither through one of the binary inputs or by other means (local HMI,SMS, SCS), activates another group.

One or more inputs can be activated at the same time. If a function is rep-resented in two different groups and both the groups are active, the groupwith lowest identity has priority. This means that group 2 has higher prior-ity than group 4 etc.

It is possible to change active group from the local HMI at:

SettingsChangeActGrp

Figure 1: Connection of the function to external circuits.

This function includes four output signals as well, for confirmation ofwhich group that is active.

4 TestingConfigure the GRP--ACTGRPn input signals to the corresponding binaryinputs of a terminal and browse the local HMI for the information aboutthe active setting group under the menu:

ServiceReport ActiveGroup

Connect the appropriate dc voltage to the corresponding binary input ofthe terminal and observe the information presented on the HMI display.The displayed information must always correspond to the activated input.Check that corresponding output indicates the active group.

GRP--ACTGRP1

GRP--ACTGRP2

GRP--ACTGRP3

GRP--ACTGRP4

IOx-Bly1

IOx-Bly2

IOx-Bly3

IOx-Bly4

ACTIVATE GROUP 1ACTIVATE GROUP 2

ACTIVATE GROUP 4ACTIVATE GROUP 3

+RL2

Activation of setting groups 1MRK 580 295-XENPage 5 – 9

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

ACTGRP1ACTGRP2ACTGRP3ACTGRP4

ACTIVATE SETTING GROUP GRP--

GRP1GRP2GRP3GRP4

Table 1:

Block Signal Type Description

GRP-- ACTGRP1 IN Active Group-Select setting group 1 as active group




GRP-- GRP1 OUT Setting group 1 active




Activation of setting groups

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 295-XENPage 5 – 10

Page 5 – 11Restricted settings via human-machine interface

Note! Do not set this function in operation before carefully reading theseinstructions and configuring the HMI--BLOCKSET functional input tothe selected binary input.

The HMI--BLOCKSET functional input is configurable only to one of theavailable binary inputs of a REx 5xx terminal. For this reason, the termi-nal is delivered with the default configuration, where the HMI--BLOCK-SET signal is connected to NONE-NOSIGNAL.

1 ApplicationSetting values of different control and protection parameters and the con-figuration of different function and logic circuits within the terminal areimportant not only for reliable and secure operation of the terminal, butalso for the entire power system.

Non-permitted and non-coordinated changes, done by unauthorised per-sonnel, can cause severe damages in primary and secondary power cir-cuits. They can influence the security of people working in close vicinityof the primary and secondary apparatuses and those using electric energyin everyday life.

For this reason, all REx 5xx terminals include a special feature that, whenactivated, blocks the possibility to change the settings and/or configura-tion of the terminal from the HMI module.

All other functions of the local human-machine communication remainintact. This means that an operator can read all disturbance reports andother information and setting values for different protection parametersand the configuration of different logic circuits.

This function permits remote resetting and reconfiguration through theserial communication ports, when the setting restrictions permit remotechanges of settings. The setting restrictions can be set only on the localHMI.

1MRK 580 296-XEN


Restricted settings via human-machine interface

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 296-XENPage 5 – 12

2 Installation and setting instructionsFigure 1: presents the combined connection and logic diagram for thefunction.

Configuration of the HMI--BLOCKSET functional input signal under thesubmenu is possible only to one of the built-in binary inputs:

ConfigurationBuiltInHMI

Carefully select a binary input not used by or reserved for any other func-tions or logic circuits, before activating the function.

Figure 1: Connection and logic diagram for the BLOCKSET function.

Set the setting restriction under the submenu:

ConfigurationBuiltInHMI

SettingRestrict

to SettingRestrict = Block:

The selected binary input must be connected to the control DC voltage viaa normally closed contact of a control switch, which can be locked by akey. Only when the normally closed contact is open, the setting and con-figuration of the REx 5xx terminal via the HMI is possible.

&

HMI--BLOCKSET

SettingRestrict=Block RESTRICT

SETTINGS

+

REx 5xx

SWITCH WITHKEY

SETTING RESTRICTION


1MRK 580 296-XENPage 5 – 13

Version 2.2-00

3 Testing1.1 Configure the HMI--BLOCKSET functional input to the binary

input, which is determined by the engineering or the input that is notused by any other function.

1.2 Set the setting restriction to SettingRestrict = Block.

1.3 Connect the rated control DC voltage to the selected binary input.

1.4 Try to change the setting of any parameter for one of the functions.Reading of the values must be possible. The terminal must notrespond to any attempt to change the setting value or configuration.

1.5 Disconnect the control DC voltage from the selected binary input.

1.6 Repeat the attempt under item 1.4. The terminal must accept thechanged setting value or configuration.

1.7 Depending on the requested design for a complete REx 5xx terminal,leave the function active or reconfigure the function into the defaultconfiguration and set the setting restriction function out of operationto SettingRestrict = Open.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 296-XENPage 5 – 14

4 Appendix

4.1 Function block

4.2 Signal list

4.3 Setting table

SETTING RESTRICTION

HMI--BLOCKSET

Table 1:


HMI- BLOCKSET Inter-nal

Input signal to restrict the setting and configuration options by the HMI unit.Warning: Read the instructions before use. Default configuration to NONE-NOSIGNAL.

Table 2:


SettingRe-strict

Open, Block Open: Permits changes of settings and configuration by means of the HMI unit regardless of the status of input HMI--BLOCKSET.Block: Inhibits changes of settings and configuration via the HMI unit when the HMI--BLOCKSET input signal is equal to logic one.

Page 5 – 15I/O system configuration

1 ApplicationThis document describes the I/O system configuration that is used to add,remove or move I/O modules in the REx 5xx terminal products. To con-figure means to connect the function blocks that represent each I/O mod-ule (BIM, BOM, IOM, DCM, MIM and PSM) to a function block for theI/O positions (IOP1).

Available I/O modules are:

• BIM, Binary Input Module with 16 binary input channels.

• BOM, Binary Output Module with 24 binary output channels.

• IOM, Input/Output Module with 8 binary input and 12 binary output channels.

• MIM, mA Input Module with six analogue input channels.

• PSM, Input Output Power Supply Module with four inputs and four outputs.

• DCM, Differential Communication Module. The only software con-figuration for this module is the I/O Position input. Refer to the “Remote end data communication module” hardware design for fur-ther description.

A REx 5xx terminal houses different numbers of modules depending ofthe casing size and which kind of modules chosen.

• The 1/1 of 19-inch size casing houses a maximum of 13 modules. But when Input/Output- or Output modules are included, the maxi-mum of modules are four. The maximum number of mA Input mod-ules are limited to six.

• The 3/4 size casing houses a maximum of eight modules. Also for this casing, the limitation is four modules when Input/Output- or Output modules are included. The maximum number of mA Input modules are three.

• The 1/2 size casing houses a maximum of three binary modules or one analogue mA Input module.

It is possible to fit modules of different types in any combination in a ter-minal, but the total maximum numbers of modules must be considered.

1MRK 580 297-XEN


I/O system configuration

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 297-XENPage 5 – 16

2 Design

2.1 General Each I/O-module can be placed in any CAN-I/O slot in the casing. Any-way, there is one exception. The DCM-module has a fixed slot positionwhich depends of the size of the casing.

To add, remove or move modules in the terminal, the reconfiguration ofthe terminal must be done from the graphical configuration tool CAP 531.

Users refer to the CAN-I/O slots by the physical slot numbers of theCAN-I/O slots, which also appear in the terminal drawings.

If the user-entered configuration does not match the actual configurationin the terminal, an error output is activated on the function block, whichcan be treated as an event or alarm.

The BIM, BOM, IOM, DCM and PSM share the same communicationaddresses for parameters and configuration. So they must share I/O mod-ule 1-13 (IOxx), which are the same function block. A user-configurablefunction selector per I/O module function block determines which type ofmodule it is.

All names for inputs and outputs are inputs on the function blocks andmust be set from the graphical tool CAP 531.

2.2 Binary input module The binary input module (BIM) has 16 inputs. These inputs appear as out-puts on the IOxx function block. The BIM supervises oscillating input sig-nals.

Figure 1: Function block for the binary input module (BIM).

ERROR

BI2BI3BI4BI5BI6

IOxx-

BI1

POSITION

BI7BI8BI9

BI10BI11BI12BI13

BI15BI16

BI14

BINAME01BINAME02BINAME03BINAME04BINAME05BINAME06BINAME07BINAME08BINAME09BINAME10BINAME11BINAME12BINAME13BINAME14BINAME15BINAME16

I/O-module

BLKOUT

I/O system configuration 1MRK 580 297-XENPage 5 – 17

Version 2.2-00

2.3 Binary output module The binary output module (BOM) has 24 outputs. The outputs are used inpairs when used as command outputs. Refer to the “Apparatus Control”document, which describes the application of using these outputs. Theseoutputs appear as inputs on the IOxx function block.

Figure 2: Function block for the binary output module (BOM).

ERROR

IOxx-

POSITION

BO1BO2BO3

BO5BO4

BO6BO7BO8BO9

BO11BO10

BO12BO13BO14BO15

BO17BO16

BO18BO19BO20BO21

BO23BO22

BO24

BONAME01BONAME02BONAME03

BONAME05BONAME04

BONAME06BONAME07BONAME08BONAME09

BONAME11BONAME10


BONAME16BONAME15


BONAME21BONAME20


I/O-module

BLKOUT


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 297-XENPage 5 – 18

2.4 Input/output module The input/output module (IOM) has 8 inputs and 12 outputs. The func-tionality of the oscillating input blocking, available on BIM and on thesupervised outputs on BOM, are not available on this module.

Figure 3: Function block for the input/output module (IOM).

2.5 mA input module The mA input module (MIM) has six inputs for mA signals. The POSI-TION input is located on the first MIM channel for each MIM module. Ifthe configuration is incorrect:

• the ERROR output is set on the first MIM channel (MI11, MI21-MI61) of that MIM.

• the InputErr is set on the outputs on all MIM channels of that MIM.

ERROR

BI2BI3BI4BI5BI6

IOxx-

BI1

POSITION

BI7BI8

BO1BO2BO3

BO5BO4

BO6BO7BO8BO9

BO11BO10

BO12

BINAME01BINAME02

BINAME04BINAME03

BINAME05BINAME06BINAME07BINAME08

BONAME02BONAME01


BONAME07BONAME06

BONAME08BONAME09BONAME10BONAME11BONAME12

I/O-module

BLKOUT


Version 2.2-00

For more information about the mA input module including the signal listand setting table, refer to the document “Direct Current Measuring Unit”.

Figure 4: Function blocks for the mA input module (MIM).

2.6 Power supply module The power supply module (PSM) has 4 inputs and 4 outputs, to be usedfor I/O operations just as BIM and BOM inputs and outputs.

Note: These I/O signals are only present in half and 3/4 width units.

Figure 5: Function block for the power supply module (PSM).

ERROR

RMINALHIALARM

HIWARNLOWWARN

LOWALARM

MIx1 (x = 1..6)

BLOCK

RMAXAL

POSITION

INPUTERR

MIM

RMINALHIALARM

HIWARNLOWWARN

LOWALARM

MIxy (y = 2 - 6)

BLOCK

RMAXAL

INPUTERR

MIM

channel no. 1 ofMIM no. x

channel no. 2-6 ofMIM no. x

ERROR

234

PSMx-

BLOCK

1

POSITION

INPUTERR

PSM

234

1


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 297-XENPage 5 – 20

2.7 Differential communication module

As already mentioned, the DCM-module only has the I/O-position inputto configure (to the I/O Position block). Anyhow, the module has a fixedslot position which depends of the size of the casing (slot S38 in the fullwidth case, S19 in the half of full width case and S29 in the 3/4 of fullwidth case).

Figure 6: Function block for the differential comm. module (DCM).

2.8 I/O position The IOP1 (I/O position) function block is the same for the different cas-ings, independent of the number of slots available. Anyway, it looks dif-ferent depending of actual configuration. All necessary configuration isdone in the CAP 531 configuration tool.

The Sxx outputs (xx = 11, 12..28, 30, 32, 34, 36) are connected to thePOSITION inputs of the I/O Modules and MIMs.

Figure 7: Function block of the I/O position block (IOP1-).

DCM--

POSITIONDCM

IOP1-

S11

S14S15S16S17S18

S13S12

S19S20S21

S23S22

I/OPosition

S24S25S26S27S28S30S32S34S36


Version 2.2-00

3 ConfigurationThe configuration can only be performed from CAP 531, the graphicalconfiguration tool.

To configure from the graphical tool:

• First, set the function selector for the logical I/O module to the type of I/O module that is used, BIM, BOM, IOM, DCM, MIM or PSM.

• Secondly, connect the POSITION input of the logical I/O module to a slot output of the IOP function block.

Figure 8: Example of an I/O-configuration in the graphical tool CAP 531 for a REx 5xx with two BIMs.

IOP1-

S11

S14S15S16S17S18

S13S12

S19S20S21

S23S22

I/OPosition

S24S25S26S27S28S30S32S34S36

IO01-

IO02-

I/O-module

I/O-module

POSITION ERRORBI1

BI6

.

.

.

POSITION ERRORBI1

BI6

.

.

.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 297-XENPage 5 – 22

4 SettingThe user shall set the input names for binary input and binary output mod-ules (BIM, BOM, IOM and PSM) from the CAP 531 configuration tool.

The binary input module (BIM) has a suppression function which blocksoscillating inputs on the module. It is possible to set the oscillation block-ing/release frequencies from both the SMS or from the local HMI.

The appendix contains the parameters and their setting ranges for BIM,BOM, IOM and PSM.

Refer to the document “Direct Current Measuring Unit” to set the mAinput module.


Version 2.2-00

5 TestingNot configured I/O modules are not supervised. When an I/O module isconfigured as a logical I/O module (BIM, BOM, IOM, DCM, MIM orPSM), the logical I/O modules are supervised. See “Self-supervision”.

Each logical I/O module has an error flag that is set if anything is wrongwith any signal or the whole module. The error flag is also set when thereis no physical I/O module of the correct type present in the connected slot.

The user can find status for inputs and outputs as well as self-supervisionstatus from the local HMI in menus:


..., Slotxx-BIMyy=, ...OK/FAILED

ServiceReportI/O

Slotxx-BIMyyFuncOutputs


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 297-XENPage 5 – 24

6 Appendix

6.1 Signal list

6.2 Setting table


IOxx- (xx=01-13)

BLKOUT IN Block outputs

IOxx- POSITION IN Position of I/O module

IOxx- BIy IN Binary input y (y=1-24). Valid for IOM and BOM modules

IOxx- BOy OUT Binary output y (y=1-24). Valid for IOM and BOM modules

IOxx- ERROR OUT I/O module status. Activated if the I/O module has failed

IOxx- BINAMEnn (nn=01-24)

See settings table

IOxx- BONAMEnn (nn=01-24)

See settings table


BINAMEnn (nn=01-24)

User def. string

String IOxx-BIn (n=1-24)

User defined name for binary input of function block IOxx (xx=01-13). String length up to 13 characters,all characters available on the HMI can be used

BONAMEnn (nn=01-24)

User def. string

String IOxx-BOn (n=1-24)

User defined name for binary output of function block IOxx (xx=01-13). String length up to 13 characters,all characters available on the HMI can be used

OscBlock 1-40 Hz 40 Oscillation blocking frequency for I/O module. Common for all channels of a BIM module

OscRel 1-40 Hz 30 Oscillation release frequency for I/O module. Common for all channels of a BIM module

Page 5 – 25Configurable logic

1 ApplicationDifferent protection, control, and monitoring functions within the REx5xx terminals are quite independent as far as their configuration in the ter-minal is concerned. The user cannot enter and change the basic algorithmsfor different functions, because they are located in the digital signal pro-cessors and extensively type tested. The user can configure different func-tions in the terminals to suit special requirements for differentapplications.

For this purpose, additional logic circuits are needed to configure the ter-minals to meet user needs and also to build in some special logic circuits,which use different logic gates and timers.

1MRK 580 298-XEN


Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 26

2 DesignThe number of blocks of configurable logic circuits available in basicREx 5xx:

6 ms cyclicity:

• 30 AND gates

• 60 OR gates

• 20 INV (INVerters)

• 10 timers (for On or Off delay)

• 10 pulses

200 ms cyclicity:

• 10 timers (for On or Off delay) with extended maximum time delay

• 10 pulses with extended maximum pulse length

• 5 SR (Set-Reset)

• 39 XOR (eXclusive OR)

2.1 Additional configurable logic

The number of blocks of configurable logic circuits available as addi-tional logic:

6 ms cyclicity:

• 40 pulses

200 ms cyclicity:

• 239 AND gates

• 159 OR gates

• 59 INV (INVerters)

• 6 MOVE (3 MOF and 3 MOL)

2.2 Inverter (INV) The INV function block is used for inverting boolean variables. The func-tion block (Figure 1:) has one input, designated IVnn-INPUT, where nnpresents the serial number of the block. Each INV circuit has one output,IVnn-OUT.

Figure 1: Function block diagram of the inverter (INV) function

INPUT1 OUT

IVnn

Configurable logic 1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 27

Version 2.2-00

The output signal from the INV function block is set to 1 if the input sig-nal is 0 and is set to 0 when the input signal is 1. See truth table below.

2.3 OR OR function blocks are used to form general combinatory expressionswith boolean variables. The function block (Figure 2:) has six inputs, des-ignated Onnn-INPUTm, where nnn presents the serial number of theblock, and m presents the serial number of the inputs in the block. EachOR circuit has two outputs, Onnn-OUT and Onnn-NOUT (inverted).

Figure 2: Function block diagram of the OR function

The output signal (OUT) is set to 1 if any of the inputs (INPUT1-6) is 1.See truth table below.

2.4 AND AND function blocks are used to form general combinatory expressionswith boolean variables. The function block (Figure 3:) has four inputs (oneof them inverted), designated Annn-INPUTm (Annn-INPUT4N is

Table 1: Truth table for theINV function block

INPUT OUT

1 0

0 1

Table 2: Truth table for the OR function block

INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 OUT NOUT

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0

1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

≥1INPUT1

INPUT2

INPUT3

INPUT4

INPUT5

INPUT6

Onnn

1

OUT

NOUT

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 28

inverted), where nnn presents the serial number of the block, and m pre-sents the serial number of the inputs in the block. Each AND circuit hastwo outputs, Annn-OUT and Annn-NOUT (inverted).

Figure 3: Function block diagram of the AND function

The output signal (OUT) is set to 1 if the inputs INPUT1-3 are 1 andINPUT4N is 0. See truth table below.

2.5 Timer The function block TM timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer (Figure 4:) has a settable time delay TMnn-Tbetween 0.00 and 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s. The input signal for each timedelay block has the designation TMnn-INPUT, where nn presents theserial number of the logic block. The output signals of each time delay

Table 3: Truth table for the AND function block

INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4N OUT NOUT

0 0 0 1 0 1

0 0 1 1 0 1

0 1 0 1 0 1

0 1 1 1 0 1

1 0 0 1 0 1

1 0 1 1 0 1

1 1 0 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 0 1

0 1 0 0 0 1

0 1 1 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 1 0 0 1

1 1 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 0 1 0

INPUT1

INPUT2

INPUT3

INPUT4N

Annn

1

OUT

NOUT

&


Version 2.2-00

block are TMnn-ON and TMnn-OFF. The first one belongs to the timerdelayed on pick-up and the second one to the timer delayed on drop-out.Both timers within one block always have the same setting.

Figure 4: Function block diagram of the Timer function

The function block TL timer (Figure 5:) with extended maximum time delayat pick-up and at drop-out, is identical with the TM timer. The difference isthe longer time delay TLnn-T, settable between 0.0 and 90000.0 s in stepsof 0.1 s.

Figure 5: Function block diagram of the TimerLong function

The input variable to INPUT is obtained delayed a settable time T at out-put OFF when the input variable changes from 1 to 0 in accordance withthe time pulse diagram, Figure 6:. The output OFF signal is set to 1 imme-diately when the input variable changes from 0 to 1.

Figure 6: Example of time diagram for a timer delayed on drop-out with preset time T = 3 s

t

t

Time delay 0.00-60.00 s

INPUT

T

OFF

ON

TMnn

t

t


INPUT

T

OFF

ON

TLnn

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

T = 3 s

1

0

1

0

INPUT

OFF

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 30

The input variable to INPUT is obtained delayed a settable time T at out-put ON when the input variable changes from 0 to 1 in accordance withthe time pulse diagram, Figure 7:. The output ON signal returns immedi-ately when the input variable changes from 1 to 0.

Figure 7: Example of time diagram for a timer delayed on pick-up with preset time T = 3 s

If more timers than available in the terminal are needed, it is possible touse pulse timers with AND or OR logics. Figure 8: shows an applicationexample of how to realise a timer delayed on pick-up. Figure 9: shows therealisation of a timer delayed on drop-out. Note that the resolution of thesetting time must be 0.2 s, if the connected logic has a cycle time of 200ms.

Figure 8: Realisation example of a timer delayed on pick-up

Figure 9: Realisation example of a timer delayed on drop-out

2.6 Pulse The pulse function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limit-ing of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP (Figure 10:) has a settablelength of a pulse between 0.00 s and 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s. The inputsignal for each pulse timer has the designation TPnn-INPUT, where nn

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

T = 3 s

1

0

1

0

INPUT

ON

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4N

AND

PulseINPUTT

OUT

FIXED-ON

OUTNOUT

0.00-60.00 s

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4

OR

PulseINPUT

T

OUT

FIXED-OFF

OUTNOUT

INPUT5INPUT6

INVINPUT OUT

0.00-60.00 s


Version 2.2-00

presents the serial number of the logic block. Each pulse timer has oneoutput, designated by TPnn-OUT. The pulse timer is not retriggable, thatis, it can be restarted first after that the time T has elapsed.

Figure 10: Function block diagram of the Pulse function

The function block TQ pulse timer (Figure 11:) with extended maximumpulse length, is identical with the TP pulse timer. The difference is the longerpulse length TQnn-T, settable between 0.0 and 90000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s.

Figure 11: Function block diagram of the PulseLong function, TQ

A memory is set when the input INPUT is set to 1. The output OUT thengoes to 1. When the time set T has elapsed, the memory is cleared and theoutput OUT goes to 0. If a new pulse is obtained at the input INPUTbefore the time set T has elapsed, it does not affect the timer. Only whenthe time set has elapsed and the output OUT is set to 0, the pulse functioncan be restarted by the input INPUT going from 0 to 1. See time pulse dia-gram, Figure 12:.

Figure 12: Example of time diagram for the pulse function with preset pulse length T = 3 s

2.7 Exclusive OR (XOR) The function block exclusive OR (XOR) is used to generate combinatoryexpressions with boolean variables. XOR (Figure 13:) has two inputs,designated XOnn-INPUTm, where nn presents the serial number of theblock, and m presents the serial number of the inputs in the block. Each


INPUT

T

OUT

TPnn


INPUT

T

OUT

TQnn

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

T = 3 s

1

0

1

0

INPUT

OUT

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 32

XOR circuit has two outputs, XOnn-OUT and XOnn-NOUT (inverted).The output signal (OUT) is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if theyare equal.

Figure 13: Function block diagram of the XOR function

The output signal (OUT) is set to 1 if the input signals are different and to0 if they are equal. See truth table below.

2.8 Set-Reset (SR) The function block Set-Reset (SR) (Figure 14:) has two inputs, designatedSRnn-SET and SRnn-RESET, where nn presents the serial number of theblock. Each SR circuit has two outputs, SRnn-OUT and SRnn-NOUT(inverted). The output (OUT) is set to 1 if the input (SET) is set to 1 and ifthe input (RESET) is 0. If the reset input is set to 1, the output is uncondi-tionally reset to 0.

Figure 14: Function block diagram of the Set-Reset function

2.9 MOVE The MOVE function blocks, also be called copy-blocks, are used for syn-chronisation of boolean signals sent between logics with slow executiontime and logics with fast execution time.

Table 4: Truth table for the XOR function block

INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT

0 0 0 1

0 1 1 0

1 0 1 0

1 1 0 1

=1INPUT1

INPUT2

XOnn

1

OUT

NOUT

SET

RESET1

OUT

NOUT

&≥1

SRnn


Version 2.2-00

There are two types of MOVE function blocks - MOF located First in theslow logic and MOL located Last in the slow logic. The MOF functionblocks are used for signals coming into the slow logic and the MOL func-tion blocks are used for signals going out from the slow logic.

The REx 5xx terminal contains 3 MOF function blocks of 16 signals each,and 3 MOL function blocks of 16 signals each. This means that a maxi-mum of 48 signals into and 48 signals out from the slow logic can be syn-chronised. The MOF and MOL function blocks are only a temporarystorage for the signals and do not change any value between input andoutput.

Each block of 16 signals is protected from being interrupted by other logicapplication tasks. This guarantees the consistency of the signals to eachother within each MOVE function block.

Synchronisation of signals with MOF should be used when a signal whichis produced outside the slow logic is used in several places in the logicand there might be a malfunction if the signal changes its value betweenthese places.

Synchronisation with MOL should be used if a signal produced in theslow logic is used in several places outside this logic, or if several signalsproduced in the slow logic are used together outside this logic, and there isa similar need for synchronisation.

Figure 15: shows an example of logic, which can result in malfunctions onthe output signal from the AND gate to the right in the figure.

Figure 15: Example of logic, which can result in malfunctions

&

&

Function 1 Function 2

Function 3

Fast logic Slow logic Fast logic

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 34

Figure 16: shows the same logic as in Figure 15:, but with the signals syn-chronised by the MOVE function blocks MOFn and MOLn. With thissolution the consistency of the signals can be guaranteed.

Figure 16: Example of logic with synchronised signals

MOFn and MOLn, n=1-3, have 16 inputs and 16 outputs. Each INPUTmis copied to the corresponding OUTPUTm, where m presents the serialnumber of the input and the output in the block. The MOFn are the firstblocks and the MOLn are the last blocks in the execution order in the slowlogic.

The appendix, attached to this document of the configurable logic, con-tains:

• Simplified terminal diagrams• Description of the connection and production signals• Description of the setting parameters

& &

Function 1 Function 2

Function 3

Fast logic Slow logic Fast logicMOFn

MOLn

MOVE

MOVE


Version 2.2-00

3 SettingThe time delays and pulse lengths are set from the CAP 531 configurationtool.

Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up and theone delayed on drop-out) always have a common setting value. Settingvalues of the pulse length are independent on one another for all pulse cir-cuits.

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 36

4 ReportsAll functional outputs in the logic blocks can be viewed on the local HMIat:

ServiceReportFunctions

AND (OR/etc.)


Version 2.2-00

5 ConfigurationThe configuration of the logics is performed from the CAP 531 configura-tion tool.

Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runs ina fixed sequence in two different cycle times, typical 6 ms and 200 ms.

For each cycle time, the function block is given an execution serial num-ber. This is shown when using the CAP 531 configuration tool with thedesignation of the function block and the cycle time, for example, TMnn-(1044, 6). TMnn is the designation of the function block, 1044 is the exe-cution serial number and 6 is the cycle time.

Execution of different function blocks within the same cycle time shouldfollow the same order as their execution serial numbers to get an optimalsolution. Always remember this when connecting in series two or morelogical function blocks. When connecting function blocks with differentcycle times, see the use of MOVE function blocks in the section “MOVE”on page 32.

Note: Be always careful when connecting function blocks with a fastcycle time to function blocks with a slow cycle time.

So design the logic circuits carefully and check always the executionsequence for different functions. In the opposite cases, additional timedelays must be introduced into the logic schemes to prevent errors, forexample, race between functions.

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 38

6 TestingThe user can separately test configuration logic circuits for each functiongroup or for each function block. First, for each block, configure all:

• Input signals within the function group to the corresponding binary inputs.

• Output signals within the function group to the corresponding binary outputs.

Then check the operation of each separate function group by applying therated DC voltage to the corresponding binary inputs and observing thelogic status of the corresponding binary outputs.

Function blocks included in the operation of different built-in functionsshould be tested at the same time as their corresponding functions.


Version 2.2-00

7 Appendix

7.1 Function blocks

Figure 17: Function block of the Inverter function

Figure 18: Function block of the OR function

Figure 19: Function block of the AND function

Figure 20: Function block of the Timer function

INPUT OUT

IVnn

INV

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4

OUTNOUT

INPUT5INPUT6

Onnn

OR

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4N

OUTNOUT

Annn

AND

INPUTT

OFFON

TMnn

Timer

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 40

Figure 21: Function block of the Timer function with extended maximum time delay

Figure 22: Function block of the Pulse function

Figure 23: Function block of the Pulse function with extended maximum pulse length

Figure 24: Function block of the Exclusive OR function

Figure 25: Function block of the Set-Reset function

INPUTT

OFFON

TLnnTimerLong

INPUTT

OUT

TPnn

Pulse

INPUTT

OUT

TQnn

PulseLong

INPUT1INPUT2

OUTNOUT

XOnn

XOR

SETRESET

OUTNOUT

SRnn

SR


Version 2.2-00

Figure 26: Function block of the MOVE First (MOF) function

Figure 27: Function block of the MOVE Last (MOL) function

OUTPUT2OUTPUT3OUTPUT4OUTPUT5OUTPUT6

OUTPUT1

OUTPUT7OUTPUT8OUTPUT9

OUTPUT10OUTPUT11OUTPUT12OUTPUT13

OUTPUT15OUTPUT16

OUTPUT14

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10INPUT11INPUT12INPUT13INPUT14INPUT15INPUT16

MOFnMOVE

OUTPUT2OUTPUT3OUTPUT4OUTPUT5OUTPUT6

OUTPUT1

OUTPUT7OUTPUT8OUTPUT9

OUTPUT10OUTPUT11OUTPUT12OUTPUT13

OUTPUT15OUTPUT16

OUTPUT14

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10INPUT11INPUT12INPUT13INPUT14INPUT15INPUT16

MOLnMOVE

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 42

7.2 Signal lists


IVxx- INPUT IN Logic INV-Input to INV gate number xx

IVxx- OUT OUT Logic INV-Output from INV gate number xx


Oxxx- INPUT1 IN Logic OR-Input 1 to OR gate number xxx






Oxxx- NOUT OUT Inverted output from OR gate number xxx

Oxxx- OUT OUT Output from OR gate number xxx


Axxx- INPUT1 IN Logic AND-Input 1 to AND gate number xxx



Axxx- INPUT4N IN Logic AND-Input 4 (inverted) to AND gate number xxx

Axxx- NOUT OUT Inverted output from AND gate number xxx

Axxx- OUT OUT Output from AND gate number xxx


TMxx- INPUT IN Logic Timer-Input to timer xx

TMxx- OFF OUT Output from timer number xx, Off delay

TMxx- ON OUT Output from timer number xx, On delay


TLxx- INPUT IN Logic Timer-Input to long timer xx

TLxx- OFF OUT Output from long timer number xx, Off delay

TLxx- ON OUT Output from long timer number xx, On delay


Version 2.2-00

7.3 Setting tables


TPxx- INPUT IN Logic pulse timer, Pulse-Input to pulse timer xx

TPxx- OUT OUT Output from pulse timer number xx


TQxx- INPUT IN Logic pulse timer, Pulse-Input to pulse long timer xx

TQxx- OUT OUT Output from pulse long timer number xx


XOxx- INPUT1 IN Logic XOR-Input 1 to XOR gate number xx

XOxx- INPUT2 IN Logic XOR-Input 2 to XOR gate number xx

XOxx- NOUT OUT Inverted output from XOR gate number xx

XOxx- OUT OUT Output from XOR gate number xx


SRxx- RESET IN RESET-Input to SET/RESET gate number xx

SRxx- SET IN SET-Input to SET/RESET gate number xx

SRxx- NOUT OUT Inverted output from SET/RESET gate number xx

SRxx- OUT OUT Output from SET/RESET gate number xx


MOFx- INPUTn IN Logic MOVE-Input n (n=1-16) to MOFx

MOFx- OUTPUTn OUT Output n (n=1-16) from MOFx


MOLx- INPUTn IN Logic MOVE-Input n (n=1-16) to MOLx

MOL1- OUTPUTn OUT Output n (n=1-16) from MOLn

Configurable logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 298-XENPage 5 – 44


T 0.000-60.000 s 0.000 Delay for timer xx


T 0.000-90000.000

s 0.000 Delay for long timer xx


T 0.000-60.000 s 0.010 Pulse length of pulse timer xx


T 0.000-90000.000

s 0.100 Pulse length of pulse long timer xx

Page 5 – 45Self-supervision

1 ApplicationThe REx 5xx protection and control terminals have a complex design withmany included functions. The included self-supervision function and theINTernal signals function block provide good supervision of the terminal.The different safety measures and fault signals makes it easier to analyseand locate a fault.

Both hardware and software supervision is included and it is also possibleto indicate eventual faults through a hardware contact and/or through thesoftware communication.

2 DesignThe self-supervision can indicate a failure in two ways. First, by means ofthe potential free alarm contact located on the power supply module. SeeFigure 3:. All different self-supervision functions (outputs) are connectedto this contact so any fault within the hardware modules will activate thecontact. The second way is through the software function block INT--, seeFigure 1: and 4. By this, any fault signal is available through the generalcommunication and at the local HMI. The signals from the function blockcan be used to block other protection functions if required/desired.The failure signals will be activated by the same faults in both the cases.It is also possible to exactly identify a faulty I/O through an error signalfrom each I/O module. An example is IOxx-Error, see Figure 2:.

Figure 1: Function block INTernal signals.

Figure 2: Error signal from an I/O module.

INT--

FAILWARNING

CPUFAILCPUWARN

ADCSETCHGD

IOxx-

ERROR

BI1BI2BI3BI4

POSITION

BINAME01BINAME02BINAME03BINAME04

I/O-module

1MRK 580 299-XEN


Self-supervision

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 299-XENPage 5 – 46

Figure 3: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact.

Power supply fault

&INTERNAL

TX overflowMaster resp.Supply faultReBoot I/O

Watchdog I/O nodes

Power supplymodule

Checksum faultSending reports

A/D conv.module

Supply faultParameter check

DSP fault Main CPU

NOFAIL

DSP = Digital Signal Processorxxxx = Inverted signal

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

I/O nodes = BIM, BOM, IOMPSM, MIM or DCM

Self-supervision 1MRK 580 299-XENPage 5 – 47

Version 2.2-00

Figure 4: Software self-supervision, function block INTernal signals.

1V

INT--ADC

1V

X

Checksum

INT--CPUFAIL

INT--CPUWARN

INT--WARNINGRTC-WARNING

X

Node reports

Watchdog

Check CRC

RAM check

Synch error

NO_RX_Data

NO_TX_Clock

Check RemError

1V

INT--CPUWARN

DSP Modules, 1-12

Parameter check

Watchdog

Flow control

&

&

&

INT--CPUFAIL

INT--ADC

I/O node FAIL

Start-up self-test

INT--FAIL

Send Rem Error

RTC-WARNING

A/D ConverterModule

Remote

communication

MainCPU

1V

1V

OK

OK

OK

OK OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

Fault

&

terminal

1V

RTC-WARNING = DIFL-COMFAIL orRTC1-COMFAIL +RTC2-COMFAIL

I/O node = BIM, BOM, IOM, PSM, MIM, DCM(described in the hardware design)

TIME-RTCERR

TIME-SYNCERR

Self-supervision

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 299-XENPage 5 – 48

Page 5 – 49Blocking of functions during test

1 ApplicationThe protection and control terminals have a complex configuration withmany included functions. To do the testing procedure at commissioningeasier, the terminals include the feature to individually block a single, sev-eral or all functions.

This means that a service engineer exactly can see when a function is acti-vated or trips. It also enables to activate a sequence of functions to checkcorrect functionality and to check parts of the configuration etc.

2 DesignThis blocking function is only active during operation in the test mode,see example in Figure 1:. When exiting the test mode, entering normalmode, this blocking is disabled and everything is set to normal operation.All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within theterminal. No settings etc. will be changed. Thus no mistakes are possible.

The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the testmode, if the blockings were not reset.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actualfunction, so no outputs will be activated.

Each of the terminal related functions is described in detail in the docu-mentation for the actual unit. The description of each function follows thesame structure (where applicable).

Figure 1: Example of blocking the Time delayed Under-Voltage func-tion.

TUV--BLKTRTUV--BLOCKTUV--VTSU

STUL1

STUL2

&

&

&STUL3

Operation = On

>1 & t

tt

15 msTUV--TRIP

TUV--START

TUV--STL1

TUV--STL2

TUV--STL3

t15 ms

t15 ms

t15 ms

t15 ms

TRIP - cont.

TEST-ACTIVETUV--TESTBLK

&

>1

Visf_244.vsd

1MRK 580 300-XEN


Blocking of functions during test

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 300-XENPage 5 – 50

Page 5 – 51Time synchronisation

1 ApplicationTime-tagging of internal events and disturbances is an excellent helpwhen evaluating faults. Without time synchronisation, only the eventswithin the terminal can be compared to one and another. With time syn-chronisation, events and disturbances within the entire station, and evenbetween line ends, can be compared during an evaluation.

If external time synchronisation is applied, there are two main alterna-tives. Either the synchronisation message is applied via any of the com-munication ports of the terminal as a telegram message including date andtime, or as a minute pulse, connected to a binary input. The minute pulseis used to fine tune already existing time in the terminals.

1MRK 580 302-XEN


Time synchronisation

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 302-XENPage 5 – 52

2 Theory of operationThe REx 5xx terminal has its own internal clock with date, hour, minute,second and millisecond. It has a resolution of 1 ms.

The clock has a built-in calendar for 30 years that handles leap years. Anychange between summer and winter time must be handled manually orthrough external time synchronisation. The clock is powered by a capaci-tor, to bridge interruptions in power supply without malfunction.

The internal clock is used for time-tagging disturbances, events in SMSand SCS, and internal events.

Time synchronisation 1MRK 580 302-XENPage 5 – 53

Version 2.2-00

3 SettingThe internal time can be set on the local human-machine interface (HMI)at:

SettingsTime

The time is set with year, date and time. See the document “Local human-machine interface”, for more information.

The source of the time synchronisation is set on the local HMI at:

ConfigurationTime

When the setting is performed on the local HMI, the parameter is calledTimeSyncSource. The time synchronisation source can also be set fromthe CAP 531 tool. The setting parameter is then called SYNCSCR. Thesetting alternatives are:

• None (no synchronisation)

• LON, SPA or IEC

• Minute pulse, positive or negative flank

LON is set when the time synchronisation is performed via SCS, SPA isset when the time synchronisation is performed via SMS, and IEC whenthe communication protocol IEC 870-5-103 is used including time syn-chronisation. Minute positive flank or Minute negative flank is set when abinary input is used for minute pulse synchronisation.

The function input to be used for minute-pulse synchronisation is calledTIME-MINSYNC.

The internal time can be set manually down to the minute level, either viathe local HMI or via any of the communication ports. The time synchroni-sation fine tunes the clock (seconds and milliseconds). If no clock syn-chronisation is active, the time can be set down to milliseconds.

Time synchronisation

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 302-XENPage 5 – 54

4 Appendix

4.1 Function block

4.2 Signal list

4.3 Setting table

MINSYNCSYNCSRC

Time

RTCERRSYNCERR

TIME


TIME- MINSYNC IN Input for ext synch of real time clock by minute pulses

TIME- RTCERR OUT Real-time clock error

TIME- SYNCERR OUT Time synchronisation error


SYNCSRC No, LO, SP, IEC, Po, Ne

No Source: 0=none, 1=LON, 2=SPA, 3=IEC, 4=BI pos flank, 5=BI neg flank

Page 6 – 1

Contents Page

Introduction to functions .........................................................................6–17Introduction................................................................................................... 6–17

Design .......................................................................................................... 6–18

Current, phase wise..................................................................................6–21

Pole discordance protection....................................................................6–21Application.................................................................................................... 6–21


Design .......................................................................................................... 6–22Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker................................ 6–23Unsymmetrical load detection ............................................................ 6–23

Setting .......................................................................................................... 6–24

Testing.......................................................................................................... 6–24General .............................................................................................. 6–24Testing method .................................................................................. 6–25

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 6–26Function block.................................................................................... 6–26Function block diagram...................................................................... 6–27Signal list............................................................................................ 6–27Setting table ....................................................................................... 6–27

Breaker-failure protection ........................................................................6–29Application.................................................................................................... 6–29

Theory of operation ...................................................................................... 6–31Input and output signals ..................................................................... 6–32Start functions .................................................................................... 6–32Measuring principles .......................................................................... 6–33Retrip functions .................................................................................. 6–34Back-up trip ........................................................................................ 6–35

Setting .......................................................................................................... 6–35Human-machine interface (HMI) ........................................................ 6–35

Testing.......................................................................................................... 6–36

Test of the breaker-failure protection ........................................................... 6–36Preparations....................................................................................... 6–36Check that the protection does not trip when set passive.................. 6–37Check that the protection can be started from all start inputs ............ 6–37Check that the retrip function works................................................... 6–37Check that the back-up trip function works ........................................ 6–38Terminate the test and restore the equipment to normal state .......... 6–38


Loss of voltage check ..............................................................................6–41Application.................................................................................................... 6–41

Functions

FunctionsPage 6 – 2


Design .......................................................................................................... 6–41

Setting instructions ....................................................................................... 6–43

Testing.......................................................................................................... 6–43

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 6–45Function block .................................................................................... 6–45Function block diagram...................................................................... 6–46Signal list............................................................................................ 6–47Setting table ....................................................................................... 6–47

Overload supervision ...............................................................................6–49Application.................................................................................................... 6–49


Design .......................................................................................................... 6–49

Setting instructions ....................................................................................... 6–50Setting of operating current IP> ......................................................... 6–50Setting of time delay t......................................................................... 6–51

Testing.......................................................................................................... 6–51

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 6–53Function block .................................................................................... 6–53Function block diagram...................................................................... 6–53Signal list............................................................................................ 6–54Setting table ....................................................................................... 6–54


Secondary system supervision ............................................................ 6–55

Current circuit supervision ......................................................................6–55Application.................................................................................................... 6–55


Setting .......................................................................................................... 6–58

Testing.......................................................................................................... 6–59


Fuse failure supervision (negative sequence) .......................................6–61Application.................................................................................................... 6–61


Design .......................................................................................................... 6–62

Setting instructions....................................................................................... 6–64Setting of negative sequence voltage 3U2> ...................................... 6–64Setting of negative sequence current 3I2< ........................................ 6–65

Testing.......................................................................................................... 6–65

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 6–68Function block.................................................................................... 6–68Function block diagram...................................................................... 6–69Signal lists .......................................................................................... 6–70Setting table ....................................................................................... 6–70

Fuse failure supervision (zero sequence) ..............................................6–71Application.................................................................................................... 6–71


Design .......................................................................................................... 6–72

Setting instructions....................................................................................... 6–74Setting of zero sequence voltage 3U0> ............................................. 6–75Setting of zero sequence current 3I0< ............................................... 6–75

Testing.......................................................................................................... 6–76

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 6–78Function block.................................................................................... 6–78Function block diagram...................................................................... 6–79Signal list............................................................................................ 6–80Setting table ....................................................................................... 6–80


Control, multiple bays ........................................................................... 6–81

Command control .....................................................................................6–81Application.................................................................................................... 6–81

Design .......................................................................................................... 6–81

Configuration ................................................................................................ 6–83

Commands ................................................................................................... 6–83

Setting .......................................................................................................... 6–84

Testing.......................................................................................................... 6–84

Appendix ...................................................................................................... 6–85Function block .................................................................................... 6–85Signal list............................................................................................ 6–85Setting table ....................................................................................... 6–85

Synchro- and energising check for single circuit breaker....................6–87Application.................................................................................................... 6–87

Synchrocheck..................................................................................... 6–87Energising check................................................................................ 6–89Voltage selection................................................................................ 6–90

Voltage selection for a single busbar ....................................... 6–91Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals................................ 6–92

Voltage selection for a double bus........................................... 6–94Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals................................ 6–94

Theory of operation ...................................................................................... 6–95Synchrocheck..................................................................................... 6–95Voltage selection................................................................................ 6–97

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–100Operation ......................................................................................... 6–100Input phase ...................................................................................... 6–100UMeasure......................................................................................... 6–100PhaseShift........................................................................................ 6–100URatio .............................................................................................. 6–100USelection........................................................................................ 6–100AutoEnerg and ManEnerg................................................................ 6–101ManDBDL......................................................................................... 6–101

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–102Test equipment ................................................................................ 6–102Synchro-check tests......................................................................... 6–102

Test of voltage difference....................................................... 6–102Test of phase difference ........................................................ 6–104Test of frequency difference .................................................. 6–105Test of reference voltage ....................................................... 6–106

Test of energising check .................................................................. 6–106Test of dead line live bus (DLLB)........................................... 6–106Dead bus live line (DBLL) ...................................................... 6–107Energising in both directions (DLLB or DBLL) ....................... 6–108Dead bus Dead line (DBDL) .................................................. 6–108

Test of voltage selection .................................................................. 6–108

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–111Function block .................................................................................. 6–111Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–111


Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–112

Synchro- and energising check for double circuit breakers ..............6–113Application.................................................................................................. 6–113

Synchrocheck................................................................................... 6–113Energising check.............................................................................. 6–115Voltage connection........................................................................... 6–116

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals...................................... 6–117

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–118Synchro-check ................................................................................. 6–118

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–121Operation ......................................................................................... 6–121Input phase ...................................................................................... 6–121UMeasure......................................................................................... 6–121PhaseShift........................................................................................ 6–121URatio .............................................................................................. 6–121AutoEnerg and ManEnerg................................................................ 6–122ManDBDL......................................................................................... 6–122

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–123Test equipment ................................................................................ 6–123Synchrocheck tests .......................................................................... 6–124



Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–130Function block.................................................................................. 6–130Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–130Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–130


Control, multiple bays ......................................................................... 6–131

Synchro- and energising check 1 1/2 CB arrangement ......................6–131Application.................................................................................................. 6–131

Synchrocheck................................................................................... 6–131Energising check.............................................................................. 6–131Voltage connection........................................................................... 6–132

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–133Synchrocheck................................................................................... 6–134Energising check.............................................................................. 6–134Voltage connection........................................................................... 6–134

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals...................................... 6–135Function block and logics................................................................. 6–136

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–141Operation ......................................................................................... 6–141Input phase ...................................................................................... 6–141UMeasure......................................................................................... 6–141PhaseShift........................................................................................ 6–141URatio .............................................................................................. 6–141AutoEnerg and ManEnerg................................................................ 6–142ManDBDL......................................................................................... 6–142

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–143Test equipment ................................................................................ 6–143Synchrocheck tests .......................................................................... 6–143


Test of energising check .................................................................. 6–147Dead-line-live-bus (DLLB)...................................................... 6–147Dead-bus-live-line (DBLL)...................................................... 6–148Energising in both directions (DLLB or DBLL) ....................... 6–149Dead-bus-dead-line (DBDL) .................................................. 6–149

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–150Function block .................................................................................. 6–150Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–151Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–152

Phasing, synchro- and energising check, single CB ..........................6–153Application.................................................................................................. 6–153

Phasing ............................................................................................ 6–153Synchrocheck................................................................................... 6–154Energising check.............................................................................. 6–156Voltage selection.............................................................................. 6–157

Voltage selection for a single busbar ..................................... 6–157Voltage selection for a double bus......................................... 6–159

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals.............................. 6–159

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–160In- and output signals....................................................................... 6–160

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–167Operation ......................................................................................... 6–167Input phase ...................................................................................... 6–167


PhaseShift........................................................................................ 6–167URatio .............................................................................................. 6–167USelection........................................................................................ 6–167AutoEnerg and ManEnerg................................................................ 6–167ManDBDL......................................................................................... 6–168OperationSynch ............................................................................... 6–168ShortPulse........................................................................................ 6–168

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–169Test equipment ................................................................................ 6–169Phasing tests.................................................................................... 6–170

Test of frequency difference .................................................. 6–171Synchrocheck tests .......................................................................... 6–171


Test of energising check .................................................................. 6–175Test of dead line live bus (DLLB)........................................... 6–175Dead bus live line (DBLL) ...................................................... 6–177Energising in both directions (DLLB or DBLL) ....................... 6–177Dead bus Dead line (DBDL) .................................................. 6–177Test of voltage selection ........................................................ 6–178


Phasing, synchro- and energising check, double CBs .......................6–183Application.................................................................................................. 6–183

Phasing ............................................................................................ 6–183Synchrocheck................................................................................... 6–184Energising check.............................................................................. 6–187Voltage connection........................................................................... 6–188

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals...................................... 6–189

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–190Input and output signals ................................................................... 6–190

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–195Operation ......................................................................................... 6–195Input phase ...................................................................................... 6–195PhaseShift........................................................................................ 6–195URatio .............................................................................................. 6–195AutoEnerg and ManEnerg................................................................ 6–195ManDBDL......................................................................................... 6–196OperationSynch ............................................................................... 6–196ShortPulse........................................................................................ 6–196

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–197Test equipment ................................................................................ 6–197Phasing tests.................................................................................... 6–198

Test of frequency difference .................................................. 6–199Synchrocheck tests .......................................................................... 6–199

Test of voltage difference....................................................... 6–199Test of phase difference ........................................................ 6–200


Test of frequency difference .................................................. 6–203Test of reference voltage ....................................................... 6–203



Autorecloser, single, two and/or three phase......................................6–209Application.................................................................................................. 6–209

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–211Input and output signals, single breaker arrangement ..................... 6–211Multi-breaker arrangement............................................................... 6–213AR Operation ................................................................................... 6–214

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–215Start and control of the auto-reclosing ............................................. 6–215Extended AR open time, shot 1 ....................................................... 6–215Long trip signal................................................................................. 6–215Reclosing programs ......................................................................... 6–215

1/2/3ph reclosing.................................................................... 6–216Evolving fault.................................................................................... 6–217AR01-P3P, Prepare three-phase trip ............................................... 6–217Blocking of a new reclosing cycle .................................................... 6–217Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer ............................................... 6–217Pulsing of CB closing command ...................................................... 6–218Transient fault .................................................................................. 6–218Unsuccessful signal ......................................................................... 6–218Permanent fault................................................................................ 6–218Automatic confirmation of programmed reclosing attempts ............. 6–219More about reclosing programs ....................................................... 6–219

Configuration and setting ........................................................................... 6–222Recommendations for input signals ................................................. 6–222Recommendations for output signals............................................... 6–223Recommendations for multi-breaker arrangement........................... 6–224

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–225Suggested testing procedure ........................................................... 6–226

Preparations........................................................................... 6–226Check the AR functionality..................................................... 6–226Check the reclosing requirements ......................................... 6–227Test of Master-Slave.............................................................. 6–227Termination of the test ........................................................... 6–228

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–229Function block .................................................................................. 6–229Function block diagrams .................................................................. 6–230Sequence examples......................................................................... 6–234Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–236Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–237


Autorecloser, three phase......................................................................6–239Application.................................................................................................. 6–239

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–241Input and output signals,single breaker arrangement ............................................................. 6–241Multi-breaker arrangement............................................................... 6–243AR Operation ................................................................................... 6–244

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–245Start and control of the auto-reclosing ............................................. 6–245Extended AR open time, shot 1 ....................................................... 6–245Long trip signal................................................................................. 6–245Reclosing program........................................................................... 6–245Blocking of a new reclosing cycle .................................................... 6–246Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer ............................................... 6–246Pulsing of CB closing command ...................................................... 6–246Transient fault .................................................................................. 6–247Unsuccessful signal ......................................................................... 6–247Permanent fault................................................................................ 6–247Automatic confirmation of programmed reclosing attempts ............. 6–247

Configuration and setting ........................................................................... 6–248Recommendations for input signals ................................................. 6–248Recommendations for output signals............................................... 6–249Recommendations for multi-breaker arrangement........................... 6–249

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–250Suggested testing procedure ........................................................... 6–251

Preparations........................................................................... 6–251Check the AR functionality..................................................... 6–251Check the reclosing requirements ......................................... 6–252Test of Master-Slave.............................................................. 6–252Termination of the test ........................................................... 6–253

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–254Function block.................................................................................. 6–254Function block diagrams .................................................................. 6–255Sequence examples......................................................................... 6–259Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–260Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–261

Single or two pole trip logic...................................................................6–263Application.................................................................................................. 6–263

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–263Three-phase front logic .................................................................... 6–263Phase segregated front logic ........................................................... 6–264Additional logic for 1ph/3ph operating mode.................................... 6–265Additional logic for 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode............................. 6–266Final tripping circuits ........................................................................ 6–267

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–2683ph operating mode ......................................................................... 6–2681ph/3ph operating mode .................................................................. 6–2681ph/2ph/3ph operating mode ........................................................... 6–269

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–270Function block.................................................................................. 6–270


Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–270Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–271

Binary signal transfer to remote end ....................................................6–273Application.................................................................................................. 6–273

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–274General ............................................................................................ 6–274Function block .................................................................................. 6–274Human-machine interface (HMI) ...................................................... 6–275Communication alternatives............................................................. 6–276

General .................................................................................. 6–276Fibre optical modem .............................................................. 6–277Short range fiber optical modem............................................ 6–277Short range galvanic modem................................................. 6–278Galvanic interfaces ................................................................ 6–279

Configuration .............................................................................................. 6–282

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–282Selection of communication parameters .......................................... 6–282Fibre optical...................................................................................... 6–283Short range fibre optical modem...................................................... 6–284

Indications.............................................................................. 6–285Jumper settings...................................................................... 6–285Operation on dedicated fibres................................................ 6–286Operation with transceivers of type 21-15XX or 21-16XX ..... 6–287

Short range galvanic modem ........................................................... 6–287Indications.............................................................................. 6–288

Optical/electric converter for short range optical modem ........................... 6–289Transceiver 21-15x for interface standard V.35/V.36....................... 6–289

Interfaces ............................................................................... 6–289Transmission rates................................................................. 6–290Timing .................................................................................... 6–290Indications.............................................................................. 6–290Dissembling/Assembling ............................................................................ 6–291Setting description ................................................................. 6–292Specification........................................................................... 6–293Recommendations on settings and connections ................... 6–293

Co-directional operation ................................................. 6–294Contra-directional operation........................................... 6–295

Transceiver 21-16x for interface standard X.21/G.703 .................... 6–295Interfaces ............................................................................... 6–295Transmission rates................................................................. 6–296Timing .................................................................................... 6–297Indications.............................................................................. 6–297Setting possibility for G.703 ................................................... 6–298Dissembling/Assembling ............................................................................ 6–298Configuring type of interface .................................................. 6–298Configuring transmission rate, timing and synchronisation.... 6–299Configuring X.21 .................................................................... 6–300Configuring G.703 co- and contra-directional ........................ 6–301Selection of protective earthing.............................................. 6–302


Specification........................................................................... 6–302Recommendations on settings and connections ................... 6–303

X.21 operation................................................................ 6–303G.703 co-directional operation ....................................... 6–304

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–305


Serial communication.............................................................................6–311Application.................................................................................................. 6–311

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–312SPA operation .................................................................................. 6–312LON operation.................................................................................. 6–312IEC 870-5-103 operation.................................................................. 6–312

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–313SPA design ...................................................................................... 6–313LON design ...................................................................................... 6–313IEC 870-5-103 design ...................................................................... 6–314

General .................................................................................. 6–314Hardware ............................................................................... 6–314Events .................................................................................... 6–314Measurands ........................................................................... 6–314Fault location.......................................................................... 6–315Commands............................................................................. 6–315File transfer ............................................................................ 6–315

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–316SPA setting ...................................................................................... 6–316LON setting ...................................................................................... 6–317IEC 870-5-103 setting ...................................................................... 6–318

Settings from the local HMI.................................................... 6–318Settings from the CAP 531 tool.............................................. 6–320

Event .............................................................................. 6–320Commands..................................................................... 6–320File transfer .................................................................... 6–321



Logic...................................................................................................... 6–325

Command function .................................................................................6–325Application.................................................................................................. 6–325

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–326General ............................................................................................ 6–326Binary signal interbay communication.............................................. 6–326

Configuration .............................................................................................. 6–327

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–327

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–327


Communication channel test logic .......................................................6–329Application.................................................................................................. 6–329

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–330Selection of an operating mode ....................................................... 6–330Operation at sending end................................................................. 6–330Operation at receiving end ............................................................... 6–331

Setting instructions ..................................................................................... 6–332tInh timer .......................................................................................... 6–332tCh timer........................................................................................... 6–332tCS timer .......................................................................................... 6–332tWait timer ........................................................................................ 6–332tChOK timer ..................................................................................... 6–332tStart timer........................................................................................ 6–332

Basic configuration possibilities.................................................................. 6–333

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–334

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–335Function block .................................................................................. 6–335Function block diagram.................................................................... 6–335Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–336Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–336


Monitoring............................................................................................. 6–337

Disturbance report - Introduction..........................................................6–337General overview ....................................................................................... 6–337

General disturbance information ...................................................... 6–338Indications........................................................................................ 6–338Event recorder.................................................................................. 6–338Fault locator ..................................................................................... 6–338Trip values........................................................................................ 6–338Disturbance recorder........................................................................ 6–339

Recording times ......................................................................................... 6–340

Analogue signals ........................................................................................ 6–341

Binary signals ............................................................................................. 6–341Trig signals....................................................................................... 6–342

Manual trig ............................................................................. 6–342Binary trig............................................................................... 6–342Analogue trig.......................................................................... 6–342

Disturbance report - Settings ................................................................6–343Introduction................................................................................................. 6–343

Settings during normal conditions .................................................... 6–344

Operation.................................................................................................... 6–344Sequence number............................................................................ 6–345Recording times ............................................................................... 6–345Binary signals................................................................................... 6–345Analogue signals.............................................................................. 6–346

Settings during test..................................................................................... 6–347Test mode ........................................................................................ 6–347Activation of manual triggering......................................................... 6–347


Disturbance report - Indications............................................................6–353Application.................................................................................................. 6–353

Theory of operation .................................................................................... 6–353

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–354

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–354

Disturbance report - Disturbance recorder ..........................................6–355Application.................................................................................................. 6–355

Recording capacity........................................................................... 6–355Memory capacity .............................................................................. 6–355Recording times ............................................................................... 6–355Triggers ............................................................................................ 6–355Time tagging .................................................................................... 6–356


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–358

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–360

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–360


Disturbance report - Event recorder .....................................................6–363Application.................................................................................................. 6–363


Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–363

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–364

Disturbance Report - Trip value recorder.............................................6–365Application.................................................................................................. 6–365

Design ........................................................................................................ 6–365

Displaying pre-fault and fault phasors of the currents and voltages........... 6–366Setting of the user-defined names for phasors ................................ 6–366

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–367

Monitoring of AC analogue measurements..........................................6–369Application.................................................................................................. 6–369

User-defined measuring ranges....................................................... 6–370Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity............................. 6–370Continuous supervision of the measured quantity ........................... 6–371

Amplitude dead-band supervision.......................................... 6–371Integrating dead-band supervision......................................... 6–372Periodic reporting................................................................... 6–372Periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision ......... 6–373Periodic reporting with serial dead-band supervision ............ 6–373Combination of periodic reportings ........................................ 6–374

Theory of operation and Design ................................................................. 6–375

Setting instructions ..................................................................................... 6–376

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–380


Monitoring of DC analogue measurements..........................................6–387Application.................................................................................................. 6–387

User-defined measuring ranges....................................................... 6–387Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity............................. 6–388Continuous supervision of the measured quantity ........................... 6–389

Amplitude dead-band supervision.......................................... 6–389Integrating dead-band supervision......................................... 6–390Periodic reporting................................................................... 6–391Periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision ......... 6–391Periodic reporting with serial dead-band supervision ............ 6–392Combination of periodic reportings ........................................ 6–393

Theory of operation and Design ................................................................. 6–394

Setting instructions ..................................................................................... 6–395

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–398

Appendix .................................................................................................... 6–399Function blocks ................................................................................ 6–399Signal list.......................................................................................... 6–400Setting table ..................................................................................... 6–401


Pulse counter ..........................................................................................6–407Application.................................................................................................. 6–407


Design ........................................................................................................ 6–408

Setting ........................................................................................................ 6–409

Testing........................................................................................................ 6–410



Page 6 – 17Introduction to functions

1 IntroductionThe protection and control terminals employ a multiprocessor design toensure the best possible operational security and dependability. Theincluded main protection and control functions are to a great extent inde-pendent of one another and each terminal can be ordered with individualoptions to satisfy the user’s needs in different applications in the best pos-sible way. To achieve this, different binary inputs of a terminal can beconfigured to different functions. Various functional output signals areprogrammable to one or several binary outputs, as well as to the differentinputs of other protection and control functions.

Each terminal has a few main functions as standard. These functionsdetermine the basic application for a terminal, for example the distanceprotection function or the phase segregated line differential protectionfunction. Additional functions, such as directional or non-directionalearth-fault overcurrent protection, auto-reclosing function etc. are avail-able as options.

The possible functional structure of each type of terminal within theREx 5xx family is described in the Buyer's Guides and also presented foreach delivered unit separately in the corresponding documentation.

Each of the terminal related functions is described in detail in the docu-mentation for the actual unit. The description of each function follows thesame structure (where applicable):

• The application part states the most important reasons for the imple-mentation of a particular protection function.

• The measuring principle gives a brief presentation of the measuring algorithm used for a particular function.

• The design part presents the general concept of a function, together with a list of the setting parameters and different signals.

• The setting instructions refer mostly to different application areas and give directions for setting of the particular parameters.

• The testing instructions describes primarily the necessary testing procedures and the requirements for the testing equipment. The expected results of some functions are also presented.

1MRK 580 313-XEN


Introduction to functions

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 313-XENPage 6 – 18

2 DesignThe description of the design is chiefly based on simplified logic dia-grams, which use IEC symbols, for the presentation of different functions,conditions etc. The functions are presented as a closed block with themost important internal logic circuits and configurable functional inputsand outputs.

Completely configurable binary inputs/outputs and functional inputs/out-puts enable the user to prepare the REx 5xx with his own configuration ofdifferent functions, according to application needs and standard practice.

Figure 1: Example of a simplified logic diagram for a function block.

The names of the configurable logic signals consist of two parts dividedby dashes. The first part consists of up to four letters and presents theabbreviated name for the corresponding function. The second part pre-sents the functionality of the particular signal. According to this explana-tion, the meaning of the signal TUV--BLKTR in Figure 1: is as follows:

• The first part of the signal, TUV- represents the adherence to the Time delayed Under-Voltage function.

• The second part of the signal name, BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLocK the TRip from the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).

Different binary signals have special symbols with the following signifi-cance:

• Signals drawn to the box frame to the left present functional input signals. It is possible to configure them to functional output signals of other functions as well as to binary input terminals of the REx 5xx terminal. Examples in Figure 1: are TUV--BLKTR, TUV--BLOCK

TUV--BLKTR

TUV--BLOCK

TUV--VTSU >1

STUL1

STUL2

&

&

&STUL3

Operation = On

>1 & t

tt

15 msTUV--TRIP

TUV--START

TUV--STL1

TUV--STL2

TUV--STL3

t15 ms

t15 ms

t15 ms

t15 ms

Visf_069.vsd

TRIP - cont.

Introduction to functions 1MRK 580 313-XENPage 6 – 19

Version 2.2-00

and TUV--VTSU.

• Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right side present the logical setting signals. Their values are high (1) only when the corre-sponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified within the frame. Example in Figure 1: is the signal Operation = On.These signals are not configurable. Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value.

• The internal signals are usually dedicated to a certain function. They are normally not available for configuration purposes. Examples in Figure 1: are signals STUL1, STUL2 and STUL3.

• The functional output signals, drawn to the box frame to the right, present the logical outputs of functions and are available for configu-ration purposes. The user can configure them to binary outputs from the terminal or to inputs of different functions. Typical examples in Figure 1: are signals TUV--TRIP, TUV--START etc.

• Other internal signals configurated to other function blocks are writ-ten on a line with an identity and a cont. reference. An example is the signal TRIP - cont. The signal can be found in the corresponding function with the same identity.

Introduction to functions

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 313-XENPage 6 – 20

Page 6 – 21Pole discordance protection

1 ApplicationCircuit breaker pole position discordance can occour at the operation of abreaker with independent operating gears for the three poles. The reasonmay be an interruption in the trip coil circuits, or a mechanical failureresulting in a stuck breaker pole. A disagreement caused by one ore twopoles failing to close or to open can be tolerated for just a limited time, forinstance where the circuit breaker is driven by the single phase auto-reclosing.

The pole discordance function (PD) detects a breaker pole position dis-crepancy not generated by a single pole reclosing and generates a threephase command trip to the circuit breaker itself.

2 Theory of operationThe operation of the pole discordance function is based on checking theposition of the circuit breaker through six of its auxiliary contacts: threeparallel connected normally open contacts are connected in series withthree parallel connected normally closed contacts. This hard-wired logicis very often integrated in the circuit breaker control cabinets and gives aclosed signal in case of pole discordance in the circuit breaker. This signalis connected to the PD---POLDISC input of the pole discordance func-tion. If the function is enabled, after a short delay, the activation of thisinput causes a trip command (PD---TRIP).

Figure 1: Typical connection diagram for pole discordance function

Ext

erna

l Blo

ckin

g

1-P

hase

Aut

o R

eclo

se R

unni

ng

visf_103.vsd

Ope

n C

omm

and

to C

.B.

Circuit Breaker Trip

IL1 IL2 IL3

Clo

se C

omm

and

to C

.B.

+ +++

Pole Discordance Signal from C.B.

+

C.B.

REx 5xx Terminal

PD---BLOCKPD---1POPENPD---POLDISCPD---BC

PD---TRIP

POLE DISCORDANCE

PD---TRIN

visf_101.vsd

1MRK 580 338-XEN


Pole discordance protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 338-XENPage 6 – 22

In addition the PD function performs a parallel detection of pole discor-dance based on current comparison in the breaker poles. This currentbased detection is enabled only for a few time after the breaker hasreceived a closing or opening command in order to avoid unwanted oper-ation in case of unsymmetrical load in service. If the circuit breaker hasreceived a command (open or close), the PD function is enabled, and thecurrent conditions are fulfilled, then a trip command is generated from thepole discordance function (PD---TRIP) after a short delay.

Figure 1 shows the typical application connection for the pole discordancefunction.

3 DesignThe simplified block diagram of the pole discordance function is shown infigure 2.

Figure 2: Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function

The pole discordance function is disabled if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockPD=Yes)

• The input signal PD---BLOCK is high

• The input signal PD---1POPEN is high

PD---BLOCK

PD---1POPEN

PD---POLDISC

PD---BC

PD---TRIP

visf_102.vsd

t

t 150 ms&

>1

PD---TRIN>1

&

INPS

Unsymmetrical Current Detection

Function Enable

t+200 ms

PD - POLE DISCORDANCE FUNCTION

>1

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockPD = Yes

Contact Based Logic

Unsymmetrical Load Detection Logic

Function Blocked form Test

Pole discordance protection 1MRK 580 338-XENPage 6 – 23

Version 2.2-00

The PD---BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the polediscordance function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminalin order to receive a block command from external devices or can be soft-ware connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order toreceive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it canbe connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

The PD---1POPEN signal blocks the pole discordance operation when asingle phase auto-reclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to theoutput signal AR01-1PT1 if the autoreclosing function is integrated in theterminal; if the auto-reclosing function is an external device, then PD---1POPEN has to be connected to a binary input of the terminal and thisbinary input is connected to a signallisation “1phase auto-reclosing inprogress” from the external auto-reclosing device.

If the pole discordance function is enabled, than two different criteria willgenerate a trip signal (PD---TRIP):

• Pole discordance signalling from the circuit breaker.

• Unsymmetrical load detection.

3.1 Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close(pole discordance status), then the function input PD---POLDISC is acti-vated from the pole discordance signal derived from the circuit breakerauxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected in parallel,and in series with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel)and, after a settable time interval t (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse command(PD---TRIP) is generated by the pole discordance function.

3.2 Unsymmetrical load detection

The unsymmetrical load detection is based on the checking that:

• any phase current is lower than 80% of the highest current in the remaining two phases

• the highest phase current is grater than 10% of the rated current

If these conditions are both true, than an unsymmetrical condition isdetected and the internal signal INPS is turned high. This detection isenabled to generate a trip after a set time delay t (0-60 s) if the detectionoccours in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a com-mand to operate and if the unbalance lasts for the whole time t. This per-mits to avoid unwanted operation at unsymmetrical load in service.

The pole discordance function is informed that a trip or close commandhas been given to the circuit breaker through the inputs PD---BC (for clos-ing command information) and PD---TRIN (for opening command infor-mation). These inputs can be connected to terminal binary inputs if theinformation are generated from the field (i.e. from auxiliary contacts of


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 338-XENPage 6 – 24

the close and open push buttons) or may be software connected to the out-puts of other integrated functions (i.e. close command from a controlfunction or a general trip from integrated protections).

OR gates will allow to connect the input signals PD---BC and PD---TRINto both terminal internal and external signals.

4 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the pole discordance function are found in the HMI-tree under:

SettingsFunctions

Group 1,2,3 and 4PoleDiscord

The parameters and their setting ranges are shown in the appendix.

Comments regarding settings:

Operation: Pole discordance protection On/Off. Activation or dis-activation of the function.

Time delay , t: Delay timer. The time delay is not critical because thepole discordance function operates mainly with loadconditions. If only the contact based function is used,the time delay should be chosen between 0.5 and 1 s.Ifalso the current detection function is used, it is recom-mended to set the time delay at 3-4 s, depending on theapplication, in order for the unbalance to stabilize. Thesetting range of the time delay is 0 - 60 s.

5 Testing

5.1 General The pole discordance function can be disabled during the test mode dur-ing these conditions:

• If the function should be blocked under the testing conditions, select the PD function under the menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

• The terminal is set to test mode by setting the Operation=On, which occurs under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation


Version 2.2-00

The terminal is automatically set to test mode by applying a logical 1 tothe TEST-INPUT functional input.

Note: the function is blocked if the corresponding setting under theBlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signal remainsactive.

The pole discordance function must not be blocked in order to be tested.

ABB Network Partner recommends, although it is not an absolute require-ment, the use of testing equipment of type RTS 21 (FREJA) for secondaryinjection tests.

The used test equipment should be capable of providing an independentthree-phase supply of currents to the tested terminal. Furthermore it mustbe possible to change the values of currents and phase angles between themeasuring quantities, independent of each other, for each phase sepa-rately. The test currents should have a common source, with a very smallcontent of higher harmonics.

5.2 Testing method The settings shown in the following tests can be used as a reference dur-ing testing. After the tests the equipment should be restored to the normalor desiderd settings.

The following steps are necessary for testing the pole discordance protec-tion function:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals of the function areconfigured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of thetested terminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. .

1.2 Set the operation of the PD protection to On mode from the HMIaccording to below:

PoleDiscordance Operation=Ont = 1.0 s

1.3 This test checks the non operation for unsymmetrical load notrelated to a command to the circuit breaker.

Apply a symmetrical three phase current of 200 mA to the currentinputs of the terminal. Turn off the current injection in phase L1(IL1=0, IL2=200mA, IL3=200 mA). Wait for a few seconds andverify that the trip signal PD---TRIP does not appear on the corre-sponding binary output or on the local HMI unit.

Repeat the same procedure for phases L2 and L3.

1.4 This test checks the trip for unsymmetrical load related to an openor close command to the circuit breaker.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 338-XENPage 6 – 26

Apply a symmetrical three phase current of 200 mA to the currentinputs of the terminal. Turn off the current injection in phase L1(IL1=0, IL2=200mA, IL3=200 mA).

Activate the binary input PD---BC (or the binary input PD---TRIN)and verify that after 1s the trip signal PD---TRIP appears on thecorresponding binary output or on the local HMI unit.

Repeat the same procedure for phases L2 and L3.

1.5 This test checks the trip by activation of the pole discordance signal-ling from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.

Do not apply any current to the terminal current inputs.Activate thebinary input PD---POLDISC and verify that after 1s the trip signalPD---TRIP appears on the corresponding binary output or on thelocal HMI unit.

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

PD---BLOCK

PD---1POPENPD---POLDISCPD---BC

PD---TRIP

POLE DISCORDANCE

PD---TRIN

visf_101.vsd


Version 2.2-00

6.2 Function block diagram

6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table

PD---BLOCK

PD---1POPEN

PD---POLDISC

PD---BC

PD---TRIP

visf_100.vsd

t

t 150 ms&

>1

PD---TRIN>1

&

INPS

t+200 ms

PD - POLE DISCORDANCE FUNCTION

>1

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockPD = Yes


PD--- BLOCK IN Block of pole discordance function

PD--- 1POPEN IN One phase open

PD--- POLDISC IN Pole discordance

PD--- BC IN Breaker closing

PD--- TRIN IN Activate from external trip

PD--- TRIP OUT Trip by pole discordance function


Operation Off, On Off Pole discordance protection On/Off

t 0.000-60.000 s 0.500 Delay timer


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 338-XENPage 6 – 28

Page 6 – 29Breaker-failure protection

1 ApplicationThis function issues a back-up to trip adjacent circuit breakers in case of atripping failure of the circuit breaker (CB), and clears the fault asrequested by the object protection.

The breaker-failure function is started by a protection trip command, fromthe line and busbar protection through the breaker-related trip relays. Thestart can be single-phase or three-phase. Correct fault current clearing orfailure is detected by a current check in each phase. The current level canbe set at 0,05 to 2 times the rated current.

Retrip of the faulty CB can be done with or without current check. Adelay, 0-60 s, can be set for the retrip.

The use of retrip, limits the impact on the power system if the breaker-failure protection function (BFP) is started by mistake during testing orother maintenance work.

A second time step is used for the back-up trip command. It should beconnected to trip the adjacent breakers, to clear the busbar section andintertrip the remote end, if so required. The time setting range is 0-60 s.

By using separate timers for each phase, correct operation at evolvingfaults is ensured.

The timer setting should be selected with a certain margin to allow varia-tion in the normal fault clearing time. The properties of the BFP functionallow the use of a small margin.

Figure 1: Start and trip functions

tp

STARTL1 BUTL1

RTL1

L1

TRRETL1

tp

STARTL2 BUTL2

RTL2TRRETL2

tp

STARTL3 BUTL3

RTL3TRRETL3

IL1

STL1

IL2

STL2

STL3

IL3

START

L2

L3

1V

TTRIP

TRBU

1V

1V

1V

&

&

&

BLOCK

1V

TRRET

1MRK 580 339-XEN


Breaker-failure protection

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 30

The application functions of the protection are:

• Individual phase-current detection

• Two time steps, one for retrip of the related circuit breaker and one for the back-up trip of the adjacent circuit breakers

• Selection of current controlled or unconditional retrip

• Phase separated timers gives correct operation at an evolving fault

• Accurate timers and current elements reset in 10 ms, allowing the use of short back-up trip time

Figure 2: Time sequence

40ms 20ms

<10ms 40ms

20ms

<10ms

30ms

Relaytime

Start BFPNormalCB opening

CB opening time Marginal

BFPtime CB opening time

Marginal

BFPtime

110ms

Retriporiginal CB

150ms

General tripadjacent CB

Breaker-failure protection 1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 31

Version 2.2-00

2 Theory of operationThe breaker-failure protection starts on a single-phase or three-phase con-dition, either from an external protection, or internally from a protectiontrip signal in the terminal.

The breaker receiving the original protection trip command can beretripped from the BFP. The retrip can be controlled by a current check, orcarried out as a direct retrip without any current check. The direct retripcan be used, because the breaker-to-trip has already received a trippingcommand, and the direct retrip does not cause any unselective tripping

The use of retrip, limits the extent of unwanted power disconnection incase of an accidental start of the BFP at work in the initiating circuits,with the primary circuit in service and the load above the set current level.

The back-up trip is sent to the adjacent circuit breakers in order to clearthe fault and disconnect the failing circuit breaker.

Figure 3: Logic diagram of breaker-failure protection, phase L1

t

t1

&

t

t

t1

t

t2

&

IL1

STL1

L1

ASDRMS

RET1

RET0

RET2

BUTL1

RTL1

RET0: No retripRET1: Retrip with current checkRET2: Unconditional retrip


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 32

2.1 Input and output signals

Figure 4: Input and output signals

The connectable inputs are connectable by configuration to the binaryinputs of the terminal or to other internal functions’ outputs. The outputsare connectable by configuration to the binary output relays. “Connecta-bles” and “outputs” can be connected to the free-logic functions of theunit, OR gates, and in that way add connection links

2.2 Start functions The breaker-failure protection can be started either internally or exter-nally. The start pulse is sealed-in as long as the current exceeds the presetcurrent level, to prevent a restart of the BFP timers in case of a chatteringstarting contact. The preset current level may be set to (0,05 - 2,0) . Irwhere Ir is 1 or 5 A.

1V

Trip Logic

TRIPL1TRIPL2TRIPL3TPTRIP

STL1STL2STL3START

TRRETL1TRRETL2TRRETL3

TRRET

Breaker-failureprotection

1V

1V

1V

External start

BLOCK

TRBU

Table 1:

Input signals: Start of breaker-failure protection:

BFP--STL1 Phase L1

BFP--STL2 Phase L2

BFP--STL3 Phase L3

BFP--START Three-phase start

BFP--BLOCK Block of BFP

Output signals: Trip:

BFP--TRBU Back-up trip

BFP--TRRETL1 Trip breaker-failure phase L1



BFP--TRRET Three-phase trip


Version 2.2-00

2.3 Measuring principles The current is filtered through a specially designed high-pass filter toobtain the required suppression of the dc components.

High-pass filtering is performed basically for two reasons i.e to removethe:

• dc component caused by saturated current transformers with a decaying current due to de-energizing of the secondary circuit. This is done to achieve a more correct representation of the real current in the line.

• dc component that is a part of the fault current. This is done to achieve a correct base for both ASD and RMS calculations.

The frequency limit of the filter is very close to the service frequency, toobtain a maximum suppression of the above dc components.

The intention of the adaptive signal detection (ASD) concept is to achieveindependence from the absolute filtering requirement, when dealing withextremely high fault currents in combination with low preset values. Thisis obtained by creating a new stabilizing signal to compare the currentwith.

The ASD works continuously, regardless of if the BFP was started. Itsresult is however considered only when the BFP has started and the pre-set time has elapsed.

As the current exceeds the previously stabilized sample, it adapts thevalue of the current and when it does not, it decays. This adaptive behav-iour makes it possible to rapidly and securely detect a breaker failure situ-ation after the pre-set time has elapsed.

Continuously and in parallel, the RMS value of the post-filtered signal iscalculated and compared with a preset current level. As the RMS valuedecreases below the preset current level, the breaker-failure function ismomentarily reset.

At normal operation of the circuit breaker, the stabilizing signal exceedsthe post-filtered signal for a consecutive period of maximum 10 ms beforeit is reset. Resetting occurs before the back-up trip timer t2 has timed out.

At a breaker failure situation, the post-filtered current exceeds the stabi-lizing signal, resulting in a trip of the breaker-failure function within 10ms after the trip timer t2 has elapsed.

The breaker-failure protection works with all three phases totally sepa-rated. But a possibility exists to start all three phases simultaneously. The back-up trip is always three-phase


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 34

Figure 5: Breaker-failure protection

Figure 6: Current detector, ASD and RMS measurement

2.4 Retrip functions The retrip function of the original circuit breaker is set at one of threeoptions:

Setting: The retrip...

Off function is not executed.

I> check occurs with a current check.

No I> check occurs without a current check.

The retrip timer t1 can be set from 0 to 60 s.

A trip pulse, tp, is generated with a length of 150 ms.

t

t1

&

t &

ASDRMS Back-up

trip

Currentdetector

Current

Start

High-passfiltering

Recti-fying

Creation ofstabilizingsignal

Decisionthroughcomparison

Decisionthroughcomparison

RMScalculation

Currentsamples ASD

RMS


Version 2.2-00

2.5 Back-up trip The back-up trip delay timer t2 can be set between 0 and 60 s.

A trip pulse, tp, is generated with a length of 150 ms.

Figure 7: Breaker-failure protection

3 Setting

3.1 Human-machine interface (HMI)

The configuration of alternatives or settings to the functions is made onthe built-in HMI:

SettingsFunctions

Group nBreaker Failure

The breaker-failure protection can be controlled from the human-machineinterface (HMI) by an “Operation” parameter, to be set between alterna-tives Off/On.

When “Operation” is set to Off, the function becomes inoperative.

The configuration of input and output signals to the function is made onthe built-in HMI:

ConfigurationFunction Inputs

Breaker Failure

tp

STARTL1 BUTL1

RTL1

L1

TRRETL1

tp

STARTL2 BUTL2

RTL2TRRETL2

tp

STARTL3 BUTL3

RTL3TRRETL3

IL1

STL1

IL2

STL2

STL3

IL3

L2

L3

1V

tp

TRBU

1V

1V

1V

&

&

&

BLOCK

1V

TRRET

START

IL1

IL2

IL3


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 36

The inputs and the outputs to and from the breaker-failure protection arepresented in the signal list.

Fixed valuesTrip pulse, tp 150 ms, fixed

4 Testing The function can be disabled during the testing mode under these condi-tions:

• When the function is selected to be blocked under the testing condi-tions, select the functions, which should be blocked under the sub-menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

• Set the Operation parameter to On (Operation = On) to set the termi-nal in to testing mode. Select the operating mode under this sub-menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal is switched to testing mode when the logical 1 is speci-fied for the TEST-INPUT functional input.

Note: The function is blocked if the corresponding setting under theBlockFunctions submenu remains On and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

5 Test of the breaker-failure protectionThe breaker-failure protection can be tested, for example at commissioningor after a changed configuration, in co-operation with some other func-tions, and in particular with the protection and trip functions.

The trip circuits to the breakers are opened at a test switch or at connec-tion terminals with links. A secondary injection relay test is used to oper-ate the protection function.

Suggested testing procedure:

5.1 Preparations 1.1 Check the settings and the alternatives of the breaker-failure protec-tion (BFP).

The operation can be set to Stand-by (Off)


Version 2.2-00

HMI submenu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nBreaker Failure

If the settings are changed to speed up times during the tests, theymust later be reset and verified.

5.2 Check that the protection does not trip when set passive

2.1 Set operation = Off.

2.2 Apply a stationary current over the set value.

2.3 Apply a start pulse to BFP--STL1.

2.4 Verify that neither retrip nor back-up trip is achieved.

5.3 Check that the protection can be started from all start inputs

3.1 Set RetripType = No I>check, I> = 100% Ir and t1 = 50 ms.

3.2 Apply a stationary three-phase current over the set value.


3.4 Verify that retrip in phase L1 is achieved.

3.5 Apply a stationary current over the set value.

3.6 Apply a start pulse to BFP--START

3.7 Verify that all three retrips are achieved.

5.4 Check that the retrip function works

4.1 No retrip function

4.1.1 Set RetripType = Retrip Off and I> = 100% Ir.

4.1.2 Apply a stationary three-phase current over the set value.

4.1.3 Apply a start pulse to BFP--STL1.

4.1.4 Verify that retrip in phase L1 is not achieved.

4.2 Retrip function with current check

4.2.1 Set RetripType = I> check, t1 = 100 ms and I> = 100% Ir.



4.2.4 Verify that retrip is achieved.

4.3 Retrip function without current check

4.3.1 Set RetripType = No I> check, t1 = 100 ms and I> = 100% Ir.



4.3.4 Verify that retrip is achieved.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 38

5.5 Check that the back-up trip function works

5.1 Set RetripType = Retrip Off, t2 = 200 ms and I> = 100% Ir.

5.2 Apply a stationary three-phase current over the set value.


5.4 Verify that back-up trip is achieved.

5.6 Terminate the test and restore the equipment to normal state

After the tests, restore the equipment to the normal or desired alternativesand settings!

Check especially that the:

• Setting parameters reset as required and that a verification test is made.

• Test switches or disconnected links of the connection terminals.

• Normal indications. (If preferred, the disturbance report can be cleared.)


Version 2.2-00

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

Figure 8: Simplified terminal diagram of the function

Figure 9: Terminal diagrams for the function

BFP

STL1STL2STL3START

TRRETL1TRRETL2TRRETL3

TRRETBLOCK TRBU

t

t1

&

t

t

t1

t

t2

&

IL1

BFP--STL1

ASDRMS

RET1

RET0

RET2

IL3BFP--STL3

IL2BFP--STL2

BFP--START

BFP FUNCTION

1V

1V

1V

&

&

&

BFP--BLOCK

BFP--

BFP--TRRETL1

BFP--TRRET

BFP--TRRETL2

BFP--TRRETL3

tp

tp

tp

1V

tp

1V

TRBU


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 339-XENPage 6 – 40

6.2 Signal list

6.3 Setting table


BFP-- BLOCK IN Block of breaker-failure function

BFP-- START IN Start of breaker-failure function

BFP-- STL1 IN Start of breaker-failure function phase L1



BFP-- TRBU OUT Backup trip by breaker-failure function

BFP-- TRRET OUT Retrip by breaker-failure function

BFP-- TRRETL1 OUT Retrip by breaker-failure function phase L1




Operation Off, On Off Breaker failure function On/Off

IPgr 5-200 % 100 Operating phase current, as a percentage of I1b

t2 0.000-60.000 s 0.200 Delay timer for backup trip

RetripType Retrip Off, I> Check, No I> Check

Retrip Off

Select type of retrip logic

t1 0.000-60.000 s 0.050 Delay timer for retrip

Page 6 – 41Loss of voltage check

1 ApplicationThe trip of the circuit breaker at a prolonged loss of voltage at all the threephases is normally used in automatic restoration systems to facilitate thesystem restoration after a major blackout. The loss of voltage check func-tion gives a trip signal only if the voltage in all the three phases is low formore then 7 seconds. If the trip to the circuit breaker is not required, thanthe function can be used for signallization through an output contact orthrough the event recording function.

2 Theory of operationThe voltage-measuring elements continuously measure the three-phase-to-phase voltages and three-phase-to-earth voltages, and compare themwith the set values. Fourier’s recursive filter filters the voltage signals, anda separate trip counter prevents overreaching of the measuring elements.

The logical values of the following signals become equal to 1, if therelated phase measured voltage decrease under the pre-set value:

• STUL1N for UL1N voltage



The 150 ms output trip pulse is emitted if all the three phase voltages arebelow the setting value for more than 7 s. The function can be blockedfrom the fuse failure supervision function intervention and when the maincircuit breaker is opened.

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the stub protection function is shown infigure 1.

The function is disabled (blocked) if:

• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockLOV=Yes)

• The input signal LOV--BLOCK is high

The LOV--BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the lossof voltage check function. It can be connected to a binary input of the ter-minal in order to receive a block command from external devices or canbe software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself inorder to receive a block command from internal functions. Through ORgate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function out-puts.

The function has a particular internal latched enable logic that:

• enables the function (signal latched enable in figure 1 is set to 1) when the line is restored; i.e. at least one of the three voltages is high for more then 3 seconds (signal set enable in figure 1).

1MRK 580 355-XEN


Loss of voltage check

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 355-XENPage 6 – 42

• disables the function (signal latched enable in figure 1 is set to 0) if the signal reset enable in figure 1 is set to 1 (reset of latced enable signal).

The latched enable signal is reset (i.e. the function is blocked) if:

• the main circuit breaker is opened. This is achieved by connecting a N.C. contact of the main circuit breaker to a terminal binary input connected to the function input LOV--BC

• the fuse failure supervision function has tripped. This is achieved by connecting the output signal of the fuse failure supervision, FUSE-VTSU, to the function input LOV--VTSU

• not all the three phase voltages are low for more then 10 s (only one or two phase voltages are low).

The output trip signal of the voltage check function is LOV--TRIP.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram of loss of voltage check protection function

LOV--BLOCK

LOV--TRIPFunction Enable

LOV - LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockLOV = Yes

>1

STUL1N

STUL2N

STUL3N

LOV--VTSU

t

7 s 150 ms

&

LOV--BC

&

>1 t

10 s

&

only 1 or 2 phases are low forat least 10 s (not three)

>1 &

>1 t

3 s

Reset Enable

Set Enable>1

Line restored forat least 3 s

-loop

LatchedEnable

visf_160.vsd

Loss of voltage check 1MRK 580 355-XENPage 6 – 43

Version 2.2-00

4 Setting instructionsThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the loss of voltage function are found in the HMI-tree under:

SettingsFunctions

Group 1,2,3 and 4LossOfVoltage

The parameter list and their setting ranges are shown in the appendix.

The low voltage primary setting should be lower than the minimum sys-tem operating voltage, Umin. Consider an additional 10% for safety mar-gin.

The primary set value will be:

(Equation 1)

The secondary setting value is:

(Equation 2)

where is the secondary rated voltage of the main VT and isthe primary rated voltage of the main VT.

The relay setting value UPE< is given in percentage of the secondary basevoltage value, , associated to the voltage transformer input U1. Thevalue for UPE< is given from this formula:

(Equation 3)

and this is the value that has to be set in the relay.

5 TestingThe function can be disabled during the test mode during these condi-tions:

• When the function should be blocked under the testing conditions, select the functions that should be blocked under the menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

• The terminal is set to test mode by setting the Operation=On, which occurs under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal is automatically set to test mode by applying the logical

UsPRIM

UsPRIM 0,9 Umin⋅=

UsSEC

UsSEC

USEC

UPRIM---------------- UsPRIM⋅=

USEC UPRIM

U1b

UPE<UsSEC

U1b----------------- 100⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 355-XENPage 6 – 44

1 to the TEST-INPUT functional input.

Important note: The function is blocked if the corresponding settingunder the BlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

The loss of voltage check protection function must not be blocked in orderto be tested.

Check the operating values of the voltage measuring elements and corre-sponding functions during the commissioning and during regular mainte-nance tests. ABB Network Partner recommends, although it is not anabsolute requirement, the use of the RTS 21 (FREJA) testing equipmentfor secondary injection-testing purposes.

Before testing, connect the testing equipment according to the valid termi-nal diagram of the specific REx 5xx terminal. Pay special attention to thecorrect connection of the input and output voltage terminals.

Follow these steps:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals in figure 1 are config-ured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the testedterminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. Set the opera-tion of the LOV protection to On mode.

1.2 Set the input logical signals LOV--BLOCK, LOV--BC, LOV--VTSU to the logical zero. Supply a three phase rated voltage in allthree phases and note on the local HMI that the LOV--TRIP logicalsignal is equal to the logical 0. Values of the logical signals belong-ing to the loss of voltage protection are available under menu tree:

Service ReportFunctions

LossOfVoltageFuncOutputs

1.3 Suddenly disconnect the voltage in all three phases and observe theLOV--TRIP pulse signal: after 7 seconds it should appear to theHMI. Its duration should be about 150 ms.

1.4 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values and decreasethem again to zero within an interval shorter than 3 seconds. NoLOV--TRIP signal should appear.

1.5 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values for at least 10seconds. Instantaneously disconnect one phase and after an intervallonger than 10 seconds, also disconnect the remaining two phases.No LOV--TRIP signal should appear.


Version 2.2-00

1.6 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values for at least tenseconds. Apply the rated dc voltage to the binary input connected tothe function input LOV--BC. Simultaneously disconnect all thethree phase voltages from the terminal. No LOV--TRIP signalshould appear. Disconnect the dc voltage from the LOV--BC input.

1.8 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values for at least tenseconds. Apply the rated dc voltage to the binary input connected tothe function input LOV--VTSU. Simultaneously disconnect all thethree phase voltages from the terminal. No LOV--TRIP signalshould appear. Disconnect the dc voltage from the LOV--VTSUinput.

1.9 Increase the measured voltages to their rated values for at least tenseconds. Apply the rated dc voltage to the binary input connected tothe function input LOV--BLOCK. Simultaneously disconnect allthe three phase voltages from the terminal. No LOV--TRIP signalshould appear. Disconnect the dc voltage from the LOV--BLOCKinput

2.0 Configure (if necessary) the terminal to its normal operating con-figuration.

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

LOV--BLOCK

LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK

visf_161.vsd

LOV--VTSU

LOV--TRIP

LOV--BC


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 355-XENPage 6 – 46


LOV--BLOCK

LOV--TRIP

LOV - LOSS OF VOLTAGE CHECK FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockLOV = Yes

>1

STUL1N

STUL2N

STUL3N

LOV--VTSU

t

7 s 150 ms

&

LOV--BC

&

>1 t

10 s

&

>1 &

>1 t

3 s

Reset Enable

Set Enable>1

-loop

visf_162.vsd


Version 2.2-00

6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table


LOV-- BLOCK IN Block of loss of voltage function

LOV-- VTSU IN Block from voltage circuit supervision

LOV-- BC IN Breaker closing command

LOV-- TRIP OUT Trip by loss of voltage function


Operation Off, On Off Loss of voltage function On/Off

UPE< 10-100 % 70 Operating phase voltage, as a percentage of U1b


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 355-XENPage 6 – 48

Page 6 – 49Overload supervision

1 ApplicationThe overload supervision function sends an alarm signal when the currentexceeds the set level for longer than a pre-set time. The operating level ofthe current measuring element can be set to the maximum, accepted, con-tinuous current. So operators are alerted if the primary system operates ina dangerous overload mode. A typical application is the signalling of theoverload of the current transformers connected to the terminal, as theyusually can withstand a small current beyond their rated current.

2 Theory of operationThe current-measuring elements continuously measure the three-phasecurrents, and compare them with the set values. Fourier’s recursive filterfilters the current signals, and a separate trip counter prevents overreach-ing of the measuring elements.

The logical values of the following signals become equal to 1, if the mea-sured current in any phase exceeds the pre-set value:

• STIL1• STIL2• STIL3

If any of the three phase currents exceeds the set value IP> for a periodlonger than the set time t, than the three phase trip signal OVLD-TRIP isemitted.

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the time delayed phase overcurrent func-tion is shown in figure 1.


• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockOVLD=Yes)

• The input signal OVLD-BLOCK is high

The OVLD-BLOCK signal is a blocking signal of the overload supervi-sion function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in orderto receive a block command from external devices or can be software con-nected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive ablock command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be con-nected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

The output trip signal OVLD-TRIP is a three phase trip. It can be used tocommand a trip to the circuit breaker or for a signallization.

1MRK 580 356-XEN


Overload supervision

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 356-XENPage 6 – 50

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram of overload supervision function

4 Setting instructionsThe setting of the operating values for the overload supervision function-occurs under the menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n = 1...4)OverLoad

The current level set should be above the maximum permissible load cur-rent. Consider the accuracy class of the used instrument current trans-formers and the specified accuracy of the current measuring elements inthe REx 5xx terminals.

The corresponding time delay must comply with the selectivity planningof the protection in the whole network, and with the permissible overload-ing of the conductors, if the function is used for tripping the circuitbreaker. The above settings might change to a lower current value andhigher time delay if the function serves only for alarming and not for trip-ping purposes.

4.1 Setting of operating current IP>

The relay setting value IP> is given in percentage of the secondary basecurrent value, , associated to the current transformer input I1.

OVLD-BLOCK

visf_170.vsd

OVLD - OVERLOAD SUPERVISION FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockOVLD = Yes

>1

STIL1

STIL2

STIL3

OVLD-TRIP>1 t

t

Function Enable

&

I1b

Overload supervision 1MRK 580 356-XENPage 6 – 51

Version 2.2-00

If is the secondary current setting operating value of the function,then the relay setting value IP> is given from this formula:

(Equation 1)


Set this value under the setting menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nOverLoad

on the value IP>.

4.2 Setting of time delay t Set the time delay of the function, t, under the setting menu:

SettingsFunctions

Group nOverLoad

on the value t.

5 TestingThe function can be disabled during the test mode during these condi-tions:

• When the function should be blocked under the testing conditions, select the functions that should be blocked under the menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

• The terminal is set to test mode by setting the Operation=On, which appears under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal is automatically set to test mode by applying the logical 1 to the TEST-INPUT functional input.

Important note: The function is blocked if the corresponding settingunder the BlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

IsSEC

IP>IsSEC

I1b-------------- 100⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 356-XENPage 6 – 52

The overload supervision function must not be blocked in order to betested.

Check the operating values of the current measuring elements and corre-sponding functions during the commissioning and during regular mainte-nance tests. ABB Network Partner recommends, although it is not anabsolute requirement, the use of the RTS 21 (FREJA) testing equipmentfor secondary injection-testing purposes.

Before testing, connect the testing equipment according to the valid termi-nal diagram of the specific REx 5xx terminal. Pay special attention to thecorrect connection of the input and output current terminals.

Follow these steps:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals in figure 1 are config-ured to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the testedterminal. If not, configure them for testing purposes. Set the opera-tion of the OVLD protection to On mode.

1.2 Set the input logical signals to the logical zero and note on the localHMI that the OVLD-TRIP logical signal is equal to the logical 0.Values of the logical signals belonging to the time delayed overcur-rent protection are available under menu tree:


OverLoadFuncOutputs

1.3 Set the time delay t to 0.0 ms.

1.4 Slowly increase the injected current (measured current) in all threephases simultaneously until the OVLD-TRIP signal appears on thecorresponding binary output or on the local HMI. Record the oper-ating value. Compare the measured operating current with the setvalue. The result should be within the 5% accuracy limits with theaddition of the accuracy class of the testing equipment.

1.5 Set the time delay t to 500 ms.

1.6 Quickly set the measured current (fault current) in all three phasesto about 1.5 times the measured operating current, and disconnectthe current with the switch.

1.7 Switch on the fault current and measure the operating time of theOVLD protection. Use the OVLD-TRIP signal from the configuredbinary output to stop the timer. Compare the measured time withthe set value t.

Overload supervision 1MRK 580 356-XENPage 6 – 53

Version 2.2-00

1.8 Connect the rated dc voltage to the OVLD-BLOCK configured binaryinput, and switch on the fault current. No OVLD-TRIP signal shouldappear. Switch off the fault current. Disconnect the dc voltage from theOVLD-BLOCK binary input.

1.9 Set the operation of the protection at Off mode and switch on thefault current. Note that no corresponding binary signals shouldappear on the terminal. Switch off the fault current.

2.0 Configure (if necessary) the terminal to its normal operating con-figuration.

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block


OVLD-BLOCK

OVERLOAD SUPERVISION

visf_171.vsd

OVLD-TRIP

OVLD-BLOCK

visf_172.vsd

OVLD - OVERLOAD SUPERVISION FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockOVLD = Yes

>1

STIL1

STIL2

STIL3

OVLD-TRIP

>1t

t&


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 356-XENPage 6 – 54

6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table


OVLD- BLOCK IN Block of overload function

OVLD- TRIP OUT Trip by overload function


Operation Off, On Off Overload function On/Off

IP> 20-300 % 100 Operating phase current, as a percentage of I1b

t 0.000-9000.000

s 20.000 Time delay

Page 6 – 55Current circuit supervision

1 ApplicationThe correct operation of a protection depends on correct informationabout the primary value of currents and voltages. When currents from twoindependent 3-phase sets of CT’s, or CT cores, measuring the same pri-mary currents are available, a reliable current circuit supervision can bearranged by comparing the currents from the two sets. If an error in theCT circuits is detected, the protection functions concerned are to beblocked and an alarm given.

In case of large currents, unequal transient saturation of CT cores with dif-ferent remanence or different saturation factor may result in differences inthe secondary currents from the two CT sets. Unwanted blocking of pro-tection functions during the transient period must be avoided.

The supervision function must be sensitive and have short operate time toprevent unwanted tripping from fast-acting, sensitive numerical protec-tions in case of errors in the current circuits.

Note that the same current input transformer (I5) in REx 5xx is used forthe reference current Iref of the CT supervision, the residual current fromthe parallel line for the fault locator and, dependent on setting I4 or I5,maybe for the earth-fault protection function. Hence, when the CT super-vision function is used, the settings Xm0 = 0 and Rm0 = 0 must be usedfor the fault locator.

1MRK 580 357-XEN


Current circuit supervision

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 357-XENPage 6 – 56

2 Theory of operationThe supervision function compares the numerical value of the sum of thethree phase currents ΣIphase (current inputs I1, I2 and I3) and thenumerical value of the residual current ΣIref (current input I5) fromanother current transformer set, see figure 1.

The CTSU-FAIL output will be set to a logical one when following crite-rias are fulfilled:

• the numerical value of the difference ΣIphase – ΣIref is higher then 80% of the numerical value of the sum ΣIphase + ΣIref

• the numerical value of the current ΣIphase – ΣIref is equal to or higher than the set operate value IMinOp (5 - 100% of I1b)

• no phase current has exceeded 1.5 times rated relay current I1b dur-ing the last 10 ms

• the current circuit supervision is released by setting Operation = On.

The CTSU-FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the And-gateresets when being activated for more than 20 ms. If the CTSU-FAIL lastsfor more than 150 ms an CTSU-ALARM will be issued. In this case theCTSU-FAIL and CTSU-ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the and-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking functionwhen phase current supervision element(s) operate, e.g. during a fault.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram for the current circuit supervision

OPERATION

Σ

IL1

IL3

IL2

1,5 x Ir

>1&

Σ+–

Σ+

+Iref

Σ+–x 0,8

>1

100 ms20 ms

1 s150 ms

10 ms CTSU-FAIL

CTSU-ALARM

I>CTSU-BLOCK

Current circuit supervision 1MRK 580 357-XENPage 6 – 57

Version 2.2-00

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 2.

Figure 2: Operate characteristics

Note that due to the formulas for the axis compared, ΣIphase - ΣIrefand ΣIphase + ΣIref respectively, the slope can not be above 1.

IminOp

Slope = 0,8

CTCFSignal

ΣIphase – ΣIref

ΣIphase + ΣIref

Slope = 1


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 357-XENPage 6 – 58

3 SettingThe function is activated by setting Operation = On.

The minimum operate current (IMinOp) should as a minimum be set twicethe residual current in the supervised CT circuits under normal serviceconditions and rated primary current. The setting range is 5 – 100% of I1b

The CTSU-FAIL and CTSU-ALARM outputs are connected to the block-ing input of the actual protection function and output alarm relay respec-tively via the internal logic programming of the REx 5xx relay.

Current circuit supervision 1MRK 580 357-XENPage 6 – 59

Version 2.2-00

4 TestingThe current circuit supervision function is conveniently tested with thesame 3-phase test set as used when testing the measuring functions in theREx 5xx.

1.Check the input circuits and the operate value of the IMinOp current leveldetector by injecting current, one phase at a time.

2.Check the phase current blocking for all three phases by injecting cur-rent, one phase at a time. The output blocking signal shall reset with adelay of 1 s when the current exceeds 1.5 x I1b.

3.Inject a current 0.90 x I1b to phase L1 and a current 0.15 x I1b to thereference current input. Decrease slowly the current to the reference cur-rent input and check that blocking is obtained when the current is about0.10 x I1b.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 357-XENPage 6 – 60

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

5.3 Setting table

CT SUPERVISION

CTSU-FAIL

CTSU-ALARM

CTSU-BLOCK


CTSU- ALARM OUT Alarm for current circuit failure

CTSU- BLOCK IN Block of current circuit supervision function

CTSU- FAIL OUT Detection of current circuit failure


Operation Off, On Off Activation of CT-Supervision

IMinOp 5-100 % 20 Minimum operate phase current, as a percentage of I1b

Page 6 – 61Fuse failure supervision (negative sequence)

1 ApplicationDifferent protection functions within the REx 5xx protection, control andmonitoring terminals operate on the basis of the measured voltage in therelay point. Examples are: distance protection function, undervoltagemeasuring function, and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.

These functions can operate unnecessarily if a fault occurs in the second-ary circuits between the voltage instrument transformers and the terminal.

It is possible to use different measures to prevent such unwanted opera-tions. Miniature circuit breakers in the voltage measuring circuits, locatedas close as possible to the voltage instrument transformers, are one ofthem. Separate fuse-failure measuring relays or elements within the pro-tection and monitoring devices are another possibility. These solutions arecombined to get the best possible effect in the fuse failure supervisionfunction (FUSE) of REx 5xx terminals.

The fuse-failure supervision function as built into the REx 5xx terminalshas these possibilities; it can operate:

• On the basis of external binary signals from the miniature circuit breaker or from the line disconnector. The first case influences the operation of all voltage-dependent functions while the second one does not affect the impedance measuring functions.

• On the basis of the negative-sequence measuring quantities: a high value of voltage 3.U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3.I2.

Because of the negative sequence detection algorithm, this function is rec-ommended for terminals used in isolated or high-impedance earthed net-works.

2 Theory of operationThe current and voltage measuring elements within one of the built-indigital signal processors continuously measure the currents and voltagesin all three phases and calculate:

• The negative-sequence current 3.I2

• The negative-sequence voltage 3.U2

comparing them with their respective set values 3I2< and 3U2> .

Fourier’s recursive filter filters the current and voltage signals, and a sep-arate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the measuring elements.The signal STNEG is set to 1, if the negative sequence measured voltageexceeds its set value 3U2> and if the negative sequence measured currentdoes not exceed its pre-set value 3I2<.

Signals STUL1N, STUL2N and STUL3N are related to phase to earthvoltages and become 1 when the respective phase voltage is lower thenthe set value. The set value (U<) is chosen in the dead line detection func-tion, that is always present in the terminal when the fuse failure supervi-sion is present.

1MRK 580 358-XEN


Fuse failure supervision (negative sequence)

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 358-XENPage 6 – 62

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the fuse failure supervision function isshown in figure 1.


• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

• The input signal FUSE-BLOCK is high

FUSE-BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse fail-ure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the ter-minal in order to receive a block command from external devices or canbe software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself inorder to receive a block command from internal functions. Through ORgate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function out-puts.

Function input signal FUSE-MCB is supposed to be connected via a ter-minal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit-breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit.

Function input signal FUSE-DISC is supposed to be connected via a ter-minal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector.

The function output FUSE-VTSU can be used for blocking the voltagerelated measuring functions (undervoltage protection, synchrocheck etc.)except for the impedance protection.

Function output FUSE-VTSZ can be used for blocking the impedanceprotection function.

The FUSE-MCB signal sets the output signals FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB isopen. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence ofFUSE-MCB signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage depen-dent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of theminiature circuit breaker.

The FUSE-DISC signal sets the output signal FUSE-VTSU in order toblock the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open.The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of theline disconnector.

The function input signal FUSE-DLCND is related to the dead line condi-tion detection. It has to be connected to the output signal of the dead linecondition function DLD-STPH (dead phase condition detected). This sig-nal is activated from the dead line condition function when the voltageand the current in at least one phase are below their respective setting val-ues. It prevents the blocking of the impedance protection by a fuse failuredetection during dead line condition (that occurs also during single pole


1MRK 580 358-XENPage 6 – 63

Version 2.2-00

auto-reclosing). The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead line condi-tion after the line-energization in order to prevent the blocking of theimpedance protection for unequal pole closing.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function

If a fuse failure condition is detected for more then five seconds and atleast one of the phases has a low phase to earth voltage, then the fuse fail-ure condition is latched: signal FUSE-VTSU is turned high, if there is nodead line condition also FUSE-VTSZ is high; if all the three phases haveno voltage (STUL1N = STUL2N = STUL3N = 1) then the output signalFUSE-VTF3PH is turned high.

FUSE-BLOCK

FUSE-VTSU

visf_190.vsd

FUSE - FUSE FAILURE SUPERVISION FUNCTION

TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockFUSE= Yes

STNEG

&

FUSE-VTSZ

FUSE-VTF3PH

FUSE-MCB

FUSE-DISC

&

&

t

150 ms

>1

>1FUSE-DLCNDt

200 ms&

>1 t

5 s

-loop

&

STUL3N

STUL2N

STUL1N

>1

&&

>1

>1

-loop

STORE3PH

20 ms

>1

1:FunctionEnable

Dead-LineBlock

1:FuseFailure

Detection

1:Fuse failure formore than 5 s

0: All voltagesare high (ResetLatch)

1:All voltagesare low

Store in non volatilememory(FUSE-STORE3PH)From non volatile

memory

(Set Latch)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 358-XENPage 6 – 64

The output signal FUSE-VTF3PH is high if the fuse failure condition isdetected for 5 seconds and all the three measured voltages are low.

Fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditionsare restored (STUL1N = STUL2N = STUL3N = 0).

Fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory of the terminal.In the new start-up procedure the terminal checks the VTF3PH(STORE3PH) value in its non volatile memory and establishes the corre-sponding starting conditions.

4 Setting instructionsThe operating value for the voltage check function (signals STUL1N,STUL2N, STUL3N) is the same as the operating value of the dead linedetection function. The setting of the voltage minimum operating valueU< occurs under the submenu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n DeadLineDet

Some values of the negative-sequence voltages and currents always existdue to different non-symmetries in the primary system and differences inthe current and voltage instrument transformers. The minimum value forthe operation of the current and voltage measuring elements must alwaysbe set with a safety margin of 10 to 15%, depending on the system operat-ing conditions.

Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities whenthe function is used on longer untransposed lines, on multicircuit lines,and so on.


4.1 Setting of negative sequence voltage 3U2>

The relay setting value 3U2> is given in percentage of the secondary basevoltage value, , associated to the voltage transformer input U1. If

is the secondary setting value of the relay, then the value for 3U2>is given from this formula:

(Equation 1)



SettingsFunctions

Group nFuseFailure

on the value 3U2>.

U1b

UsSEC

3U2>UsSEC

U1b----------------- 100⋅=


1MRK 580 358-XENPage 6 – 65

Version 2.2-00

4.2 Setting of negative sequence current 3I2<

The relay setting value 3I2< is given in percentage of the secondary basecurrent value, , associated to the current transformer input I1. If is the secondary setting value of the relay, then the value for 3I2< is givenfrom this formula:

(Equation 2)



SettingsFunctions

Group nFuseFailure

on the value 3I2<.

5 TestingIt is possible to disable the function during the test mode under the follow-ing conditions:

• When the function should be blocked under the testing conditions. The selection of functions, which should be blocked is possible under the menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

• The terminal has been set into the test mode by setting the Opera-tion=On. This selection takes place under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal has been set automatically into test mode by applying the logical 1 to the TEST-INPUT functional input

Important note: The function will be blocked if the corresponding set-ting under the BlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPUTsignal remains active.

The fuse failure supervision function must not be blocked in order to betested.

Check the operation of the FUSE function during the commissioning andduring regular maintenance tests. ABB Network Partner recommends,although it is not an absolute requirement, the use of the RTS 21 (FREJA)testing equipment for secondary injection testing purposes.

I1b IsSEC

3I2<IsSEC

I1b-------------- 100⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 358-XENPage 6 – 66

The test equipment used should be able to provide an independent three-phase supply of voltages and currents to the tested terminal. It must bepossible to separately change the values of voltages, currents, and phaseangles among them independent of each other, for each phase. The testvoltages and currents should have a common source, with very small con-tent of higher harmonics. If the test equipment cannot indicate the phaseangles between the measured quantities, a separate phase angle meter isneeded.

The corresponding binary signals that inform the operator about the oper-ation of the FUSE function are available on the local human-machineinterface (HMI) unit under the menu:


FuseFailureFuncOutputs

The appendix reports the corresponding signals that display informationon the operation of the FUSE function.

These steps are necessary for testing the FUSE function:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals as shown in figure 1 onpage 63 are configured to the corresponding binary inputs and out-puts of the tested terminal. If not, configure them for testing pur-poses. Set the operation of FUSE protection to On mode under thesubmenu:

Settings Functions

Group nFuseFailure

NegativeSeq

1.2 Connect the three-phase testing equipment to the tested terminal,and simulate normal operating conditions with the three-phase cur-rents in phase with their corresponding phase voltages and with allof them equal to their rated values.

1.3 Connect the nominal dc voltage to the FUSE-DISC binary input,and check that the signal FUSE-VTSU appears with almost no timedelay. No signals FUSE-VTSZ and FUSE-VTF3PH should appearon the terminal. Only the distance protection function operates. Noother voltage-dependent functions must operate. Disconnect the dcvoltage from the FUSE-DISC binary input terminal.

1.4 Connect the nominal dc voltage to the FUSE-MCB binary inputand check that the FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ signals appearwithout any time delay. No voltage-dependent functions mustoperate. Disconnect the dc voltage from the FUSE-MCB binaryinput terminal.


1MRK 580 358-XENPage 6 – 67

Version 2.2-00

1.5 Disconnect one of the phase voltages and observe the logical outputsignals on the terminal binary outputs. FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ signals should simultaneously appear.

1.6 After more than 5 seconds disconnect the remaining two phasevoltages and all three currents. There should be no change in thehigh statuses of the output signals FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ.The signal FUSE-VTF3PH will instead appear.

1.7 Simultaneously establish normal voltage and current operating con-ditions and observe the corresponding output signals. They shouldchange to the logical 0 as follows:

•Signal FUSE-VTF3PH after about 25 ms

•Signal FUSE-VTSU after about 50 ms

•Signal FUSE-VTSZ after about 200 ms

1.8 Slowly decrease the measured voltage in one phase until the FUSE-VTSU signal appears. Record the measured voltage and calculatethe corresponding negative-sequence voltage according to theequation (observe that the voltages in the equation are phasors):

(Equation 3)

where:

, and are the measured phase voltages

and

(Equation 4)

Compare the result with the set value (consider that the set value3U2> is in percentage of the base voltage U1b) of the negative-sequence operating voltage. The result should be within the +5%limits of accuracy with the addition of declared accuracy for testingequipment.

1.9 Disconnect the testing equipment. Don’t forget to configure the ter-minal, if necessary, to its normal operating configuration.

3 U2⋅ UL1 a2 UL2 a+⋅ UL3⋅+=

UL1 UL2 UL3

a 1 ej2 π⋅

3-----------

⋅ 0 5 j3

2-------+,–= =


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 358-XENPage 6 – 68

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

FUSE-BLOCK

FUSE-VTF3PH

FUSE FAILURE SUPERVISION

visf_191.vsd

FUSE-VTSUFUSE-VTSZ

FUSE-DISC

FUSE-MCB

FUSE-DLCND


1MRK 580 358-XENPage 6 – 69

Version 2.2-00


FUSE-BLOCK

FUSE-VTSU

visf_192.vsd


TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockFUSE= Yes

STNEG

&

FUSE-VTSZ

FUSE-VTF3PH

FUSE-MCB

FUSE-DISC

&

&

t150 ms

>1

>1FUSE-DLCNDt

200 ms&

>1 t5 s

-loop

&

STUL3N

STUL2N

STUL1N

>1

&&

>1

>1

-loop

STORE3PH

20 ms

>1


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 358-XENPage 6 – 70

6.3 Signal lists

6.4 Setting table


FUSE- DLCND IN Dead line condition

FUSE- MCB IN Operation of MCB

FUSE- DISC IN Line disconnector position

FUSE- BLOCK IN Block of fuse failure function

FUSE- VTF3PH OUT Detection of 3-phase fuse failure

FUSE- VTSU OUT Block for voltage measuring functions

FUSE- VTSZ OUT Block for impedance measuring functions


Nega-tiveSeq

Off, On Off Fuse failure negative sequence function On/Off

3U2> 10-50 % 10 Operating negative sequence voltage, as a percentage of U1b

3I2< 10-50 % 10 Operating negative sequence current, as a percentage of I1b

Page 6 – 71Fuse failure supervision (zero sequence)

1 ApplicationDifferent protection functions within the REx 5xx protection, control andmonitoring terminals operate on the basis of the measured voltage in therelay point. Examples are: distance protection function, undervoltagemeasuring function, and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.

These functions can operate unnecessarily if a fault occurs in the second-ary circuits between the voltage instrument transformers and the terminal.

It is possible to use different measures to prevent such unwanted opera-tions. Miniature circuit breakers in the voltage measuring circuits, locatedas close as possible to the voltage instrument transformers, are one ofthem. Separate fuse-failure measuring relays or elements within the pro-tection and monitoring devices are another possibility. These solutions arecombined to get the best possible effect in the fuse failure supervisionfunction (FUSE) of REx 5xx terminals.

The fuse-failure supervision function as built into the REx 5xx terminalshas these possibilities; it can operate:

• On the basis of external binary signals from the miniature circuit breaker or from the line disconnector. The first case influences the operation of all voltage-dependent functions while the second one does not affect the impedance measuring functions.

• On the basis of the zero-sequence measuring quantities: a high value of voltage 3.U0 without the presence of the residual current 3.I0 .

2 Theory of operationThe current and voltage measuring elements within one of the built-indigital signal processors continuously measure the currents and voltagesin all three phases and calculate:

• The zero-sequence current 3.I0

• The zero-sequence voltage 3.U0

comparing them with their respective set values 3I0< and 3U0> .

Fourier’s recursive filter filters the current and voltage signals, and a sep-arate trip counter prevents high overreaching of the measuring elements.The signal STZERO is set to 1, if the zero sequence measured voltageexceeds its set value 3U0> and if the zero sequence measured current doesnot exceed its pre-set value 3I0<.

Signals STUL1N, STUL2N and STUL3N are related to phase to earthvoltages and become 1 when the respective phase voltage is lower thenthe set value. The set value (U<) is chosen in the dead line detection func-tion, that is always present in the terminal when the fuse failure supervi-sion is present.

1MRK 580 359-XEN


Fuse failure supervision (zero sequence)

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 72

3 DesignThe simplified logic diagram of the fuse failure supervision function isshown in figure 1.


• The terminal is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

• The input signal FUSE-BLOCK is high

The FUSE-BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fusefailure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of theterminal in order to receive a block command from external devices orcan be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itselfin order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through ORgate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function out-puts.

The function input signal FUSE-MCB is supposed to be connected via aterminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit-breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit.

The function input signal FUSE-DISC is supposed to be connected via aterminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnec-tor.

The function output FUSE-VTSU can be used for blocking the voltagerelated measuring functions (undervoltage protection, synchrocheck etc.)except for the impedance protection.

The function output FUSE-VTSZ can be used for blocking the impedanceprotection function.

The FUSE-MCB signal sets the output signals FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB isopen. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence ofFUSE-MCB signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage depen-dent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of theminiature circuit breaker.

The FUSE-DISC signal sets the output signal FUSE-VTSU in order toblock the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open.The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of theline disconnector.

The function input signal FUSE-DLCND is related to the dead line condi-tion detection. It has to be connected to the output signal of the dead linecondition function DLD-STPH (dead phase condition detected). This sig-nal is activated from the dead line condition function when the voltageand the current in at least one phase are below their respective setting val-ues. It prevents the blocking of the impedance protection by a fuse failuredetection during dead line condition (that occurs also during single pole


1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 73

Version 2.2-00

auto-reclosing). The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead line condi-tion after the line-energization in order to prevent the blocking of theimpedance protection for unequal pole closing.

If the fuse failure condition is detected for more then five seconds and atleast one of the phases has a low phase to earth voltage, then the fuse fail-ure condition is latched: signal FUSE-VTSU is turned high, if there is nodead line condition also FUSE-VTSZ is high; if all the three phases haveno voltage (STUL1N = STUL2N = STUL3N = 1) then the output signalFUSE-VTF3PH is turned high.

The output signal FUSE-VTF3PH is high if the fuse failure condition isdetected for 5 seconds and all the three measured voltages are low.

The fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage condi-tions are restored (STUL1N = STUL2N = STUL3N = 0).

The fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory of the ter-minal. In the new start-up procedure the terminal checks the VTF3PH(STORE3PH) value in its non volatile memory and establishes the corre-sponding starting conditions.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 74

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function

4 Setting instructionsThe operating value for the voltage check function (signals STUL1N,STUL2N, STUL3N) is the same as the operating value of the dead linedetection function. The setting of the voltage minimum operating valueU< occurs under the submenu:

SettingsFunctions

Group n DeadLineDet

FUSE-BLOCK

FUSE-VTSU

visf_195.vsd


TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockFUSE= Yes

STZERO

&

FUSE-VTSZ

FUSE-VTF3PH

FUSE-MCB

FUSE-DISC

&

&

t150 ms

>1

>1FUSE-DLCNDt

200 ms&

>1 t5 s

-loop

&

STUL3N

STUL2N

STUL1N

>1

&& >1

>1

-loop

STORE3PH

20 ms

>1

1:FunctionEnable

Dead-LineBlock

1:FuseFailure

Detection

1:Fuse failure formore than 5 s

0: All voltagesare high (ResetLatch)

1:All voltagesare low

Store in non volatilememory(FUSE-STORE3PH)From non volatile

memory

(Set Latch)


1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 75

Version 2.2-00

Some values of the zero-sequence voltages and currents always exist dueto different non-symmetries in the primary system and differences in thecurrent and voltage instrument transformers. The minimum value for theoperation of the current and voltage measuring elements must always beset with a safety margin of 10 to 15%, depending on the system operatingconditions.

Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities whenthe function is used on longer untransposed lines, on multicircuit lines,and so on.


4.1 Setting of zero sequence voltage 3U0>

The relay setting value 3U0> is given in percentage of the secondary basevoltage value, , associated to the voltage transformer input U1. If

is the secondary setting value of the relay, then the value for 3U0>is given from this formula:

(Equation 1)



SettingsFunctions

Group nFuseFailure

on the value 3U0>.

4.2 Setting of zero sequence current 3I0<

The relay setting value 3I0< is given in percentage of the secondary basecurrent value, , associated to the current transformer input I1. If is the secondary setting value of the relay, then the value for 3I0< is givenfrom this formula:

(Equation 2)



SettingsFunctions

Group nFuseFailure

on the value 3I0<.

U1b

UsSEC

3U0>UsSEC

U1b----------------- 100⋅=

I1b IsSEC

3I0<IsSEC

I1b-------------- 100⋅=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 76

5 TestingIt is possible to disable the function during the test mode under the follow-ing conditions:

• When the function should be blocked under the testing conditions. The selection of functions, which should be blocked is possible under the menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions

• The terminal has been set into the test mode by setting the Opera-tion=On. This selection takes place under the menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal has been set automatically into test mode by applying the logical 1 to the TEST-INPUT functional input

Important note: The function will be blocked if the corresponding set-ting under the BlockFunctions menu remains on and the TEST-INPUTsignal remains active.

The fuse failure supervision function must not be blocked in order to betested.

Check the operation of the FUSE function during the commissioning andduring regular maintenance tests. ABB Network Partner recommends,although it is not an absolute requirement, the use of the RTS 21 (FREJA)testing equipment for secondary injection testing purposes.

The test equipment used should be able to provide an independent three-phase supply of voltages and currents to the tested terminal. It must bepossible to separately change the values of voltages, currents, and phaseangles among them independent of each other, for each phase. The testvoltages and currents should have a common source, with very small con-tent of higher harmonics. If the test equipment cannot indicate the phaseangles between the measured quantities, a separate phase angle meter isneeded.

The corresponding binary signals that inform the operator about the oper-ation of the FUSE function are available on the local human-machineinterface (HMI) unit under the menu:


FuseFailureFuncOutputs


1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 77

Version 2.2-00

The appendix reports the corresponding signals that display informationon the operation of the FUSE function.

These steps are necessary for testing the FUSE function:

1.1 Check if the input and output logical signals as shown in figure 1 onpage 74 are configured to the corresponding binary inputs and out-puts of the tested terminal. If not, configure them for testing pur-poses. Set the operation of FUSE protection to On mode under thesubmenu:

Settings Functions

Group nFuseFailure

ZeroSeq

1.2 Connect the three-phase testing equipment to the tested terminal,and simulate normal operating conditions with the three-phase cur-rents in phase with their corresponding phase voltages and with allof them equal to their rated values.

1.3 Connect the nominal dc voltage to the FUSE-DISC binary input,and check that the signal FUSE-VTSU appears with almost no timedelay. No signals FUSE-VTSZ and FUSE-VTF3PH should appearon the terminal. Only the distance protection function operates. Noother voltage-dependent functions must operate. Disconnect the dcvoltage from the FUSE-DISC binary input terminal.

1.4 Connect the nominal dc voltage to the FUSE-MCB binary inputand check that the FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ signals appearwithout any time delay. No voltage-dependent functions mustoperate. Disconnect the dc voltage from the FUSE-MCB binaryinput terminal.

1.5 Disconnect one of the phase voltages and observe the logical outputsignals on the terminal binary outputs. FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ signals should simultaneously appear.

1.6 After more than 5 seconds disconnect the remaining two phasevoltages and all three currents. There should be no change in thehigh statuses of the output signals FUSE-VTSU and FUSE-VTSZ.The signal FUSE-VTF3PH will instead appear.

1.7 Simultaneously establish normal voltage and current operating con-ditions and observe the corresponding output signals. They shouldchange to the logical 0 as follows:

•Signal FUSE-VTF3PH after about 25 ms

•Signal FUSE-VTSU after about 50 ms

•Signal FUSE-VTSZ after about 200 ms


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 78

1.8 Slowly decrease the measured voltage in one phase until the FUSE-VTSU signal appears. Record the measured voltage and calculatethe corresponding zero-sequence voltage according to the equation(observe that the voltages in the equation are phasors):

(Equation 3)

where:

, and are the measured phase voltages

Compare the result with the set value (consider that the set value3U0> is in percentage of the base voltage U1b) of the zero-sequence operating voltage. The result should be within the +5%limits of accuracy with the addition of declared accuracy for testingequipment.

1.9 Disconnect the testing equipment. Don’t forget to configure the ter-minal, if necessary, to its normal operating configuration.

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

3 U0⋅ UL1 UL2 UL3+ +=

UL1 UL2 UL3

FUSE-BLOCK

FUSE-VTF3PH

FUSE FAILURE SUPERVISION

visf_191.vsd

FUSE-VTSUFUSE-VTSZ

FUSE-DISC

FUSE-MCB

FUSE-DLCND


1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 79

Version 2.2-00


FUSE-BLOCK

FUSE-VTSU

visf_196.vsd


TEST-ACTIVE

&

TEST

BlockFUSE= Yes

STZERO

&

FUSE-VTSZ

FUSE-VTF3PH

FUSE-MCB

FUSE-DISC

&

&

t150 ms

>1

>1FUSE-DLCNDt

200 ms&

>1 t5 s

-loop

&

STUL3N

STUL2N

STUL1N

>1

&&

>1

>1

-loop

STORE3PH

20 ms

>1


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 359-XENPage 6 – 80

6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table


FUSE- DLCND IN Dead line condition

FUSE- MCB IN Operation of MCB

FUSE- DISC IN Line disconnector position

FUSE- BLOCK IN Block of fuse failure function

FUSE- VTF3PH OUT Detection of 3-phase fuse failure

FUSE- VTSU OUT Block for voltage measuring functions

FUSE- VTSZ OUT Block for impedance measuring functions


ZeroSeq Off, On Off Fuse failure zero sequence function On/Off

3U0> 10-50 % 10 Operating zero sequence voltage, as a percentage of U1b

3I0< 10-50 % 10 Operating zero sequence current, as a percentage of I1b

Page 6 – 81Command control

1 ApplicationThe REx 5xx terminals may be provided with output functions that can becontrolled either from a Substation Control System or from the local HMI.The output functions can be used, for example, to control high-voltageapparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI canbe used. Together with the configuration logic circuits, the user can gov-ern pulses or steady output signals for control purposes within the termi-nal or via binary outputs.

2 DesignThe command control function consists of one single command functionblock, CD01 for 16 binary output signals.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting isdone on the MODE input, common for the whole block, from theCAP 531 configuration tool.

0=Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the stationlevel, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.

1=Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the val-ues sent from the station level.

2=Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sentfrom the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the config-ured logic connected to the command function block may not have a cycletime longer than the execution cycle time for the command functionblock.

The outputs can be individually controlled from the operator station,remote-control gateway, or from the local HMI. Each output signal can begiven a name with a maximum of 13 characters from the CAP 531 config-uration tool.

The output signals, here CD01-OUT1 to CD01-OUT16, are then availablefor configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic cir-cuits to the binary outputs of the terminal.

The command function can be connected according to the applicationexamples in Fig. 1 to Fig. 3. Note that the execution cyclicity of the con-figured logic connected to the command function block cannot have acycle time longer than the command function block.

Fig. 1 shows an example of how the user can, in an easy way, connect thecommand function via the configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage apparatus. This type of command control is normally performed

1MRK 580 382-XEN


Command control

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 382-XENPage 6 – 82

by a pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal. Fig. 1 shows a closeoperation, but an open operation is performed in a corresponding waywithout the synchro-check condition.

Figure 1: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker via configuration logic circuits

Fig. 2 and Fig. 3 show other ways to control functions, which requiresteady signals On and Off. The output can be used to control built-in func-tions or external equipment.

Figure 2: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of built-in functions

&User-definedconditions

Configuration logic circuits

200 ms

Synchro-check

SingleCmdFunc

OUTy

MODE

CmdOuty

2

Close CB1

SinglecommandfunctionCD01

SingleCmdFunc

OUTy

MODE

CmdOuty

1

Function n

Function n


Command control 1MRK 580 382-XENPage 6 – 83

Version 2.2-00

Figure 3: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of external equipment via configuration logic circuits

3 ConfigurationThe configuration of the signal outputs from the single command functionin is made by the CAP 531 configuration tool.

4 CommandsThe outputs of the single command function block can be activated fromthe local HMI. This can be performed under the menu:

CommandCD01

Fig. 4 shows the dialogue box for the local HMI after the selection of thecommand menu above. The display shows the name of the output to con-trol (CmdOut1) and the present status (Old) and proposes a new value(New).

Figure 4: Command dialogue to control an output from the single com-mand function block

&User-definedconditions

Configuration logic circuitsSingleCmdFunc

OUTy

MODE

CmdOuty

1

Device 1


Old:1 New: 0 ^CD01 - CmdOut1

NOYES

Command control

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 382-XENPage 6 – 84

The dialogue to operate an output from the single command functionblock is performed from different states as follows:

1. Selection active; select the:

• C button, and then the No box activates.• Up arrow, and then New: 0 changes to New: 1. The up arrow

changes to the down arrow.• E button, and then the Yes box activates.

2. Yes box active; select the:

• C button to cancel the action and return to the CMD/CD01 menu window.

• E button to confirm the action and return to the CMD/CD01 menu window.

• Right arrow to activate the No box.

3. No box active; select the:

• C button to cancel the action and return to the CMD/CD01 menu window.

• E button to confirm the action and return to the CMD/CD01 menu window.

• Left arrow to activate the Yes box.

5 SettingThe setting parameters for the single command function are set from theCAP 531 configuration tool.

Parameters to be set are MODE, common for the whole block, and Cmd-Outy - including the name for each output signal. The MODE input setsthe outputs to be one of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse.

The appendix shows the parameters and their setting ranges.

6 TestingFor the single command function block, it is necessary to configure theoutput signal to corresponding binary output of the terminal. The opera-tion of the function is then checked from the local HMI by applying thecommands with the MODE Off, Steady, or Pulse and by observing thelogic statuses of the corresponding binary output.

Command control functions included in the operation of different built-infunctions must be tested at the same time as their corresponding functions.

Command control 1MRK 580 382-XENPage 6 – 85

Version 2.2-00

7 Appendix

7.1 Function block

Figure 5: Function block for the single command function

7.2 Signal list In the signal list, xx=01

7.3 Setting table In the setting table, xx=01

OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9

OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15OUT16

SingleCmdFunc

CMDOUT1CMDOUT2CMDOUT3CMDOUT4CMDOUT5CMDOUT6CMDOUT7CMDOUT8CMDOUT9CMDOUT10CMDOUT11CMDOUT12CMDOUT13CMDOUT14CMDOUT15CMDOUT16MODE

CD01


CDxx- OUTy OUT Command output y (y=1-16)

CDxx- CMDOUTy See settings table

CDxx- MODE See settings table


CMDOUTy User def. string

String CDxx-CMD-OUTy

User defined name for output y (y=1-16) of function block CDxx. String length up to 13 characters,all characters avail-able on the HMI can be used

MODE 0, 1, 2 0 Operation mode, 0: Off, 1: Not pulsed (steady). 2: Pulsed. Can only be set from the CAP 531 configuration tool

Command control

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 382-XENPage 6 – 86

Page 6 – 87Synchro- and energising check for single circuit breaker

1 Application

1.1 Synchrocheck The synchrocheck function is used for controlled closing of a circuit in aninterconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal atsatisfied voltage conditions across the breaker to be closed. When there is aparallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the same at the twosides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, an oscillat-ing difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be a phaseangle and a voltage amplitude difference due to voltage drop across the par-allel circuit or circuits. The synchro-check function measures the differencebetween the U-line and the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff), phase angle(PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and permits closing of thecircuit breaker when these conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.

• The voltages U-line and U-bus are higher than the set value for UHigh of the base voltage U1b.

• The differences in the voltage and phase angles are smaller than the set values of UDiff and PhaseDiff.

• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiff. The bus frequency must also be within a range of ±5 Hz from the rated frequency.

The function can be used as a condition to be fulfilled before the breakeris closed at manual closing and/or together with the auto-recloser func-tion.

Figure 1: Synchrocheck

SYN 1

UHigh>70-100% UrUDiff<5-60% UrPhaseDiff<5-75o

FreqDiff<50-300mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail

U-Line Line referencevoltage

U-LineU-Bus

1MRK 580 363-XEN



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 88

The voltage circuits are arranged differently depending on the number ofsynchrocheck functions that are included in the terminal.

In terminals intended for one bay the U-line voltage reference phase isselected on the human-machine interface (HMI). The reference voltagecan be single-phase L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. TheU-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as arechosen on the HMI. Figure 2: shows the voltage connection.

In terminals intended for several bays, all voltage inputs are single phasecircuits. The voltage can be selected for single phase or phase-to-phasemeasurement on the HMI. All voltage inputs must be connected to thesame phase or phases.

The circuit breaker can be closed when the conditions for FreqDiff, PhaseDiff, and UDiff are fulfilled with the UHigh condition.

Figure 2: Connection of the synchrocheck function for one bay.

U-Line

U-Bus

UL1

UL2

UL3

UN

U

UN

AD

L1,L2,L3

L12,L23

L31

ϕ

U

f

SYN1AUTOOK

SYN1MANOK

HMISetting


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 89

Version 2.2-00

1.2 Energising check The energising check is made when a disconnected line is to be connectedto an energised section of a network, see Figure 3:. The check can also beset to allow energisation of the busbar or in both directions.

Figure 3: Principle for energising check.

The voltage level considered to be a non-energised bus or line is set on theHMI. An energising can occur — depending on the set direction of theenergising function. There are separate settable limits for energised (live)condition, UHigh, and non-energised (dead) ULow conditions. The equip-ment is considered energised if the voltage is above the set value UHigh(e.g. 80% of base voltage), and non-energised if it is below the set value,ULow (e.g. 30% of the base voltage). The user can set the UHigh condi-tion between 70-100% U1b and the ULow condition between 10-80%U1b.

A disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to, for instance,induction from a line running in parallel, or by being fed via the extin-guishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be as high as30% or more of the rated voltage of the line.

The energising operation can be set to operate in either direction over thecircuit breaker, or it can be permitted to operate in both directions. Use theAutoEnerg and ManEnerg HMI setting to select the energising operationin:

• Both directions (Both)

• Dead line live bus (DLLB)

• Dead bus live line (DBLL)

The voltage check can also be set Off. A closing impulse is issued to thecircuit breaker if one of the U-line or U-bus voltages is High and the otheris Low, that is, when only one side is energised. The user can set AutoEn-erg and ManEnerg to enable different conditions during automatic andmanual closing of the circuit breaker.

UHigh>70-100%UrULow<10-80%Ur

U-Bus U-Line


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 90

In the manual mode it is also possible to allow closing when both sides ofthe breaker are dead. This is done by setting the parameter ManDBDL =“On” and ManEnerg to “DLLB”, “DBLL” or “Both”.

1.3 Voltage selection The voltage selection function is used for the synchronisation and syn-chronism (SYNx) and energising check functions. When the terminal isused in a double bus, the voltage that should be selected depends on thepositions of the breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the positionof the disconnectors and/or breakers auxiliary contacts, the terminal canselect the right voltage for the synchronism and energising function.Select the type of voltage selection from the synchrocheck, Uselection,SingleBus or DbleBus on the HMI. When using voltage selection, anextra I/O-module is required.

The configuration of internal signal inputs and outputs may be differentfor different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substa-tion must be done during engineering of the terminal.


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 91

Version 2.2-00

Figure 4: Voltage connection in a single busbar arrangement. Alterna-tively, it can be extended up to three bays in one terminal.

1.3.1 Voltage selection for a single busbar

Single bus is selected on the HMI. Figure 4: shows the principle for theconnection arrangement. One terminal unit is used for each bay, or it canalternatively be common for three bays. For the synchrocheck (SYNx)and energising check function, there is one voltage transformer at eachside of the circuit breaker. The voltage transformer circuit connections arestraight forward, no special voltage selection is needed.

For the synchrocheck and energising check, the voltage from Bus 1(SYNx-U-Bus) is connected to the single phase analogue input (U5) onthe terminal unit.

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1

SYNCH.CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AISYN1

U5

ULx(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF1

FUSEUB1FUSEF1 F1

SYN1_UB1OK/FFSYN1_VTSU

SYN2

U5

UL2

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF2


SYN3

U5

UL3

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF3


U-Line 2

FUSEF2

U-Line 3

FUSEF3

U5

ULx(1)

UL2

UL3

From Bay 2

From Bay 3


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 92

For the terminal intended for one bay, the line voltage (SYN1-U-line 1) isconnected as a three-phase voltage to the analogue inputs UL1, UL2, UL3(ULx). For the version intended for three bays, the line voltages are con-nected as three single-phase inputs, UL1 for Bay 1, UL2 for Bay 2, andUL3 for Bay 3.

1.3.1.1 Fuse failure and Volt-age OK signals

The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuseswitch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of thesynchrocheck functions in the terminal. There are two alternative connec-tion possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuitis healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit isfaulty.

The SYNx-UB1OK and SYNx-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbarvoltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of theexternal fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The SYNx-VTSU input isrelated to the line voltage from each line.

For the terminal that is intended for one bay, the user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failure function asan alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line-check) is blockedvia the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 93

Version 2.2-00

Figure 5: Voltage selection in a double bus arrangement. Alternatively it can be extended up to three bays in one terminal

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1

SYNCH-CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AISYN1

U5

ULx(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

1CB11CB2

1CB1

FUSEF1

SYN1_CB1OPEN/CLDSYN1_CB2OPEN/CLD

SYN2

SYN3

U5

ULx(1)

From Bay 2

Bus 2

U-Bus 2U4

1CB2

U4

VOLT. SEL1

FUSEUB1FUSEUB2

FUSEUB1SYN1_UB1OK/FF


FUSEF1SYN1_VTSU

VOLT. SEL2

VOLT. SEL3

UL2

U-Bus

U-Line

2CB12CB2

2CB1SYN2_CB1OPEN/CLDSYN2_CB2OPEN/CLD

UL2

2CB2

U4

FUSEF2



FUSEF2SYN2_VTSU

U5

U-Line 2

From Bay 3

UL3

U-Bus

U-Line

3CB13CB2

3CB1SYN3_CB1OPEN/CLDSYN3_CB2OPEN/CLD

UL3

3CB2

U4

FUSEF3



FUSEF3SYN3_VTSU

U5

U-Line 3


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 94

1.3.2 Voltage selection for a double bus

Select DbleBus on the HMI. Figure 5: shows the principle for theconnection arrangement. One terminal unit is used for each bay or it canalternatively be common for three bays. For the synchrocheck (SYNx)and energising check function, the voltages on the two busbars areselected by voltage selection (VOLT.SELx) in the terminal unit. The busvoltage from Bus 1 is fed to the U5 analogue single-phase input, and thebus voltage from Bus 2 is fed to the U4 analogue single-phase input. Theline voltage transformers are connected as a three-phase voltage UL1,UL2, UL3 (ULx) to the input U-line. For the version intended for threebays, the line voltages are connected as three, single-phase inputs, UL1for Bay1, UL2 for Bay2 and UL3 for Bay3.

The selection of the bus voltage is made by checking the position of thedisconnectors’ auxiliary contacts connected via binary inputs of the voltageselection logic inputs, SYNx-CB1OPEN (Disconnector section 1 open),SYNx-CB1CLD (Disconnector section 1 closed) and SYNx-CB2OPEN(Disconnector section 2 open), SYNx-CB2CLD (Disconnector section 2closed).


The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuseswitch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of thesynchro-check functions in the terminal. There are two alternative con-nection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage cir-cuit is healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit isfaulty.

The SYNx-UB1(2)OK and SYNx-UB1(2)FF inputs are related to eachbusbar voltage. The SYNx-VTSU input is related to each line voltage.Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the externalfuse failure of the busbar respectively the line voltage. Only the fuse fail-ure of a selected voltage causes a blocking of the relevant energisingcheck unit.

For the terminal that is intended for one bay, you can use the FUSE-VTSUsignal from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failure function as analternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line-check) is blockedvia the inputs (SYNx-UB1OK/FF, SYNx-UB2OK/FF or SYNx-VTSU).


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 95

Version 2.2-00

2 Theory of operation

Figure 6: Input and output signals.

2.1 Synchrocheck Description of input and output signals for the synchro-check function.

Input signals Description

SYNx-BLOCK General block input from any external condi-tion, that should block the synchrocheck.

SYNx-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-inoptional fuse failure detection. It can also beconnected to external condition for fuse failure.This is a blocking condition for the energisingfunction.

SYNx-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 (U5). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure the energising check is blocked.

SYNx-UB1OK No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Invertedsignal.

FreqDiffPhaseDiffUDiffUHighULow

<<<><

50-300 mHz5-75 deg5-60 %70-100 %10-80 %

SYNx-VTSU

SYNx-BLOCK

SYNx x=1,2 or 3

SYNx-AUTO

SYNx-MANOK

Connectable inputs

From fuse failuredetection, line side(external or internal)

Connectableoutputs

General Block

SYNx-UB1/2OK

SYNx-UB1/2FFFrom fuse failuredetection bus side


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 96



Output signals Description

SYNx-AUTOOK Synchrocheck/energising OK. The output signal is high when the synchrocheck conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energising condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the auto-recloser before clos-ing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.

SYNx-MANOK Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energising to be used during manual closing of the circuit breaker.


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 97

Version 2.2-00

Figure 7: Voltage selection logic in a double bus, single breaker arrangement. In case of three bay arrangement the 1 in SYN1 and UENERG1OK are replaced by 2 and 3 in the logic.

2.2 Voltage selection Description of the input and output signals shown in the above simplifiedlogic diagrams for voltage selection:

Input signal Description

SYNx-CB1OPEN Disconnector section of Bay x open. Connectedto the auxiliary contacts of a disconnector sec-tion in a double-bus, singlebreaker arrange-ment, to inform the voltage selection about thepositions.

SYNx-CB1CLD Disconnector section of Bay x closed. Con-nected to the auxiliary contacts of a disconnectorsection in a double-bus, single-breaker arrange-ment to inform the voltage selection about thepositions.

SYNx-CB2OPEN Same as above but for disconnector section 2.

SYNx-CB2CLD Same as above but for disconnector section 2.

SYNx-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltageBus 1 (U5). This signal can come from a trippedfuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of thevoltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure,the energising check is blocked.


SYNx-UB2FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltageBus 2 (U4). This signal can come from a trippedfuse switch (MCB) on the secondary side of thevoltage transformer. In case of fuse failure, theenergising check is blocked.

1V

SYN1-CB1OPENSYN1-CB1CLD

SYN1-CB2OPEN

1V

SYN1-CB2CLD

SYN-UB1FF

SYN1-VTSU

1V UENERG1OKSYN-UB1OK

SYN-UB2FFSYN-UB2OK

&

&

&

&

&

SYN1-VSUB1

SYN1-VSUB2

U5

U4

SYN1-U-BUS

To energisingcheck Figure 9:


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 98


SYNx-VTSU Internal fuse failure detection or configured to abinary input indicating external fuse failure ofthe UL1, UL2, UL3 line-side voltage. Blocksthe energising function.


SYNx-VSUB1 Signal for indication of voltage selection fromBus 1 voltage.

SYNx-VSUB2 Signal for indication of voltage selection fromBus 1 voltage.

Figure 8: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck.

t& 1V

UDiff

OPERATIONOFF

RELEASEON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

FreqDiff

PhaseDiff

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1

50ms

&

&

&

1V

SYN1

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

From energisingcheck figure 9.


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 99

Version 2.2-00

Figure 9: Simplified logic diagram - energising check.

t

&1V

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

UL HighUL LowUB High

50ms

&& AUTOENERG 1

UB Low

UENERG1OK

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

ManEnerg.

AutoEnerg.

1V 1V t0.00-60.0s

&1V

&& MANENERG 11V

1V

t0.00-60.0s

&OFFON

1V

ManDBDL

t50ms

To synchro-checkfigure 8.

From voltage selection


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 100

3 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the synchrocheck function are found in the HMI tree under:

SettingsFunctions

Group nSynchroCheck

SynchroCheck n (n=1-3)(The number of SynchroCheck functions is dependent of the version)

Comments regarding settings.

3.1 Operation Off/Release/On

Off The synchrocheck function is off and theoutput is low.

Release There are fixed, high output signals SYN1-AUTOOK = 1 and SYN1-MANOK = 1.

On The function is in service and the output sig-nal depends on the input conditions.

3.2 Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be ofa single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase). (Only avail-able in terminals intended for one bay).

3.3 UMeasure Selection of single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phase-phase)measurement.(Only available in terminals intended for several bays).

3.4 PhaseShift This setting is used to compensate for a phase shift caused by a line trans-former between the two measurement points for UBus and ULine. The setvalue is added to the measured phase difference. The bus voltage is refer-ence voltage.

3.5 URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the set-ting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if one wishes toconnect the UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral. The “Inputphase”-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the “URatio”-settingto sqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level withthe bus voltage.

3.6 USelection Selection of single or double bus voltage-selection logic.


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 101

Version 2.2-00

3.7 AutoEnerg and ManEnerg

Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of thecircuit breaker.

Off The energising function is Off

DLLB The line voltage U-line is low, below (10-80% U1b) andthe bus voltage U-bus is high, above (70-100% U1b).

DBLL The bus voltage U-bus is low, below (10-80% U1b) andthe line voltage U-line is high, above (70-100% U1b).

Both Energising can be done in both directions, DLLB orDBLL.

tAutoEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the ener-gising condition to achieve SYN1-AUTOOK.

tManEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfillment of the ener-gising condition to achieve SYN1-MANOK.

3.8 ManDBDL If the parameter is set to “On”, closing is enabled when Both U-Line andU-bus are below ULow and ManEnerg is set to “DLLB”, “DBLL” or“Both”.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 102

4 TestingAt periodical checks, the functions should preferably be tested with theused settings. To test a specific function, it might be necessary to changesome setting parameters, for example:

• AutoEnerg = On/Off/DLLB/DBLL/Both

• ManEnerg = Off

• Operation = Off, On

The tests explained in section “Synchro-check tests” on page 102 describethe settings, which can be used as references during testing, are presentedbefore the final settings are specified. After testing, restore the equipmentto the normal or desired settings.

4.1 Test equipment A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase angleby regulation of the resistive and reactive components is needed. Here, thephase angle meter is also needed. To perform an accurate test of the fre-quency difference, a frequency generator at one of the input voltages isneeded. The tests can also be performed with the computer-aided test sys-tem FREJA which has a specially designed program for evaluating thesynchro-check function.Figure 10: shows the general test connection principle, which can be usedduring testing.

This description describes the test of the version intended for one bay.

Figure 10: General test connection for synchro-check with three-phase voltage connected to the line side.

4.2 Synchro-check tests

4.2.1 Test of voltage difference

Set the voltage difference at 30% U1b on the HMI, and the test should verifythat operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiff is lower than30% U1b.

Testequipment

U-Bus

U-Line

N

U-Bus

N

UL1UL2UL3N

Input PhaseL1,L2,L3L12,L23,L31

UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

REx 5xx


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 103

Version 2.2-00

These voltage inputs are used:

U-line UL1, UL2 or UL3 voltage input on the terminal.

U-bus U5 voltage input on the terminal

These HMI settings can be used during the test if the final setting is notdetermined:

1 Set these HMI settings, which are found under:

SettingsFunctions

Group nSynchroCheck

SynchroCheck1

2 Test with UDiff = 0%• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b and U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b

with no frequency or phase difference.

• Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activated.

• The test can be repeated with different voltage values to verify that the function operates within UDiff <30%.

3 Test with UDiff = 40%• Increase the U-bus (U5) to 120% U1b, and the U-line (UL1) = 80%

U1b.

Table 1:

Parameter: Setting:

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

USelection SingleBus

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 104

• Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.

4 Test with UDiff = 20%, Uline < UHigh• Decrease the U-line (UL1) to 60% U1b and the U-bus (U5) to be

equal to 80% U1b.


5 Test with URatio=0.20• Run the test under section 2 to 4 but with U-bus voltages 5 times

lower.

6 Test with URatio=5.00• Run the test under section 2 to 4 but with U-line voltages 5 times

lower.

4.2.2 Test of phase difference

The phase difference is set at 45° on the HMI, and the test should verifythat operation is achieved when the PhaseDiff (phase difference) is lowerthan 45°.

1 Set these HMI settings:

2 Test with PhaseDiff = 0° Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 100% U1b and U-bus (U5) = 100% U1b,with no frequency or phase difference.Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs areactivated.

Table 2: Test settings for phase difference

Parameter: Setting:

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 105

Version 2.2-00

By changing the phase angle on U1 connected to U-bus, between +/-45° you can check that the two outputs are activated for a PhaseDifflower than 45°. It should not operate for other values. See Figure 11:.

Figure 11: Test of phase difference.

4 Apply a PhaseShift setting of 10 deg. Change the phase anglebetween +55 and -35 and verify that the two outputs are activated forphase differences between these values but not for phase differencesoutside. See Figure 12:.

Change the PhaseShift setting to 350 deg. Change the phase anglebetween +35 and -55 and verify as above.


4.2.3 Test of frequency difference

The frequency difference is set at 50 mHz on the HMI, and the testshould verify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiff frequency dif-ference is lower than 50 mHz.

1 Use the same HMI setting as in section “Test of phase difference” onpage 104.

+45o

-45o

No operation

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus

+55o

-35o

No operation

U-bus

U-line operation

U-bus

PhaseShift=10 degPhaseShift=350 deg


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 106

2 Test with FreqDiff = 0 mHzApply voltages U-Line (UL1) equal to 100% U1b and U-Bus (U5)equal to 100% U1b, with a frequency difference equal to 0 mHz and aphase difference lower than 45°. Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK andSYN1-MANOK outputs are activated.

3 Test with FreqDiff = 1HzApply voltage to the U-line (UL1) equal to 100% U1b with a fre-quency equal to 50 Hz and voltage U-bus (U5) equal to 100% U1b,with a frequency equal to 49 Hz. Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.

4 The test can be repeated with different frequency values to verify thatthe function operates for values lower than the set ones. If the FREJAprogram, Test of synchronising relay, is used the frequency can bechanged continuously.

Note that a frequency difference also implies a floating mutual-phasedifference. So the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputsmight NOT be stable, even though the frequency difference is within setlimits, because the phase difference is not stable!

4.2.4 Test of reference voltage

1 Use the same basic test connection as in Figure 10:. The UDiffbetween the voltage connected to U-bus and U-line should be 0%, sothat the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activatedfirst.Change the U-Line voltage connection to UL2 without changing thesetting on the HMICheck that the two outputs are NOT activated.

2 The test can also be repeated by moving the U-line to the UL3 input.

4.3 Test of energising check

Use these voltage inputs:

U-line = UL1, UL2 or UL3 voltage input on the terminal.

U-bus = U5 voltage input on the terminal.

4.3.1 Test of dead line live bus (DLLB)

The test should verify that the energising function operates for a low volt-age on the U-Line and for a high voltage on the U-bus. This correspondsto an energising of a dead line to a live bus.

Use these HMI settings during the test if the final setting is not deter-mined.


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 107

Version 2.2-00


2 Apply a single-phase voltage 100% U1b to the U-bus (U5), and a sin-gle-phase voltage 30% U1b to the U-line (UL1).

3 Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs areactivated.

4 Increase the U-Line (UL1) to 60% U1b and U-Bus(U5) to be equal to100% U1b. The outputs should NOT be activated.

5 The test can be repeated with different values on the U-Bus and theU-Line.

4.3.2 Dead bus live line (DBLL)

The test should verify that the energising function operates for a low volt-age on the U-bus and for a high one on the U-line. This corresponds to anenergising of a dead bus from a live line.

1 Change the HMI settings AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to DBLL.

2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-bus (U5) and asingle-phase voltage of 100% U1b to the U-line (UL1).


4 Decrease the U-line to 60% U1b and keep the U-bus equal to 30%U1b. The outputs shall NOT be activated.

Table 3: Test settings for DLLB

Parameter: Setting:

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg DLLB

ManEnerg DLLB

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 108

5 The test can be repeated with different values on the U-bus and the U-line.

4.3.3 Energising in both directions (DLLB or DBLL)

1 Change the HMI settings AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to Both.

2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-line (UL1) and asingle-phase voltage of 100% U1b to the U-bus (U5).

3 Check that the “SYN1-AUTOOK” and “SYN1-MANOK” outputsare activated.

4 Change the connection so that the U-line (UL1) is equal to 100% U1band the U-bus (U5) is equal to 30% U1b.

5 The outputs should still be activated.


7 Restore the equipment to normal or desired settings.

4.3.4 Dead bus Dead line (DBDL)

The test should verify that the energising function operates for a low volt-age on both the U-bus the U-line, i.e closing of the breaker in a non ener-gised system.

1 Set AutoEnerg to Off and ManEnerg to DBLL.

Set ManDBDL to On.


3 Check that the SYN1-MANOK output is activated.

4 Increase the U-bus to 80% U1b and keep the U-lineequal to 30% U1b.

The outputs shall NOT be activated.

5 Repeat the test with ManEnerg set to DLLB and Both, and differentvalues on the U-bus and the U-line.

4.4 Test of voltage selection

This test should verify that the correct voltage is selected for the measure-ment in the energising function used in a double-bus arrangement. Applya single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-line (UL1) and a single-phasevoltage of 100% U1b to the U-bus (U5).


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 109

Version 2.2-00

If the SYN1-UB1/2OK inputs for the fuse failure are used, normally theymust be activated, thus activated and deactivated must be inverted in thedescription of tests below.


Table 4: Test settings for voltage selection

Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

USelection DbleB

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Both

ManEnerg Both

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 110

2 Connect the signals below to binary inputs and binary outputs. Applysignals according to the table and verify that correct output signals aregenerated.

Table 5: Signals

VO

LT

AG

E F

RO

M

BU

S1

U5

VO

LT

AG

E F

RO

M

BU

S2

U4

BIN

AR

Y IN

PU

TS

CB

1OP

EN

CB

1CL

D

CB

2OP

EN

CB

2CL

D

UB

1FF

UB

2FF

VT

SU

BIN

AR

Y O

UT

PU

TS

AU

TO

OK

MA

NO

K

VS

UB

1

VS

UB

2

1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 01 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0


1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 111

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

SYN1

SYN

BLOCKFD1OPENFD1CLDCB1OPEN

AUTOOKMANOK

CB1CLDCB2OPENCB2CLDUB1FFUB1OKUB2FFUB2OKVTSU

VSUB1VSUB2


SYNx- BLOCK IN Block of synchrocheck function x (x=1-3)

SYNx- FD1OPEN IN Feeder disconnector 1 open

SYNx- FD1CLD IN Feeder disconnector 1 closed

SYNx- CB1OPEN IN Breaker section 1 open

SYNx- CB1CLD IN Breaker section 1 closed



SYNx- UB1FF IN External voltage fuse failure, bus 1

SYNx- UB1OK IN External voltage fuse healthy, bus 1



SYNx- VTSU IN Block from internal fuse failure supervision or from external fuse failure of the line voltage.

SYNx- AUTOOK OUT Automatic synchronism/energising check OK

SYNx- MANOK OUT Manual synchronism/energising check OK

SYNx- VSUB1 OUT Voltage selection from bus 1



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 363-XENPage 6 – 112

5.3 Setting table


Operation Off, Release, On

Off Synchrocheck function Off/Release/On

InputPhase L1, L2, L3, L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1

L1 Select input voltage

UMeasure Ph/N, Ph/Ph Ph/N Select input voltage Ph/N or Ph/Ph

PhaseShift 0-360 degrees 0 Phase shift between U-bus and U-line

URatio 0.20-5.00 1.00 Voltage ratio between U-bus and U-line

USelection SingleBus, DbleBus

Single-Bus

Bus arrangement for voltage selection

AutoEnerg Off, DLLB, DBLL, Both

Off Auto energising/synchronising method

ManEnerg Off, DLLB, DBLL, Both

Off Manual energising/synchronising method

ManDBDL Off, On Off Manual dead bus and dead line energising

UHigh 50-120 % 80 High voltage limit, as a percentage of Ub

ULow 10-100 % 40 Low voltage limit, as a percentage of Ub

FreqDiff 0.05-0.30 Hz 0.20 Frequency difference limit

PhaseDiff 5-75 degrees 20 Phase difference limit

UDiff 5-50 % 20 Voltage difference limit, as a percentage of Ub

tAutoEnerg 0.000-60.000 s 0.100 Auto energising time delay period

tManEnerg 0.000-60.000 s 0.100 Manual energising time delay period

Page 6 – 113Synchro- and energising check for double circuit breakers

1 Application

1.1 Synchrocheck The synchrocheck function is used for controlled closing of a circuit in aninterconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal atsatisfied voltage conditions across the breaker to be closed. When there is aparallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the same at the twosides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, an oscillat-ing difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be a phaseangle and a voltage amplitude difference due to voltage drop across the par-allel circuit or circuits. The synchrocheck function measures the differencebetween the U-line and the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff), phase angle(PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and permits closing of thecircuit breaker when these conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.







SYN 1


FreqDiff<50-300mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail


U-LineU-Bus

1MRK 580 362-XEN



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 114

In terminals intended for one bay the U-line voltage reference phase isselected on the human-machine interface (HMI). The reference voltagecan be single-phase L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. TheU-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as arechosen on the HMI. Figure 2: shows the voltage connection.

In terminals intended for several bays, all voltage inputs are single phasecircuits. The voltage can be selected for single phase or phase-to-phasemeasurement on the HMI. All voltage inputs must be connected to thesame phase or phases.

The circuit breaker can be closed when the conditions for FreqDiff, PhaseDiff, and UDiff are fulfilled with the UHigh condition.

Figure 2: Connection of the synchrocheck function for one bay

U-Line

U-Bus 1

UL1

UL2

UL3

UN

U

UN

AD

L1,L2,L3L12,L23L31

ϕ

U

f

SYN1AUTOOK

SYN1MANOK

HMISetting

U-Bus 2U

UNL1,L2,L3L12,L23L31

ϕ

U

f

SYN2AUTOOK

SYN2MANOK

HMISetting

SYN1

SYN2

U5

U4


1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 115

Version 2.2-00



The voltage level considered to be a non-energised bus or line is set on theHMI. An energising can occur — depending on the set direction of theenergising function. There are separate settable limits for energised (live)condition, UHigh, and non-energised (dead) ULow conditions. The equip-ment is considered energised if the voltage is above the set value UHigh(e.g. 80% of the base voltage), and non-energised if it is below the setvalue, ULow (e.g. 30% of the base voltage) The user can set the UHighcondition between 70-100% U1b and the ULow condition between 10-80% U1b.







UHigh>70-100%U1bULow<10-80%U1b

U-Bus U-Line


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 116


Figure 4: Voltage connection in a double busbar double breaker arrangement. Alternatively, it can be extended up to two bays in one terminal

1.3 Voltage connection The principle for the connection arrangement is shown in Figure 4:. Oneterminal is used for the two circuit breakers in one or two bays dependentof selected option. There is one voltage transformer at each side of the cir-cuit breaker, and the voltage transformer circuit connections are straight-forward, without any special voltage selection.

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1

SYNCH.CHECK VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AISYN1

U5

ULx(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF1

FUSEUB1

FUSEF1 F1


SYN3

U5

UL2

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF2


SYN4

U4

UL2

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB2FUSEF2


U-Line 2

FUSEF2

U5

ULx(1)

UL2

From Bay 2

Bus 2

U-Bus 2U4

SYN2

U4

ULx(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB2FUSEF1


FUSEUB2


1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 117

Version 2.2-00

For the synchrocheck and energising check, the voltage from Bus 1(SYN1(3)-U-bus) is connected to the single-phase analogue input (U5) onthe terminal and the voltage from Bus 2 (SYN2(4)-U-bus) is connected tothe single-phase analogue input (U4).

For the terminal intended for one bay the line voltage transformers areconnected as a three-phase voltage to the analogue inputs UL1, UL2, UL3(ULx) (SYN1(2)-U-Line) voltage. For the version intended for two baysthe line voltages are connected as two single phase inputs, UL1 for Bay 1and UL2 for Bay 2

The synchronism condition is set on the HMI of the terminal, and the volt-age is taken from Bus 1 and the Line or from Bus 2 and the Line (U-line).This means that the two synchrocheck units are operating without anyspecial voltage selection, but with the same line (U-line) voltage.

The configuration of internal signals, inputs, and outputs may be differentfor different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substa-tion must be done during engineering of the terminal.

1.3.1 Fuse failure and Voltage OK signals



The user can use the FUSE-VTSU signal from the built-in optional select-able fuse-failure function as an alternative to the external fuse-failure sig-nals.

In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line check) is blockedvia the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF orSYN1-VTSU).


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 118



2.1 Synchro-check Description of input and output signals for the synchrocheck function.


SYNx-BLOCK General block input from any external condi-tion, that should block the synchrocheck.

SYNx-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be connected to external condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energising function.




<<<><

50-300 mHz5-75 deg5-60 %70-100 %10-80 %

SYNx-VTSU

SYNx-BLOCK

SYNx x=1,2,3 or 4

SYNx-AUTO

SYNx-MANOK

Connectable inputs


Connectableoutputs

General Block

SYNx-UB1OK

SYNx-UB1FFFrom fuse failuredetection bus side


1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 119

Version 2.2-00


SYNx-AUTOOK Synchrocheck/energising OK. The output signal is high when the synchrocheck conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energising condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the auto-recloser before clos-ing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.


Figure 6: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck.

t& 1V

UDiff

OPERATIONOFF

RELEASEON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

FreqDiff

PhaseDiff

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1

50ms

&

&

&

1V

SYN1

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

From energising checksee figure 7


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 120

Figure 7: Simplified logic diagram - energising check.

t

&1V

OFFBothDLLBDBLL


50ms

&& AUTOENERG 1

UB Low

UENERG1OK

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

ManEnerg.

AutoEnerg.

1V 1V t0.00-60.0s

&1V

&& MANENERG 11V

1V

t0.00-60.0s

From voltage selection fig.

&OFFON

1V

ManDBDL

t50ms

To synchrocheckFigure 6:


1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 121

Version 2.2-00

3 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the synchrocheck function are found in the HMI tree under:

Settings Functions Group n

SynchroCheckSynchroCheck n (n=1-4)

(The number of SynchroCheck settings is dependent of the version)

Comments regarding settings.





3.2 Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be ofa single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase). (Only avail-able in terminals intended for one bay).

3.3 UMeasure Selection of single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phase-phase)measurement. (Only available in terminals intended for several bays).


3.5 URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the set-ting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if one wishes toconnect the UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral. The “Inputphase”-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the “URatio”-settingto sqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level withthe bus voltage.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 122



Off The energising function is Off.








1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 123

Version 2.2-00



• ManEnerg = Off


The tests explained in the section “Synchrocheck tests” on page 124describe the settings, which can be used as references during testing, arepresented before the final settings are specified. After testing, restore theequipment to the normal or desired settings.

4.1 Test equipment A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase angleby regulation of the resistive and reactive components is needed. Here, thephase angle meter is also needed. To perform an accurate test of the fre-quency difference, a frequency generator at one of the input voltages isneeded. The tests can also be performed with the computer-aided test sys-tem FREJA which has a specially designed program for evaluating thesynchro-check function.Figure 8: shows the general test connection principle, which can be usedduring testing.


Figure 8: General test connection for synchrocheck with three-phase voltage connected to the line side.

Testequipment

U-Bus

U-Line

N

U-Bus

N

UL1UL2UL3N


UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

REx 5xx


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 124

4.2 Synchrocheck tests


Set the voltage difference at 30% U1b on the HMI, and the test should checkthat operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiff is lower than30% U1b.






SettingsFunctions

Group nSynchrCheck

SynchroCheck1

2 Test with UDiff = 0%• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b and U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b

with no frequency or phase difference.


• The test can be repeated with different voltage values to verify that

Table 1: Test settings for voltage difference

Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30%U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 125

Version 2.2-00

the function operates within UDiff <30%.


U1b with no frequency or phase difference.

• Check that the two outputs are not activated.


equal to 80% U1b.

• Check that the two outputs are not activated.


lower.


lower.





Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 126

2 Test with PhaseDiff = 0°

Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 100% U1b and U-bus (U5) = 100% U1b,with no frequency or phase difference.Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs areactivated.

By changing the phase angle on U1 connected to U-bus, between +/-45° you can check that the two outputs are activated for a PhaseDifflower than 45°. It should not operate for other values. See Figure 9:.




Figure 10: Test of phase difference

+45o

-45o

No operation

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus

+55o

-35o

No operation

U-bus

U-line operation

U-bus



1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 127

Version 2.2-00


The frequency difference is set at 50 mHz on the HMI, and the testshould verify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiff frequency dif-ference is lower than 50 mHz.



3 Test with FreqDiff = 1HzApply voltage to the U-line (UL1) equal to 100% U1b with a fre-quency equal to 50 Hz and voltage U-bus (U5) equal to 100% U1b,with a frequency equal to 49 Hz. Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.


But note that a frequency difference also implies a floating mutual-phase difference. So the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK out-puts might not be stable, even though the frequency difference is withinset limits, because the phase difference is not stable!


1 Use the same basic test connection as in Figure 8:. The UDiff betweenthe voltage connected to U-bus and U-line should be 0%, so that theSYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activated first.Change the U-Line voltage connection to UL2 without changing thesetting on the HMICheck that the two outputs are not activated.










Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 128









2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-bus (U5) and a single-phase voltage of 100% U1b to the U-line (UL1).


Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg DLLB

ManEnerg DLLB

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 129

Version 2.2-00


4 Decrease the U-line to 60% U1b and keep the U-bus equal to 30%U1b. The outputs should NOT be activated.






4 Change the connection so that the U-line (UL1) is equal to 100% U1band the U-bus (U5) is equal to 30% U1b.







Set ManDBDL to On




The outputs should NOT be activated.



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 362-XENPage 6 – 130

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

5.3 Setting table

SYN1

SYNBLOCKUB1FFUB1OKVTSU

AUTOOKMANOK






SYNx- AUTOOK OUT Automatic synchro-/energising check OK

SYNx- MANOK OUT Manual synchro-/energising check OK













ManDBDL Off, On Off Manual deadbus and deadline energising








Page 6 – 131Synchro- and energising check 1 1/2 CB arrangement

1 Application

1.1 Synchrocheck The synchrocheck function is used for controlled closing of a circuit breakerin an interconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable sig-nal at satisfied voltage conditions across the breaker to be closed. Whenthere is a parallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the same atthe two sides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, anoscillating difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be aphase angle and a voltage amplitude difference due to voltage drop acrossthe parallel circuit or circuits.

The function can be used as a condition to be fulfilled before the breaker isclosed at manual closing and/or together with the auto-recloser function.

Figure 1: Synchrocheck.

1.2 Energising check The energising check is made when a disconnected line is to be connectedto an energised section of a network, see Figure 2:. The check can also beset to allow energising of the busbar or in both directions.


SYN 1


FreqDiff<50-300mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail


U-LineU-Bus

UHigh>70-100%U1bULow<10-80%U1b

U-Bus U-Line

1MRK 580 364-XEN


Synchro- and energising check 1 1/2 CB arrangement

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 132


1.3 Voltage connection The voltage circuits are arranged differently depending on the number ofsynchrocheck functions that are included in the terminal.

In terminals intended for one bay the U-line voltage reference phase isselected on the human-machine interface (HMI). The reference voltagecan be single-phase L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. TheU-bus voltage must then be connected to the same phase or phases as cho-sen on the HMI. Figure 3: shows the voltage connection.

In terminals intended for several bays, all voltage inputs are single-phasecircuits. The voltage can be selected for single-phase or phase-to-phasemeasurement on the HMI. All voltage inputs must be connected to thesame phase or phases.

The circuit breaker can be closed when the conditions for FreqDiff,PhaseDiff, and UDiff are fulfilled with the UHigh condition.

Figure 3: Connection of the synchrocheck function for one bay.

U-Line

U-Bus

UL1

UL2

UL3

UN

U

UN

AD

L1,L2,L3L12,L23L31

ϕ

U

f

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

HMISetting

U-SelectedU

UN

SYN1

U5

U4


1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 133

Version 2.2-00


Figure 4: Connections in 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement.

Bus 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1

VOLT SELECTION I/O BI/BO AISYN1

U5U-BusU-Line

FD1CB1

CB1

CB2

SYN1_FD1OPEN/CLDSYN1_CB1OPEN/CLD

SYN1

SYN1

U5

ULx

FD1

U4

VOLT.SEL FUSE

FUSEUB1FUSEUF1

FUSEUF1SYN1_UF1OK/FF

VOLT.SEL

VOLT.SEL

U-Bus

U-Line

U5

U-Bus

U-Line

FD2

ULx

SYN1_UB1OK/FF FUSEUB1

U4

CB2SYN1_FD1OPEN/CLDSYN1_CB1OPEN/CLD

3VSUB1SYN1_UF1OK/FFSYN1_UB1OK/FF

1VSUB1

U5

ULxU4

FD2CB2

SYN1_FD1OPEN/CLDSYN1_CB1OPEN/CLD

FUSEUF2SYN1_UF1OK/FFSYN1_UB1OK/FF

FUSEUB2

F1

FUSEUF1

CB1

FUSEUB2FUSEUF2

CB3

U-Line 2ULx

FUSEUF2

CB3

F2

CB2

U-Bus 2U5

UB1

FUSEUB2

Bus 2

SYNCH-CHECK

U5

U4

U4

U4

VSUF1

VSUB1

1VSUB1

3VSUB1

1VSUB1

3VSUB1

VSUB2

VSUB1

VSUB2

VSUF2

Terminal 3

Terminal 2

Terminal 1

*) Explanation of signal names, see Section 2.4


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 134

2.1 Synchrocheck The synchrocheck function measures the difference between the U-lineand the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff), phase angle (PhaseDiff), andfrequency (FreqDiff). It operates and permits closing of the circuit breakerwhen the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.




2.2 Energising check The energising operation can be set to operate in either direction over thecircuit breaker, or it can be permitted to operate in both directions. Use thesetting of the parameters AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to select the energis-ing operation in:




The voltage level considered to be a non-energised bus or line is set on theHMI. An energising can occur — depending on:

• the set direction of the energising function,

• the set limit for energised condition (live - UHigh) and

• the set limit for non-energised (dead - ULow) condition.

The equipment is considered energised if the voltage is above the setvalue UHigh (e.g. 80% of the base voltage), and non-energised if it isbelow the set value, ULow (e.g. 30% of the base voltage).

The voltage check can also be set Off. A closing impulse is issued to thecircuit breaker if one of the U-line or U-bus voltages is High and the otheris Low, that is, when only one side is energised. Set AutoEnerg andManEnerg to enable different conditions during automatic and manualclosing of the circuit breaker.

In the manual mode it is also possible to allow closing when both sides ofthe breaker are dead. This is done by setting the parameter ManDBDL =On and ManEnerg to DLLB, DBLL or Both.

2.3 Voltage connection The principle for the connection arrangement is shown in Figure 4:. Oneterminal is used for the two circuit breakers in one or two bays dependentof selected option. There is one voltage transformer at each side of the cir-cuit breaker, and the voltage transformer circuit connections are straightforward, without any special voltage selection.For the synchrocheck and energising check, the voltage from Bus 1


1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 135

Version 2.2-00

(SYN1(T1) - U-bus 1) is connected to the single-phase analogue input(U5) on terminal 1 and the voltage from Bus 2 (SYN1(T3) - U-bus 2) isconnected to the single-phase analogue input (U4) on terminal 1.

Vice verse, the voltage from Bus 1 (SYN1(T1) - U-bus 1) is connected tothe single-phase analogue input (U4) on terminal 3 and the voltage fromBus 2 (SYN1(T3) - U-bus 2) is connected to the single-phase analogueinput (U5) on terminal 3.

For a terminal intended for one bay the line voltage transformers are con-nected as a three-phase voltage to the analogue inputs UL1, UL2, UL3(ULx) (SYN1(T2) - U-Line) voltage. For the version intended for twobays the line voltages are connected as two single-phase inputs, UL1 forBay 1 and UL2 for Bay 2.

The synchronism condition is set on the local HMI of the terminal, and thevoltage is taken from Bus 1 and the Line or from Bus 2 and the Line (U-line). This means that the two synchro-check units are operating withoutany special voltage selection, but with the same line (U-line) voltage.

The configuration of internal signals, inputs, and outputs may be differentfor different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substa-tion must be done during engineering of the terminals.


The external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuseswitch/MCBs are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of thesynchro-check functions in the terminal. There are two alternative con-nection possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage cir-cuit is healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit isfaulty.

The SYN1-UB1OK and SYN1-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbarvoltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of theexternal fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The SYN1-VTSU input isrelated to the line voltage from each line.

The FUSE-VTSU signal, from the built-in optional selectable fuse-failurefunction, can be used as an alternative to the external fuse-failure signals.

In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line - check) isblocked via the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 136

2.4 Function block and logics



<<<><

50-300 mHz5-75 deg5-50 %50-120 %10-100 %

VTSU

BLOCK

SYN1-

AUTOOK

MANOK

Connectable inputs


Connectableoutputs

General Block

UB1OK

UB1FFFrom fuse failuredetection, bus 1

UB2OK

UB2FFFrom fuse failuredetection, bus 2

UF1OK

UF1FFFrom fuse failuredetection, feeder 1

UF2OK

UF2FFFrom fuse failuredetection, feeder 2

CB1CLD

CB1OPENStatus informationof breaker section 1

FD1CLD

FD1OPENStatus informationof feeder disconn.1

FD2CLD

FD2OPENStatus informationof feeder disconn.2

VSUB1

VSUB2

VSUF1

VSUF2

tAutoEnergtManEnerg

<<

0-60 s0-60 s

Indication of selectedbus voltage, Bus 1/2

Indication of selectedfeeder voltage, F 1/2

Auto. SynchrocheckOK signal. Can be usedas indication or to the

Man. SynchrocheckOK signal. Indicationor to auto-recloser.

auto-recloser.

Can include energ. dir.

STARTInitiating start signal

CB3.....

INPROGR

CLOSECB

TESTCB

Indication synchro-check in progress

Close circuit breakercommand“Close circuit breakercommand” signal usedduring testing


1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 137

Version 2.2-00

Figure 5: shows possible connections for the synchrocheck function anddifferent parameters. A description of the input and output signals followsbelow.


SYN1-BLOCK General block input from any external condi-tion, that should block the synchrocheck.

SYN1-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be connected to external condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energising function.

SYN1-UBxFF External fuse failure input from busbar voltage Bus 1 or 2 resp. (U5). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the sec-ondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure the energising check is blocked.

SYN1-UBxOK No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Inverted signal.

SYN1-UFxFF External fuse failure input from feeder voltage Feeder 1 or 2 resp. (U4). This signal can come from a tripped fuse switch (MCB) on the sec-ondary side of the voltage transformer. In case of a fuse failure the energising check is blocked.

SYN1-UFxOK No external voltage fuse failure (U4). Inverted signal.

SYN1-START Signal to initiate the synchrocheck function. Can be connected to a binary input, other func-tion blocks or logics.

SYN1-CBnOPEN Status signal of breaker section n (n=1..3), indi-cating Open breaker section.

SYN1-CBnCLD Status signal of breaker section n, indicating Closed breaker section.

SYN1-FDmOPEN Status signal of feeder disconnector m (m=1..2), indicating Open disconnector. Can be used for interlocking.

SYN1-FDmCLD Status signal of feeder disconnector m, indicat-ing Closed disconnector. Can be used as inter-locking condition.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 138


SYN1-AUTOOK Synchro-/energising check OK. The output sig-nal is high when the synchrocheck conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energising condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the autorecloser before closing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.

SYN1-MANOK Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energising to be used during manual closing of the circuit breaker.

SYN1-VSUBx Voltage Bus 1 (and Bus 2 respectively) selected for the synchro-check function.

SYN1-VSUFx Voltage Feeder 1 (and Feeder 2 respectively) selected for the synchro-check function.

SYN1-CLOSECB Close breaker command from synchrocheck. Used to the circuit breaker or to be connected to the auto-reclosing function.

SYN1-TESTCB Output when the function is in test mode. In test mode a complete synchrocheck sequence is per-formed except for closing of the circuit breaker. The output signal SYN1-TESTCB indicates when the SYN1-CLOSECB signal would have been submitted from the function block or when the conditions for energising are fulfilled.

SYN1-INPROGR The signal is high when a synchrocheck is in progress, i.e from the moment a SYN1-START is received until the operation is terminated. The operation is teminated when SYN1-CLOSECB or SYN1-TESTCB has been submitted or if a SYN1-BLOCK is received.

Figure 6: is a simplified logic diagram of the internal voltage selectionfunction. All input signals can be find above. The voltage selection func-tion requires an extra I/O-module.

The internal resulting signal UENERG1OK is further used by the internalenergising check function as a condition to release an xxxENERG 1 out-put. See Figure 7: for a simplified logic diagram of the energising check.

The output signals, AUTOENERG 1 and MANENERG 1, from the ener-gising check is dependent of the actual parameter settings. These signalsare further connected to the main synchro-check. See Figure 8:.


1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 139

Version 2.2-00

Figure 6: Simplified logic diagram - Voltage selection

SYN1-FD1OPENSYN1-FD1CLD

SYNx-UF1FF

SYN1-VTSU

1V

UENERG1OK

SYNx-UF1OK

&

&

&

&

SYN1-VSUF1

SYN1-VSUF2

ULx

U4

SYN1-U-LINE

To energisingcheck Figure 7:SYN1-CB1OPEN

SYN1-CB1CLD &

&

SYNx-UB1FFSYNx-UB1OK &

&

1V 1V

&

&

&&

1V

SYN1-VSUB1

SYN1-VSUB2


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 140

Figure 7: Simplified logic diagram - Energising check

.

Figure 8: Simplified logic diagram - Synchrocheck

t

&1V

OFFBothDLLBDBLL


50ms

&& AUTOENERG 1

UB Low

UENERG1OK

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

ManEnerg.

AutoEnerg.

1V 1V t0.00-60.0s

&1V

&& MANENERG 11V

1V

t0.00-60.0s

&OFFON

1V

ManDBDL

t50ms

From voltage selection Figure 6:

To synchrocheckFigure 8:

t& 1V

UDiff

OPERATIONOFF

RELEASEON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

FreqDiff

PhaseDiff

AUTOENERG1MANENERG1

50ms

&

&

&

1V

SYN1

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

From energisingcheck Figure 7:


1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 141

Version 2.2-00

3 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the local HMI. The parame-ters for the synchrocheck function are found in the HMI tree under:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n = 1..4)SynchroCheck

SynchroCheck1

Comments regarding settings:





3.2 Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can besingle-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phase-phase).

Note! Only available in terminals intended for one bay.

3.3 UMeasure Selection of single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phase (phase-phase)measurement.

Note! Only available in terminals intended for several bays.


3.5 URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the set-ting, is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if desired to con-nect the UBus as phase-phase and the ULine as phase-neutral. The Inputphase -setting should then be set to phase-phase and the URatio-setting tosqr(3) (=1.732). This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level withthe bus voltage.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 142



Off The energising function is Off.

DLLB The line voltage U-line is dead (low), below (10-80%U1b) and the bus voltage U-bus is live (high), above (70-100% U1b).

DBLL The bus voltage U-bus is dead (low), below (10-80%U1b) and the line voltage U-line is live (high), above (70-100% U1b).




3.7 ManDBDL If the parameter is set to On, closing is enabled when Both U-Line and U-bus are below ULow and ManEnerg is set to DLLB, DBLL or Both.


1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 143

Version 2.2-00



• ManEnerg = Off


The tests explained under “Synchrocheck tests” on page 143 describe thesettings, which can be used as references during testing. They are pre-sented before the final settings are specified. After testing, restore theequipment to the normal or desired settings.

4.1 Test equipment A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase angleby regulation of the resistive and reactive components is needed. Here, thephase angle meter is also needed. To perform an accurate test of the fre-quency difference, a frequency generator at one of the input voltages isneeded. The tests can also be performed with the computer-aided test sys-tem FREJA, which has a specially designed program for evaluating thesynchro-check function.Figure 9: shows the general test connection principle, which can be usedduring testing.





Set the voltage difference at 30% of U1b on the local HMI, and the test shouldcheck that operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiff is lowerthan 30% of U1b.

Testequipment

U-Bus

U-Line

N

U-Bus

N

UL1UL2UL3N


UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

REx 5xx


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 144




These settings can be used during the test if the final setting is not deter-mined:

1 Set these parameters, which are found in the local HMI under:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n = 1..4)SynchroCheck

SynchroCheck1

2 Test with UDiff = 0%• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% of U1b and U-Bus (U5) = 80% of

U1b with no frequency or phase difference.



3 Test with UDiff = 40%


Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45 deg

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 145

Version 2.2-00

• Increase the U-bus (U5) to 120% of U1b, and the U-line (UL1) = 80% of U1b with no frequency nor phase difference.


4 Test with UDiff = 20%, Uline < UHigh• Decrease the U-line (UL1) to 60% of U1b and the U-bus (U5) to be

equal to 80% of U1b.


5 Test with URatio=0.20• Run the test under section 2 to 4 but with the U-bus voltages one

fifth of before.

6 Test with URatio=5.00• Run the test under section 2 to 4 but with the U-line voltages one

fifth of before.


The phase difference is set at 45° on the local HMI, and the test shouldverify that operation is achieved when the PhaseDiff (phase difference) islower than 45°.

1 Set these parameters accordingly:

2 Test with PhaseDiff = 0°


Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45 deg

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 146

Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 100% of U1b and U-bus (U5) = 100% ofU1b, with no frequency or phase difference.Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs areactivated.

By changing the phase angle on U1 connected to U-bus, between +/-45° enables to check that the two outputs are activated for a PhaseDifflower than 45°. It should not operate for other values. See Figure 10:.


4 Apply a PhaseShift setting of 10 deg. Change the phase anglebetween +55° and -35° and verify that the two outputs are activatedfor phase differences between these values but not for phase differ-ences outside. See Figure 11:.

Change the PhaseShift setting to 350 deg. Change the phase anglebetween +35° and -55° and verify as above.

Figure 11: Test of shifted phase difference.

+45o

-45o

No operation

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus

+55o

-35o

No operation

U-bus

U-line operation

U-bus



1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 147

Version 2.2-00


The frequency difference is set at 50 mHz on the local HMI, and the testshould verify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiff frequency dif-ference is lower than 50 mHz.

1 Use the same settings as under “Test of phase difference” above.

2 Test with FreqDiff = 0 mHzApply voltages U-Line (UL1) equal to 100% of U1b and U-Bus (U5)equal to 100% of U1b, with a frequency difference equal to 0 mHzand a phase difference lower than 45°. Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activated.

3 Test with FreqDiff = 1HzApply voltage to the U-line (UL1) equal to 100% of U1b with a fre-quency equal to 50 Hz and voltage U-bus (U5) equal to 100% of U1b,with a frequency equal to 49 Hz.Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.


Note!! A frequency difference also implies a floating mutual-phase dif-ference. So the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs might NOT be stable, even though the frequency difference is within set lim-its, because the phase difference is not stable!


1 Use the same basic test connection as in Figure 9:. The UDiff betweenthe voltage connected to U-bus and U-line should be 0%, so that theSYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activated first.Change the U-Line voltage connection to UL2 without changing thesetting on the HMICheck that the two outputs are NOT activated.






4.3.1 Dead-line-live-bus (DLLB)


Use these settings during the test if the final setting is not determined.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 148

1 Set these parameters accordingly:

2 Apply a single-phase voltage 100% of U1b to the U-bus (U5), and asingle-phase voltage 30% of U1b to the U-line (UL1).


4 Increase the U-Line (UL1) to 60% of U1b and U-Bus(U5) to be equalto 100% of U1b. The outputs should NOT be activated.


4.3.2 Dead-bus-live-line (DBLL)

The test should verify that the energising function operates for a low volt-age on the U-bus and for high voltage on the U-line. This corresponds toan energising of a dead bus from a live line.

1 Change the settings of AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to DBLL.

2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% of U1b to the U-bus (U5) and a single-phase voltage of 100% of U1b to the U-line (UL1).


Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg DLLB

ManEnerg DLLB

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45 deg

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s


1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 149

Version 2.2-00


4 Decrease the U-line to 60% of U1b and keep the U-bus equal to of30% U1b.The outputs should NOT be activated.



1 Change the settings of AutoEnerg and ManEnerg to Both.

2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% of U1b to the U-line (UL1) anda single-phase voltage of 100% of U1b to the U-bus (U5).


4 Change the connection so that the U-line (UL1) is equal to 100% ofU1b and the U-bus (U5) is equal to 30% of U1b.




4.3.4 Dead-bus-dead-line (DBDL)

The test should verify that the energising function operates for a low volt-age on both the U-bus the U-line, i.e closing of the breaker in a non-ener-gised system.


Set ManDBDL to On.

2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% of U1b to the U-bus (U5) and asingle-phase voltage of 30% of U1b to the U-line (UL1).


4 Increase the U-bus to 80% of U1b and keep the U-lineequal to 30% of U1b.


5 The test can be repeated with the ManEnerg set to DLLB and Both,and using different values on the U-bus and the U-line.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 150

5 Appendix

5.1 Function blockSYN1

SYN1-

BLOCK

VTSUUB1FFUB1OKUB2FFUB2OKUF1FFUF1OKUF2FFUF2OK

START

CB1OPENCB1CLDCB2OPENCB2CLDCB3OPENCB3CLDFD1OPENFD1CLDFD2OPENFD2CLD

AUTOOKMANOK

VSUB1VSUB2VSUF1VSUF2

INPROGRCLOSECB

TESTCB


1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 151

Version 2.2-00

5.2 Signal list


SYN1- BLOCK IN Block of synchro-check function 1

SYN1- CB1CLD IN Breaker section 1 closed

SYN1- CB1OPEN IN Breaker section 1 open





SYN1- FD1CLD IN Feeder disconnector 1 closed

SYN1- FD1OPEN IN Feeder disconnector 1 open

SYN1- FD2CLD IN Feeder disconnector 2 closed

SYN1- FD2OPEN IN Feeder disconnector 2 open

SYN1- START IN Initiate phasing operation

SYN1- UB1FF IN External voltage fuse failure, bus 1

SYN1- UB1OK IN External voltage fuse healthy, bus 1

SYN1- UB2FF IN External voltage fuse failure, bus 2

SYN1- UB2OK IN External voltage fuse healthy, bus 2

SYN1- UF1FF IN External voltage fuse failure, feeder 1

SYN1- UF1OK IN External voltage fuse healthy, feeder 1

SYN1- UF2FF IN External voltage fuse failure, feeder 2

SYN1- UF2OK IN External voltage fuse healthy, feeder 2

SYN1- VTSU IN Block from internal fuse failure supervision or from external fuse failure of the line voltage.

SYN1- AUTOOK OUT Automatic synchronism/Energising check OK

SYN1- CLOSECB OUT Close circuit breaker pulse

SYN1- INPROGR OUT Phasing operation in progress

SYN1- MANOK OUT Manual synchronism/energising check OK

SYN1- TESTCB OUT Close circuit breaker test output

SYN1- VSUB1 OUT Voltage selection from bus 1

SYN1- VSUB2 OUT Voltage selection from bus 2

SYN1- VSUF1 OUT Voltage selection from feeder 1

SYN1- VSUF2 OUT Voltage selection from feeder 2


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 364-XENPage 6 – 152

5.3 Setting table



Off Synchro-check function Off/Release/On







Single-Bus






ManDBDL Off, On Off Manual dead-bus and dead-line energising








Operation-Synch

Off, On Off Phasing function Off/On

ShortPulse Off, On Off Short pulse Off/On

FreqDiff-Synch

0.05-0.50 Hz 00.30 Frequency diff limit for phasing

tPulse 0.000-60.000 s 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration

tBreaker 0.02-0.50 s 0.20 Closing time of the breaker

Page 6 – 153Phasing, synchro- and energising check, single CB

1 Application

1.1 Phasing The phasing function is used to close a circuit breaker when two asyn-chronous systems are going to be connected. The breaker close commandis issued at the optimum time when conditions across the breaker are sat-isfied in order to avoid stress on the network and its components.

The systems are defined to be asynchronous when the frequency differ-ence between bus and line is larger than an adjustable parameter. If thefrequency difference is less than this threshold value the system is definedto have a parallel circuit and the synchro-check function is used.

The phasing function measures the difference between the U-line and theU-bus. It operates and issues a closing command to the circuit breakerwhen the calculated closing angle is equal to the measured phase angleand these conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.


• The difference in the voltage is smaller than the set value of UDiff.

• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiff-Synch and larger than the set value of FreqDiff. If the frequency is less than FreqDiff the synchro-check is used. The bus and line fre-quencies must also be within a range of ±5 Hz from the rated fre-quency.

• The frequency rate of change is less than 0.21 Hz/s for both U-bus and U-line.

• The closing angle is less than approx. 60 degrees.

The phasing function compensates for measured slip frequency as well asthe circuit breaker closing delay. The phase advance is calculated continu-ously by the following formula:

(Equation 1)

Closing angle is the change in angle during breaker closing delay.

Closing angle 360° Meas. freq. diff. tBreaker⋅ ⋅=

1MRK 580 365-XEN


Phasing, synchro- and energising check, single CB

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 154

Figure 1: Phasing.

1.2 Synchrocheck The synchrocheck function is used for controlled closing of a circuit in aninterconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal atsatisfied voltage conditions across the breaker to be closed. When there isa parallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the same at thetwo sides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, anoscillating difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be aphase angle and a voltage amplitude difference due to voltage drop acrossthe parallel circuit or circuits. The synchrocheck function measures thedifference between the U-line and the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff),phase angle (PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and per-mits closing of the circuit breaker when these conditions are simulta-neously fulfilled.





SYN 1

UHigh>70-100% UrUDiff<5-60% Ur

PhaseDiff<60o

FreqDiffSynch<50-500mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail


U-LineU-Bus

|dFbus/dt|,|dFline/dt|<0.21Hz/s

Fbus, Fline = Fr


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 155

Version 2.2-00

Figure 2: Synchrocheck.

The reference voltage can be single-phase L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the samephase or phases as are chosen on the HMI. Figure 3: shows the voltageconnection.

Figure 3: Connection of the phasing and synchrocheck function for one bay.

SYN 1


FreqDiff<50-300mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail


U-LineU-Bus

U-Line

U-Bus

UL1

UL2

UL3

UN

U

UN

AD

L1,L2,L3

L12,L23

L31

ϕ

U

f

SYN1AUTOOK

SYN1MANOK

HMISetting

dF/dtSYN1CLOSECB


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 156



The voltage level considered to be a non-energised bus or line is set on theHMI. An energising can occur — depending on the set direction of theenergising function. There are separate setable limits for energised (live)condition, UHigh, and non-energised (dead) ULow conditions. The equip-ment is considered energised if the voltage is above the set value UHigh(e.g. 80% of base voltage), and non-energised if it is below the set value,ULow (e.g. 30% of the base voltage). The user can set the UHigh condi-tion between 70-100% U1b and the ULow condition between 10-80%U1b.








U-Bus U-Line


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 157

Version 2.2-00


1.4 Voltage selection The voltage selection function is used for the phasing and synchronism(SYN1) and energising check functions. When the terminal is used in adouble bus, the voltage that should be selected depends on the positions ofthe breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the position of the discon-nectors and/or breakers auxiliary contacts, the terminal can select the rightvoltage for the synchronism and energising function. Select the type ofvoltage selection from the Synchro-check, Uselection, SingleBus or Dble-Bus on the HMI.

The configuration of internal signal inputs and outputs may be differentfor different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substa-tion must be done during engineering of the terminal.

Figure 5: Voltage connection in a single busbar arrangement.

1.4.1 Voltage selection for a single busbar

Single bus is selected on the HMI. Figure 5: shows the principle for theconnection arrangement. For the phasing, synchrocheck (SYN1) and ener-gising check function, there is one voltage transformer at each side of thecircuit breaker. The voltage transformer circuit connections are straightforward, no special voltage selection is needed.

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1

SYNCH VOLT SELECTION I/O BI AISYN1

U5

ULX(1)

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF1

FUSEUB1FUSEF1 F1


U5

ULX(1)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 158

For the phasing, synchrocheck and energising check, the voltage fromBus 1 (SYN1-U-Bus) is connected to the single phase analogue input(U5) on the terminal unit.

Fuse failure and Voltage OK signalsThe external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuseswitch/MCB are connected to binary inputs configured to inputs of thesynchrocheck functions in the terminal. There are two alternative connec-tion possibilities. Inputs named OK must be supplied if the voltage circuitis healthy. Inputs named FF must be supplied if the voltage circuit isfaulty.

The SYN1-UB1OK and SYN1-UB1FF inputs are related to the busbarvoltage. Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of theexternal fuse failure of the busbar voltage. The SYN1-VTSU input isrelated to the line voltage from each line.


In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line check) is blockedvia the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).

Figure 6: Voltage selection in a double bus arrangement.

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1


U5

ULX

U-Bus

U-Line

1CB11CB2

1CB1

FUSEF1

SYN1_CB1OPEN/CLDSYN1_CB2OPEN/CLD

U5

ULX

Bus 2

U-Bus 2U4

1CB2

U4

VOLT. SEL1

FUSEUB1FUSEUB2



FUSEF1SYN1_VTSU


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 159

Version 2.2-00

1.4.2 Voltage selection for a double bus

Select DbleBus on the HMI. Figure 6: shows the principle for theconnection arrangement. For the phasing and synchrocheck (SYN1) andenergising check function, the voltages on the two busbars are selected byvoltage selection (VOLT.SEL1) in the terminal unit. The bus voltage fromBus 1 is fed to the U5 analogue single-phase input, and the bus voltagefrom Bus 2 is fed to the U4 analogue single-phase input. The line voltagetransformers are connected as a three-phase voltage UL1, UL2, UL3(ULx) to the input U-line.

The selection of the bus voltage is made by checking the position of thedisconnectors’ auxiliary contacts connected via binary inputs of the voltageselection logic inputs, SYN1-CB1OPEN (Disconnector section 1 open),SYN1-CB1CLD (Disconnector section 1 closed) and SYN1-CB2OPEN(Disconnector section 2 open), SYN1-CB2CLD (Disconnector section 2closed).



The SYN1-UB1(2)OK and SYN1-UB1(2)FF inputs are related to eachbusbar voltage. The SYN1-VTSU input is related to each line voltage.Configure them to the binary inputs that indicate the status of the externalfuse failure of the busbar respectively the line voltage. Only the fuse fail-ure of a selected voltage causes a blocking of the relevant energisingcheck unit.


In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line check) is blockedvia the inputs (SYN1-UB1OK/FF, SYN1-UB2OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 160



2.1 In- and output signals Description of input and output signals for the phasing and synchrocheckfunction.


SYN1-BLOCK General block input from any external condition, that should block the phasing and thesynchrocheck.

SYN1-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-inoptional fuse failure detection. It can also be

FreqDiffSynch

PhaseDiff

|dFbus/dt|

UHigh

<

<

<

>

50-500 mHz

60 deg

0.21 Hz/s

70-100 %

SYN1-VTSU

SYN1-BLOCK

SYN1

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

Connectable

From fuse failure

inputs

detection, lineside(external or internal)

Connectableoutputs

General Block SYN1-TESTCB

SYN1-CLOSECB

SYN1-INPROGR


<<<><

50-300 mHz5-75 deg5-60 %70-100 %10-80 %

|dFbus/dt| < 0.21 Hz/s

UDiff < 5-60 %

Fbus,Fline = Fr ± 5 Hz

SYN1-START

Phasing

Phasing and synchrocheck

Synchrocheck


Initiate Phasingoperation


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 161

Version 2.2-00

connected to external condition for fuse failure.This is a blocking condition for the energisingfunction.

SYN1-START The signal initiates the phasing operation. Wheninitiated the function continues until the SYN1-CLOSECB pulse is submitted or it is stopped bythe SYN1-BLOCK signal. In test mode (SYN1-TESTCB) ends the phasing operation.


SYN1-TESTCB Output when the function is in test mode. In test mode a complete phasing sequence is per-formed except for closing of the circuit breaker. The output signal SYN1-TESTCB indicates when the SYN1-CLOSECB signal would have been submitted from the phasing function or when the conditions for paralleling are fulfilled, from the synchro-check function

SYN1-CLOSECB Close breaker command from phasing. Used to the circuit breaker or to be connected to the auto-reclosing function.

SYN1-INPROGR The signal is high when a phasing operation is in progress, i.e from the moment a SYN1-START is received until the operation is termi-nated. The operation is teminated when SYN1-CLOSECB or SYN1-TESTCB has been sub-mitted or if a SYN1-BLOCK is received.

SYN1-AUTOOK Synchrocheck/energising OK. The output signal is high when the synchro-check conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energising condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the autorecloser before closing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.

SYN1-MANOK Same as above but with alternative settings of the direction for energising to be used during manual closing of the circuit breaker.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 162

Figure 8: Simplified voltage selection logic in a double bus, single breaker arrangement.

Description of the input and output signals shown in the above simplifiedlogic diagrams for voltage selection:

Input signal Description

SYN1-CB1OPEN Disconnector section 1 of Bay 1 open. Con-nected to the auxiliary contacts of a disconnec-tor section in a double-bus, single breakerarrangement, to inform the voltage selectionabout the positions.

SYN1-CB1CLD Disconnector section 1 of Bay 1 closed. Con-nected to the auxiliary contacts of a disconnectorsection in a double-bus, single breaker arrange-ment to inform the voltage selection about thepositions.

SYN1-CB2OPEN Same as above but for disconnector section 2.

SYN1-CB2CLD Same as above but for disconnector section 2.

SYN1-UB1FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltageBus 1 (U5). This signal can come from atripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondaryside of the voltage transformer. In case of a fusefailure, the energising check is blocked.

SYN1-UB1OK No external voltage fuse failure (U5). Invertedsignal.

SYN1-UB2FF External fuse failure input from busbar voltageBus 2 (U4). This signal can come from atripped fuse switch (MCB) on the secondaryside of the voltage transformer. In case of fusefailure, the energising check is blocked.

1V

SYN1-CB1OPENSYN1-CB1CLD

SYN1-CB2OPEN

1V

SYN1-CB2CLD

SYN1-UB1FF

SYN1-VTSU

1V

UENERG1OKSYN1-UB1OK

SYN1-UB2FFSYN1-UB2OK

&

&

&

&

&

SYN1-VSUB1

SYN1-VSUB2

U5

U4

SYN1-U-BUS

To energising checkFigure 11:


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 163

Version 2.2-00

SYN1-UB2OK No external voltage fuse failure (U4). Invertedsignal.

SYN1-VTSU Internal fuse failure detection or configured to abinary input indicating external fuse failure ofthe UL1, UL2, UL3 line-side voltage. Blocksthe energising function.


SYN1-VSUB1 Signal for indication of voltage selection fromBus 1 voltage.

SYN1-VSUB2 Signal for indication of voltage selection fromBus 1 voltage.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 164

Figure 9: Simplified logic diagram - Phasing

t&

UDiff

OPERATION SYNCHOFFON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

PhaseDiff < 60 deg

50ms

&

&

SYN1

SYN1-INPROGR

SYN1-CLOSECB

SYN1-START

SYN1-TESTCB

dF/dt Bus

dF/dt Line

Fbus 5 Hz

FreqDiffSynch

±

Fline 5 Hz±

PhaseDiff=Closing angle

&

TEST MODEOFFON

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

FreqDiff

1V

&tPulse

&

1V

&1V

&

1V

& SR

From energising- and synchro-

check (Figure 10:)


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 165

Version 2.2-00


t& 1V

UDiff

OPERATIONOFF

RELEASEON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

FreqDiff

PhaseDiff

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1

50ms

&

&

&

1V

SYN1

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

From energisingcheck, figure 11.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 166

Figure 11: Simplified logic diagram - Energising check

t

&1V

OFFBothDLLBDBLL


50ms

&& AUTOENERG 1

UB Low

UENERG1OK

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

ManEnerg.

AutoEnerg.

1V 1V t0.00-60.0s

&1V

&& MANENERG 11V

1V

t0.00-60.0s


&OFFON

1V

ManDBDL

t50ms

To synchrocheck,figure 10.


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 167

Version 2.2-00

3 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the phasing and synchrocheck function are found in the MMI treeunder:

SettingsFunctions

Group n (n=1-4)SynchroCheck

SynchroCheck1

3.1 Operation Off The synchrocheck function is off and theoutput is low.


On The synchro-check function is in service andthe output signal depends on the input condi-tions.

3.2 Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be ofa single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase).


3.4 URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the set-ting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if wished to con-nect the UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral. The “Input phase”-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the “URatio”-setting tosqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with thebus voltage.

3.5 USelection Selection of single or double bus voltage-selection logic.



Off The energising condition is not used, only the synchro-check.



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 168






3.8 OperationSynch Off The phasing function is off and all outputsare low.

On The phasing function is in service and theoutput signals depends on the input condi-tions.

3.9 ShortPulse Off The closing pulse issued to the circuitbreaker will be of length=tPulse.

On The closing pulse issued to the circuitbreaker will be of length=one cycle time inthe internal logic.


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 169

Version 2.2-00



• ManEnerg = Off


The tests explained in section “Synchrocheck tests” on page 171 describethe settings, which can be used as references during testing, are presentedbefore the final settings are specified. After testing, restore the equipmentto the normal or desired settings.

4.1 Test equipment A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase angleby regulation of the resistive and reactive components is needed. Here, thephase angle meter is also needed. To perform an accurate test of the fre-quency difference, a frequency generator at one of the input voltages isneeded. The tests can also be performed with the computer-aided test sys-tem FREJA.

FREJA has a specially designed program for evaluating the synchro-check function. Figure 12: shows the general test connection principle,which can be used during testing. This description describes the test of theversion intended for one bay.

Figure 12: General test connection for phasing and synchrocheck with three-phase voltage connected to the line side.

Testequipment

U-Bus

U-Line

N

U-Bus

N

UL1UL2UL3N


UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

REx 5xx


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 170

4.2 Phasing tests These voltage inputs are used:





SettingsFunctions


SynchroCheck1

Table 1: Test settings for phasing

Parameter: Setting:

Operation Off

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch On

ShortPulse Off

FreqDiffSynch 0.40 Hz

tPulse 0.20 s

tBreaker 0.20 s


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 171

Version 2.2-00


The frequency difference is set at 0.40 Hz on the HMI, and the test shouldverify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiffSynch frequency dif-ference is lower than 0.40 Hz.

• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b, f-line=50.0 Hz and U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b, f-bus=50.3 Hz

• Check that a closing pulse is submitted with length=0.20 sec. and at closing angle=360 * 0.20 * 0.40=29 deg

• Repeat with U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b, f-bus=50.5 Hz to verify that the function doesn’t operate when freq.diff is above limit.

• Repeat with different settings on tBreaker and FreqDiffSynch. Make sure that the calculated closing angle is less than 60 deg. Verify that closing command is issued at the correct phase angle when the fre-quency difference is less than the set value.



Set the voltage difference at 30% U1b on the HMI, and the test should checkthat operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiff is lower than30% U1b.






SettingsFunctions


SynchroCheck1


Parameter: Setting:

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 172

2 Test with UDiff = 0%• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b and U-Bus (U5) = 80%

U1b.




U1b.



equal to 80% U1b.



lower.


lower.



ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s



1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 173

Version 2.2-00


2 Test with PhaseDiff = 0° Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 100% U1b and U-bus (U5) = 100% U1b,with a phase difference equal to 0° and a frequency difference that islower than 50 mHz.Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs areactivated.

3 The test can be repeated with other PhaseDiff values to verify that thefunction operates for values lower than the set ones. By changing thephase angle on U1 connected to U-bus, between +/- 45°. The usercan check that the two outputs are activated for a PhaseDiff lowerthan 45°. It should not operate for other values. See Figure 13:.


PARAMETER: SETTING:

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

ManDBDL Off

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 174





+45o

-45o

No operation

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus

+55o

-35o

No operation

U-bus

U-line operation

U-bus



1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 175

Version 2.2-00


The frequency difference is set at 50 mHz on the HMI, and the test shouldverify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiff frequency differenceis lower than 50 mHz.



3 Test with FreqDiff = 1HzApply voltage to the U-line (UL1) equal to 100% U1b with a fre-quency equal to 50 Hz and voltage U-bus (U5) equal to 100% U1b,with a frequency equal to 49 Hz.Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.


Note! A frequency difference also implies a floating mutual-phase dif-ference. So the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs mightNOT be stable, even though the frequency difference is within set limits,because the phase difference is not stable!


1 Use the same basic test connection as in Figure 12:. The UDiffbetween the voltage connected to U-bus and U-line should be 0%, sothat the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activatedfirst.Change the U-Line voltage connection to UL2 without changing thesetting on the HMICheck that the two outputs are NOT activated.









Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 176








Parameter: Setting:

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00


AutoEnerg DLLB

ManEnerg DLLB

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 177

Version 2.2-00












4 Change the connection so that the U-line (UL1) is equal to100% U1band the U-bus (U5) is equal to 30% U1b.







Set ManDBDL to On.




Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 178

4 Increase the U-bus to 80% U1b and keep the U-lineequal to 30% U1b.The outputs should NOT be activated.


4.4.5 Test of voltage selection

This test should verify that the correct voltage is selected for the measure-ment in the energising function used in a double-bus arrangement. Applya single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-line (UL1) and a single-phasevoltage of 100% U1b to the U-bus (U5).

If the SYN1-UB1/2OK inputs for the fuse failure are used, normally theymust be activated, thus activated and deactivated must be inverted in thedescription of tests below.


Table 5: Test settings for voltage selection

Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1

USelection DbleBus

PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Both

ManEnerg Both

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 179

Version 2.2-00

2 Connect the signals below to binary inputs and binary outputs. Applysignals according to the table and verify that correct output signals aregenerated.

Table 6: Signals

VO

LT

AG

E F

RO

M

BU

S1

U5

VO

LT

AG

E F

RO

M

BIN

AR

Y IN

PU

TS

CB

1OP

EN

CB

1CL

D

CB

2OP

EN

CB

2CL

D

UB

1FF

UB

2FF

VT

SU

BIN

AR

Y O

UT

PU

TS

AU

TO

OK

MA

NO

K

VS

UB

1

VS

UB

2

1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 01 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 01 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 00 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 10 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 180

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

SYN1

SYN

BLOCKFD1OPENFD1CLDCB1OPEN

AUTOOKMANOK

CB1CLDCB2OPENCB2CLDUB1FFUB1OKUB2FFUB2OKVTSU

VSUB1VSUB2

START

TESTCBCLOSECBINPROGR



SYNx- FD1OPEN IN Feeder disconnector 1 open

SYNx- FD1CLD IN Feeder disconnector 1 closed










SYNx- START IN Initiate phasing operation

SYNx- AUTOOK OUT Automatic synchronism/energising check OK




SYNx- TESTCB OUT Close circuit breaker test output

SYNx- CLOSECB OUT Close circuit breaker pulse

SYNx- INPROGR OUT Phasing operation in progress


1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 181

Version 2.2-00

5.3 Setting table










Single-Bus














Operation-Synch



FreqDiff-Synch





Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 365-XENPage 6 – 182

Page 6 – 183Phasing, synchro- and energising check, double CBs

1 Application

1.1 Phasing The phasing function is used to close a circuit breaker when two asyn-chronous systems are going to be connected. The close breaker commandis issued at the optimum time when conditions across the breaker are sat-isfied in order to avoid stress on the network and its components.

The systems are defined to be asynchronous when the frequency differ-ence between bus and line is larger than an adjustable parameter. If thefrequency difference is less than this treshold value the system is definedto have a parallel circuit and the synchro-check function is used.

The phasing function measures the difference between the U-line and theU-bus. It operates and issues a closing command to the circuit breakerwhen the calculated closing angle is equal to the measured phase angleand these conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.


• The difference in the voltage is smaller than the set value of UDiff.

• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiff-Synch and larger than the set value of FreqDiff. If the frequency is less than FreqDiff the synchro-check is used. The bus and line fre-quencies must also be within a range of ±5 Hz from the rated fre-quency.

• The frequency rate of change is less than 0.21 Hz/s for both U-bus and U-line.

• The closing angle is less than approx. 60 degrees.

The phasing function compensates for measured slip frequency as well asthe circuit breaker closing delay. The phase advance is calculated continu-ously by the following formula:

(Equation 1)

Closing angle is the change in angle during breaker closing delay.

Closing angle 360° Meas. freq. diff. tBreaker⋅ ⋅=

1MRK 580 366-XEN


Phasing, synchro- and energising check, double CBs

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 184

Figure 1: Phasing.

1.2 Synchrocheck The synchrocheck function is used for controlled closing of a circuit in aninterconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal atsatisfied voltage conditions across the breaker to be closed. When there isa parallel circuit established, the frequency is normally the same at thetwo sides of the open breaker. At power swings, e.g. after a line fault, anoscillating difference can appear. Across the open breaker, there can be aphase angle and a voltage amplitude difference due to voltage drop acrossthe parallel circuit or circuits. The synchrocheck function measures thedifference between the U-line and the U-bus, regarding voltage (UDiff),phase angle (PhaseDiff), and frequency (FreqDiff). It operates and per-mits closing of the circuit breaker when these conditions are simulta-neously fulfilled.




The function can be used as a condition to be fulfilled before the breakeris closed at manual closing and/or together with the autorecloser function.

SYN 1

UHigh>70-100% UrUDiff<5-60% Ur

PhaseDiff<60o

FreqDiffSynch<50-500mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail


U-LineU-Bus

|dFbus/dt|,|dFline/dt|<0.21 Hz/s

Fbus, Fline = Fr 5 Hz±


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 185

Version 2.2-00



The reference voltage can be single-phase L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The U-bus voltage must then be connected to the samephase or phases as are chosen on the HMI. Figure 3: shows the voltageconnection.

SYN 1


FreqDiff<50-300mHz

Fuse fail

Fuse fail


U-LineU-Bus


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 186

Figure 3: Connection of the phasing and synchrocheck function for one bay.

U-Line

U-Bus 1

UL1

UL2

UL3

UN

U

UN

AD

L1,L2,L3L12,L23L31

SYN1AUTOOK

SYN1MANOK

HMISetting

U-Bus 2U

UNL1,L2,L3L12,L23L31SYN2

AUTOOK

SYN2MANOK

HMISetting

SYN1

SYN2

ϕ

U

f

dF/dt

ϕ

U

f

dF/dt

SYN1CLOSECB

SYN2CLOSECB

U5

U4


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 187

Version 2.2-00



The voltage level considered to be a non-energised bus or line is set on theHMI. An energising can occur — depending on the set direction of theenergising function. There are separate settable limits for energised (live)condition, UHigh, and non-energised (dead) ULow conditions. The equip-ment is considered energised if the voltage is above the set value UHigh(e.g. 80% of base voltage), and non-energised if it is below the set value,ULow (e.g. 30% of the base voltage) The user can set the UHigh condi-tion between 70-100% U1b and the ULow condition between 10-80%U1b.








U-Bus U-Line


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 188


Figure 5: Voltage connection in a double busbar double breaker arrangement.

1.4 Voltage connection The princip for the connection arrangement is shown in Figure 5:. Oneterminal unit is used for the two circuit breakers in one bay. There is onevoltage transformer at each side of the circuit breaker, and the voltagetransformer circuit connections are straight forward, without any specialvoltage selection.For the synchrocheck and energising check, the voltage from Bus 1(SYN1-U-bus) is connected to the single-phase analogue input (U5) onthe terminal and the voltage from Bus 2 (SYN2-U-bus) is connected to thesingle-phase analogue input (U4).

The line voltage transformers are connected as a three-phase voltage tothe analogue inputs UL1, UL2, UL3 (SYN1(2)-U-Line) voltage.

The synchronism condition is set on the HMI of the terminal unit, and thevoltage is taken from Bus 1 and the Line or from Bus 2 and the Line (U-line). This means that the two synchro-check units are operating withoutany special voltage selection, but with the same line (U-line) voltage.

The configuration of internal signals, inputs, and outputs may be differentfor different busbar systems, and the actual configuration for the substa-tion must be done during engineering of the terminal.

Bus 1 Bay 1

U-Bus 1

U-Line 1


U5

ULX

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB1FUSEF1

FUSEUB1

FUSEF1 F1


U5

ULX

Bus 2

U-Bus 2U4

SYN2

U4

ULX

U-Bus

U-Line

FUSEUB2FUSEF1


FUSEUB2


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 189

Version 2.2-00





In case of a fuse failure, the energising check (dead line- check) is blockedvia the input (SYN1-UB1OK/FF or SYN1-VTSU).


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 190



2.1 Input and output signals

Description of input and output signals for the phasing and synchro-checkfunction.


SYNx-BLOCK General block input from any external condition, that should block the phasing and the syn-chrocheck.

SYNx-VTSU The SYNC function cooperates with the FUSE-VTSU connected signal, which is the built-in optional fuse failure detection. It can also be

FreqDiffSynch

PhaseDiff

|dFbus/dt|

UHigh

<

<

<

>

50-500 mHz

60 deg

0.21 Hz/s

70-100 %

SYNx-VTSU

SYNx-BLOCK

SYNx

SYNx-AUTOOK

SYNx-MANOK

Connectable

From fuse failure

inputs

detection, lineside(external or internal)

Connectableoutputs

General block SYNx-TESTCB

SYNx-CLOSECB

SYNx-INPROGR


<<<><

50-300 mHz5-75 deg5-60 %70-100 %10-80 %

|dFbus/dt| < 0.21 Hz/s

UDiff < 5-60 %


Phasing

Phasing and synchrocheck

Synchrocheck


x = 1 or 2

Initiate phasingoperation SYNx-START


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 191

Version 2.2-00

connected to external condition for fuse failure. This is a blocking condition for the energising function.



SYNx-START The signal initiates the phasing operation. Wheninitiated the function continues until the SYNx-CLOSECB pulse is submitted or it is stopped bythe SYNx-BLOCK signal. In test mode SYNx-TESTCB ends the phasing operation.


SYNx-TESTCB Output when the function is in test mode. In test mode a complete phasing sequence is per-formed except for closing of the circuit breaker. The output signal SYNx-TESTCB indicates when the SYNx-CLOSECB signal would have been submitted from the phasing function or when the conditions for paralleling are fulfilled, from the synchro-check function.

SYNx-CLOSECB Close breaker command from phasing. Used to control the circuit breaker or to be connected to the auto-reclosing function.

SYNx-INPROGR The signal is high when a phasing operation is in progress, i.e from the moment a SYNx-START is received until the operation is termi-nated. The operation is teminated when SYNx-CLOSECB or SYNx-TESTCB has been sub-mitted or if a SYNx-BLOCK is received.

SYNx-AUTOOK Synchrocheck/energising OK. The output signal is high when the synchrocheck conditions set on the HMI are fulfilled. It can also include the energising condition, if selected. The signal can be used to release the autorecloser before closing attempt of the circuit breaker. It can also be used as a free signal.



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 192

Figure 7: Simplified logic diagram - Phasing

t&

UDiff

OPERATION SYNCHOFFON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

PhaseDiff < 60 deg

50ms

&

&

SYN1

SYN1-INPROGR

SYN1-CLOSECB

SYN1-START

SYN1-TESTCB

dF/dt Bus

dF/dt Line

Fbus 5 Hz

FreqDiffSynch

±

Fline 5 Hz±

PhaseDiff=Closing angle

&

TEST MODEOFFON

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

FreqDiff

1V

&tPulse

&

1V

&1V

&

1V

& SR

From energising and synchro-

check (Figure 8:)


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 193

Version 2.2-00


t& 1V

UDiff

OPERATIONOFF

RELEASEON

SYN1-BLOCK

UBusHigh

ULineHigh

FreqDiff

PhaseDiff

AUTOENERG1

MANENERG1

50ms

&

&

&

1V

SYN1

SYN1-AUTOOK

SYN1-MANOK

From energisingcheck, figure 9


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 194

Figure 9: Simplified logic diagram - Energising check.

t

&1V

OFFBothDLLBDBLL


50ms

&& AUTOENERG 1

UB Low

UENERG1OK

OFFBothDLLBDBLL

ManEnerg.

AutoEnerg.

1V 1V t0.00-60.0s

&1V

&& MANENERG 11V

1V

t0.00-60.0s

&OFFON

1V

ManDBDL

t50ms

To synchrocheck,figure 8



1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 195

Version 2.2-00

3 SettingThe setting parameters are accessible through the HMI. The parametersfor the synchro-check function are found in the MMI tree under:

SettingsFunctions


SynchroCheck1 (and 2)

3.1 Operation Off The function is off and the output is low.



3.2 Input phase The measuring phase of the UL1, UL2, UL3 line voltage, which can be ofa single-phase (phase-neutral) or two-phases (phase-phase).


3.4 URatio The URatio is defined as URatio=UBus/ULine. A typical use of the set-ting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused if wished to con-nect the UBus phase-phase and ULine phase-neutral. The “Input phase”-setting should then be set to phase-phase and the “URatio”-setting tosqr3=1.732. This setting scales up the line voltage to equal level with thebus voltage.



Off The energising condition is not used only the synchro-check.





Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 196

tAutoEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfilment of the ener-gising condition to achieve SYN1-AUTOOK.

tManEnerg The required consecutive time of fulfilment of the ener-gising condition to achieve SYN1-MANOK.


3.7 OperationSynch Off The phasing function is off and all outputsare low.

On The phasing function is in service and theoutput signals depends on the input condi-tions.

3.8 ShortPulse Off The closing pulse issued to the circuitbreaker will be of length=tPulse.

On The closing pulse issued to the circuitbreaker will be of length=one cycle time inthe internal logic.


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 197

Version 2.2-00



• ManEnerg = Off


The tests explained in section “Synchrocheck tests” on page 199“describe the settings, which can be used as references during testing, arepresented before the final settings are specified. After testing, restore theequipment to the normal or desired settings.

4.1 Test equipment A secondary injection test set with the possibility to alter the phase angleby regulation of the resistive and reactive components is needed. Here, thephase angle meter is also needed. To perform an accurate test of the fre-quency difference, a frequency generator at one of the input voltages isneeded. The tests can also be performed with the computer-aided test sys-tem FREJA.

FREJA has a specially designed program for evaluating the synchrocheckfunction. Figure 10: shows the general test connection principle, whichthe user can use during testing. This description describes the test of theversion intended for one bay.


Testequipment

U-Bus

U-Line

N

U-Bus

N

UL1UL2UL3N


UMeasurePh/NPh/Ph

REx 5xx


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 198

4.2 Phasing tests These voltage inputs are used:





SettingsFunctions



Table 1: Test settings for phasing

PARAMETER: SETTING:

Operation Off

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch On

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.20 s

tBreaker 0.20 s


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 199

Version 2.2-00


The frequency difference is set at 0.40 Hz on the HMI, and the test shouldverify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiffSynch frequency dif-ference is lower than 0.40 Hz.

• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b, f-line=50.0 Hz and U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b, f-bus=50.3 Hz.

• Check that a closing pulse is submitted with length=0.20 sec. and at closing angle=360 * 0.20 * 0.40=29 deg.

• Repeat with U-Bus (U5) = 80% U1b, f-bus=50.5 Hz to verify that the function does not operate when freq.diff is above limit.

• Repeat with different settings on tBreaker and FreqDiffSynch. Make sure that the calculated closing angle is less than 60 deg. Verify that closing command is issued at the correct phase angle when the fre-quency difference is less than the set value.



Set the voltage difference at 30% U1b on the HMI, and the test shouldcheck that operation is achieved when the voltage difference UDiff islower than 30% U1b.






SettingsFunctions




Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 200

2 Test with UDiff = 0%• Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 80% U1b and U-Bus (U5) = 80%

U1b, with no frequency or phase difference.




U1b.



equal to 80% U1b.



lower.


lower.



ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0.05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 30% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s



1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 201

Version 2.2-00


2 Test with PhaseDiff = 0°Apply voltages U-line (UL1) = 100% U1b and U-bus (U5) = 100% U1b,with no frequency or phase difference.Check that the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs areactivated.


Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg Off

ManEnerg Off

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 70% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 202

3 The test can be repeated with other PhaseDiff values to verify that thefunction operates for values lower than the set ones. By changing thephase angle on U1 connected to U-bus, between +/- 45°. The user cancheck that the two outputs are activated for a PhaseDiff lower than45°. It should not operate for other values. See figure 11.





+45o

-45o

No operation

U-Bus

U-Line operation

U-Bus

+55o

-35o

No operation

U-bus

U-line operation

U-bus



1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 203

Version 2.2-00


The frequency difference is set at 50 mHz on the HMI, and the test shouldverify that operation is achieved when the FreqDiff frequency differenceis lower than 50 mHz.



3 Test with FreqDiff = 1HzApply voltage to the U-line (UL1) equal to 100% U1b with a fre-quency equal to 50 Hz and voltage U-bus (U5) equal to 100% U1b,with a frequency equal to 49 Hz.Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.


Note! A frequency difference also implies a floating mutual-phase dif-ference. So the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs mightNOT be stable, even though the frequency difference is within set limits,because the phase difference is not stable!


1 Use the same basic test connection as in Figure 10:. The UDiffbetween the voltage connected to U-bus and U-line should be 0%, sothat the SYN1-AUTOOK and SYN1-MANOK outputs are activatedfirst.Change the U-Line voltage connection to UL2 without changing thesetting on the HMI.Check that the two outputs are NOT activated.









Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 204








Parameter Setting

Operation On

InputPhase UL1


PhaseShift 0 deg

URatio 1.00

AutoEnerg DLLB

ManEnerg DLLB

ManDBDL Off

UHigh 80% U1b

ULow 40% U1b

FreqDiff 0,05 Hz

PhaseDiff 45°

UDiff 15% U1b

tAutoEnerg 0.5 s

tManEnerg 0.5 s

OperationSynch Off

ShortPulse Off


tPulse 0.2 s

tBreaker 0.2 s


1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 205

Version 2.2-00




2 Apply a single-phase voltage of 30% U1b to the U-bus (U5) and a single-phase voltage of 100% U1b to the U-line (UL1).








4 Change the connection so that the U-line (UL1) is equal to100% U1band the U-bus (U5) is equal to 30% U1b.







Set ManDBDL to On.




Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 206





1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 207

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

SYN1

SYN

BLOCKUB1FFUB1OKVTSU

AUTOOKMANOKTESTCB

CLOSECBINPROGRSTART


SYNx- BLOCK IN Block of synchro- and energising check function x (x=1-2)




SYNx- START IN Initiation of phasing operation

SYNx- AUTOOK OUT Automatic synchro-/energising check OK


SYNx- TESTCB OUT Output from phasing and synchrocheck when SYNx is in test mode

SYNx- CLOSECB OUT Close circuit breaker pulse from phasing

SYNx- INPROGR OUT Phasing operation in progress


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 366-XENPage 6 – 208

5.3 Setting table




















Operation-Synch



FreqDiff-Synch




Page 6 – 209Autorecloser, single, two and/or three phase

1 ApplicationAutomatic reclosing (AR) is a well-established method to restore the ser-vice of a power line after a transient line fault. The majority of line faultsare flashover arcs, which are transient by nature. When the power line isswitched off by operation of line protection and line breakers, the arc de-ionises and recovers voltage withstand at a somewhat variable rate. So acertain line dead time is needed. But then line service can resume by theauto-reclosing of the line breakers. Select the length of the dead time toenable good probability of fault arc de-ionisation and successful reclos-ing.

For the individual line breakers and auto-reclosing equipment, the Auto-reclose open time (AR open time) expression is used.At simultaneous tripping and reclosing at the two line ends, Auto-recloseopen time equals the dead time of the line. Otherwise these two times maydiffer.

In case of a permanent fault, the line protection trips again at reclosing toclear the fault. Figure 1: shows the operation sequence and some expres-sions.

The reclosing function can be selected to perform single-phase, two-phaseand/or three-phase reclosing from six single-shot to multiple-shot reclos-ing programs. The three-phase auto-reclose open time can be set to giveeither high-speed auto-reclosing (HSAR) or delayed auto-reclosing(DAR).

Three-phase auto-reclosing can be performed with or without the use ofsynchro-check and energising check.

Single-phase tripping and single-phase reclosing is a way to limit theeffect of a single-phase line fault to system operation. Especially at thehigher voltages, the majority of line faults are of the single-phase type.The method is of particular value to maintain system stability in systemswith limited meshing or parallel routing. It requires individual operationof each phase of the breakers, which is most common at the higher trans-mission voltages.

A somewhat longer dead time may be required at single-phase reclosingcompared to high-speed three-phase reclosing, due to influence on thefault arc of the non-tripped phases.

1MRK 580 367-XEN


Autorecloser, single, two and/or three phase

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 210

Figure 1: Single-shot auto-reclosing at a permanent fault.

Lineprotection

Circuitbreaker

Auto-reclosingfunction

Open

Fault duration AR open time for breaker Fault duration

Closed

Operate time

Break time Break timeClosing time

Res

ets

AR

res

et

Operate time

Set AR open time Reclaim time

Star

t AR

Rec

losi

ngco

mm

and

Clo

se c

omm

and

Ope

rate

s

Fau

lt

Ope

rate

s

Inst

at o

f fa

ult

Res

ets

Con

tact

clo

sed

Arc

ext

ingu

ishe

s

Con

tact

s se

para

ted

Tri

p co

mm

and


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 211

Version 2.2-00

2 Theory of operationThe auto-reclosing function first co-operates with the line protection func-tions, the trip function, the circuit-breaker and the synchro-check func-tion. It can also be influenced by other protection functions such as shuntreactor protection through binary input signals and AR On/Off manualcontrol. It can provide information to the disturbance and service reportfunctions, event recording, indications, and reclosing operation counters.

The reclosing function outputs and counters can be viewed and reset onthe local HMI at:


AutoRecloserAutoRecloser n

The auto-reclosing is a pure logical function that works with logical orbinary signals, logical operations and timers.

2.1 Input and output signals, single breaker arrangement

Figure 2: Single-, two- and three-phase auto-reclosing; input and out-put signals.

The input signals can be connected to binary inputs or internal functionsof the terminal. The output signals can be connected to binary outputrelays. It is also possible to connect the signals to free logic functions, forexample OR-gates, and in that way add connection links.

SYNCHRO-CHECKPHASING

PRO

TE

CT

ION

AN

D T

RIP

CAN BE CONNECTED TOBINARY INPUTS

AR CONNECTED TO BINARY OUTPUTS

2nd AR**

** ONLY IN SOME TERMINALS

ONOFFBLKONBLOCKOFF

BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBITRESET

STARTSTTHOL

TR2PTR3P

CBREADY

UNSUCREADY

P1PP3P

CLOSECB1PT12PT1

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOSTSYNCWAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 212

The input and output signals which can be interfaced with the auto-recloser 1 are presented in this document. Data is the same for other auto-recloser functions (2 to 6) with signal prefix AR02- to AR06-.

Input signals:AR01-ON Switches the auto-reclosing On

(at Operation = Stand-by).

AR01-OFF Switches the auto-reclosing Off (at Operation =Stand-by).

AR01-BLKON Sets the auto-recloser in blocked state.

AR01-BLOCKOFF Releases the auto-recloser from the blocked state.

AR01-INHIBIT Inhibits an auto-reclosing cycle. Interrupts andblocks auto-reclosing. The input can, for example,be activated by a shunt reactor, delayed back-upprotection or breaker-failure protection. There is atInhibit reset timer to ensure blocking during a fewseconds after the signal is removed.

AR01-RESET Resets the auto-recloser.

AR01-START Auto-reclosing start by a protection trip signal.It also makes the reclosing program continue at arepeated trip, if multi-shot reclosing is selected.

AR01-STTHOL Start of thermal overload protection. Will block theauto-reclosing.

AR01-TRSOTF Protection trip switch-onto-fault. This signal alonedoes not start reclosing. But at a reclosing onto apermanent fault it may appear and let the functionmove on to AR01-UNSUC (unsuccessful) or sec-ond-shot reclosing as programmed.

AR01-TR2P Two-phase trip. Status signal to the auto-reclosingfunction that a two-phase tripping occurred.

AR01-TR3P Three-phase trip. Status signal to the auto-reclosingfunction that a three-phase tripping occurred.

AR01-CBREADY A condition for the start of a reclosing cycle. Thecircuit breaker must have its operating gear ready(manoeuvre spring charged) for a Close-Open(CO) or an Open-Close-Open (OCO) operations toallow the start of an auto-reclosing cycle. Thisinput can also be connected to circuits that monitorthe breaker pressure. If it is not ready at start, it isunlikely that it is ready by the end of the AR opentime.

AR01-CBCLOSED Circuit breaker closed. A condition for the start of areclosing cycle. The circuit breaker (CB) must beclosed at least for five seconds to allow a new ARcycle to start. It prevents start at closing onto afault. It also prevents the reclosing of a breaker thatis open at the protection trip, which is possible in amultiple breaker arrangement.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 213

Version 2.2-00

AR01-PLCLOST Power line carrier or other form of permissive sig-nal lost. An optional input signal at loss of a com-munication channel in a permissive line protectionscheme. Can extend the AR open time.

AR01-SYNC Synchro-check fulfilled from the internal synchro-check/phasing function or an external devicerequired for three-phase auto-reclosing.

Output signals:AR01-BLOCKED The auto-recloser is in blocked state.

AR01-SETON Indicates that the AR operation is switched on, oper-ative.

AR01-INPROGR Auto-reclosing attempt in progress. Activated dur-ing the AR open time.

AR01-ACTIVE Auto-reclosing cycle in progress.

AR01-UNSUC Auto-reclosing unsuccessful. Activated at a newtrip after the last programmed shot (selected num-ber of reclosing shots), or at trip while reclosing isblocked. The output resets after the reclaim time.

AR01-READY Indicates that the AR function is ready for a newAR cycle. It is On but not started or blocked. Thisoutput is high when the function is On, at rest, andprepared for operation. The signal can be used by aprotection function to extend the reach beforereclosing, when required.

AR01-P1P Permit single-phase trip. Inverse signal to AR01-P3P.

AR01-P3P Prepare three-phase trip. Control of the next tripoperation.

AR01-CLOSECB Close circuit-breaker command.

AR01-1PT1 Single-phase reclosing in progress.

AR01-2PT1 Two-phase reclosing in progress.

AR01-T1(T2 - T4) Three-phase reclosing, Shot 1(2 - 4) in progress.

2.2 Multi-breaker arrangement

In stations with a 1 1/2-breaker, double breaker or ring bus arrangement,there are two breakers which switch that end of the line. The reclosing ofthe line breakers can be made in a sequential order. One breaker isreclosed first, and if the reclosing is successful, the second breaker isreclosed as well. In the case of a permanent fault, the second breaker neednot to be reclosed. By fitting one REx 5xx terminal for each line breaker,and by a few interconnections between them, sequential reclosing can beachieved. See Figure 3:.

One terminal is selected as Master and given high reclosing priority. Atline protection trip, the two reclosing functions are started, but the masterissues a Wait For Master signal to the Slave (with low reclosing priority).At unsuccessful reclosing by the master, an Inhibit reclosing signal is sentto the slave terminal to interrupt and reset the reclosing function.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 214

AR01-WAIT Signal to the low priority auto-reclosing functionfrom the master in multi-breaker arrangements forsequential reclosing.

AR01-WFMASTER Wait for master. Issued by the high priority unit forsequential reclosing.

Figure 3: Additional input and output signals at multi-breaker arrange-ment.

2.3 AR Operation The user can control the auto-reclosing function from the local HMI. Use theparameter Operation, which can be set to Off, Stand-by or On. See Figure 6:.

Off deactivates the auto-recloser. On activates automatic reclosing. Stand-by enables On and Off Operation via input signal pulses.

AR01ONOFFBLKONBLOCKOFF

BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBITRESET

STARTSTTHOL

CBREADY

UNSUCREADY

CLOSECB

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOSTSYNC

WAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF

Terminal ‘Master’Priority = High

CB1

CB2

AR01ONOFFBLKONBLOCKOFF

BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBITRESET

STARTSTTHOL

CBREADY

UNSUCREADY

CLOSECB

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOSTSYNC

WAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF

Terminal ‘Slave’Priority = Low

*) Other input/output signals as in previous single breaker arrangement.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 215

Version 2.2-00

3 Design

3.1 Start and control of the auto-reclosing

The automatic operation of the auto-reclosing function is controlled bythe parameter Operation and the input signals as described above. When itis on, the AR01-SETON output is high (active). See Figure 6:.

The auto-reclosing function is activated at a protection trip by the AR01-START input signal. At repeated trips, this signal is activated again tomake the reclosing program continue.

There are a number of conditions for the start to be accepted and a newcycle started. After these checks, the start signal is latched in and theStarted state signal is activated. It can be interrupted by certain events.

3.2 Extended AR open time, shot 1

The purpose of this function is to adapt the length of the AR Open time tothe possibility of non-simultaneous tripping at the two line ends. If a per-missive communication scheme is used and the permissive communica-tion channel (for example, PLC, power-line carrier) is out of service atthe fault, there is a risk of sequential non-simultaneous tripping. Toensure a sufficient line dead time, the AR open time is extended by0.4 s. The input signal AR01-PLCLOST is checked at tripping. See fig-ure 7. Select this function (or not) by setting the Extended t1 parameter toOn (or Off).

3.3 Long trip signal During normal circumstances, the trip command resets quickly due tofault clearing. The user can set a maximum trip pulse duration by tTrip. Ata longer trip signal, the AR open dead time is extended by Extend_t1. Ifthe Extended t1 = Off, a long trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequencein the same way as AR01-INHIBIT.

3.4 Reclosing programs The reclosing programs can be performed with up to maximum fourreclosing attempts (shots), selectable with the NoOfReclosing parameter.The first program is used at pure 3-phase trips of breakers and the otherprograms are used at 1-, 2- or 3-phase trips of breakers.

The following reclosing programs can be selected through the parameterFirstShot, to fit actual application:

3ph 3-phase reclosing, one to four attempts.

1/2/3ph 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing (shot 1) fol-lowed by 3-phase reclosing (shot 2 - 4) if selected.

1/2ph 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing (shot 1) followed by 3-phase reclosing (shot 2 - 4) if selected. If the first tripis a 3-phase trip (TR3P high), the AR will be blocked.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 216

1ph + 1*2ph 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing (shot 1). The 1-phasereclosing attempt can be followed by 3-phase reclos-ing (shot 2 - 4) if selected. A failure of a 2-phasereclosing attempt will block the AR. If the first trip is a3-phase trip (TR3P high), the AR will be blocked.

1/2ph + 1*3ph 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing (shot 1). The 1-phase and 2-phase reclosing attempts can be followedby 3-phase reclosing (shot 2 - 4) if selected. A failureof a 3-phase reclosing attempt (at shot 1) will blockthe AR.

1ph + 1*2/3ph 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing (shot 1). The 1-phase reclosing attempt can be followed by 3-phasereclosing (shot 2 - 4) if selected. A failure of the 2-phase and 3-phase reclosing attempts will block theAR.

Below is a description of a one-shot reclosing for single-phase, two-phaseor three-phase. The other programs are thereafter described more briefly.

3.4.1 1/2/3ph reclosing For the example, one-shot reclosing for 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase, seeFigures 6 and 12. Here, the AR function is assumed to be On and Ready.The breaker is closed and the operation gear ready (manoeuvre springcharged etc.). Only the 1-phase and 3-phase cases are described.

AR01-START is received and sealed-in at operation of the line protection.The AR01-READY output is reset (Ready for a new AR cycle).

If AR01-TR2P (2-phase trip) is low and AR01-TR3P (3-phase trip)is...

Immediately after the start-up of the reclosing and tripping of thebreaker, the input (in Figure 6:) AR01-CBCLOSED is low (possibly alsoAR01-CBREADY at type OCO). The AR Open-time timer, t1 1Ph or t1,keeps on running.At the end of the set AR open time, t1 1Ph or t1, the respective SPTO orTPTO (single-phase or three-phase AR time-out, Figure 9:) is activatedand goes on to the output module for further checks and to give a closingcommand to the circuit breaker.

low, the timer for 1-phase reclosing open time t1 1Ph is started and the AR01-1PT1 output (auto-reclosing 1-phase, shot 1, in progress) is activated.It can be used to suppress Pole disagreement and Earth-fault pro-tection during the 1-phase open interval.

high, the timer for 3-phase AR open time, t1, is started (instead of t1 1Ph) and AR01-T1 is set (auto-reclosing 3-phase, shot 1, in progress). While either t1 1Ph or t1 is running, the output AR01-INPROGR is activated.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 217

Version 2.2-00

3.5 Evolving fault A single-phase fault can result in a single-phase trip and start of t1 1Ph.The fault may evolve into another phase. At such an evolving fault, theprotection must issue a three-phase trip at the second trip.

When the AR01-P3P appears, the t1 1Ph-timer is stopped and the timerfor t1, the three-phase AR open time, starts.

3.6 AR01-P3P, Prepare three-phase trip

This output signal ensures that a possible coming trip operation is a three-phase operation. This is, for example, the case if the AR is set off, orblocked, or if it has performed the first reclosing shot.

Usually, the signal is reset when the reclaim time after a reclosing hasexpired and the function is once more ready for a single-phase reclosing, Permit single-phase trip (P1P). It is the inverse of P3P and should be con-nected to a binary output relay. Should the unit with the auto-reclosing beinoperative, single-phase trip is thus not released. The external circuit canbe connected to a make or break contact of an output relay depending onwhat is required: Permit single-phase or Prepare three-phase trip.

3.7 Blocking of a new reclosing cycle

A new start of a reclosing cycle is blocked for the reclaim time after theselected number of reclosing attempts are performed.

3.8 Reclosing checks and Reclaim timer

An AR open-time time-out signal is received from a program module. At three-phase reclosing, a synchro-check and/or energising check orvoltage check can be used. It is possible to use an internal or an externalsynchro-check function, configured to AR01-SYNC.If a reclosing without check is preferred, configure the input AR01-SYNCto FIXD-ON (set to 1).

Another possibility is to set the output from the internal synchro-checkfunction to a permanently active signal. Set Operation = Release in thesynchro-check function. Then AR01-SYNC is configured to SYNx-AUTOOK.

At confirmation from the synchro-check or if the reclosing is of single-phase type, the signal passes on.

At AR01-CBREADY signal of the Close-Open (CO) type, it is checkedthat this signal is present to allow a reclosing.

The synchronising and energising check must be fulfilled within a certainperiod of time, tSync. If it does not, or if the other conditions are not ful-filled, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked.

The Reclaim-timer defines a period from the issue of a reclosing com-mand, after which the reclosing function is reset. Should a new trip occurwithin this time, it is treated as a continuation of the first fault.When a closing command is given (Pulse AR), the reclaim timer isstarted.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 218

There is an AR State Control, Figure 9:, to track the actual state in thereclosing sequence.

3.9 Pulsing of CB closing command

The circuit breaker closing command, AR01-CLOSECB, is made as apulse with a duration, set by the tPulse parameter. For circuit breakerswithout an anti-pumping function, the closing-pulse-cutting describedbelow can be used. It is selected by means of the CutPulse parameter (setto On). In case of a new trip pulse, the closing pulse will be cut (inter-rupted). But the minimum length of the closing pulse is always 50 ms.

At the issue of a reclosing command, the associated reclosing operationcounter is also incremented.There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total numberof reclosings. See Figure 10:.

3.10 Transient fault After the reclosing command, the reclaim timer keeps running for the settime. If no tripping occurs within this time, tReclaim, the auto-reclosingfunction will be reset. The circuit breaker remains closed and the operat-ing gear ready (manoeuvre spring is recharged). AR01-CBCLOSED = 1and AR01-CBREADY = 1.

After the reclaim time, the AR state control resets to original rest state,with AR01-SETON = 1, AR01-READY = 1 and AR01-P1P = 1 (depend-ing on the selected program). The other AR01 outputs = 0.

3.11 Unsuccessful signal Normally the signal AR01-UNSUC appears when a new start is receivedafter the last reclosing attempt has been made. See Figure 11:. It can beprogrammed to appear at any stage of a reclosing sequence by setting theparameter UnsucMode = On. The UNSUC signal is attained after the timetUnsuc.

3.12 Permanent fault If a new trip takes place after a reclosing attempt and a new AR01-START or AR01-TRSOTF signal appears, the AR01-UNSUC (Reclos-ing unsuccessful) is activated. The timers for the first reclosing attempt(t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph and t1) cannot be started (Figure 9:).

Depending on the PulseCut parameter setting, the closing command maybe shortened at the second trip command.

After time-out of the reclaim timer, the auto reclosing function resets, butthe circuit breaker remains open (AR01-CBCLOSED = 0, AR01-CBREADY = 1). Thus the reclosing function is not ready for a newreclosing cycle. See Figure 6: and Figure 12:.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 219

Version 2.2-00

3.13 Automatic confirmation of programmed reclosing attempts

The auto-recloser can be programmed to continue with reclosing attemptstwo to four (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from theprotection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. See figure 8. Thisis done by setting the parameter AutoCont = On and the wait time tAu-toWait to desired length.

3.14 More about reclosing programs

The reclosing programs are briefly described below concerning type ofreclosing and number of attempts for different trips. Also see Table 1 inthe end of this section.

3ph3-phase reclosing, one to four attempts (NoOfReclosing parameter).The output AR01-P3P is always high (=1).

A trip operation is made as a three-phase trip at all types of fault.The reclosing is as a three-phase reclosing in program 1/2/3ph, describedabove.

All signals, blockings, inhibits, timers, requirements etc. are the same asfor the above described example.

1/2/3ph1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At any kind of trip, the operation is as already described, program1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issuedand 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected. Maximum three additionalattempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing parameter).


1/2ph1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At 1-phase or 2-phase trip, the operation is as in above described example,program 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will beissued and 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected. Maximum threeadditional attempts can be done (according to the NoOfReclosing parame-ter).

At 3-phase trip, TR2P low and TR3P high, the AR will be blocked and noreclosing takes place.


1ph + 1*2ph1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At 1-phase trip (TR2P low and TR3P low), the operation is as in above


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 220

described example, program 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing attempt fails, a3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can follow, if selected.Maximum three additional attempts can be done (according to the NoOf-Reclosing parameter).

At 2-phase trip (TR2P high and TR3P low), the operation is similar asabove. But, if the first reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issuedand the AR will be blocked. No more attempts take place!

At 3-phase trip, TR2P low and TR3P high, the AR will be blocked and noreclosing takes place.


1/2ph + 1*3ph1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At 1-phase or 2-phase trip, the operation is as described above. If the firstreclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclos-ings can follow, if selected. Maximum three additional attempts can bedone (according to the NoOfReclosing parameter).

At 3-phase trip, the operation is similar as above. But, if the first reclosingattempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and the AR will be blocked. Nomore attempts take place!


1ph + 1*2/3ph1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot.

At 1-phase trip, the operation is as described above. If the first reclosingattempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and 3-phase reclosings can fol-low, if selected. Maximum three additional attempts can be done (accord-ing to the NoOfReclosing parameter).

At 2-phase or 3-phase trip, the operation is similar as above. But, if thefirst reclosing attempt fails, a 3-phase trip will be issued and the AR willbe blocked. No more attempts take place!



1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 221

Version 2.2-00

Table 1: Type of reclosing for different programs

Program 1st attempt 2-4th attempt

3ph 3ph 3ph

1/2/3ph 1ph 3ph

2ph 3ph

3ph 3ph

1/2ph 1ph 3ph

2ph 3ph

No 3ph reclosing No 3ph reclosing

1ph + 1*2ph 1ph 3ph

2ph No

No 3ph reclosing No 3ph reclosing

1/2ph + 1*3ph 1ph 3ph

2ph 3ph

3ph No

1ph + 1*2/3ph 1ph 3ph

2ph No

3ph No


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 222

4 Configuration and settingThe signals are configured in the CAP 531 configuration tool.

The parameters for the auto-reclosing function are set through the localHMI at:

SettingsFunctions

Group nAutoRecloser

AutoRecloser n

4.1 Recommendations for input signals

See Figure 4: and the default configuration for examples.

AR01-ON and AR01-OFFmay be connected to binary inputs for external control.

AR01-STARTshould be connected to the protection function trip output which shall startthe auto-recloser. It can also be connected to a binary input for start froman external contact. A logical OR gate can be used to multiply the numberof start sources.

AR01-INHIBITcan be connected to binary inputs, to block the AR from a certain protec-tion, such as a line connected shunt reactor, transfer trip receive or back-up protection or breaker-failure protection.

AR01-CBCLOSED and AR01-CBREADYmust be connected to binary inputs, for pick-up of the breaker signals. Ifthe external signals are of Breaker-not-ready type, uncharged etc., aninverter can be configured before CBREADY.

AR01-SYNCis connected to the internal synchro-check function if required. It can alsobe connected to a binary input. If neither internal nor external synchronis-ing or energising check (dead line check) is required, it can be connected toa permanent 1 (high), by connection to FIXD-ON.

AR01-PLCLOSTcan be connected to a binary input, when required.

AR01-TRSOTFcan be connected to the internal line protection, distance protection, tripswitch-onto-fault.

AR01-STTHOLStart of thermal overload protection signal. Can be connected to OVLD-TRIP to block the AR at overload.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 223

Version 2.2-00

AR01-TR2P and AR01-TR3Pare connected to the function block TRIP or to binary inputs. The protectionfunctions that give two-phase or three-phase trips are supposed to be routedvia that function.

OtherThe other input signals can be connected as required.

4.2 Recommendations for output signals

See Figure 4: and the default configuration for examples.

AR01-READYcan be connected to the Zone extension of a line protection. It can also beused for indication, if required.

AR01-1PT1 and 2PT11-phase and 2-phase reclosing in progress is used to temporarily block anEarth-fault protection and/or a Pole disagreement function during the 1-phase or 2-phase open intervals.

AR01-CLOSECBconnect to a binary output relay for circuit breaker closing command.

AR01-P3Pprepare 3-phase trip: Connect to TRIP-P3PTR.

AR01-P1Ppermit 1-phase trip: Can be connected to a binary output for connection toexternal protection or trip relays. In case of total loss of auxiliary voltage,the output relay drops and does not allow 1-phase trip. If needed to invertthe signal, it can be made by a breaking contact of the output relay.

OtherThe other output signals can be connected for indication, disturbancerecording etc., as required.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 224

Figure 4: Recommendations for I/O-signal connections.

4.3 Recommendations for multi-breaker arrangement

Sequential reclosing at multi-breaker arrangement is achieved by givingthe two line breakers different priorities. Refer to Figure 3:. At singlebreaker application, Priority is set to No, and this has no influence on thefunction. The signal Started is sent to the next function module. At doublebreaker and similar applications, Priority is set High for the Master termi-nal and Priority = Low for the Slave.

While reclosing is in progress in the master, it issues the signal -WFMAS-TER. A reset delay ensures that the -WAIT signal is kept high for thebreaker closing time. After an unsuccessful reclosing, it is also maintainedby the signal -UNSUC. For the slave terminal, the input signal -WAITholds back a reclosing operation. A time tWait sets a maximum waitingtime for the reset of the Wait signal. At time-out, it interrupts the reclosingcycle by a WM-INH, wait for master inhibit, signal.

AR01-

ONOFFBLKONBLOCKOFF

BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBIT

RESET

START

STTHOL

TR2P

TR3P

CBREADY

UNSUC

READY

P1P

P3P

CLOSECB

1PT12PT1

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOST

SYNCWAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF

IOM

INPUTxxxxxx

xxxxxxxx

xx

xxxx

1Vxxxx-TRIPPROTECTION

OVLD-TRIP

SOTF-TRIPZM1--TRIP

TRIP-TR2P

TRIP-TR3P

FIXD-ON

1V

IOM

OUTPUTxx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

xx

1V

TRIP-P3PTR

EF4--BLOCK

xxxx-??????


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 225

Version 2.2-00

5 TestingThe user can test the auto-reclosing function, for example, during com-missioning or after a reconfiguration. The test can be performed with pro-tection and trip functions, as the synchro-check function (with energisingcheck), applied.

Figure 5: illustrates a recommended testing scenario, where the circuitbreaker is simulated by an external bistable relay (BR), e.g. an RXMVB2or an RXMVE1. These manual switches are available:

• Switch close (SC)

• Switch trip (ST)

• Switch ready (SRY).

SC and ST can be push-buttons with spring return. If no bistable relay isavailable, replace it with two self-reset auxiliary relays as in Figure 5:.

Use a secondary injection relay test set to operate the protection function.It is possible to use the BR to control the injected analogue quantities sothat the fault only appears when the BR is picked up—simulating a closedbreaker position.

To make the arrangement more elaborate, include the simulation of theoperation gear condition, AR01-CBREADY, for the sequences Close-Open (CO) and Open-Close-Open (OCO).

The AR01-CBREADY condition at the CO sequence type is usually lowfor a recharging time of 5-10 s after a closing operation. Then it is high.The example shows that it is simulated with SRY, a manual switch.

Figure 5: Simulating breaker operation with two auxiliary relays.

Trip

Close

ST

OR

SC

SRY

+ -

To Test Set

AR01-CLOSECB

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY

Trip

CR


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 226

5.1 Suggested testing procedure

5.1.1 Preparations 1.1 Check the settings of the auto-reclosing (AR) function. The operationcan be set at Stand-by (Off).

HMI tree:

SettingsFunctions

Group nAutoRecloser

AutoRecloser n

If any timer setting is changed so as to speed-up or facilitate the test-ing, they must be set to normal after the testing. A verification testhas to be done afterwards.

1.2 Read and note the reclosing operate counters from the HMI tree:



Counters

1.3 Do the testing arrangements outlined above, for example, as in Figure5:.

1.4 The AR01-CBCLOSED breaker position, the commands Trip andClosing, AR01-CLOSECB, and other signals should preferably bearranged for event recording provided with time measurements. Oth-erwise, a separate timer or recorder can be used to check the AR opentime and other timers.

5.1.2 Check the AR functionality

2.1 Ensure that the voltage inputs to Synchro-check gives accepted con-ditions at open breaker (BR). They can, for example, be Live busbarand Dead line.

2.2 Set the operation at On.

2.3 Make a BR pickup by a closing pulse, the SC-pulse.

2.4 Close SRY, Breaker ready and leave it closed.

2.5 Inject AC quantities to give a trip and start AR.Observe or record the BR operation. The BR relay should trip andreclose. After the closing operation, the SRY switch could be openedfor about 5 s and then closed.The AR open time and the operating sequence should be checked, forexample, in the event recording.Check the operate indications and the operate counters.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 227

Version 2.2-00

Should the operation not be as expected, the reason must be investi-gated. It could be due to an AR Off state or wrong program selection,or not accepted synchro-check conditions.

2.6 A few fault cases may be checked, for example, single-phase, two-phase and three-phase trips, transient, and permanent fault. The sig-nal sequence diagrams in Figure 12: and 13 can be of guidance for thechecking.

5.1.3 Check the reclosing requirements

The number of cases can be varied according to the application. Examplesof selection cases are:

3.1 Inhibit input signal: Check that the function is operative and that thebreaker conditions are okay. Apply an AR01-INHIBIT input signaland start the reclosing function. No reclosing!

3.2 Breaker open, closing onto a fault: Set the breaker simulating relay,BR, in position open. Then close it with the SC switch and start theAR within one second. No reclosing!

3.3 Breaker not ready: Close the BR breaker relay and see that everythingexcept for AR01-CBREADY is in normal condition (SRY is open).Start the AR function. No reclosing!

3.4 Lack of verification from synchro-check: Check the function at non-acceptable voltage conditions. Wait for the time out, >5 s. No reclos-ing!

3.5 Operation Stand-by and Off: Check that no reclosing can occur withthe function in Off state.

3.6 Depending on the program selection and the selected fault types thatstart and inhibit reclosing, a check of no unwanted reclosing can bemade. For example, if only single-phase reclosing is selected, a testcan verify that there is no reclosing after two-phase and three-phasetrips.

5.1.4 Test of Master-Slave

If a multi-breaker arrangement is used for the application and prioritiesare given for the master (high) and slave (low) terminals, test that correctoperation takes place and that correct signals are issued. The signalsWFMASTER, UNSUC, WAIT and INHIBIT should be involved.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 228

5.1.5 Termination of the test

After the test, restore the equipment to normal or desired state.

Especially check these items:

4.1 Reclosing operate counters: Check and record the counter contents.(Reset if it is the user’s preference.)

HMI tree:



CountersClear Counters

4.2 Setting parameters and the Operation parameter as required.

4.3 Test switch or disconnected links of connection terminals.

4.4 Normal indications.

(If so preferred, the disturbance report may be cleared.)

HMI tree:

DisturbReportClearDistRep


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 229

Version 2.2-00

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

AR01

AR

ONOFFBLKONBLOCKOFF

BLOCKEDSETON

INPROGRACTIVE

INHIBITRESET

STARTSTTHOL

TR2PTR3P

CBREADY

UNSUCREADY

P1PP3P

CLOSECB1PT12PT1

T1T2T3T4

WFMASTER

PLCLOSTSYNCWAIT

CBCLOSED

TRSOTF


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 230

6.2 Function block diagrams

Figure 6: Auto-reclosing on/off control and start

&t5s

AR01-UNSUC

&

Operation:Off

& 1V

Operation:On

Operation:Standby

AR01-ON

AR01-OFF

AR01-START

AR01-TRSOTF

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY

COUNT-0

INITIATE

AR01-READY

STARTAR

INITIATE

AR01-SETON

&

SR

& SR

Reclosing function reset

& 1V

&1V

1V

&Blocked state

1Blocking andinhibit conditions

&

Additional condition

Figure 9

(below and fig-ure 7 and 9)

1V

XY

Figure 7


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 231

Version 2.2-00

Figure 7: Control of extended AR open time, shot 1

Figure 8: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 4

LONGDURA

&

AR01-PLCLOST& 1V &

ttTRIP

INITIATE

INITIATE

STARTAR

STARTAR

Extend_t1

&t

tTRIP

Figure 6

Figure 6

Figure 6

Figure 6

INITIATE

&

AR01-CLOSECBS

1V

ttAutoWait

AR01-CBCLOSED

1V

R&

AR01-START

&


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 232

Figure 9: Reclosing checks and “Reclaim” and “Inhibit” timers.

t

AR01-SYNC

&1V

ttSync

&

AR01-INHIBIT

Blocking

Pulse AR (above)

TPTOT2TOT3TOT4TO

1V

SPTO

“AR Open time” timers

&

& & 1V

Blocking

Pulse AR

AR StateControl

1V

ttReclaim

&AR01-TR2P

1V

Inhibit

Figure 6

below and figure 6

Figure 6:

(below)

reclosingLOGIC

programsAR01-TR3P

STARTAR

INITIATE

CL

R

01234

COUNTER01234

0

2

4

1

3

tInhibit

2PT1

1PT1

1V

T1

T2

T3

T4

AR01-INPROGR

1

AR01-P1P

AR01-P3P

INITIATEAR01-CBREADY

X

X Y

1V

tt1 1Ph

tt1

tt1 2Ph

SPTO

TPTO

From logic forreclosingprograms

etc.


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 233

Version 2.2-00

Figure 10: Pulsing of close command and driving of operation counters

Figure 11: Issuing of the AR01-UNSUC signal

tPulse

&

&

1V

AR01-CLOSECB

1-ph Shot 1AR01-1PT1

tPulse

& 3-ph Shot 1AR01-T1




No of Reclosings

Pulse-AR

INITIATE

**)

**) Only if “PulseCut” = On

& 2-ph Shot 1AR01-2PT1

Figure 6

AR01-UNSUC

&

Pulse - AR

S1V

ttUnsuc

AR already started

COUNT-0

AR01-CBCLOSED

1V

R&

AR01-START

&


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 234

6.3 Sequence examples

Figure 12: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase single-shot reclosing.

Figure 13: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph, two-shot reclosing.

t1s

tReclaim

FaultAR01-CBCLOSEDAR01-CBREADY(CO)AR01-STARTAR01-TR3PAR01-SYNCAR01-READYAR01-INPROGRAR01-1PT1AR01-T1AR01-T2AR01-CLOSECBAR01-P3PAR01-UNSUC

t1s

FaultAR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-START

AR01-TR3P

AR01-SYNC

AR01-READY

AR01-INPROGR

AR01-1PT1

AR01-T1

AR01-T2

AR01-CLOSECB

AR01-P3P

AR01-UNSUC tReclaim

t2


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 235

Version 2.2-00

Figure 14: Sequential reclosing of two line breakers with priority.

Fault

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-START

AR01-WFMASTER

CB1:

AR01-CLOSECB

AR01-CBCLOSED

AR01-CBREADY(CO)

AR01-START

AR01-WAIT

CB2:

AR01-CLOSECB


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 236

6.4 Signal list The signal list shows the input and output signals which can be interfacedwith the auto-recloser 1. Data is same for other auto-recloser functions (2to 6) with signal prefix AR02- to AR06-.

Table 2:


AR01- ON IN Enable auto-recloser operation

AR01- OFF IN Disable auto-recloser operation

AR01- BLKON IN Set auto-recloser in blocked state

AR01- BLOCKOFF IN Release of auto-recloser in blocked state

AR01- INHIBIT IN Inhibit auto-reclosing cycle

AR01- RESET IN Resets auto-recloser

AR01- START IN Start of auto-reclosing cycle

AR01- STTHOL IN Start of thermal overload protection

AR01- TRSOTF IN Start of auto-reclosing cycle from switch-onto-fault

AR01- TR2P IN Two-phase trip

AR01- TR3P IN Three-phase trip

AR01- CBREADY IN Circuit breaker ready for operation

AR01- CBCLOSED IN Circuit breaker closed

AR01- PLCLOST IN Permissive communication channel out of service

AR01- SYNC IN OK from external synchronising/energising unit

AR01- WAIT IN Wait from master for sequential tripping

AR01- BLOCKED OUT Auto-recloser in blocked state

AR01- SETON OUT Auto-recloser switched on

AR01- INPROGR OUT Auto-reclosing attempt in progress

AR01- ACTIVE OUT Auto-reclosing cycle in progress

AR01- UNSUC OUT Unsuccessful auto-reclosing

AR01- READY OUT Auto-recloser prepared for reclose cycle

AR01- P1P OUT Permit single-phase trip

AR01- P3P OUT Prepare three-phase trip

AR01- CLOSECB OUT Closing command for circuit breaker

AR01- 1PT1 OUT Single-phase reclosing in progress

AR01- 2PT1 OUT Two-phase reclosing in progress

AR01- T1 OUT Three-phase reclosing, shot 1 in progress




AR01- WFMASTER OUT Wait from master for sequential tripping


1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 237

Version 2.2-00

6.5 Setting table


Operation Off, Stand-by, On

Off Auto-recloser Off/Stand-by/On

NoOfRe-closing

1-4 1 Maximum number of reclosing attempts

FirstShot 3 ph, 1/2/3 ph, 1/2 ph, 1 ph+1*2 ph, 1/2+1*3 ph, 1 ph+1*2/3 ph

3 ph Restriction of fault type for first reclosing attempt

Extended t1 Off, On Off Extended dead time for loss of permissive channel

t1 1Ph 0.000-60.000 s 1.000 Open time for first auto-reclosing at single-phase

t1 2Ph 0.000-60.000 s 1.000 Open time for first auto-reclosing at two-phase

t1 0.000-60.000 s 1.000 Open time for first auto-reclosing at three-phase

t2 0.0-9000.0 s 30.0 Open time for second auto-reclosing

t3 0.0-9000.0 s 30.0 Open time for third auto-reclosing

t4 0.0-9000.0 s 30.0 Open time for fourth auto-reclosing

tSync 0.0-9000.0 s 2.0 Auto-recloser maximum wait time for sync

tPulse 0.000-60.000 s 0.200 Circuit breaker closing pulse length

CutPulse Off, On Off Shorten closing pulse at a new trip

tReclaim 0.0-9000.0 s 60.0 Auto-recloser reclaim time

tInhibit 0.000-60.000 a 5.000 Inhibit reset time

CB Ready CO, OCO CO Select type of circuit breaker ready signal

tTrip 0.000-60.000 s 1.000 Block auto-reclosing for long trip duration

Priority None, Low, High

None Priority selection between adjacent terminals

tWaitFor-Master

0.0-9000.0 s 60.0 Maximum wait time for Master

AutoCont Off, On Off Continue with next reclosing attempt if breaker not closes

BlockUnsuc Off, On Off Block auto-recloser at unsuccessful auto-reclosing

tAutoWait 0.000-60.000 s 2.000 Maximum wait time between shots

UnsucMode NoCBCheck, CBCheck

NOCB-Check

Unsuccessful-signal mode

tUnsuc 0.0-9000.0 s 30 CB Check time before unsuc


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 367-XENPage 6 – 238

Page 6 – 239Single or two pole trip logic

1 ApplicationThe tripping logic in REx 5xx protection, control and monitoring termi-nals offers three different operating modes:

• Three-phase tripping for all kinds of faults (3ph operating mode)

• Single-phase tripping for single-phase faults and three-phase trip-ping for multi-phase and evolving faults (1ph/3ph operating mode). The logic also issues a three-phase tripping command when phase selection within the operating protection functions is not possible, or when external conditions request three-phase tripping.

• Single-phase tripping for single-phase faults, two-phase tripping for ph-ph and ph-ph-E faults and three-phase tripping for three-phase faults (1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode). The logic also issues a three-phase tripping command when phase selection within the operating protection functions is not possible or at evolving multi-phase faults.

2 DesignThe function consists of the following basic logic parts:

• A three-phase front logic that is activated when the terminal is set into exclusive three-phase operating mode.

• A phase segregated front logic that is activated when the terminal is in 1ph/3ph or 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode.

• An additional logic for evolving faults and three-phase tripping when the function operates in 1ph/3ph operating mode

• An additional logic for evolving faults and three-phase tripping when the function operates in 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode.

• The final tripping circuits.

2.1 Three-phase front logic

Figure 1: shows a simplified block diagram of a three-phase front logic.Descriptions of different signals is available in signal list.

Figure 1: Three-phase front logic - simplified logic diagram

Any of active functional input signals activates the RSTTRIP internal sig-nal, which influences the operation of the final tripping circuits.

Visf_096.vsd

TRIP-TRINL1

TRIP-TRINL2

TRIP-TRINL3

TRIP-1PTRZ

TRIP-1PTREF

TRIP-TRIN

>1

>1

>1

Program = 3ph

& RSTTRIP - cont.

1MRK 580 379-XEN


Single or two pole trip logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 379-XENPage 6 – 240

2.2 Phase segregated front logic

The following input signals to the single-phase front logic influence thesingle-phase tripping of the terminal (see Figure 2:):

• Phase related tripping signals from different built-in protection func-tions that can operate on a phase segregated basis and are used in the terminal. The output signals of these functions should be configured to the TRIP-TRINLn (n = 1...3) functional inputs.

• Internal phase-selective tripping signals from different phase selection functions within the terminal, like PHS (phase selection for distance protection) or GFC (general fault criteria). The output signals of these functions should be configured to the TRIP-PSLn (n = 1...3) func-tional inputs. It is also possible to connect to these functional inputs different external phase selection signals.

• Single-phase tripping commands from line distance protection or carrier aided tripping commands from scheme communication logic for distance protection, which initiate single-phase tripping. These signals should be configured to the TRIP-1PTRZ functional input. It is also possible to configure a tripping output from an earth-fault overcurrent protection, to initiate the single-pole trip in connection with some external phase selection function. This signal should be configured to the TRIP-1PTREF functional input.

Figure 2: Phase segregated front logic

Visf_097.vsd

TRIP-TRINL1

TRIP-PSL1

TRIP-TRINL2

TRIP-PSL2

TRIP-TRINL3

TRIP-PSL3

TRIP-1PTREF

TRIP-1PTRZ

-loop-loop

TRIP-TRIN

L1TRIP - cont.

L2TRIP - cont.

L3TRIP - cont.

>1

>1

>1

&

&

&

>1

>1

>1

&

>1

&

>1

&&

t

50 ms

Single or two pole trip logic 1MRK 580 379-XENPage 6 – 241

Version 2.2-00

The TRIP-1PTRZ signal enables tripping corresponding to phase selec-tion signals without any restriction while any phase selective external trip-ping signals prevent such tripping from the TRIP-1PTREF signal.

If any of these signals continues for more than 50 ms without the presenceof any phase selection signals, three-phase tripping command is issued.

It is possible to configure the TRIP-1PTREF signal to the output signal ofthe EF---TRIP overcurrent, earth-fault, protection function (directionaland nondirectional). This enables single-phase tripping when the faultyphase is detected by some other phase-selection element such as the phaseselection in distance protection.

2.3 Additional logic for 1ph/3ph operating mode

Figure 3: presents the additional logic when the trip function is in 1ph/3phoperating mode. A TRIP-P3PTR functional input signal activates a threepole tripping if at least one phase within the front logic initiates a tripcommand.

Figure 3: Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

Visf_098.vsd

L1TRIP - cont.

L2TRIP - cont.

L3TRIP - cont.

TRIP-P3PTR

-loop

RTRIP - cont.

STRIP - cont.

TTRIP - cont.

150 ms

t>1

t

2000 ms

>1&

>1

>1

150 ms

t>1

t

2000 ms

>1&

>1

>1

&

>1150 ms

t

t

2000 ms

>1&

>1

>1


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 379-XENPage 6 – 242

If only one of internal signals LnTRIP is present without the presence of aTRIP-P3PTR signal, a single pole tripping information is send to the finaltripping circuits. A three-phase tripping command is initiated in all othercases.

Built-in drop-off delayed (two second) timers secure a three-phase trip-ping for evolving faults if the second fault occurs in different phase thanthe first one within a two second interval after initiation of a first trippingcommand.

2.4 Additional logic for 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

Figure 4: presents the additional logic, when the trip function is in1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode. A TRIP-P3PTR functional input signal acti-vates a three pole tripping if at least one phase within the front logic ini-tiates a trip command.

Figure 4: Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

The logic initiates a single-phase tripping information to the final logiccircuits, if only one of internal input signals (LnTRIP) is active. A twophase tripping information is send in case, when two out of three inputsignals LnTRIP are active. A three phase tripping information requires allthree LnTRIP input signals to be active.

Visf_099.vsd

L1TRIP - cont.150 ms

t

t

2000 ms

L2TRIP - cont.

L3TRIP - cont.

TRIP-P3PTR

-loop

RTRIP - cont.

STRIP - cont.

TTRIP - cont.

&

>1

>1

>1

>1

&>1

>1

t

2000 ms

150 ms

t

t

2000 ms

150 ms

t

&

&

&

>1

>1

>1


Version 2.2-00

The built in drop-off delayed (two seconds) timers secure correct three-phase tripping information, when the faults are detected within two sec-onds in all three phases.

2.5 Final tripping circuits Figure 5: present the final tripping circuits for a tripping function withinthe REx 5xx terminals. The TRIP-BLOCK functional input signal canblock the operation of a function, so that no functional output signalsbecome logical one. Detailed explanation of functional output signals isavailable in signal list.

Figure 5: Final tripping circuits

Visf_263.vsd

TRIP-BLOCK

RTRIP -cont.

>1

>1

>1

STRIP - cont.

TTRIP -cont.

RSTTRIP -cont.

&

&

&

>1

&>1

&

-loop

&

&

&>1

&

-loop

& t

10 ms

t

5 msTRIP-TR2P

TRIP-TR1P

TRIP-TR3P

TRIP-TRL1

TRIP-TRL2

TRIP-TRL3

TRIP-TRIP


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 379-XENPage 6 – 244

3 Testing The function can be disabled during the testing mode under these condi-tions:

• When the function is selected to be blocked under the testing condi-tions, select the functions, which should be blocked under the sub-menu:

TestTestMode

BlockFunctions• Set the Operation parameter to On (Operation=On) to set the termi-

nal in to testing mode. Select the operating mode under this sub-menu:

TestTestMode

Operation

• The terminal is switched to testing mode when the logical 1 is speci-fied for the TEST-INPUT functional input.

Note: The function is blocked if the corresponding setting under theBlockFunctions submenu remains on and the TEST-INPUT signalremains active.

The function is tested functionally together with other protection func-tions (distance protection ZMn--, line differential protection DIFL-, earth-fault overcurrent protection IOC-- or TOC--, etc.) within the REx 5xx ter-minals. It is recommended to test the function together with the autore-closing function, when built into the terminal or when a separate externalunit is used for the reclosing purposes.

3.1 3ph operating mode The function must issue a three-phase tripping in all cases, when trippingis initiated by any protection or some other built-in or external function.The following functional output signals must always appear simulta-neously: TRIP-TRIP, TRIP-TRL1, TRIP-TRL2, TRIP-TRL3 and TRIP-TR3P.

3.2 1ph/3ph operating mode

The following tests should be carried out in addition to some other tests,which depends on the complete configuration of a terminal:

1.) Initiate one-by one different single-phase-to-earth faults. Con-sider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a reclaim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a single-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and only one of the tripping outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at a time. Functional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR1P should be active at each fault. No other outputs should be active.


Version 2.2-00

2.) Initiate different phase-to-phase and three-phase faults. Consider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a reclaim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a three-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and all of the tripping outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at a time. Functional out-puts TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR3P should be active at each fault. No other outputs should be active.

3.) Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the tripping signal is issued for the corresponding phase. Ini-tiate the same fault once again within the reclaim time of the used autoreclosing function. A three-phase tripping must be initiated for the second fault. Check that the corresponding tripping signals appear after both faults. If not the autoreclosing function is used the functional outputs TRIP-TRIP, TRIP-TR1P and the corresponding phase signal (TRIP-TRLn) should be active at each fault.

4.) Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the tripping signal is issued for the corresponding phase. Ini-tiate the second single-phase-to-earth fault in one of the remaining phases within the time interval, shorter than two seconds and shorter than the dead-time of the autoreclosing function, when included in protection scheme. Check that the second trip is a three-phase trip.

3.3 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

The following tests should be carried out in addition to some other tests,which depends on the complete configuration of a terminal:

1.) Initiate one-by one different single-phase-to-earth faults. Con-sider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a reclaim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a single-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and only one of the tripping outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at a time. Functional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR1P should be active at each fault. No other outputs should be active.

2.) Initiate one-by one different phase-to-phase faults. Consider suf-ficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a reclaim time of eventually activated autoreclosing function. Only a two-phase trip should occur for each separate fault and only corresponding two trip-ping outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be activated at a time. Functional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR2P should be active at each fault. No other outputs should be active.

3.) Initiate a three-phase fault. Consider sufficient time interval between the faults, to overcome a reclaim time of eventually acti-vated autoreclosing function. Only a three-phase trip should occur for the fault and all tripping outputs (TRIP-TRLn) should be acti-vated at the same time. Functional outputs TRIP-TRIP and TRIP-TR3P should be active at each fault. No other outputs should be active.

4.) Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the tripping signal is issued for the corresponding phase. Ini-tiate the same fault once again within the reclaim time of the used autoreclosing function. A three-phase tripping must be initiated for


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 379-XENPage 6 – 246

the second fault. Check that the corresponding tripping signals appear after both faults. If not the autoreclosing function is used the functional outputs TRIP-TRIP, TRIP-TR1P and the corresponding phase signal (TRIP-TRLn) should be active at each fault.

5.) Initiate a single-phase-to-earth fault and switch it off immediately when the tripping signal is issued for the corresponding phase. Ini-tiate the second single-phase-to-earth fault in one of the remaining phases within the time interval, shorter than two seconds and shorter than the dead-time of the autoreclosing function, when included in protection scheme. Check that the second trip is a single-phase trip in a second initiated phase.

6.) Initiate a phase-to-phase fault and switch it off immediately when the tripping signal is issued for the corresponding two phases. Ini-tiate another phase-to-phase fault (not between the same phases) within the time, shorter than 2 seconds. Check, that the output sig-nals, issued for the first fault, correspond to two-phase tripping for included phases. The output signals for the second fault must corre-spond to the three-phase tripping action.

4 Appendix

4.1 Function block

4.2 Signal list

VFJ0002.vsd

TRIP-BLOCK

TRIP-TRL2

SINGLE-PHASE TRIPPING LOGICTRIP-

TRIP-TRL3

TRIP-TR1P

TRIP-TR2P

TRIP-TRIN

TRIP-TRINL1

TRIP-TRINL2

TRIP-TRINL3

TRIP-PSL1

TRIP-TRL1

TRIP-TRIP

TRIP-PSL2

TRIP-PSL3

TRIP-1PTRZ

TRIP-1PTREF

TRIP-P3PTR

TRIP-TR3P

Block: Signal: Type Description:

TRIP- TRIP OUT General trip output signal

TRIP- TRL1 OUT Trip output signal in phase L1




Version 2.2-00

4.3 Setting table

TRIP- TR1P OUT Single pole tripping

TRIP- TR2P OUT Two pole tripping

TRIP- TR3P OUT Three pole tripping

TRIP- BLOCK IN Block of Trip

TRIP- TRIN IN Trip all phases

TRIP- TRINL1 IN Trip phase L1



TRIP- PSL1 IN Functional input for phase selection in phase L1



TRIP- 1PTRZ IN Functional input for impedance single pole trip

TRIP- 1PTREF IN Functional input for earth fault single pole trip

TRIP- P3PTR IN Functional input for preparing for three phase trip


Parameter: Range: Unit: Default: Parameter description:

Operation Off / On - Off Operation of trip logic

Program 3ph - 1/3ph - 1/2/3ph

- 3ph Operating mode of trip logic


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 379-XENPage 6 – 248

Page 6 – 249Binary signal transfer to remote end

1 ApplicationThe binary signal transfer function is preferably used for sending commu-nication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signalsrequired at the remote end. Up to 32 selectable binary send and 32 select-able binary receive signals, internal or external to the terminal can betransmitted.

To ensure compatibility with a wide range of communication equipmentand media, the relay is designed to work within the signalling bandwidthof a standard CCITT PCM channel at 64 kbits/s. To enable the use inNorth American EIA PCM systems working at 56 kbits/s, some of theinterfacing modules can be adapted to this bit rate.

A data message is sent every 5 ms. Each data message is 22 bytes long. Tothis message, start and stop flags are then added, together with a 16 bitCyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) word.

HDLC is a protocol for the flow management of the information on a datacommunication link. The protocol is widely used. The basic informationunit on an HDLC link is a frame. A frame consists of:

• start (or opening) flag

• address and control fields (if included)

• data to be transmitted

• CRC word

• end (or closing) flag.

HDLC is a bit-oriented protocol, which means that the receiver must beable to recognize a flag at any time. For this reason, all flags have thebinary configuration 01111110. To avoid problems with other bytes hav-ing the same pattern, a technique called “zero bit insertion” is used. Thistechniques specifies that after every succession of five consecutive 1’s, abinary 0 is inserted. Thus, no pattern 01111110 is ever transmitted bychance, except for the flags. At the receiving end, when the start flag isrecognized, a 0 is removed after 5 consecutive 1’s.

The address field is used for checking that the received message origi-nates from the correct equipment. There is always a risk of multiplexersoccasionally mixing up the messages. Each terminal is given different ter-minal numbers. The terminal is then programmed to accept messages onlyfrom a specific terminal number.

If the CRC function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown awayand not used in the evaluation. No data restoration or retransmission areimplemented.

1MRK 580 381-XEN


Binary signal transfer to remote end

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 250

2 Design

2.1 General The Remote Terminal Communication module RTC1 can handle 16inputs and 16 outputs. If additional inputs and outputs are required, anadditional Remote Terminal Communication module RTC2 can be added.

The modules can be placed in applicable slots in the terminal. To add,remove or move modules within the REx 5xx terminal, reconfiguration ofthe terminal is done from the graphical configuration tool, CAP 535.

If the user-entered configuration does not match the actual hardware posi-tion of the modules within the terminal, an error output is activated on thefunction block, which can be treated as an event or alarm.

All user defined names for inputs and outputs are input identities on thefunction blocks and are set from the configuration tool CAP 535.

2.2 Function block Each corresponding Remote terminal communication function block has16 inputs to handle information received from the remote end plus 16 out-puts to send information to the remote end. See figure 1.

The function blocks has an input BLOCK, which is available to block thefunction. When the input is energized, all 16 binary signals (SEND01-16)will be sent as zeroes. Incoming signals are not affected.

An output COMFAIL is also available to announce an alarm when there isa failure in the communication via the Remote terminal communicationmodule.

Figure 1: Function block of RTC1- with input and output signals.

RTC1-

BLOCKSEND01SEND02SEND03SEND04SEND05SEND06SEND07SEND08SEND09SEND10SEND11SEND12SEND13SEND14SEND15SEND16

COMFAILREC01REC02REC03REC04REC05REC06REC07REC08REC09REC10REC11REC12REC13REC14REC15REC16


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 251

Version 2.2-00

2.3 Human-machine interface (HMI)

The service reports of the function provides information of all functionaloutputs as well as function inputs ‘SEND01-16’ and can be viewed on thelocal HMI under:

ServiceReportI/O

RemTermCom1RemTermCom2

Self-supervision is provided for the remote terminal communication andinformation is available on the local HMI under:


RemTermCom


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 252

2.4 Communication alternatives

2.4.1 General Following communication alternatives exists:

Figure 2: Multiplexed link, fibre optical-galvanic connection.

Figure 3: Dedicated link, fibre optical connection.

Figure 4: Multiplexed link, fibre optical connection.

< 30 km

Opticalfibres

REx 5xx

otherusers

FOX 6Plus

MUX

GalvanicG.703

to theother end

X80039-2_1.eps

Opticalfibres

< 30 km

REx 5xx REx 5xx

X80039-2_2.eps

otherusers

REx 5xx

< 30 km MUX

FOX 20

Opticalfibres

to theother end

X80039-2_5.eps


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 253

Version 2.2-00

Figure 5: Multiplexed link, galvanic connection.

Figure 6: Dedicated link, short range galvanic modem.

Figure 7: Multiplexed link, short range fibre optical connection.

2.4.2 Fibre optical modem

The optical communication module is designed for both 9/125 µm singlemode fibres, and 50/125 or 62.5/125 µm multi mode fibres at a wave-length of 1300 nm. The connectors are of type FC-PC (SM) or FC (MM)respectively. Two different levels of optical output power are used tocover distances from 0 to approximately 30 km.

2.4.3 Short range fiber optical modem

The short range fiber optical modem is used for synchronous 64 kbit/sdata transmission at distances up to 5 km. It can also be used together withfibre optic transceiver type 21-15X/16X from FIBERDATA in order to getan optical link between the protection terminal and a remotely locatedcommunication equipment as in figure 7.

V.35, V.36, X.21, RS53056/64 kbit/s

REx 5xx

< 100 m

otherusers

MUX

Galvanic

to theother end

X80039-2_6.eps

Twistedpair cable

< 4 km

REx 5xx REx 5xx

X80039-2_4.eps

OpticalfibresREx 5xx 21-15X/16X V.35/36 (15X)

X.21 (16X)G.703 (16X)

< 5 km X80039-2_7.eps


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 254

Transmission is performed simultaneously in both directions, full duplex,over two optical fibres. The fibres shall be of multi mode type, preferable50/125 mm or 62.5/125 mm.

The reach of the short range optical modem will depend on the propertiesof the used optical fibre. In the optical budget also has to be accounted forlosses in splices, connectors and also ageing of the cable. The connectionto the protection terminal shall not be accounted for in the optical budget.15 dB optical budget gives up to 5 km reach under normal conditions.

2.4.4 Short range galvanic modem

The short range galvanic modem is used for synchronous data transmis-sion at 64 kbit/s at distances up to 4 km.

Compared to normal data transmission standards, for example V.36, X21etc., the short range modem increase the operational security and allowslonger distances of transmission. This is achieved by a careful choice oftransmission technology, modified M-3 balanced current loop, and gal-vanic isolation between the transmission line and the internal logic of theprotection terminal.

Transmission is performed simultaneously in both directions, full duplex,over four wires in the transmission line.

Table 1: Technical data for the short range fiber optical modem

Data transmission Synchronous; full duplex

Transmission rate 64 kbit/s

Optical fibre 850 nm, multimode fibre

Optical connectors ST

Optical budget 15 dB

Clock source Internal or derived from received signal

LED indications RTS, CTS, DSR, DCD, TXD, RXD, LO, LA, MA, RA

Table 2: Technical data for short range galvanic modem

Data transmission Synchronous; full duplex

Transmission rate 64 kbit/s (256 kBaud; code transparent

Range See figure 8 on page 255. Maximum permitted capacitance within each pair is 140 nF. The modem is not recommended to be used on dis-tance above 4 km.

Line interface Balanced symmetrical three-state current loop. 5-pin divisible connector with screw connection

Clock source Internal or derived from received signal

LED indications Clock, Send and Receive

Isolation Galvanic isolation through opto-couplers and iso-lating DC/DC converter

Test voltage 2 500 Vrms; 1 minute


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 255

Version 2.2-00

The reach of the short range galvanic modem will depend on the usedcable. Higher capacitance between conductors and higher resistance willreduce the reach. The use of screened cables will increase the capacitanceand thereby shorten the reach but this will most often be compensated forby the reduced noise giving a better operational security. Maximumranges as a function of cable parameters is given in Figure 8:.

Figure 8: Maximum reach.

Note! The reaches in the diagram, figure 8, is given for twisted-pair anddouble-screened cables, one screen for each pair and one common outerscreen. For non twisted-pair cables, the reach has to be reduced by 20%.For non pair-screened cables, the reach also has to be reduced by 20%.For non twisted and single screened cables, one common outer screen, thereach will therefor be reduced by 40%.

2.4.5 Galvanic interfaces If the terminal is in the same building as the multiplexing equipment,within a distance of less than 100 m, and the environment is relatively freeof noise, the terminal may be connected directly to the multiplexer viashielded and properly earthed cables with twisted pairs.

Since the terminal communicates continuously, a permanent communica-tion circuit is required. Consequently, the call control and handshakingfeatures specified for some interfacing recommendations are not pro-vided.

Equipment is available for the following interfacing recommendations,specifying the interconnection of the digital equipment to a PCM multi-plexer:

• V.35/36 co-directional galvanic interface

• V.35/36 contra-directional galvanic interface

• X.21 galvanic interface

• RS530/422 co-directional galvanic interface

• RS530/422 contra-directional galvanic interface

• G.703 co-directional galvanic interface (via additional interface con-verter).


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 256

Note! Due to problems of timing co-directional operation for V.35/36 andRS530 is only recommended to be used at direct back-to-back operation,for example during laboratory testing!

For the signals used by the terminal, the communication module for V.36also fulfils the older recommendation for V.35.

The connection is established by DSUB connectors, 15 pins for X.21 and25 pins for V.35/36 and RS530. The use of the different pins are shown infigure 9. The G.703 converter connection is performed by screw connec-tion.

Figure 9: DSUB connectors.

The following abbreviations are used in figure 9:

Table 3:

A Designations of terminals according to CCITT, EIA etc.

B Designations of terminals according to CCITT, EIA etc.

DCE Data communication equipment (= multiplexer, etc.)

DTE Data terminal equipment (= protection)

DTE READY Data terminal ready (follows auxiliary voltage)

GND Earth (reference for signals)

RCLK Receiver signal timing

REQ SEND Request to send (follows auxiliary voltage)

RXD Received data

SCREEN Connection of cable screen

TCLK DCE Transmitter signal timing from DCE

TCLK DTE Transmitter signal timing from DTE

TXD Transmitter data


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 257

Version 2.2-00

If the terminal is at a long distance from the multiplexer, or if the cablesrun through a noisy area, optical cables should be used to interconnect therelay and the multiplexer. In this case, the relay contains the module usedfor dedicated optical links.

If the multiplexer is of type FOX20 from ABB Netcom, the terminal canbe connected optically to the multiplexer, provided it is equipped with anOptical Terminal Module of type N3BT.

In other cases, an optical-to-electrical converter, FOX6Plus, 21-15xx or21-16xx has to be used at the multiplexer. The FOX6Plus supports theG.703 co-directional interfacing. 21-15xx supports V.35 and V.36 while21-16xx supports X.21, G.703 and RS530 co-directional and contra-direc-tional. The distance between the optical-to-electrical converter and themultiplexer should be kept less than 100 m, for G.703 less than 10 m.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 258

3 ConfigurationThe configuration of input and output signals to the function block is donefrom the configuration tool CAP 535.

To configure the I/O-module from the graphical tool:

• First, set the function selector for the Remote Terminal Communica-tion units, RTC1 used.

• Then connect the POSITION input of the logical I/O module to a slot output of the RTC function block.

Reconfiguration of the I/O-modules are also possible from the local HMIunder the menus:

ConfigurationI/O-modules

OperationReconfigureOscillation

4 SettingSet the user defined names, parameters, for the binary inputs and outputsfrom the configuration tool CAP 535.

The configuration parameters for the communication are available in themenu tree in the local HMI under:


RemTermCom

4.1 Selection of communication parameters

Note! This section does not apply to short range optical or galvanicmodem.

For the optical module, the optical output power has to be set according tothe attenuation of the fibre optic link.

For multimode fibres:

• If the attenuation is less than 6 dB, use Low setting

• If the attenuation is higher than 10 dB, use High setting

• If the attenuation is between 6 and 10 dB, use either High or Low setting.

For single-mode fibres:

• If the attenuation is higher than 5 dB, use High setting

• If the attenuation is between 0 and 5 dB, use either High or Low set-ting.


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 259

Version 2.2-00

To achieve the best operation, the optical communication modules at bothterminals must be synchronised. To fulfil this, one terminal acts as a Mas-ter and the other as a Slave. This is set under:


RemTermComCommSync

When communicating with FOX20 or FOX6Plus, the setting should be:

• Slave on the protection at both terminals.

When operating over dedicated fibres the setting shall be:

• Master at one terminal and Slave at the other.

When using the modules for X.21, V.35/36 contra-directional andRS530/422 contra-directional, no setting has to be carried out.

For the modules with V.35/36 co-directional and RS530/422 co-direc-tional communication, the bit rate has to be set. The choice is between56 and 64 kbits/s. This is set under:


RemTermComBitrate

4.2 Fibre optical Note! This section does not apply to short range optical modem.

The optical power is set in the HMI under:


RemTermCom

The optical power for the different possibilities is shown in the tablebelow.

Table 4:

Type of fibre Output powerOptical Transmission Output power

Optical Reception Sensitivity

Maximum attenuation

MultimodeLow -28 dBm -40 dBm 10 dB

High -16 dBm -40 dBm 21 dB

SinglemodeLow -33 dBm -40 dBm 5 dB

High -21 dBm -40 dBm 16 dB


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 260

The attenuation in fibres is normally approximately 0.8 dB/km for multi-mode, and 0.4 dB/km for single-mode fibres. Additional attenuation dueto the installation can be estimated at 0.2 dB/km for multimode and0.1 dB/km for single-mode fibres. For a single-mode fibre with high out-put power, this results in a maximum distance of 32 km.

4.3 Short range fibre optical modem

Normally all setting can be made on a DIP-switch located behind thecover around the fibre optic connectors at the back of the terminal accord-ing to figure 10. After the fibres has been disconnected, if attached, thecover plate can be removed just by pulling at the middle of the coverplate.

Note! If handled carefully the cover plate can be removed also with thefibres attached.

Figure 10: Setting and indications.

Switch 3 and 4 are used to set the source of timing. The function isaccording to setting of timing signal, table 5 on page 260.

When using the modem for optical point-to-point transmission, onemodem should be set for locally created timing and the other for timingrecovered from received signal.

When the modems are communicating with a transceiver 21-15X or 16Xthe modems shall be set for timing recovered from received optical signal,see setting of timing signal:

Table 5: Setting of timing signal

Switch No Function

3 4

OFF OFF Timing created by the modem

OFF ON Timing created by the differential function

ON OFF Timing recovered from received optical signal

ON ON No timing, the data transmission will not work


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 261

Version 2.2-00

The module can synchronise received data with the send clock. This is notnormally necessary in this application. Synchronisation ON/OFF is con-trolled by switch 2.

When the module is set for synchronisation (switch 2 = ON) switch 1must be set in the position corresponding to the Sync LED that is bright-est. If both have the same brightness the switch can be set in any position.

Note! After any change of settings, the modem has to be reset by theReset button located below the DIP-switch.

4.3.1 Indications There are ten LED’s indicating the status of the transmission link. TheseLED’s are found above DIP-switch described in the Setting section, seealso figure 10 on page 260. The function of the LED’s are explained in thefollowing table.

The memory function is reset with the Reset button below the DIP-switch.The reset command is also transmitted to the other end of the optical link.

The two green LED’s, Sync, at the bottom is used to set the synchronisa-tion function correctly with switch 4 as described in the Setting section.

4.3.2 Jumper settings Note! All jumpers are set in correct location from factory. No change ofjumper settings should be made without contacting the manufacturer.

The jumpers are accessible after the modem has been pulled out. This isdone by first removing all green 18-pin connectors at the back, thenremove all screws holding the back plate. After the back plate has beenremoved the modem can be pulled out.

Table 6: Indications

LED Colour Explanation

RTS Yellow Request to send

CTS Yellow Clear to send

DSR Yellow Data communication correct

DCD Yellow Detection of carrier signal

TXD Yellow Transmitted data

RXD Yellow Recieved data

RA Red Remotely detected problem with link

MA Red Memory function for problem with link

LO Green Link operation correctly

LA Red Locally detected problem with link

Sync Green Used when synchronisation is selected


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 262

Note! Only pull out the modem not the whole double size Euro-card.After the jumper settings has been changed put everything back in reverseorder.

Note! All electronic are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Proper actionmust be taken at the work place to avoid electrostatic discharge!

There are two locations of jumpers, S3 and S5 according to figure 11.

Figure 11: Jumper locations.

S3 is used for selecting timing function. A jumper is inserted in position 1.

S5 is used for setting the transmission rate at timing created by themodem. Two jumpers are inserted, one in position 1 and the other in posi-tion 4. This gives 64 kbit/s which is the rate used by the differential pro-tection function.

4.3.3 Operation on dedicated fibres

When operating on dedicated fibres one protection is set to generate thetiming and the other will recover timing from received optical signal. Thesetting will then be according to table 7.

Table 7: Settings

Protection 1 Protection 2

Switch Position Switch Position

1 Not used 1 Not used

2 Off 2 Off

3 Off 3 Off

4 Off 4 On


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 263

Version 2.2-00

4.3.4 Operation with transceivers of type 21-15XX or 21-16XX

When operating with transceivers of type 21-15XX or 21-16XX fromFiberdata, the timing will be recovered from received optical signal. Thesetting will then be according to table 8.

4.4 Short range galvanic modem

There is only one setting to do, if the timing signal (Clock) are to belocally created or recovered from the received signal. This setting is per-formed by a DIP-switch located behind the cover around the line connec-tor at the back of the terminal according to figure 12. After the lineconnector has been pulled out, the cover plate can be removed just bypulling at the middle of the cover plate.

Figure 12: Settings and indications.

Only switch 1 and 2 are used on the DIP-switch. The function is accordingto the setting of timing signal, see table 9.

In normal operation switch 1 is set in ON position at one end and switch 2is set ON at the other end. The rest of the switches is set OFF.

Table 8: Settings

Protection

Switch Position

1 Not used

2 Off

3 Off

4 On

Table 9: Setting of timing signal

Switch No Function

1 2


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 264

4.4.1 Indications There are three LED’s indicating the status of the transmission link. TheseLED’s are found below DIP-switch described in the Setting section, seealso figure 12 on page 263. The LED’s are denoted DCD, RD and TDwith indications according to table 10, Indications, below.


LED Explanation

DCD Data and Carrier Detect. Indicates that a correct timing signal is received. Shall show a steady green light.

RD Receive Data. Indicates that a “one” is received. Shall show a flickering yellow light

TD Transmit Data. Indicates that a “zero” is sent. Shall show a flick-ering yellow light.


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 265

Version 2.2-00

5 Optical/electric converter for short range optical modem

5.1 Transceiver 21-15x for interface standard V.35/V.36

5.1.1 Interfaces The transceiver 21-15X can be used for interface standards V35, V36 andRS232. The transmission can be synchronous at different transmissionrates (see below in section 2) or asynchronous with a maximum transmis-sion rate of 256 kBaud (12% jitters). Following signals are supported inthe interface:

1)DCE stands for Data Circuit terminating Equipment and DTEfor Data Terminal Equipment. The transceiver is normally a DCE.

2)= 19, 20, 25, 27, 29, 30, 31, 37

Figure 13: Connection between the transceiver and other equipment.

V35, V36 and RS232 are using a common output module and the choosebetween the three interface standards are done by placing a jumper in oneof three possible positions according to figure 14 on page 268. Only oneinterface standard can be chosen simultaneously but different standardscan be chosen at the two ends.

The optical contact is ST for multi mode fibre, 50/120 µm or 62.6/120µm.

Table 11: Interface signals

Signal name V24 V35 V36 RS232 Direction1)

TXD 103 P/S 4/22 2 -> DCE

TXD

TXC

TXCE

RXD

RXC

TXD

TXC

TXCE

RXD

RXC

RTS

DSR

DTR

CTS

DCD

RTS

DSR

DTR

CTS

DCD

SGNDPGND

SGNDPGND


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 266

The electrical contact is a 34-pin connector according to ISO 4902 DCEfor V35, a 37-pin connector according to ISO 2593-1984 DCE for V36and a 25-pin connector according to ISO 2110 DCE for V24 / V28(RS232).

5.1.2 Transmission rates The transceiver can transmit synchronous data with transmission ratesaccording to table 12.

The transmission rate is set by a rotary switch, see figure 14 on page 268.

Asynchronous data transmission can be used with a sampling rate of2048 ksample/s which gives a maximum transmission rate of about256 kBaud.

5.1.3 Timing The timing of the transceiver can be set for three alternatives:

• Internal timing, the transceiver will create the timing.

• External timing, the transceiver is controlled by the DTE via signal 113.

• Loop timing, the timing is derived from the received optical signal.

The choice is done by two jumpers, see figure 14 on page 268.The transceiver can synchronise received data with transmit timing. Thisfunction is controlled by a jumper, see figure 14 on page 268. When thetransceiver is set for synchronisation of data, the jumper for selection ofphase must be correctly set. The jumper has to be placed closest to thebrightest LED, see figure 14 on page 268.

5.1.4 Indications Ten LED’s with following colour code: Alarm = Red, Status = Yellow,Function = Green.

The transceiver is supervising its own receiving function and announce itby indicating and signaling with DCD and DSR. The transceiver is super-vising the receiving function of the remote end and announce this by indi-cating and signaling with DSR. The reading of fault indication isinterrupted by pressing the reset button, the signaling cannot be read. Thereset is also transmitted to the transceiver at the remote end.

The following indications exist:

Table 12: Transmission rates

Transmission rate[kBaud]

Position

2048 0, E, F

Table 13:

RTS status CTS status


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 267

Version 2.2-00

5.1.5 Dissembling/Assembling

To make the jumpers accessible to perform the above mentioned settings,the unit must be opened.


The unit is dissembled by unscrewing three screws located under the unitat the back, holding the back plate in position. The back plate with con-nection for the auxiliary voltage can now be pulled backwards. The uppercover is now pushed backward about 2 cm and when lifted up from theunit. The printed circuit board will now be visible according to figure 14on page 268.

The unit is reassembled by placing the cover on the unit about 2 cmbehind the front. The cover is gently pushed downwards and then pushedforward. The back plate with connection for the auxiliary voltage is put inposition from behind and the three screws, holding the back plate, are putback.

DSR status DCD status

TXD status RXD status

LO function (Link operational) LA alarm (Link Alarm)

MA status (Memory Alarm) RA alarm (Remote Alarm)

Table 13:


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 268

5.1.6 Setting description

Figure 14: Setting location on printed circuit board.

Selection of interface standard, V35 / V36 / RS232, jumper S1:

• RS232: put the jumper in upper position.

• V35: put the jumper in middle position (factory setting).

• V36: put the jumper in bottom position.

Selection of transmission rate, rotary switch S2:

• Turn S2 in wanted position. For asynchronous transmission put S2 in position 0. (default setting at factory).

Selection of timing function, jumper S3:

• Internal timing: No jumper on the two bottom positions (default set-ting).

• External timing: One jumper in the middle position.

• Timing retrieved from received optical signal: One jumper in the bottom position.

Selection of synchronisation, jumper S3:

• Synchronisation: One jumper in the top position.

• No synchronisation: No jumper in the top position (default setting).

Power

S1 S2 S3 S7

S5 S4

Back side

Front


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 269

Version 2.2-00

When synchronisation has been selected, jumper S4 is placed closest tothe brightest LED.

Note! After any change in setting the transceiver, it has to be reset bypressing button S7 (Reset).

Selection of protective grounding, jumper S5:

• No connection between protective grounding and signal ground:

• No jumper (default setting).

• Soft connection between protective grounding and signal ground:jumper inserted to the left.

• Hard connection between protective grounding and signal ground: jumper inserted to the right.

5.1.7 Specification Electrical interface:34-pin connector according to ISO 4902 DCE for V35,37-pin connector according to ISO 2593-1984 DCE for V36,25-pin connector according to ISO 2110 DCE for V24/V28 (RS232).

Optical interface:Optical connectors are ST for multi mode fibre.Optical budget is 15 dB for 850 nm multi mode fibre.

Auxiliary voltage:110-230 Volt ± 20%, 50-60 Hz Standard AC line connectoror48-110 Volt DC ± 20%XLR audio connector.

5.1.8 Recommendations on settings and connections

Here follows some recommendations on settings and connections whenoperating together with protections from ABB Network Partner. In thefollowing the transceiver is regarded as a DTE (although it is actuallydesigned as a DCE) and is supposed to be connected to a communicationequipment that acts as a DCE.

For synchronous communication a DCE always have to output timing sig-nals (TC and RC) and one input timing signal (TTC). For the DTE theopposite is valid. All clocks in a synchronous network have the same tim-ing and provided the phase is set correctly they have also the same phase.This means that only one clock signal has to be used between the trans-ceiver and the communication as in the cases below.

Connector for DC-supply

1 = 48-110 V DC2 = 0 V3 = Screen

1 2

3


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 270

5.1.8.1 Co-directional opera-tion

The connection is done according to table 14.

Figure 6 on page 253 shows the connection. If needed for proper opera-tion of the communication equipment a connection can be made betweenthe RC and TC. Both TD and RD are controlled from TTC.

Setting of transceiver is done according to table 15.

Table 14: Connections

Transceiver

Pin No.

V.35 V.36 Comm. eq.

Signal No A B A B Signal No Direction

TD 103 P S 4 22 RD 104 Comm. eq -> Transceiver

RD 104 R T 6 24 TD 103 Transceiver -> Comm. eq.

TTC 113 U W 17 35 RC 115 Comm. eq. -> Transceiver

Table 15: Settings

Switch, jumper Setting Gives

S1 Middle position V.35

S1 Bottom position V.36

S2 9 64 kbit/s

S3 Middle position External clock

S4 Has no influence on operation ---


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 271

Version 2.2-00

5.1.8.2 Contra-directional operation

The connection is done according to table 16.

1) Either RC - 115 or TC - 114 can be used.

Figure 7 on page 253 shows the connection. In this case the connection toTTC can be done either from RC or TC but not from both. Both TD andRD are controlled from TTC.


5.2 Transceiver 21-16x for interface standard X.21/G.703

5.2.1 Interfaces The transceiver 21-16X can be used for interface standards X.21, RS530and three variants of G.703 (the 2048 kbit/s protocol on coaxial cable, co-directional according to the 64 kbit/s protocol from 64 up to 2048 kbit/sand contra-directional according to the 64 kbit/s protocol from 64 up to2048 kbit/s, the last two on twisted pair cable. The transmission can besynchronous at different transmission rates (see “Transmission rates” onpage 272) or asynchronous with a maximum transmission rate of 256kBaud (12% jitters). Following signals are supported in the interface:


Transceiver

Pin No.

V.35 V.36 Comm. eq.

Signal No A B A B Signal No Direction

TD 103 P S 4 22 RD 104 Comm. eq -> Transceiver

RD 104 R T 6 24 TD 103 Transceiver -> Comm. eq.

TTC 113 U W 17 35 1) 1) Comm. eq. -> Transceiver

Table 17: Settings


S1 Middle position V.35

S1 Bottom position V.36

S2 9 64 kbit/s



Table 18: Interface signals

Signal name X.21 RS530 G.7032) (co) Direction1)

TXD 2, 9 2, 14 3, 4 -> DCE


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 272

1)DCE stands for Data Circuit terminating Equipment and DTE forData Terminal Equipment. The transceiver is normally a DCE.

2)Numbered from left, the connection points will get this number.3)Depending if the transceiver is acting as receiver or transmitter of

reference timing. This is set by jumpers on the PCB.

Figure 15: Connection between the transceiver and other equipment.

Choosing interface standard is done by placing a jumper in one of fourpossible positions according to “Configuring type of interface” onpage 274. Only one interface standard can be chosen simultaneously butdifferent standards can be chosen at the two ends.

Optical connectors are ST for multi mode fibre.

The electrical contact is for:X.2115-pin DSUBRS53025-pin DSUBG.703 co-directional 10 pin divisible screw connector (and/or8-pin modular RJ45 jack).

5.2.2 Transmission rates The transceiver can transmit synchronous data with transmission ratesaccording to table 19.

TXD

TXC

TXCE

RXD

RXC

TXD

TXC

TXCE

RXD

RXC

RTS

DSR

DTR

CTS

DCD

RTS

DSR

DTR

CTS

DCD

SGNDPGND

SGNDPGND

Table 19: Transmission rates

Transmission rate [kBaud] Position

2048 0, E, F


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 273

Version 2.2-00

Asynchronous data transmission can be used with a sampling rate of2048 ksample/s which gives a maximum transmission rate of about256 kBaud. The transmission rate is set by a rotary switch according to“Configuring transmission rate, timing and synchronisation” on page 275.

5.2.3 Timing The timing of the transceiver can be set for three alternatives:

• Internal timing:the transceiver will create the timing.

• External timing:the transceiver is controlled by the DTE via signal 113.

• Loop timing:the timing is derived from the received optical signal.

The selection is done by two jumpers according to “Configuring transmis-sion rate, timing and synchronisation” on page 275.

The transceiver can synchronise received data with transmit timing. Thisfunction is controlled by a jumper, see “Configuring transmission rate,timing and synchronisation” on page 275. When the transceiver is set forsynchronisation of data, the jumper for selection of phase must be cor-rectly set. The jumper has to be placed closest to the brightest LEDaccording to “Configuring transmission rate, timing and synchronisation”on page 275.

5.2.4 Indications Twelve LED’s with following colour code:

• Alarm = Red

• Status = Yellow

• Function = Green.

The transceiver is supervising its own receiving function and announce itby indicating and signaling with DCD and DSR. The transceiver is super-vising the receiving function of the remote end and announce this byindicating and signaling with DSR. The lock-in of fault indication is inter-rupted by pressing the reset button. Note that signaling is not locked-in.

Following indications exist:


RTS status CTS status

DSR status DCD status

TXD status RXD status

CO status (G.703 co) CONTRA status (G.703 contra)

LO function (Linkoperational)

LA alarm (Linkoperational)

MA status (MemoryAlarm)

RA alarm (MemoryAlarm)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 274

5.2.5 Setting possibility for G.703

The interface for G.703 for twisted pair cable demands certain jumpers tobe inserted depending on type of transmission. Following possibilitiesexist:

• co- or contra-directional

• sending or receiving of timing signal for contra-directional mode.

Insertion of jumpers are done according to “Configuring G.703 co- andcontra-directional” on page 277.

5.2.6 Dissembling/Assembling

For making the jumpers accessible to perform the above mentioned set-tings, the unit must be opened.


The unit is dissembled by unscrewing three screws located under the unitat the back, holding the back plate in position. The back plate with con-nection for the auxiliary voltage can now be pulled backwards. The uppercover is now pushed backward about 2 cm and then lifted up from theunit. The printed circuit board will now be visible according to figure 14on page 268.

The unit is reassembled by placing the cover on the unit about 2 cmbehind the front. The cover is gently pushed downwards and then pushedforward. The back plate with connection for the auxiliary voltage is put inposition from behind and the three screws, holding the back plate, are putback.

5.2.7 Configuring type of interface

Figure 16: Jumper location for interface standard selection.


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 275

Version 2.2-00

Jumper field S5 selects the interface type.

Note! Only one interface type can be chosen. From top to bottom accord-ing to figure 16, an inserted jumper will give the following interface type:

• G.703, 64 to 2048 kbit/s, co-directional with twisted pair cable conn.

• X.21

• RS530

5.2.8 Configuring transmission rate, timing and synchronisation

Figure 17: Setting locations for rate, clock and synchronisation.

Selection of transmission rate:

• Turn S11 in wanted position according to “Transmission rates” on page 272.

Selection of timing function, jumper S14.

• Internal timing: No jumper on the two bottom positions.

• External timing: One jumper in the middle position.

• Timing retrieved from received optical signal: One jumper in the bottom position.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 276

Selection of synchronisation, jumper S14:

• Synchronisation: One jumper in the top position.

• No synchronisation: No jumper in the top position.

When synchronisation has been selected, jumper S13 is placed closest tothe brightest LED.Note! After any change in the setting, the transceiver has to be reset bypressing button S12 (Reset).

5.2.9 Configuring X.21

Figure 18: Jumper location for interface standard X.21.

The insertion of jumpers in fields S2, S3 and S4 shall be done consideringif the unit shall act as a DCE or a DTE according to following:

How to choose X.21 see “Configuring type of interface” on page 274.

S2 S3 S4

S2 S3 S4

DTE:

DCE:


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 277

Version 2.2-00

5.2.10 Configuring G.703 co- and contra-directional

Figure 19: Jumper locations for G.703 co- and contra-directionaloperation.

Jumper field S6:

• G.703 co-directional: One jumper in the top position.

• G.703 contra-directional: One jumper in the bottom position.

Jumper field S7, S8 and S9:

• Jumper at S7 gives transmission of timing at G.703 contra-directional operation.

• No jumper at S7 gives reception of timing at G.703 contra-directional operation.

Note! S7 has no influence at G.703 co-directional operation.

S8 and S9 reconnects the pulse transformer for transmission or receptionof timing signal.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 278

Note! S8 and S9 must be equally configured and in accordance with set-ting of S7.

How to choose G.703 co- and contra-directional operation, see “Configur-ing G.703 co- and contra-directional” on page 277.

5.2.11 Selection of protective earthing

Figure 20: Jumper location for protective earthing.

Jumper field S1:

• No connection between protective earth and signaling earth:No jumper.

• Soft connection between protective earth and signaling earth:Jumper inserted to the left.

• Direct connection between protective earth and signaling earth:Jumper inserted to the right.

5.2.12 Specification Electrical interface:X.2115-pin DSUBRS53025-pin DSUBG.703 10 pin divisible screw connector (and/or 8-pin modular RJ45 jack).

Jumper in upper field givestransmission of timing

Jumper in bottom field givestransmission of timing


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 279

Version 2.2-00

Optical interface:Optical connectors are ST for multi mode fibre.Optical budget is 15 dB for 850 nm multi mode fibre.

Auxiliary voltage:110-230 Volt ± 20%, 50-60 Hz Standard AC line connectoror48-110 Volt DC ± 20%XLR audio connector.

5.2.13 Recommendations on settings and connections

Here follows some recommendations on settings and connections whenoperating together with protections from ABB Network Partner. In thefollowing the transceiver is regarded as a DTE and is supposed to be con-nected to a communication equipment that acts as a DCE.

5.2.13.1 X.21 operation The connection is done according to table 21, also shown in figure 3 onpage 252.


Connector for DC-supply

1 = 48-110 V DC2 = 0 V3 = Screen

1 2

3


Transceiver Comm. eq.

Pin No.

Signal A B Signal Direction

T R Comm. eq -> Transceiver

R T Transceiver -> Comm. eq.

S S Comm. eq. -> Transceiver

Table 22: Settings


S5 Second position from top G.703

S6 Top position Co-directional

S11 9 64 kbit/s




Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 280

5.2.13.2 G.703 co-directional operation

The connection is done according to table 23, also see figure 3 on page252.

If a screen is available in the cable it is connected to protection earth (pin9, 10 on the transceiver) at one or both ends.



Transceiver Comm. eq.

Signal Pin Signal Direction

TX 3, 4 RX Comm. eq -> Transceiver

RX 1, 2 TX Transceiver -> Comm. eq.

Table 24: Settings


S5 Second position from top G.703

S6 Top position Co-directional

S11 9 64 kbit/s




1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 281

Version 2.2-00

6 TestingThere are two types of internal self-supervision of the RTC.

The I/O-circuitboard is supervised as an I/O module. For example it gives‘FAIL’ if the board is not inserted. I/O-modules not configured are neithersupervised. When an RTC- module is configured as a logical I/O moduleit is also supervised.

Then there is also the communication supervision that gives ‘WARNING’if one of the RTC-modules signals for ‘COMFAIL’. Each RTC-modulehas an error output (‘COMFAIL’) which is set to a logical 1 if anything iswrong with the communication through the actual module. Status forinputs and outputs as well as self-supervision status are available from thelocal HMI.

Test correct functionality by simulating different kind of faults. Alsocheck that sent and received data is correct transmitted and read.

A test connection is showed in figure 21. A binary input ( BI ) is con-nected to a RTC function input in end1, for example RTC1-SEND01, andin the other end a binary output ( BO ) is connected to the received func-tion output, for example RTC1-REC01. The binary signal is transfered tothe remote end ( end2 ) through a HDLC link.

Figure 21: Test of RTC with I/O.

REx 5xx (End 1)

BI

REx 5xx

BO

+

+

HDLClink

(End 2)Test connectionwith I/O

-

-


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 282

7 Appendix

7.1 Function block

Figure 22: Terminal diagram of function block RTC1, parameters shown.

RTC1-

BLOCKSEND01SEND02SEND03SEND04SEND05SEND06SEND07SEND08SEND09SEND10SEND11SEND12SEND13SEND14SEND15SEND16

COMFAILREC01REC02REC03REC04REC05REC06REC07REC08REC09REC10REC11REC12REC13REC14REC15REC16

RC01NAMERC02NAMERC03NAMERC04NAMERC05NAMERC06NAMERC07NAMERC08NAMERC09NAMERC10NAMERC11NAMERC12NAMERC13NAMERC14NAMERC15NAMERC16NAMESD01NAMESD02NAMESD03NAMESD04NAMESD05NAMESD06NAMESD07NAMESD08NAMESD09NAMESD10NAMESD11NAMESD12NAMESD13NAMESD14NAMESD15NAMESD16NAME


1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 283

Version 2.2-00

7.2 Signal list


RTC1- BLOCK IN Block of remote terminal communication function

RTC1- SEND01 IN Signal to remote terminal, input 1
















RTC1- COMFAIL OUT Communication failure

RTC1- REC01 OUT Signal from remote terminal, input 1

















Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 284

7.3 Setting table


RC01NAME 0-13 RTC1-REC01

Remote Terminal Communication 1, Name for Input 1































SD01NAME 0-13 RTC1-SEND01

Remote Terminal Communication 1, Name for Output 1














1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 285

Version 2.2-00





















Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 381-XENPage 6 – 286

Page 6 – 287Serial communication

1 ApplicationThe serial communication can be used for different purposes, whichenable better access to the information stored in the terminals. The serialcommunication is also used for communication directly between termi-nals (bay-to-bay communication).

The serial communication can be used with a station monitoring system(SMS), via a substation automation system (SCS) or a SCADA system.Normally, SPA communication is used for SMS and SCS; LON communi-cation is used for SCS. SPA communication is also applied when usingthe front communication port, but for this purpose, no special serial com-munication function is required in the terminal. Only the software in thePC and a special cable for front connection is needed.

As an alternative to the rear SPA communication port, a port intended forthe IEC 870-5-103 is available. IEC 870-5-103 is a standard protocol forprotection functions.

Figure 1: Example of SPA communication structure for a station moni-toring system

Figure 2: Example of LON communication structure for substation auto-mation

REB 551*2.0

REL 5xx*2.0

Bus connection units

REOR 100

REC 561*2.0

SPA busFibre opticloop

Opto/electricalconverter

(Minute pulsefrom station clock)

Telephone Telephonemodem modem

SMS-BASESM/REx 500SM/REOR 100RECOMREVAL

REB 551

REL 5xx*2.0

REC 561

Micro SCADA

Gateway

LON-bus

LIB 520

1MRK 580 301-XEN


Serial communication

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 288

2 Theory of operationAll serial communication to and from the terminal (including the front PCport communication) uses either the SPA-bus V 2.4 protocol, IEC 870-5-103 or the LonTalk protocol.

2.1 SPA operation The SPA protocol is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication.The communication is based on a master-slave principle, where the termi-nal is a slave, and the PC is the master. Only one master can be applied oneach fibre optic loop. A program is needed in the master computer forinterpretation of the SPA-bus codes, and for translation of the settings sentto the terminal. This program is called SMS-BASE with the SM/REx 500-module.

2.2 LON operation The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol Specification Ver-sion 3 from Echelon Corporation. This protocol is designed for communi-cation in control networks and is a peer-to-peer protocol where all thedevices connected to the network can communicate with each otherdirectly. For more information of the bay-to-bay communication, refer tothe documents Event function and Binary signal interbay communication.

2.3 IEC 870-5-103 operation

The IEC 870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bitserial communication exchanging information with a control system. InIEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is aslave. The communication is based on a point to point principle. The mas-ter must have a program that can interpret the IEC 870-5-103 communica-tion messages. For detailed information about IEC 870-5-103, refer to thepart 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion stan-dard for the informative interface of protection equipment, in the IEC 870standard.

Serial communication 1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 289

Version 2.2-00

3 DesignThe serial communication use optical fibres for transfer of data within astation. For this purpose, a fibre optic bus input can be available on therear of the terminal, one for LON communication, and one for SPA or IECcommunication. The principle of two independent communication ports isused.

3.1 SPA design When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the sta-tion, using the rear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station mon-itoring system is:

• Optical fibres• Opto/electrical converter for the PC• PC

When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, thesame hardware is needed plus telephone modems.

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is:

• SMS-BASE (Ver. 2.0 or higher)

• SM/REx 500 for terminals ver. 2.0

• RECOM (Ver 1.3 or higher) if disturbance recorder data is trans-ferred to a PC

• REVAL (Ver 1.1 or higher) for evaluation of this disturbance recorder data

When communicating to a front-connected PC, the only hardwarerequired is the special front-connection cable. The software needed in afront connected PC is:

• SMS-BASE (Ver 2.0 or higher)

• SM/REx 500 for terminals ver. 2.0. The SM/REx 500 includes one small part of RECOM, which lets you collect disturbance recorder data via the front port.

• REVAL (Ver 1.1 or higher) is also required if the same PC is used for evaluation of the disturbance recorder data.

3.2 LON design The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on theapplication, but one very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler andoptic fibres connecting the star coupler to the terminals. To communicatewith the terminals from MicroSCADA, the application library LIB 520 isneeded.

The HV/Control and the HV/REx 500 software modules are included inthe LIB 520 high-voltage process package, which is a part of the Applica-tion Software Library within MicroSCADA applications.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 290

The HV/Control software module is intended to be used for control func-tions in REx 5xx terminals. This module contains the process picture, dia-logues and process database for the control application in theMicroSCADA.

The HV/REx 500 software module is used to present Station Monitoringinformation on the MicroSCADA screen.

3.3 IEC 870-5-103 design

3.3.1 General The protocol implementation in REx 5xx consists of these functions:

• Event handling

• Report of analog service values (measurands)

• Fault location

• Command handling- Autorecloser ON/OFF

- Teleprotection ON/OFF

- Protection ON/OFF

- LED reset

- Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)

• File transfer (disturbance files)

• Time synchronisation

3.3.2 Hardware When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) or a RemoteTerminal Unit (RTU) in the station, using the IEC port, the only hardwareneeded is:

• Optical fibres, glass/plastic• Opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU• PC/RTU

3.3.3 Events The events created in the terminal available for the IEC 870-5-103 proto-col are based on the event function EV01 - EV06 available in the terminal.These event function blocks include the function type and the informationnumber for each event input, which can be found in the IEC-document.See also document Event function.

3.3.4 Measurands The measurands can be included as type 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and type 9according to the standard.


Version 2.2-00

3.3.5 Fault location The fault location is expressed in reactive ohms. In relation to the linelength in reactive ohms, it gives the fault distance in percent. The data isavailable and reported when the fault locator function is included in theterminal.

3.3.6 Commands The commands defined in the IEC 870-5-103 protocol are represented in adedicated function block. This block has output signals according to theprotocol for all commands. The function block for the IEC commands canbe found in the appendix.

3.3.7 File transfer As for file transfer functionality it is based on the Disturbance recorderfunction. The analog and binary signals recorded will be reported to themaster. The eight last disturbances that is recorded is available for transferto the master. Though a file is transferred and acknowledged by the masterit cannot be transferred again.

The analog channels that are reported are the first four current inputs andthe first four voltage inputs.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 292

4 SettingThe SPA and the IEC use the same rear communication port. To define theprotocol to be used, a setting is done on the local HMI under the menu:


SPA-IECPort

When the type of communication protocol is defined, the power to the ter-minal has to be switched off and on.

4.1 SPA setting The most important settings in the terminal for SPA communication arethe slave number and baud rate (communication speed). These settings areabsolutely essential for all communication contact to the terminal.

These settings can only be done on the local HMI for rear channel com-munication at:


SPACommRear

and for front connection at:


SPACommFront

The slave number can be set to any value from 1 to 899, as long as theslave number is unique within the used SPA loop.

The baud rate, which is the communication speed, can be set to between300 and 38400 bits/s. The baud rate should be the same for the whole sta-tion, although different baud rates in a loop are possible. If different baudrates in the same fibre optical loop are used, consider this when makingthe communication setup in the communication master, the PC. The max-imum baud rate of the front connection is limited to 9600 bit/s.

For local communication, 19200 or 38400 bit/s is the normal setting. Iftelephone communication is used, the communication speed depends onthe quality of the connection and on the type of modem used. But remem-ber that the terminal does not adapt its speed to the actual communicationconditions, because the speed is set on the HMI of the terminal.


Version 2.2-00

4.2 LON setting Use the LNT, LON Network Tool to set the LON communication. This isa software tool applied as one node on the LON bus. In order to communi-cate via LON, the terminals need to know which node addresses the otherconnected terminals have, and which network variable selectors should beused. This is organised by the LNT.

The node address is transferred to the LNT via the local HMI at:


LONCommServicePinMsg

By setting YES, the node address is sent to the LNT via the LON bus. Or,the LNT can scan the network for new nodes.

The speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 MHz. This can bechanged by the LNT.

If the LON communication from the terminal stops, caused by setting ofillegal communication parameters (outside the setting range) or byanother disturbance, it is possible to reset the LON port of the terminal.This is performed at the local HMI at:


LONCommLONDefault

By setting YES, the LON communication is reset in the terminal, and theaddressing procedure can start from the beginning again.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 294

There are a number of session timers which can be set via the local HMI.These settings are only for advanced use and should only be changed afterrecommendation from ABB Network Partner AB. The time values beloware the default settings. The settings can be found at:


LONCommSessionTimers

4.3 IEC 870-5-103 setting

4.3.1 Settings from the local HMI

The settings for IEC 870-5-103 communication are the following:

• Individually blocking of commands• Setting of measurand type• Setting of main function type and activation of main function type• Settings for slave number and baud rate (communication speed)• Command for giving Block of information command

The settings for individually blocking of commands can be found on thelocal HMI at:


IECComCommands

Each command has its own blocking setting and the state can be set toOFF or ON. The OFF state corresponds to non-blocked state and ON cor-responds to blocked state.


Version 2.2-00

The settings for type of measurand can be found on the local HMI at:


IECComMeasurands

The type of measurands can be set to report standardised types, Type 3.1,Type 3.2, Type 3.3, Type 3.4 or Type 9.

The use of main function type is to facilitate the engineering work of theterminal. The settings for main function type and the activation of mainfunction type can be found on the local HMI at:


IECComFunctionType

The main function type can be set to values according to the standard, thisis, between 1 and 255. The value zero is used as default and correspondsto not used.

The setting for activation of main function type can be set to OFF or ON.The OFF state corresponds to non-activated state and ON corresponds toactivated state. Upon activated the main function type overrides all othersettings for function type within the terminal, that is, function type set-tings for event function and disturbance recorder function. When set toOFF, function type settings for event function and disturbance recorderfunction use their own function type settings made on the function blocksfor the event function and disturbance recorder respectively. Though forall other functions they use the main function type even when set to OFF.

The settings for communication parameters slave number and baud ratecan be found on the local HMI at:


IECComCommunication

The slave number can be set to any value between 0 to 255.

The baud rate, the communication speed, can be set either to 9600 bits/sor 19200 bits/s.

The settings for issuing a block-of-information command can be found onthe local HMI at:


IECComBlockOfInfo


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 296

Issuing the BlockOfInformation command with the value one (1) blocksall information sent to the master and abort any GI procedure or any filetransfer in process. Thus issuing the command with the value set to zero(0) will allow information to be polled by the master.

The dialogue to operate the output from the BlockOfInformation com-mand function is performed from different state as follows:

1. Selection active; select the:

• C button, and then the No box activates.• Up arrow, and then New: 0 changes to New: 1. The up arrow

changes to the down arrow.• E button, and then the Yes box activates.

2. Yes box active; select the:

• C button to cancel the action and return to the BlockOfInfo window.• E button to confirm the action and return to the BlockOfInfo win-

dow.• Right arrow to activate the No box.

3. No box active; select the:

• C button to cancel the action and return to the BlockOfInfo window.• E button to confirm the action and return to the BlockOfInfo win-

dow.• Left arrow to activate the Yes box.

4.3.2 Settings from the CAP 531 tool

4.3.2.1 Event For each input of the Event function there is a setting for the informationnumber of the connected signal. The information number can be set to anyvalue between 0 and 255. In order to get proper operation of the sequenceof events the event masks in the event function shall be set toON_CHANGE. For single-command signals, the event mask shall be setto ON_SET.

In addition there is a setting on each event block for function type. Referto description of the Main Function type set on the local HMI.

4.3.2.2 Commands As for the commands defined in the protocol there is a dedicated functionblock with eight output signals. The configuration of these signals aremade by using the CAP 531 tool.

To realise the BlockOfInformation command, which is operated from thelocal HMI, the output BLKINFO on the IEC command function blockICOM has to be connected to an input on an event function block. Thisinput shall have the information number 20 (monitor direction blocked)according to the standard.


Version 2.2-00

4.3.2.3 File transfer For each input of the Disturbance recorder function there is a setting forthe information number of the connected signal. The information numbercan be set to any value between 0 and 255.

Furthermore there is a setting on each input of the Disturbance recorderfunction for the function type. Refer to description of Main Function typeset on the local HMI.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 298

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

5.2 Signal list

FuncTypeOpFnType

IEC870-5-103

ARBLKZCOMBLK

FNBLKLEDRSSETG1SETG2SETG3SETG4

BLKINFO

ICOM


ICOM- ARBLK OUT Output from ARBLK command, to be used for switching autorecloser on/off.

ICOM- FNBLK OUT Output from FNBLK command, to be used for switching protection on/off.

ICOM- BLKINFO OUT Output from BLKINFO command. Signal to block all information sent to master.

ICOM- LEDRS OUT Output from LEDRS command, to be used for resetting the LEDs.

ICOM- SETG1 OUT Output from SETG1 command, to be used for activation of setting group 1.



ICOM- SETG4K OUT Output from SETG4 command, to be used for activation of setting group 4.

ICOM- ZCOMBLK OUT Output from ZCOMBLK command, to be used for switching teleprotection on/off.


Version 2.2-00

5.3 Setting table

Table 1: Setting table for the IEC 870-5-103 command function block ICOM


FuncType 0-255 0 Main function type for terminal

OpFnType Off, On Off Main function type operation for terminal

Table 2: Setting table for SPA communication

PARAMETER SETTING RANGE DESCRIPTION

Rear comm. port:

SlaveNo (1 - 899) SPA-bus identification number

BaudRate 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 Baud

Communication speed

RemoteChActgrp Open, Block Open=Access right to change between active groups (both rear ports)

RemoteChSet Open, Block Open=Access right to change any parameter (both rear ports)

Front comm. port:

SlaveNo (1 - 899) SPA-bus identification number

BaudRate 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 Baud

Communication speed


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 301-XENPage 6 – 300

Page 6 – 301Command function

1 ApplicationThe REx 5xx terminals may be provided with output functions that can becontrolled either from a Substation Control System or from other termi-nals via the LON bus. Together with the configuration logic circuits, theuser can govern pulses or steady output signals for control purposeswithin the terminal or via binary outputs. Command function blocks for16 binary signals are used to receive information over the LON bus fromthe operator station and from other REx 5xx terminals. The other termi-nals must have a corresponding event function block to send the informa-tion.

1MRK 580 353-XEN


Command function

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 353-XENPage 6 – 302

2 Design

2.1 General One multiple command function block with fast execution time and/or 79multiple command function blocks with slower execution time are avail-able in the REx 5xx terminals as options.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting isdone on the MODE input, common for the whole block, from the CAP531 configuration tool.

0=Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the stationlevel, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.

1=Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the val-ues sent from the station level.

2=Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sentfrom the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the config-ured logic connected to the command function blocks may not have acycle time longer than the execution cycle time for the command functionblock.

The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in oneblock, which can be controlled from the operator station or from other ter-minals. One common name, with a maximum of 19 characters for theblock, is set from the configuration tool CAP 531.

The output signals, here CMxx-OUT1 to CMxx-OUT16, are then avail-able for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logiccircuits to the binary outputs of the terminal.

2.2 Binary signal interbay communication

The multiple command function block can also be used to receive infor-mation over the LON bus from other REx 5xx terminals. The most com-mon use is to transfer interlocking information between different bays.That can be performed by an Event function block as the send block andwith a multiple command function block as the receive block. The config-uration for the communication between terminals is made by the LONNetwork Tool.

The MODE input is set to Steady at communication between terminalsand then the data are mapped between the terminals.

The command function also has a supervision function, which sets theoutput VALID to 0 if the block did not receive data within an INTERVALtime, that could be set. This function is applicable only during communi-cation between terminals over the LON bus. The INTERVAL input time isset a little bit longer than the interval time set on the Event function block(see the document Event function). If INTERVAL=0, then VALID will be1, that is, not applicable.

Command function 1MRK 580 353-XENPage 6 – 303

Version 2.2-00

3 ConfigurationThe configuration of the signal outputs from the multiple command func-tion in REx 5xx is made by the CAP 531 configuration tool.

4 SettingThe setting parameters for the multiple command function are set from theCAP 531 configuration tool.

The multiple command function has a common name setting (CmdOut)for the block. The MODE input sets the outputs to be one of the types Off,Steady, or Pulse. INTERVAL is used for the supervision of the cyclicalreceiving of data.


5 TestingTest of the multiple command function block is recommended to be per-formed in a system, that is, either in a complete delivery system as anacceptance test (FAT/SAT) or as parts of that system, because the com-mand function blocks are connected in a delivery-specific way betweenbays and the station level.

Command function blocks included in the operation of different built-infunctions must be tested at the same time as their corresponding functions.

Command function

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 353-XENPage 6 – 304

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

6.2 Signal list

6.3 Setting table

OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9

OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15OUT16

MultCmdFunc

CMDOUTMODE

VALID

INTERVAL

CMxx


CMxx- (xx=01-80)

OUTy OUT Command output y (y=1-16)

CMxx- VALID OUT Received data. 0: invalid, 1: valid

CMxx- CMDOUT See settings table

CMxx- INTERVAL See settings table

CMxx- MODE See settings table


CMDOUT User def. string

String CMxx-CMD-OUT

User defined common name for all outputs of function block CMxx (xx=01-80).String length up to 19 characters. Can only be set from CAP 531 configuration tool

INTERVAL 0-60 s 0 Time interval for supervision of recieved data. Can only be set from CAP 531 configuration tool

MODE 0, 1, 2 0 Operation mode. 0: Off, 1: Not pulsed (steady), 2: Pulsed. Can only be set from CAP 531 configuration tool

Page 6 – 305Communication channel test logic

1 ApplicationMany applications in secondary systems require testing of different func-tions with confirmed information on successfully completed test. Carrierchannel test (CCHT) function serves primarily testing of communication(power line carrier) channels in applications, where continuous monitor-ing by some other means is not possible due to technical or economicalreasons.

The logic initiates sending of some impulse (carrier send signal), whichstarts the operation of different functions outside the logic, and checks thefeedback from the external function. It reports the successful or non-suc-cessful response on initiated test. It is also possible to abort the test withsome external signal, which overrules all internal process.

It is possible to initiate the logic manually or automatically. Manual startsare possible by means of external push-button, connected to the binaryinput of a terminal. Automatic starts are possible in long time intervalswith their duration dependent on setting of the corresponding timer.

1MRK 580 332-XEN


Communication channel test logic

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 332-XENPage 6 – 306

2 DesignFigure 1: presents a simplified logic diagram for the CCHT function. Log-ical one on CCHT-BLOCK functional input disables completely the oper-ation of the logic.

Figure 1: Simplified logic diagram for the CCHT function

2.1 Selection of an operating mode

Selection of an operating mode, which determines the automatic (internal)or manual (external) start is possible by setting the “Operation = Aut” and“Operation = Man” respectively (see Figure 1:). The automatic startingrequires continuous presence of logical one on CCHT-START functionalinput. Setting of the tStart timer determines the time intervals for the auto-matic starts logic.

Any presence of the logical one signal on the CCHT-START functionalinput starts the function, when in manual operating mode.

2.2 Operation at sending end

Manual or automatic start initiates the pulse, which is for 15 ms longerthan the time set on a tWait timer. This pulse initiates the CCHT-CS func-tional output signal in duration as set on a tCS pulse timer.The same pulsestarts also the time measurement by the tWait timer. The CCHT-ALARMoutput signal appears, if the CCHT-CR input does not become logical onewithin the time interval, as set on the tWait timer. The appearance of theCCHT-CR signal is safeguarded by a 15 ms timer, to prevent influence ofthe disturbances on a communication link.

CCHT-BLOCK

Operation=Man

&CCHT-START

&Operation=Aut t

tStart>1

-loop

t

tCh

t15 ms

&

CCHT-CR t

15 ms

>1

t

tWait

&

&

&CCHT-RESET

>1

&>1

&

CCHT-CHOK

CCHT-ALARM

CCHT-CS

visf_033.vsd

&

&tCS

t

tChOK

t

tWait

t

Communication channel test logic 1MRK 580 332-XENPage 6 – 307

Version 2.2-00

The appearance of the CCHT-CR signal within the tWait time intervalactivates the CCHT-CHOK output signal. It remains active for the periodas set on the timer tChOK or until the CCHT-ALARM appears at newstart of a CCHT function.

The tCh timer, which is delayed on drop-off, prevents ringing of a com-plete system. It is possible to reset the CCHT-ALARM output signal byactivating the CCHT-RESET functional input.

2.3 Operation at receiving end

Activation of a CCHT-CR functional input activates instantaneously theCCHT-CS functional output, if the timer tCh has not been activated or thefunction has not been blocked by the active CCHT-BLOCK functionalinput. Duration of the CCHT-CR input signal must be longer than 15 msto avoid operation at different disturbances on communication link.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 332-XENPage 6 – 308

3 Setting instructionsSettings for the CCHT function relates mostly to time co-ordinationbetween settings of different timers.

3.1 tInh timer The CCHT function remains blocked as long as the CCH-BLOCK func-tional input is active. The time delay set on tInh timer determines the timeinterval, which takes for the logic to start its normal operation after theCCHT-BLOCK functional input has been set to logical zero. It is recom-mended to set it to some longer time delay, 30 seconds for example.

3.2 tCh timer The tCh timer determines the time interval after the activation of theCCHT-START functional input, during which it is not possible to activatethe CCHT-CS functional output by activating the CCHT-CR functionalinput. It prevents ringing of the function. Setting of 60s is recommended.

3.3 tCS timer It determines the duration at which the CCHT-CS functional output isactivated (logical one). The CCHT-CS signal should be active longenough, to reliably activate the operation of the tested function. Too longactivation is not recommended.

3.4 tWait timer The tWait timer determines the maximum time interval, within which theCCHT-CR functional input must become active after the CCHT-CS signalhas been initiated. It must include double transmission time to the testedequipment, the reaction time of the tested equipment, and some additionalmargin of at least 20%.

3.5 tChOK timer The tChOK timer determines the duration of a CCHT-CHOK functionalinput. Its setting depends on the signalling equipment and purposes withinthe secondary system in substation.

3.6 tStart timer The tStart timer determines the duration of regular time intervals, whenthe function starts automatically. Eight hour time intervals are usually rec-ommended, when used for testing the carrier communication channels.


Version 2.2-00

4 Basic configuration possibilitiesLogical one on functional input signal CCHT-BLOCK blocks instanta-neously and completely the operation of a function. The input should beconfigured to the output of some OR gates, which have connected on theirinputs operating (starting) signals from different protection functions,like:

• operation of a line distance protection in forward and reverse direc-tion

• operation of the overvoltage and the undervoltage protection func-tions

• operation of the overcurrent (phase and earth fault) protection func-tions, etc.

The CCHT-START functional input initiates the operation of a CCHTfunction. It is possible to configure it to the binary input of a terminal andstart the function manually by connecting the dc voltage for a short timevia some normally opened contact. It must be connected to a constantlyactive FIXD-ON signal, if the automatic mode of operation is selected.

CCHT-CR functional input brings back to the logic the response of atested object. It is possible to configure it to some terminal binary input.Configure it to the same binary input as a carrier receive signal for thescheme communication logic, used together with the distance protection,if the CCHT function is used for testing the communication channel asso-ciated with the distance protection function.

CCHT-RESET functional input resets the ALARM functional output.Configure it normally to some terminal binary input and connect the laterone to some external reset push-button with normally opened contact.

The signal obtained on CCHT-CS functional output is supposed to startsome external activities. It is possible to configure it to some binary out-put of a terminal, or to the same binary output as the carrier send signal forthe distance protection function (via some OR gates), if the CCHT func-tion is intended for testing the communication channel associated with adistance protection communication logic.

CCHT-ALARM and CCHT-CHOK functional outputs bring informationon successful or non-successful result of an activity, started by the logic.They are supposed to be configured to the binary outputs of a terminal andused for the initiation of some external alarming and signalling facilities.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 332-XENPage 6 – 310

5 TestingCheck that all functional inputs and outputs are connected to the corre-sponding binary inputs and outputs of a terminal. In the opposite case,configure them for the testing purposes.

Check the operation of a logic according to Figure 1: by applying a dcvoltage on the corresponding binary inputs and checking the response onthe binary outputs of a terminal.

Establish the correct configuration of a terminal after the tests have beencompleted.


Version 2.2-00

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block


Figure 2: Function diagram for the CCHT function

CARRIER CHANNEL TEST

CCHT-BLOCK

CCHT-CR

CCHT-START

CCHT-RESET

CCHT-CS

CCHT-ALARM

CCHT-CHOK

visf_034.vsd

CCHT-BLOCK

Operation=Man

&CCHT-START

&Operation=Aut t

tStart>1

-loop

t

tCh

t

15 ms

&

CCHT-CR t

15 ms

>1

t

tWait

&

&

&CCHT-RESET

>1

&

>1

&

CCHT-CHOK

CCHT-ALARM

CCHT-CS

COMMUNICATION CHANNEL TEST

visf_035.vsd

&

& tCS

t

tChOK

t

tWait

t

t

tInh


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 332-XENPage 6 – 312

6.3 Signal list

6.4 Setting table


CCHT- BLOCK IN Blocks the operation of a function and CCHT-CS output

CCHT- START IN Starts the functional cycle at manual operating mode. To be connected to FIXD-ON at automatic operating mode.

CCHT- CR IN Informs on completed operation of an external (tested) function.

CCHT- RESET IN Resets the CCHT-ALARM output signal, when present.

CCHT- CS OUT Initiates the operation of an external (tested) function.

CCHT- ALARM OUT Informs on uncompleted (failed) test of an external function.

CCHT- CHOK OUT Informs on successful (completed) test of an external function.

Parameter: Range: Unit: Default: Parameter description:

Operation Off, Manual, Automatic

Off Operating mode of a function

tStart 0 - 90000 s 28800 Time interval for outomatic start of testing cycle

tWait 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.1 Time interval available for successful test of an external func-tion

tCh 0.000 - 60.000 s 30 Minimum time interval for repeated tests of an external func-tion

tCS 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.04 Duration of CCHT-CS functional output signal, which initiates testing of an external function

tChOK 0 - 90000 s 10 Duration of a CCHT-CHOK functional output signal

tInh 0.000 - 60.000 s 30 Diration of an inhibit condition after the CCHT-BLOCK input signal resets

Page 6 – 313Disturbance report - Introduction

1 General overviewThe aim of the disturbance report is to contribute to the highest possiblequality of electrical supply. This is done by a continuous collection of sys-tem data and, upon occurrence of a fault, by storing a certain amount ofpre-fault, fault, and post-fault data.

The stored data can be used for analysis and decision making to find andeliminate possible system and equipment weaknesses.

The disturbance report is a common name for several facilities to supplythe operator with more information about the disturbances and the system.Some of the facilities are basic and some are optional in the differentproducts. For some products not all facilities are available.

The facilities included in the disturbance report are:

• General disturbance information• Indications• Event recorder• Fault locator • Trip values (phase values)• Disturbance recorder

The whole disturbance report can contain information for up to 10 distur-bances, each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above,depending on the options installed. All information in the disturbancereport is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no infor-mation is lost in case of loss-of-power supply.

Figure 1: Disturbance report structure.

Up to 10 disturbances can always be stored. If a new disturbance is to berecorded when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance is over-writtenby the new one. The nominal memory capacity for the disturbancerecorder is measured with 10 analogue and 48 binary signals recorded,which means that in the case of long recording times, fewer than 10 dis-turbances are stored. If fewer analogue signals are recorded, a longer totalrecording time is available. This memory limit does not affect the rest ofthe disturbance report.

Disturbance report

Disturbance no.2Disturbance no.1 Disturbance no.10

General dist.information Indication

Faultlocator

Tripvalues

Eventrecorder

Disturbancerecorder

1MRK 580 383-XEN


Disturbance report - Introduction

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 383-XENPage 6 – 314

1.1 General disturbance information

Disturbance overview is a summary of all the stored disturbances. Theoverview is available only on a front-connected PC or via the StationMonitoring System (SMS). The overview contains:

• Disturbance index

• Date and time

• Trip signals

• Trig signal that activated the recording

• Distance to fault (requires Fault locator)

• Fault loop selected by the Fault locator (requires Fault locator)

Disturbance Summary is automatically scrolled on the human-machineinterface (HMI). Here the two latest disturbances (DisturbSummary 1,which is the latest and DisturbSummary 2 which is the second latest) arepresented with:

• Date and time

• Selected indications (set with the Indication mask)

• Distance to fault and fault loop selected by the Fault locator

Disturbance data on the HMI is presented at:

DisturbReportDisturbances

Disturbance n (1 - 10)

The date and time of the disturbance, the trig signal, the indications, thefault locator result and the trip values are available, provided that the cor-responding functions are installed.

1.2 Indications Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the fault time ofthe disturbance. A part (or all) of these signals are automaticallyscrolled on the local HMI after a disturbance.

1.3 Event recorder The event recorder contains an event list with time-tagged events. In theStation Monitoring System, this list is directly connected to a distur-bance.

1.4 Fault locator The fault locator contains information about the distance to the fault andabout the measuring loop that was selected for the calculation. Afterchanging the system parameters in the terminal, a recalculation of the dis-tance to the fault can be made in the protection.

1.5 Trip values Trip values includes phasors of currents and voltages before the fault and duringthe fault.

Disturbance report - Introduction 1MRK 580 383-XENPage 6 – 315

Version 2.2-00

1.6 Disturbance recorder The disturbance recorder records analogue and binary signal data before,during and after the fault.

On the local HMI, the indications, the fault locator result (when applica-ble), and the trip values are available. For a complete disturbance report,front communication with a PC or remote communication with SMS isrequired.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 383-XENPage 6 – 316

2 Recording timesThe recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. The distur-bance recorder and the event recorder register disturbance data and eventsduring tRecording, the total recording time. However, indications are onlyregistered during the fault time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = tPre + tFault + tPost, or tPre + tLim, depending on whichcriterion stops the current disturbance recording.

Figure 2: Recording times relationship.

The different time periods are described below:

Period Is the ...

tPre Pre-fault recording time. More correctly it should be called pre-triggering time, because it consists of not only a pre-fault timebut also the operating time for the trigger itself.

tFault Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set andcontinues as long as any valid trigger condition, binary or ana-logue, persists (unless limited by tLim the limit time, seebelow).

tPost Post-fault recording time. When all activated triggers during thefault time are reset, the current disturbance recording continuesaccording to the set post-fault time.

tLim Limit time, which is the maximum recording time after the dis-turbance recording was triggered. The limit time is used to elim-inate the consequences of a faulty trigger that does not resetwithin a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum record-ing time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting ofalready stored disturbances.

tLim

tPost

Pre-fault Fault Post-fault

tPre

Disturbance report - Introduction 1MRK 580 383-XENPage 6 – 317

Version 2.2-00

3 Analogue signalsUp to 10 analogue signals (five voltages and five currents from the trans-former module) can be selected for recording and trig if the disturbancerecorder function is installed. If fewer than 10 signals are selected, themaximum storing capacity in the flash memories, regarding total record-ing time are increased.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be programmed in the ter-minal.

For each of the 10 analogue signals, Operation = On means that it isrecorded by the disturbance recorder. The triggering itself is independentof the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is set to Off.Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trig condition. Thesame applies for the current signals.

The check of the trig condition is based on peak-to-peak values. Whenthis is found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calcu-lated. If the average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltageor overcurrent trig, this trig is indicated with a greater than (>) sign withthe user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage orundercurrent trig, this trig is indicated with a less than (<) sign with itsname. The procedure is separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analogue start conditions gives a functionwhich is insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operating time for thisstart is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.

The analogue signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, butthey affect the entire disturbance report when being used for triggering.

4 Binary signalsUp to 48 binary signals can be selected from the signal list, where allavailable signals are grouped under each function. The 48 signals can beselected from among internal logical signals and binary input signals. Foreach of the 48 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to be usedas a trigger of the disturbance report, and if the trig should be activated ona 1 or a 0. A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on thelocal HMI.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be programmed in the ter-minal.

The selected 48 signals are presented in the event list and the disturbancerecording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they areused for triggering.

The indications, that are to be automatically scrolled on the HMI when adisturbance has been recorded are also selected from these 48 signals withthe HMI Indication Mask.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 383-XENPage 6 – 318

4.1 Trig signals The trig conditions affect the entire disturbance report. As soon as a trigcondition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is recorded. On theother hand, if no trig condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report,no calculation of distance to fault, no indications, and so on. This impliesthe importance of choosing the right signals as trig conditions.

A trig can be of type:

• Manual trig• Binary-signal trig• Analogue-signal trig (over/under function)

4.1.1 Manual trig Manual trig starts from the local HMI or from a front-connected PC (orSMS). This is found on the HMI menu tree at:

DisturbReportManualTrig

4.1.2 Binary trig A trig on a binary signal can be activated on either a logical 1 or alogical 0. When a binary input is used as trig, the signal must stay for atleast 15 ms to be picked up.

Note that when a binary signal is programmed to trig on a logical 0, thissignal is not presented as an indication in the disturbance report.

4.1.3 Analogue trig All analogue signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if theyare recorded in the disturbance recorder or not. But the disturbancerecorder function must be installed in the terminal.

Page 6 – 319Disturbance report - Settings

1 IntroductionThe main part of the settings for the Disturbance Report is found on thelocal human-machine interface (HMI) at:

SettingsDisturbReport

The settings include:

Operation Disturbance Report (On/Off)

Re-trig during post-fault state (On/Off)

SequenceNo Sequence number (0-255) (normally not necessaryto set)

RecordingTimes Recording times for the Disturbance Report and theevent/indication logging, including pre-fault time,post-fault time, and limit time for the entire distur-bance

BinarySignals Selection of binary signals, trig conditions, HMIindication mask and HMI red LED option

AnalogSignals Recording mask and trig conditions

FaultLocator Distance measurement unit (km/miles/%)

User-defined names of analogue signals can be set at:


The user-defined names of binary signals can be set at:

ConfigurationDisturbReport

Input n (n=1-48)

The analogue and binary signals appear with their user-defined names.

1MRK 580 384-XEN


Disturbance report - Settings

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 384-XENPage 6 – 320

1.1 Settings during normal conditions

2 OperationHMI submenu:


Operation

Operation can be set to On or Off. If Off is selected, note that no distur-bance report is registered, including indications, fault locator, eventrecorder, and disturbance recorder.

Operation = Off:• Disturbances are not stored.

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is not stored or changed.

• No disturbance summary is scrolled on the local HMI.

Operation = On:• Disturbances are stored, disturbance data can be read from the local

HMI and from a front-connected PC or Station Monitoring System (SMS).

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.

• The disturbance summary is automatically scrolled on the local HMI for the two latest registered disturbances, until cleared.

Table 1: How the settings affect different functions in the disturbance report

HMISetting menu

Function Disturbance summary (on HMI)

Disturbance recorder

Indica-tions

Event list (SMS)

Trip values

Fault locator

Operation Operation (On/Off)

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Recordingtimes

Recording times (tPre, tPost, tLim)

No Yes No Yes No No

Binarysignals

Trig operation and trig level


Indication mask (for automatic scrolling)

Yes No No No No No

Analogue signals

Operation (On/Off)

No Yes No No Yes Yes

Trig over/under function


Fault Locator

Fault locator set-tings (Distance Unit)

No No No No No Yes

Disturbance report - Settings 1MRK 580 384-XENPage 6 – 321

Version 2.2-00

Post re-trig can be set to On or Off

Postretrig = On:Re-trig during the set post-fault time is enabled.

Postretrig = OffRe-trig during the set post fault time is not accepted.

2.1 Sequence number HMI submenu:


SequenceNo

Normally, this setting option is seldom used. Each disturbance is assigneda number in the disturbance report. The first disturbance each day nor-mally receives SequenceNo = 0. The value of SequenceNo that can beread in the service report is the number that will be assigned to the nextdisturbance registered during that day.

In normal use, the sequence number is increased by one for each new dis-turbance until it is reset to zero each midnight.

2.2 Recording times HMI submenu:


RecordingTimes

Under this submenu, the different recording times for the disturbancereport are set (the pre-fault time, post-fault time, and limit time). Theserecording times affect the disturbance recorder and event recorder func-tions. The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = tPre + tFault + tPost, or tPre + tLim, depending on whichcriterion stops the current disturbance recording.

2.3 Binary signals HMI submenu:

ConfigurationDisturbReport

Input n (n=1-48)

Up to 48 binary signals can be selected from the signal list, where allavailable signals are grouped function by function. The 48 signals can beselected among internal logical signals and binary input signals. Eachselected signal is registered by the disturbance recorder, event recorder,and indication functions during a recording.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 384-XENPage 6 – 322

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be entered. This name cancomprise up to 13 characters.

HMI submenu:


BinarySignals

For each of the 48 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to beused as a trigger for the start of the disturbance report (TrigOperation),and if the trig should be activated at a logical 1 or 0 level (TrigLevel).

The indications in the disturbance summary, that are automaticallyscrolled on the HMI when a disturbance is registered, are also selectedfrom these 48 signals using the indication mask.

2.4 Analogue signals HMI-submenu:


AnalogSignals

This HMI submenu is only available when the disturbance recorder optionis installed.For each of the 10 analogue signals (five voltages and five currents),Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder. Iffewer than 10 signals are selected, the maximum storing capacity in theflash memories for total recording time becomes longer.

Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as triggering condition.The same applies for the current signals. The triggering is independent ofthe setting of Operation and triggers even if Operation = Off.

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be entered. It can consistof up to 13 characters. It is found at:



Version 2.2-00

3 Settings during test

3.1 Test mode During testing, the operation of the disturbance report is required. The set-ting of this operation is found at the HMI submenu:

TestTest Mode

DisturbReportOperation, DisturbSummary

When TestMode is set to On (Operation = On), the setting of the distur-bance report parameters have the following impact:

Operation = Off DisturbSummary = Off• Disturbances are not stored.

• LED information is not shown on the HMI and not stored.

• No Disturbance Summary is scrolled on the HMI.

Operation = Off DisturbSummary = On• Disturbances are not stored.

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) are shown on the local HMI, but not stored in the terminal.

• Disturbance summary is automatically scrolled on the local HMI for the two latest registered disturbances, until cleared. The information is not stored in the terminal.

Operation = On DisturbSummary = Off or On• The disturbance report works as in normal mode.

• Disturbances are stored. Data can be read from the local HMI, a front-connected PC, or SMS.

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.

• Disturbance summary is automatically scrolled on the local HMI for the two latest registered disturbances, until cleared.

• All disturbance data stored during test mode remains in the terminal when returning to normal mode.

3.2 Activation of manual triggering

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, afront-connected PC, or SMS. When the trig is activated, the manual trigsignal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 384-XENPage 6 – 324

4 Appendix

4.1 Function block

There are three different disturbance function blocks. The diagram aboveshows the first one, DRP1-. The other two (DRP2- and DRP3-) only con-tains the inputs, numbered 17 to 32 and 33 to 48 respectively.

DRP1-

INPUT1CLRLEDS

MEMUSEDRECMADERECSTART

OFF

CLEARED

INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10INPUT11INPUT12INPUT13INPUT14INPUT15INPUT16NAME01NAME02NAME03NAME04NAME05NAME06NAME07NAME08NAME09NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16FuncT01FuncT02FuncT03FuncT04FuncT05FuncT06FuncT07FuncT08FuncT09FuncT10FuncT11FuncT12FuncT13FuncT14FuncT15FuncT16

InfoNo01InfoNo02InfoNo03InfoNo04InfoNo05InfoNo06InfoNo07InfoNo08InfoNo09InfoNo10InfoNo11InfoNo12InfoNo13InfoNo14InfoNo15InfoNo16


Version 2.2-00

4.2 Signal list


DRP1- CLRLEDS IN Disturbance Report-Clear front panel LEDs

DRP1- INPUT1 IN Select binary signal to be recorded as signal no. 1.
















DRP1- NAME01-16 IN See the setting table

DRP1- FuncT01-16 IN See the setting table

DRP1- InfoNo01-16 IN See the setting table

DRP1- CLEARED OUT All disturbances in Disturbance Report cleared

DRP1- MEMUSED OUT More than 80% of recording memory used

DRP1- OFF OUT Disturbance Report function turned off

DRP1- RECMADE OUT Disturbance recording made

DRP1- RECSTART OUT Disturbance recording started


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 384-XENPage 6 – 326

4.3 Setting table


Disturbance report

Operation Off, On On Disturbance report deactivated/activated (off/on)

PostRetrig Off, On Off Postfault retrig off/on

RecordingTime

tPre 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.10 Prefault recording time

tPost 0.1 - 3.0 s 0.5 Postfault recording time

tLim 0.5 - 4.0 s 1.0 Fault recording time limit

Binary signals (x=1-48)(Settings to be set for each input)

TrigOpera-tion

Off, On Off On/Off: The binary signal is used as recordning trigger (On) or not used (Off)

TrigLevel High-to-low, Low-to-high

High-to-low

Selects the signal transition used for triggering. From-1-to-0 or from-0-to-1

Indication-Mask

Hide, show Hide Show: The signal is displayed (and automatically scrolled) on the local HMI

SetLed Off, On Off On: When trigger conditions is satisfied, the red HMI LED is lit

NAMEx Usr def. string Input x User defined name of binary input. The name can only be set using the CAP 531 configuration tool

Analogue voltage signals (U1b-U5b)(Settings to be set for each input)

Operation Off, On On On: The signal is recorded in the disturbance recorder (if present)

<TrigLevel 0-110 % 90 Undervoltage (U<) trigger level in % of voltage signal (U1b-U5b)

>TrigLevel 0-200 % 110 Overvoltage (U>) trigger level in % of voltage signal (U1b-U5b)

<TrigOpera-tion

Off, On Off On: Undervoltage recording trigger is active

>TrigOpera-tion

Off, On Off On: Overvoltage recording trigger is active

Analogue current signals (I1b-I5b)(Settings to be set for each input)

Operation Off, On On On: The signal is recorded in the disturbance recorder (if present)

<TrigLevel 0-200 % 50 Undercurrent (I<) trigger level in % of current signal (I1b-I5b)

>TrigLevel 0-5000 % 200 Overcurrent (I>) trigger level in % of current signal (I1b-I5b)

<TrigOpera-tion

Off, On Off On: Undercurrent recording trigger is active

>TrigOpera-tion

Off, On Off On: Overcurrent recording trigger is active

Sequence number


Version 2.2-00

Sequen-ceNo

0 - 255 0 Disturbance sequence number

Function block setting inputs

FuncT01 0-255 0 Function type 1
















InfoNo01 0-255 0 Information number 1
















NAME01 0-13 Input1 Signal 1 user name 13 char. for disturbance presentations








Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 384-XENPage 6 – 328












Page 6 – 329Disturbance report - Indications

1 ApplicationThe indications from all the 48 selected binary signals are shown on thelocal human-machine interface (HMI) and on the Station Monitoring Sys-tem (SMS) for each recorded disturbance in the disturbance report. TheLEDs on the front of the terminal display start and trip indications.

2 Theory of operationThe indications shown on the HMI and SMS give an overview of the sta-tus of the 48 event signals during the fault. On the HMI, the indicationsfor each recorded disturbance are presented at:


Disturbance n (n=1-10)Indications

All selected signals can be internally produced signals or emerge frombinary input channels.

The indications are registered only during the fault time of a recorded dis-turbance, as long as any trigger condition is activated. A part or all ofthese indications can be automatically scrolled on the local HMI after adisturbance is recorded, until acknowledged with the C button on theHMI. They are selected with the indication mask.

The signal name for internal logical signals presented on the screen fol-lows the signal name, which can be found in the signal list in each func-tion description of this user’s guide. Binary input signals are displayedwith their user-defined names.

The LED indications display this information:

Green LED :• Steady light In service

• Flashing light Internal fail, the INT--FAIL internal signal is high

• Dark No power supply

Yellow LED :• Steady light A disturbance report is triggered

• Flashing light The terminal is in test mode or in configuration mode

Red LED :• Steady light Trig on binary signal with HMI red LED option set.

• Flashing light The terminal is in configuration mode.

1MRK 580 386-XEN


Disturbance report - Indications

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 386-XENPage 6 – 330

3 SettingThe signals to be displayed as indications are selected in the disturbancereport setting. This can be found on the local HMI at:


BinarySignalsInput n (n=1-48)

4 Testing

If TestMode is activated and TestMode/DisturbReport/ is set to ... Then the disturbances ...

Operation = On DisturbSummary = On or Off Are stored as usual in the terminal.

Operation = Off DisturbSummary = On Summary scrolls. No indications. No storage of LED information.

Operation = Off DisturbSummary = Off Are not stored. LED information not stored.

Page 6 – 331Disturbance report - Disturbance recorder

1 ApplicationThe aim of disturbance recording is to provide a means for better under-standing of the behaviour of the power network and related primary andsecondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of therecorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improveexisting equipment. This information can also be used when planning forand designing new installations.

Most of the built-in disturbance recorders offered by various manufactur-ers operate only in connection with the operation of the protective func-tions and they have a very limited capacity for recording times and thenumber of recordings.

This is not the case with the disturbance recorders built into the REx 5xxterminals. These disturbance recorders are characterised by great flexibil-ity as far as starting conditions and recording times, and large storagecapacity are concerned. Thus, the disturbance recorders are not dependenton the operation of protective functions, and they can record disturbancesthat were not discovered by protective functions for one reason or another.

The disturbance recording function in the REx 5xx terminals is fully ade-quate for the recording of disturbances for the protected object.

1.1 Recording capacity The recording function can record all analogue inputs in the transformermodule and up to 48 binary signals. To maximise the use of the memory,the number of analogue channels to be recorded is user-selectable by pro-gramming and can be set individually for each analogue input. Therecorded binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internallogical signals created by the protective functions.

1.2 Memory capacity The maximum number of recordings stored in the memory is 10. Sodepending on the set recording times and the recording of the enablednumber of channels, the memory can contain a minimum of six and amaximum of 10 disturbance recordings comprising of both header partand data part. But the header part for the last 10 recordings is alwaysavailable.

1.3 Recording times The recording times for the pre- and post-fault period, tPre and tPost, areuser-programmable with wide setting ranges.

To avoid uncontrolled recording and subsequent erasing of previousrecordings, in case a trigger should not reset within a reasonable time, alimit time, tLim, can be set to limit the total duration of a recording.

1.4 Triggers Any of the recorded binary signals can be programmed to act as a trigger.The analogue channels have programmable threshold levels for trigger-ing. Both overlevels and underlevels are available. Manual triggering isalso available. This provides a convenient test possibility.

1MRK 580 387-XEN


Disturbance report - Disturbance recorder

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 332

1.5 Time tagging The terminal has a built-in, real-time clock and calendar. This function isused for time tagging of the recorded disturbances. The time taggingrefers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording.

2 Theory of operationDisturbance recording is based on the continuous collection of networkdata, currents and binary signals, in a cyclic buffer. The buffer operatesaccording to the FIFO principle, old data will be overwritten as new dataarrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined by theset pre-fault recording time.

Figure 1: State transition diagram governing the recording modes.

Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the data storage continuesin another part of the memory. The storing goes on as long as the faultcondition prevails - plus a certain additional time. The length of this addi-tional part is called the post-fault time and it can be set in the disturbancerecorder. The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording.The whole memory acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldestrecording is overwritten.

The recordings can be retrieved to the PC with RECOM, the data collec-tion software, and analysed and evaluated manually by using the REVALevaluation software, which is also used for printouts of recorded distur-bances. For automatic evaluation of the recordings, the RESDA softwarepackage is available.

Pre-fault Fault

Post-fault

tLim

trig-on

trig-off

trig-ontPost

ortLim

(Store recording)

(New recording started)

(All triggers)

(New recording started,Store previous recording)

(Store recording, active triggers must reset)


1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 333

Version 2.2-00

The recordings can be divided into two parts, the header and the data part.The data part contains the numerical values for the recorded analogue andbinary channels. The header contains clearly written basic information onthe disturbance. A part of this information is also used by REVAL toreproduce the analogue and binary signals in a correct and user-friendlyway. Such information is, primary and secondary instrument transformerratings.

This information is included in the header:

Table 1: Contents of the header

Type of informationParameter

Stored in parameter database

Stored with disturbance

General

Station, object & unit ID x -

Date and time - x

Sequence number - x

CT earthing x -

Time synchronisation source x -

Recording times tPre, tPost, tLim

- x

Pre-fault Uph-ph, I (RMS) - x

Trig signal and test mode flag - x

Analogue signals

Signal name x -

Primary and secondary instr. transformer rating

x -

Undertrig: level and operation x -

Overtrig: level and operation x -

Undertrig status at time of trig - x

Overtrig status at time of trig - x

Instantaneous Uph-0 at time of trig

- x

Instantaneous Iph-0 at time of trig

- x

Uph-0/Iph-0 (RMS) before trig (pre-fault)

- x

Uph-0/Iph-0 (RMS) after trig (fault)

- x

Binary signals


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 334

Table 1 is a summary. For detailed information, see the “User’s Guide forREVAL”.

3 DesignThe disturbance recording function is an optional function in the REx 5xxterminals. The processing of analogue signals is handled by a dedicatedDSP (digital signal processor). Other functions are implemented in themain CPU. The memory is shared with other functions.

The numerical signals coming from the A/D conversion module in serialform are converted to parallel form in a dedicated DSP. The analogue trigconditions are also checked in the DSP.

A check of the start conditions is performed by searching for a maximumvalue. This is a positive peak. The function also seeks a minimum value,which is the negative peak.

When this is found, the absolute average value is calculated. If this valueis above the set threshold level for the overfunction on the channel inquestion, an overfunction start on that channel is indicated. The overfunc-tion is indicated with a greater than (>) sign.

Similarly, if the average value is below the set threshold level for under-function on the channel in question, an underfunction start on that channelis indicated. The underfunction is indicated with a less than (<) sign.

The procedure is separately performed for each channel. This method ofchecking the analogue start conditions gives a function that is insensitiveto DC offset in the signal. The operating time for this start is typically inthe range of one cycle, 20 ms in a 50 Hz network.

The numerical data, along with the result of the trigger condition evalua-tion, are transmitted to the main CPU. The main CPU handles these func-tions:

• Evaluation of the manual start condition

• Evaluation of the binary start condition, both for true binary input signals and for internally created logical signals

• Storage of the numerical values for the analogue channels

Signal name - x

Type of contact (trig level) x -

Trig operation x -

Signal status at time of trig - x

Trig status at time of trig - x

Table 1: Contents of the header

Type of informationParameter

Stored in parameter database

Stored with disturbance


1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 335

Version 2.2-00

The numerical data for the analogue channels are stored in a cyclic pre-fault buffer in a RAM. When a trigger is activated, the data storage ismoved to another area in the RAM, where the data for the fault and thesubsequent post-fault period are stored. Thus, a complete disturbancerecording comprises the stored data for the pre-fault, fault, and post-faultperiod.

The RAM area for temporary storage of recorded data is divided into sub-areas, one for each recording. The size of a subarea is governed by thesum of the set pre-fault (tPre) and maximum post-triggering (tLim) time.There is a sufficient memory capacity for at least four consecutive record-ings with a maximum number of analogue channels recorded and withmaximum time settings. Should no such area be free at the time of a newtriggering, the oldest recording stored in the RAM is overwritten.

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.

This post-recording processing comprises:

• Merging the data for analogue channels with corresponding data for binary signals stored in an event buffer

• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy

• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash mem-ory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation. Therecording comprises the stored and time-tagged disturbance data alongwith relevant data from the database for configuration and parameter set-up.

Some parameters in the header of a recording are stored with the record-ing, and some are retrieved from the parameter database in connectionwith a disturbance. Table 1 indicates where the various parameters arestored. This means that if a parameter that is retrieved from the parameterdatabase was changed between the time of recording and retrieval, thecollected information is not correct in all parts. For this reason, all record-ings should be transferred to the Station Monitoring System (SMS) work-station and then deleted in the terminal before any such parameters arechanged.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 336

4 SettingThe setting parameters specific for the disturbance recording function areavailable in the menu tree under:


OperationSequenceNoRecordingTimesBinarySignalsAnalogSignals

The list of parameters in the appendix attached to the document “Distur-bance report - Settings”, explains the meaning of the abbreviations used inconnection with setting ranges.

Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere in the menu tree arelinked to the information on a recording. Such parameters are, for exam-ple, station and object identifiers, CT and PT ratios.

The sequence number of the recordings is a specific parameter for the dis-turbance recorder and is used to identify the different recordings. By com-bining the date and the sequence number for a recording, the recording canbe uniquely identified. The sequence number is also shown under:

ServiceReportDisturbReport

SequenceNo

The read value on the local human-machine interface (HMI) display is thesequence number that the next recorded disturbance receives. The numberis automatically increased by one for each new recording and is reset tozero at each midnight. The sequence number can also be set manually.

5 TestingEvaluation of the results from the disturbance recording function requiresaccess to an SMS workstation either permanently connected to the termi-nal or temporarily connected to the serial port on the front. The followingsoftware packages must be installed in the workstation:

Package: For:

SMS-BASE Common functions

RECOM Collection of the disturbance data

REVAL Evaluation and printouts of the recorded data

It could be useful to have a printer for hard copies. The behavior of thedisturbance recording function can be checked when protective functionsof the terminal are tested.


1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 337

Version 2.2-00

When the terminal is set to operate in test mode, there is a separate settingfor operation of the disturbance report, which also affects the disturbancerecorder.

A manual trig can be started any time. This results in a snap-shot of theactual values of all recorded channels.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 387-XENPage 6 – 338

Page 6 – 339Disturbance report - Event recorder

1 ApplicationWhen using a front-connected PC or Station Monitoring System (SMS),an event list can be available for each of the recorded disturbances in thedisturbance report. Each list can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.These events are logged during the total recording time, which depends onthe set recording times (pre-fault, post-fault and limit time) and the actualfault time. During this time, the first 150 events for all the 48 selectedbinary signals are logged and time tagged. This list is a useful instrumentfor evaluating a fault and is a complement to the disturbance recorder.

To obtain this event list, the event recorder function (basic in some termi-nals and optional in others) must be installed.

2 Theory of operationWhen one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, theevents are collected by the main processing unit, from the 48 selectedbinary signals. The events can come from both internal logical signals andbinary input channels. The internal signals are time tagged in the mainprocessing module, while the binary input channels are time taggeddirectly on each I/O module. The events are collected during the totalrecording time, tRecording, and they are stored in the disturbance reportmemory at the end of each recording.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event list is theuser-defined name that can be programmed in the terminal.

The time tagging of events emerging from internal logical signals andbinary input channels have a resolution of 1 ms.

3 SettingThe settings of the event recorder consist of the signal selection and therecording times. It is possible to select up to 48 binary signals, eitherinternal signals or signals coming from binary input channels. These sig-nals coincide with the binary signals recorded by the disturbancerecorder. The disturbance summary indications that are to scroll automat-ically on the local human-machine interface (HMI), can only be selectedfrom these 48 event channels.

The signal selection is found at:


BinarySignalsInput n (n=1-48)

Each of the up to 48 event channels can be selected from the signal list,consisting of all available internal logical signals and all binary inputchannels.

1MRK 580 385-XEN


Disturbance report - Event recorder

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 385-XENPage 6 – 340

For each of the binary input and output signals, a user-defined name canbe programmed at:

ConfigurationI/O

Slotnn-XXXX (ex. Slot15-BOM3)

4 TestingDuring testing, the event recorder can be switched off if desired. This isfound in the SMS or Substation Control System (SCS).

Page 6 – 341Disturbance Report - Trip value recorder

1 ApplicationThe main objective of line protection and monitoring terminals is fast,selective and reliable operation for faults on a protected object. Besidesthis, information on the values of the currents and voltages before andduring the fault is valuable to understand the severity of the fault.

The trip value recorder in the REx 5xx series of terminals provides thisinformation. The function is an optional software module in the terminal.

The function calculates the pre-fault and fault values of currents and volt-ages and presents them as phasors with amplitude and argument.

2 DesignPre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are filtered from dis-turbance data stored in digital sample buffers.

When the disturbance report function is triggered, the trip value recorderfunction starts to calculate the frequency of the analogue channel U1. Ifthe calculation fails, a default frequency is read from database to ensurefurther execution of the function.

Then the sample for the fault interception is looked for by checking thenon-periodic changes. The channel search order is U1, U2, U3, I1, I2, I3,I4, I5 and U5.

If no error sample is found, the trig sample is used as the start sample forthe Fourier estimation of the complex values of currents and voltages. Theestimation uses samples during one period before the trig sample. In thiscase the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault values.

If an error sample is found the Fourier estimation of the prefault valuesstarts 1.5 period before the fault sample. The estimation uses samples dur-ing one period. The postfault values are calculated using the RecursiveLeast Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples afterthe fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 periods depending on theshape of the signals.

The pre-fault time (tPre) should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samplesfor the estimation of pre-fault trip values.

1MRK 580 389-XEN


Disturbance Report - Trip value recorder

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 389-XENPage 6 – 342

3 Displaying pre-fault and fault phasors of the currents and voltages

When the Trip value recorder function is built into the REx 5xx terminals,it records and displays:

• The pre-fault phasors

• The fault phasors

Figure 1: shows typical examples of the corresponding data windows. Theappendix in this document contains explanations of the different parame-ter names.

Figure 1: Typical data windows, which display the phasors of voltages and currents.

The phasors of the pre-fault and fault voltages and currents are availableunder the menu:


Disturbance n (n=1-10)TripValues

PreFault (Fault)

Figure 1:a and 1b shows typical data windows. The first row indicates ifthe pre-fault or the fault value of the phasor is presented. The name of thephasor is located in the second row. Its RMS value appears in the thirdrow, while the fourth row displays information about the relative phaseposition compared, as a reference, to the voltage in the L1 phase.

3.1 Setting of the user-defined names for phasors

Customer specific names for all the ten analogue inputs (five currents andfive voltages) can be entered. Each name can have up to 13 alphanumericcharacters. These names are common for all functions within the distur-bance report functionality. See the document “Terminal identification” forfurther description and settings of the analogue inputs.

The user-defined names for the analogue inputs are set under the menu:


U1 (U2..U5, I1..I5)

U1=57.35 kV

.TripVal/PreFlt

0.00 deg

I1=4560 A

.TripVal/Flt

87.0 dega) b)


1MRK 580 389-XENPage 6 – 343

Version 2.2-00

4 Appendix

Table 1: List of phasors

Default parameter: Description:

Phasors of the pre-fault primary voltages and currents for the disturbance n = 1 to 10; Menu tree: Disturb.Report—Disturbances—Disturbance n—TripValues—PreFault

U1 Phase value of the phase L1 voltage—RMS value and relative phase angle



U4 Residual voltage 3Uo—RMS value and relative phase angle

U5 Phase value of the busbar voltage, used for the purposes of synchro-check and dead-line-check function—RMS value and relative phase angle

I1 Phase value of the phase L1 current—RMS value and relative-phase angle



I4 Residual current 3Io - RMS value and relative-phase angle

I5 Residual current 3Io from the parallel line for the fault location function only—RMS value and relative-phase angle

Frequency Frequency before the disturbance

Phasors of the fault primary voltages and currents for the disturbance n = 1 to 10;Menu tree: Disturb.Report—Disturbances—Disturbance n—TripValues—Fault

U1 Phase value of the phase L1 voltage—RMS value and relative-phase angle



U4 Residual voltage 3Uo—RMS value and relative phase angle

U5 Phase value of the busbar voltage, used for the purposes of synchro-check and dead-line-check function—RMS value and relative phase angle




I4 Residual current 3Io—RMS value and relative-phase angle

I5 Residual current 3Io from the parallel line for the purposes of a fault location function only—RMS value and relative-phase angle


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 389-XENPage 6 – 344

Page 6 – 345Monitoring of AC analogue measurements

1 ApplicationFast, reliable supervision of different analogue quantities is of vital impor-tance during the normal operation of a power system.

Operators in the control centres can, for example:

• Continuously follow active and reactive power flow in the network

• Supervise the busbar voltage level and frequency

Different measuring methods are available for different quantities. Cur-rent and voltage instrument transformers provide the basic information onmeasured phase currents and voltages in different points within the powersystem. At the same time, currents and voltages serve as the input measur-ing quantities to power and energy meters, protective devices and so on.

Further processing of this information occurs within different control,protection, and monitoring terminals and within the higher hierarchicalsystems in the secondary power system.

The REx 5xx protection, control, and monitoring terminals have a built-inoption to measure and further process information about up to five inputcurrents and five input voltages. The number of processed alternate mea-suring quantities depends on the type of terminal and built-in options.Additional information are also available:

• Mean values of measured currents I in the first, three current-mea-suring channels

• Mean values of measured voltages U in the first, three voltage-mea-suring channels

• Three-phase active power P as measured by the first, three current- and voltage-measuring channels

• Three-phase reactive power Q as measured by the first, three current- and voltage-measuring channels

• Frequency f

The accuracy of measurement depends on the requirements. Basic accu-racy satisfies the operating (information) needs. An additional calibrationof measuring channels is necessary and must be ordered separately whenthe requirements on accuracy of the measurement are higher. Refer to thetechnical data and ordering particulars, for the particular terminal.

The information on measured quantities are then available to the user ondifferent locations:

• Locally by means of the local human-machine interface (HMI) unit• Locally by means of a front-connected personal computer (PC)• Remotely over the LON bus to the station control system (SCS)• Remotely over the SPA port to the station monitoring system (SMS)

1MRK 580 390-XEN


Monitoring of AC analogue measurements

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 346

1.1 User-defined measuring ranges

Each measuring channel has an independent measuring range from theothers. This allows the users to select the most suitable measuring rangefor each measuring quantity on each monitored object of the power sys-tem. In doing so, they optimize the functionality of the power system.

1.2 Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity in each channel bymeans of four built-in operating thresholds (figure 1). The monitors oper-ate in two different modes of operation:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the HiWarn or HiAlarm pre-set values

• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low-Warn or LowAlarm pre-set values

Figure 1: Presentation of the operating limits

Each operating level has its corresponding functional output signal:

• HIWARN

• HIALARM

• LOWWARN

• LOWALARM

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according tofigure 1.

visf_210.vsd

HIWARN = 1

HIALARM = 1

HIWARN = 0

HIALARM = 0

Hysteresis

HiAlarm

HiWarn

LowWarn

LowAlarm

LOWWARN = 1

LOWALARM = 1

LOWALARM = 0

LOWWARN = 0

Y

t


1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 347

Version 2.2-00

The user can set the hysteresis, which determines the difference betweenthe operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range foreach measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all oper-ating values within one channel.

1.3 Continuous supervision of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally andremotely. The measurement is continuous for each channel separately, butthe reporting of the value to the higher levels (control processor in theunit, HMI and SCS) depends on the selected reporting mode. The follow-ing basic reporting modes are available:

• Periodic reporting

• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in parallel

• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in series

• Dead-band reporting

Users can select between two types of dead-band supervision:

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (ADBS)

• Integrating dead-band supervision (IDBS)

1.3.1 Amplitude dead-band supervision

If the changed value —compared to the last reported value— is largerthan the ± ∆Y predefined limits that are set by users, and if this is detectedby a new measuring sample, then the measuring channel reports the newvalue to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimumnecessary. Figure 2 shows an example of periodic reporting with theamplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process isnot continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of onesecond from each others.

Figure 2: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

visf_232.vsd

Y

t

Value Reported(1st)

Value ReportedValue Reported

Y1

Y2

Y3

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

Value Reported


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 348

After the new value is reported, the new + ∆Y limits for dead-band areautomatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the mea-sured quantity changes more than defined by the new +∆Y set limits.

1.3.2 Integrating dead-band supervision

The measured value is updated if the time integral of all changes exceedsthe pre-set limit (figure 3), where an example of reporting with integratingdead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process isnot continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of onesecond from each others.

The last value reported (Y1 in figure 3) serves as a basic value for furthermeasurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and thenewly measured value during new sample and is multiplied by the timeincrement (discrete integral). The absolute values of these products areadded until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2that is reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (aswell as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integrating dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitor-ing signals with low variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Figure 3: Reporting with integrating dead-band supervision

1.3.3 Periodic reporting The user can select the periodic reporting of measured value in time inter-vals between 1 and 3600 s. The measuring channel reports the value evenif it has not changed for more than the set limits of amplitude or integrat-ing dead-band supervision. To disable periodic reporting, set the reportingtime interval to 0 s (figure 4).

visf_233.vsd

Y

t

Value Reported(1st)

Y1

ValueReported

A1Y2

ValueReported

Y3

Y4

AValueReported

A2

Y5

A3A4

A5 A7A6

ValueReported

A2 >=pre-set value

A1 >=pre-set valueA >=

pre-set value

A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=pre-set value


1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 349

Version 2.2-00

Figure 4: Periodic reporting

1.3.4 Periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision

The newly measured value is reported:

• After each time interval for the periodic reporting expired, OR

• When the new value is detected by the dead-band supervision func-tion

The amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-band can be selected.The periodic reporting can be set in time intervals between 1 and 3600seconds.

Figure 5: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in parallel

1.3.5 Periodic reporting with serial dead-band supervision

Periodic reporting can operate serially with the dead-band supervision.This means that the new value is reported only if the set time periodexpired AND if the dead-band limit was exceeded during the observed

visf_231.vsd

Val

ue 1

Y

t

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Val

ue 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value Reported

Val

ue 5

Value Reported

Y1

Y2

Y5

Value Reported Value Reported

Y3Y4

t (*)

(*)Set value for t: RepInt

t (*) t (*) t (*)

visf_234.vsdVal

ue 1

Y

t

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Val

ue 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value ReportedValueReported

Val

ue 5

Value Reported

Y1

∆Y

∆Y

ValueReported

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)


Value Reported

∆Y∆Y

Value Reported

∆Y

∆Y

ValueReported

∆Y∆Y


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 350

time (figures 6 and 7). The amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-band can be selected. The periodic reporting can be set in time intervalsbetween 1 and 3600 seconds.

Figure 6: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in series

Figure 7: Periodic reporting with integrating dead-band supervision in series

1.3.6 Combination of periodic reportings

The reporting of the new value depends on setting parameters for thedead-band and for the periodic reporting. Table 1 presents the dependencebetween different settings and the type of reporting for the new value of ameasured quantity.

visf_211.vsdVal

ue 1

Y

t

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Val

ue 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value Reported

∆Y

∆Y

Value notReported

Val

ue 5

Value Reported

Y1

Y2

Y3

∆Y

∆Y

Value notReported

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)


visf_212.vsd

Y

t

Val

ue 1

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Value Reported(1st)

Value notReported

Y1

ValueReported

A1 A2

Y2

t (*) t (*)


A1 <pre-set value

A1 + A2 >= pre-set value


1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 351

Version 2.2-00

* please, refer to the setting table for the explanation

2 Theory of operation and Design

The design of the alternating quantities measuring function follows thedesign of all REx 5xx-series protection, control, and monitoring terminalsthat have distributed functionality, where the decision levels are placed asclosely as possible to the process.

The measuring function uses the same input current and voltage signals asother protection and monitoring functions within the terminals (figure 8on page 352). The number of input current and voltage transformersdepends on the type of terminal and options included. The maximum pos-sible configuration comprises five current and five voltage input channels.

Measured input currents and voltages are first filtered in analogue filtersand then converted to numerical information by an A/D converter, whichoperates with a sampling frequency of 2 kHz.

Table 1: Dependence of reporting on different setting parameters:

EnD

eadB

*

EnI

Dea

dB*

EnD

eadB

P*

Rep

Int*

Reporting of the new value

Off Off Off 0 No measured values is reported

Off On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if, dur-ing this time, the integrating dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reportingwith integrating dead-band supervision in series)

On Off On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period has expired and if,during this time, the amplitude dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic report-ing with amplitude dead-band supervision in series)

On On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if at leastone of the dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reporting with dead-bandsupervision in series)

Off On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when the integrated dead-band limitsare exceeded

On Off Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when the amplitude dead-band limitswere exceeded

On On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only if one of the dead-band limits wasexceeded

x x Off t>0 The new measured value is updated at least after the time t period expired. If thedead-band supervision is additionally selected, the updating also occurs when thecorresponding dead-band limit was exceeded (periodic reporting with paralleldead-band supervision)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 352

The numerical information on measured currents and voltages continuesover a serial link to one of the built-in digital signal processors (DSP). Anadditional Fourier filter numerically filters the received information, andthe DSP calculates the corresponding values for the following quantities:

• Five input measured voltages (U1, U2, U3, U4, U5). RMS values

• Five input measured currents (I1, I2, I3, I4, I5). RMS Values

• Mean RMS value, U, of the three phase-to-phase voltages calculated from the first three phase-to-earth voltages U1, U2 and U3

• Mean RMS value, I, of the first three measured RMS values I1, I2, and I3

• Three-phase active power, P, related to the first three measured cur-rents and voltages (I1, U1, I2, U2, I3, U3)

• Three-phase, reactive power, Q, related to the first three measured currents and voltages (I1, U1, I2, U2, I3, U3)

• Mean value of frequencies, f, as measured with voltages U1, U2, and U3

Figure 8: Simplified diagram for the function

This information is available to the user for operational purposes.

3 Setting instructionsThe basic terminal parameters can be set from the HMI under the sub-menu:


Generalfr, CTEarth

So users can determine the rated parameters for the terminal:

• Rated frequency fr

• Position of the earthing point of the main CTs (CTEarth), which determines whether the CT earthing point is towards the protected object or the busbar.

visf_213.vsd

AD DSP

5I

5U

PROCESSING

CALIBRATION

SCS

HMI

SMS

LOGIC


1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 353

Version 2.2-00

The other basic terminal parameters, related to any single analog input,can be set under the submenu:


U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, I1, I2, I3, I4, I5, U, I, P, Q, f

So the users can determine the base values, the primary CTs and VTsratios, and the user-defined names for the analog inputs of the terminal.

Under U1:

• ac voltage base value for analog input U1: U1b

• voltage transformer input U1 nominal primary to secondary scale value: U1Scale

• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input U1: Name

Under U2:




Under U3:




Under U4:




Under U5:




Under I1:

• ac current base value for analog input I1: I1b

• current transformer input I1 nominal primary to secondary scale value: I1Scale

• Name (of up to 13 characters) of the analog input I1: Name


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 354

Under I2:




Under I3:



• Name (up to 13 characters) of the analog input I3: Name

Under I4:




Under I5:



• Name (up to 13 characters) of the analog input I5: Name

Under U:

• Name (up to 13 characters) of the phase to phase voltage U: Name

Under I:

• Name (up to 13 characters) of the average current I: Name

Under P:

• Name (up to 13 characters) of the active power P: Name

Under Q:

• Name (up to 13 characters) of the reactive power Q: Name

Under f:

• Name (up to 13 characters) of the frequency value f: Name

The names of the first 10 quantities automatically appears in the REVALevaluation program for each reported disturbance.

SMS and the CAP 531 configuration tool have to be used in order to setall remaining parameters that are related to different alternating measuringquantities.


1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 355

Version 2.2-00

In the settings menu it is possible to set all monitoring operating valuesand the hysteresis directly in the basic units of the measured quantities foreach channel and for each quantity:


AnalogSignals

The dead-band limits can be set directly in the corresponding units of theobserved quantity for the:



The IDBS area is defined by the following formula:

(Equation 1)

where:

is a set operating value for IDBS in corresponding unit

is the reading frequency. It has a constant value of 1Hz

is the time between two samples (fixed to 1s).

The setting value for IDBS is IDeadB, and is expressed in the measuringunit of the monitored quantity (kV, A, MW, Mvar or Hz). The value isreported if the time integral area is greater than the value IDBS.

If a 0.1 Hz variation in the frequency for 10 minutes (600 s) is the eventthat should cause the reporting of the frequency monitored value, than theset value for IDeadB is 60 Hz.

The hysteresis can be set under the setting Hysteres.

Alarm and warning thresholds have to be set respectively under the set-tings HiAlarm (LowAlarm) and HiWarn (LowWarn).

The setting table lists all the setting parameters.

Note: It is important to set the time for periodic reporting and deadband inan optimised way to minimise the load on the station bus.

IDBSIDeadB

ReadFreq----------------------------- IDeadB ts⋅= =

IDeadB

ReadFreq

ts1

ReadFreq-----------------------------=


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 356

4 TestingStabilized ac current and voltage generators and corresponding current,voltage, power and frequency meters with very high accuracy are neces-sary for testing the alternating quantity measuring function. The operatingranges of the generators must correspond to the rated alternate current andvoltage of each terminal.

Connect the generators and instruments to the corresponding input termi-nals of a unit under test. Check that the values presented on the HMI unitcorrespond to the magnitude of input measured quantities within the lim-its of declared accuracy. The mean service values are available under thesubmenu:

Service ReportServiceValues

The phasors of up to five input currents and voltages are available underthe submenu:

Service ReportPhasors

Primary

The operation of ADBS or IDBS function can be checked separately withthe RepInt = 0 setting. The value on the HMI follows the changes in theinput measuring quantity continuously.

Configure the monitoring output signals (see the signal list) to the corre-sponding output relays. Check the operating monitoring levels by chang-ing the magnitude of input quantities and observing the operation of thecorresponding output relays.

The output contact changes its state when the changes in the input mea-suring quantity are higher than the set values HIWARN, HIALARM, orlower than the set values LOWWARN, LOWALARM.

5 Appendix

5.1 Function block

DAxx-BLOCK DAxx-HIALARM


visf_230.vsd

DAxx-HIWARN

DAxx-LOWWARNDAxx-LOWALARM


1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 357

Version 2.2-00

5.2 Signal list

*1) The xx within the signal name corresponds to the following measur-ing quantities:

xx = 01 input measuring voltage U1





xx = 06 input measuring current I1





xx = 11 mean value U of the three phase to phase voltages calculated from the first three phase voltages U1, U2 and U3

xx = 12 mean value I of first three currents I1, I2 and I3

xx = 13 three phase active power P measured by first three voltage and current inputs

xx = 14 three phase reactive power Q measured by first three voltage and current inputs

xx = 15 mean value of frequency f as measured by first three voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3

5.3 Setting table

Table 2:


DAxx- BLOCK IN Block updating of value for U1

DAxx- HIALARM OUT High Alarm U1

DAxx- HIWARN OUT High Warning U1

DAxx- LOWALARM OUT Low Alarm U1

DAxx- LOWWARN OUT Low Warning U1

Table 3:


For each voltage input channels U1 - U5:

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input U1 - U5 Off/On

Hysteres 0.0-1999.9 kV 5.0 Alarm hysteresis for U1 - U5 in kV

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for U1 - U5(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 358

EnAlarms Off, On On Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for U1 - U5(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0.0-1999.9 kV 220.0 High Alarm level for U1 - U5 in kV

HiWarn 0.0-1999.9 kV 210.0 High Warning level for U1 - U5 in kV

LowWarn 0.0-1999.9 kV 170.0 Low Warning level for U1 - U5 in kV

LowAlarm 0.0-1999.9 kV 160.0 Low Alarm level for U1 - U5 in kV

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for U1 - U5 in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for U1 - U5

DeadBand 0.0-1999.9 kV 5.0 Amplitude dead band for U1 - U5 in kV

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for U1 - U5

IDeadB 0.0-1999.9 kV 10.0 Integrating dead band for U1 - U5 in kV

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting U1 - U5

For each voltage input channels I1 - I5:

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input I1 - I5 Off/On

Hysteres 0-99999 A 50 Alarm hysteresis for I1 - I5 in A

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for I1 - I5(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)

EnAlarms Off, On Off Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for I1 - I5(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0-99999 A 900 High Alarm level for I1 - I5 in A

HiWarn 0-99999 A 800 High Warning level for I1 - I5 in A

LowWarn 0-99999 A 200 Low Warning level for I1 - I5 in A

LowAlarm 0-99999 A 100 Low Alarm level for I1 - I5 in A

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for I1 - I5 in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for I1 - I5

DeadBand 0-99999 A 50 Amplitude dead band for I1 - I5 in A

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for I1 - I5

IDeadB 0-99999 A 10000 Integrating dead band for I1 - I5 in A

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting I1 - I5

Mean phase-to-phase voltage measuring channel U:

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input U Off/On

Hysteres 0.0-1999.9 kV 5.0 Alarm hysteresis for U in kV

Table 3:



1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 359

Version 2.2-00

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for U(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)

EnAlarms Off, On On Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for U(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0.0-1999.9 kV 220.0 High Alarm level for U in kV

HiWarn 0.0-1999.9 kV 210.0 High Warning level for U in kV

LowWarn 0.0-1999.9 kV 170.0 Low Warning level for U in kV

LowAlarm 0.0-1999.9 kV 160.0 Low Alarm level for U in kV

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for U in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for U

DeadBand 0.0-1999.9 kV 5.0 Amplitude dead band for U in kV

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for U

IDeadB 0.0-1999.9 kV 10.0 Integrating dead band for U in kV

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting U

Mean current measuring channel I:

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input I Off/On

Hysteres 0-99999 A 50 Alarm hysteresis for I in A

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for I(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)

EnAlarms Off, On Off Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for I(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0-99999 A 900 High Alarm level for I in A

HiWarn 0-99999 A 800 High Warning level for I in A

LowWarn 0-99999 A 200 Low Warning level for I in A

LowAlarm 0-99999 A 100 Low Alarm level for I in A

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for I in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for I

DeadBand 0-99999 A 50 Amplitude dead band for I in A

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for I

IDeadB 0-99999 A 10000 Integrating dead band for I in A

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting I

Active power measuring channel P:

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input P Off/On

Table 3:



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 360

Hysteres 0.0-9999.9 MW 5.0 Alarm hysteresis for P in MW

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for P(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)

EnAlarms Off, On Off Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for P(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0.0-9999.9 MW 300.0 High Alarm level for P in MW

HiWarn 0.0-9999.9 MW 200.0 High Warning level for P in MW

LowWarn 0.0-9999.9 MW 80.0 Low Warning level for P in MW

LowAlarm 0.0-9999.9 MW 50.0 Low Alarm level for P in MW

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for P in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for P

DeadBand 0.0-9999.9 MW 1.0 Amplitude dead band for P in MW

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for P

IDeadB 0.0-9999.9 MW 10.0 Integrating dead band for P in MW

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting P

Reactive power measuring channel Q:

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input Q Off/On

Hysteres 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 5.0 Alarm hysteresis for Q in Mvar

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for Q(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)

EnAlarms Off, On Off Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for Q(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 300.0 High Alarm level for Q in Mvar

HiWarn 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 200.0 High Warning level for Q in Mvar

LowWarn 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 80.0 Low Warning level for Q in Mvar

LowAlarm 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 50.0 Low Alarm level for Q in Mvar

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for Q in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for Q

DeadBand 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 1.0 Amplitude dead band for Q in Mvar

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for Q

IDeadB 0.0-9999.9 Mvar 10.0 Integrating dead band for Q in Mvar

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting Q

Frequency measuring channel f:

Table 3:



1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 361

Version 2.2-00

Operation Off, On Off Direct Analogue Input f Off/On

Hysteres 0.0-99.9 Hz 1.0 Alarm hysteresis for f in Hz

EnAlRem Off, On On Immediate event when an alarm is disabled for f(produces an immediate event at reset of any alarm monitor-ing element, when On)

EnAlarms Off, On Off Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for f(produces an immediate event at operation of any alarm mon-itoring element, when On)

HiAlarm 0.0-99.9 Hz 55.0 High Alarm level for f in Hz

HiWarn 0.0-99.9 Hz 53.0 High Warning level for f in Hz

LowWarn 0.0-99.9 Hz 47.0 Low Warning level for f in Hz

LowAlarm 0.0-99.9 Hz 45.0 Low Alarm level for f in Hz

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for f in seconds. Zero = Off(duration of time interval between two reports at periodic reporting function. Setting to 0 disables the periodic reporting)

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for f

DeadBand 0.0-99.9 Hz 1.0 Amplitude dead band for f in Hz

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for f

IDeadB 0.0-99.9 Hz 5 Integrating dead band for f in Hz

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting f

Reporting of events to the station control system (SCS) through LON port

EventMask U1

No Events, Report Events

Enables (Report Events) or disables (No Events) the reporting of events from channel DA01 to the SCS

EventMask U2



EventMask U3



EventMask U4



EventMask U5



EventMask I1



EventMask I2



EventMask I3



EventMask I4



EventMask I5



Table 3:



Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 390-XENPage 6 – 362

EventMask U



EventMask I



EventMask P



EventMask Q



EventMaskf



Table 3:


Page 6 – 363Monitoring of DC analogue measurements

1 ApplicationFast, reliable supervision of different analogue quantities is of vital impor-tance during the normal operation of a power system. Operators in thecontrol centres can, for example:

• Continuously follow active and reactive power flow in the network

• Supervise the busbar voltages

• Check the temperature of power transformers, shunt reactors

• Monitor the gas pressure in circuit breakers

Different measuring methods are available for different quantities. Cur-rent and voltage instrument transformers provide the basic information onmeasured phase currents and voltages in different points within the powersystem. At the same time, currents and voltages serve as the input measur-ing quantities to power and energy meters.

Different measuring transducers provide information on electrical andnon-electrical measuring quantities such as voltage, current, temperature,and pressure. In most cases, the measuring transducers change the valuesof the measured quantities into the direct current. The current value usu-ally changes within the specified mA range—in proportion to the value ofthe measured quantity.

Further processing of the direct currents obtained on the outputs of differ-ent measuring converters occurs within different control, protection, andmonitoring terminals and within the higher hierarchical systems in thesecondary power system.

The REx 5xx control, protection and monitoring terminal have a built-inoption to measure and further process information from 6 up to 36 differ-ent direct current information from different measuring transducers. Sixindependent measuring channels are located on each independent mAinput module and the REx 5xx terminals can accept from one up to sixindependent mA input modules, depending on the case size. Refer to thetechnical data and ordering particulars for the particular terminal.

Information about the measured quantities are then available to the useron different locations:

• Locally by means of the local human-machine-interface (HMI)

• Locally by means of a front-connected personal computer (PC)

• Remotely over the LON bus to the station control system (SCS)

• Remotely over the SPA port to the station monitoring system (SMS)

1.1 User-defined measuring ranges

The measuring range of different direct current measuring channels is set-table by the user independent on each other within the range between -25mA and +25 mA in steps of 0.01 mA. It is only necessary to select theupper operating limit I_max higher than the lower one I_min.

1MRK 580 391-XEN


Monitoring of DC analogue measurements

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 364

The measuring channel can have a value of 2% of the whole range I_max- I_min above the upper limit I_max or below the lower limit I_min,before an out-of-range error occurs. This means that with a nominal rangeof 0-10 mA, no out-of-range event will occur with a value between -0.2mA and 10.2 mA.

User can this way select for each measuring quantity on each monitoredobject of a power system the most suitable measuring range and this wayoptimise a complete functionality together with the characteristics of theused measuring transducer.

1.2 Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

The user can continuously monitor the measured quantity in each channelby means of six built-in operating limits (figure 1). Two of them aredefined by the operating range selection: I_Max as the upper and I_Minas the lower operating limit. The other four operating limits operate in twodifferent modes:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the HiWarn or HiAlarm pre-set values

• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low-Warn or LowAlarm pre-set values

Figure 1: Presentation of the operating limits

Each operating level has its corresponding functional output signal:

• RMAXAL

• HIWARN

• HIALARM

• LOWWARN

visf_240.vsd

HIWARN = 1

HIALARM = 1

HIWARN = 0

HIALARM = 0

Hysteresis

HiAlarm

HiWarn

LowWarn

LowAlarm

LOWWARN = 1

LOWALARM = 1

LOWALARM = 0

LOWWARN = 0

Y

t

I_MaxRMAXAL = 1

RMAXAL = 0

I_MinRMINAL = 1

RMINAL = 0


1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 365

Version 2.2-00

• LOWALARM

• RMINAL

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according tofigure 1 on page 364.

The user can set the hysteresis, which determines the difference betweenthe operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range foreach measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all oper-ating values within one channel.

1.3 Continuous supervision of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally andremotely. The measurement is continuous for each channel separately, butthe reporting of the value to the higher levels (control processor in theunit, HMI and SCS) depends on the selected reporting mode. The follow-ing basic reporting modes are available:

• Periodic reporting

• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in parallel

• Periodic reporting with dead-band supervision in series

• Dead-band reporting

Users can select between two types of dead-band supervision:



1.3.1 Amplitude dead-band supervision

If the changed value —compared to the last reported value— is largerthan the ± ∆Y predefined limits that are set by users, and if this is detectedby a new measuring sample, then the measuring channel reports the newvalue to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimumnecessary. Figure 2 on page 366 shows an example of periodic reportingwith the amplitude dead-band supervision.

The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values areevaluated at a time intervals depending on the sampling frequency chosenby the user (SampRate setting).

After the new value is reported, the new + ∆Y limits for dead-band areautomatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the mea-sured quantity changes more than defined by the new +∆Y set limits.


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 366

Figure 2: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

1.3.2 Integrating dead-band supervision

The measured value is updated if the time integral of all changes exceedsthe pre-set limit (figure 3), where an example of reporting with integratingdead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process isnot continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of onesecond from each others.

The last value reported (Y1 in figure 3) serves as a basic value for furthermeasurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and thenewly measured value during new sample and is multiplied by the timeincrement (discrete integral). The absolute values of these products areadded until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2that is reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (aswell as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integrating dead-band supervision is particularly indicate for monitor-ing signals with low variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Figure 3: Reporting with integrating dead-band supervision

visf_232.vsd

Y

t

Value Reported(1st)

Value ReportedValue Reported

Y1

Y2

Y3

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

∆Y

Value Reported

visf_233.vsd

Y

t

Value Reported(1st)

Y1

ValueReported

A1Y2

ValueReported

Y3

Y4

AValueReported

A2

Y5

A3A4

A5 A7A6

ValueReported

A2 >=pre-set value

A1 >=pre-set valueA >=

pre-set value

A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=pre-set value


1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 367

Version 2.2-00

1.3.3 Periodic reporting The user can select the periodic reporting of measured value in time inter-vals between 1 and 3600 s (setting RepInt). The measuring channelreports the value even if it has not changed for more than the set limits ofamplitude or integrating dead-band supervision (figure 4). To disable theperiodic reporting, set the reporting time interval to 0 s .

Figure 4: Periodic reporting

1.3.4 Periodic reporting with parallel dead-band supervision

The newly measured value is reported:

• After each time interval for the periodic reporting expired, OR

• When the new value is detected by the dead-band supervision func-tion

Both amplitude and integrating dead-bands can be selected. The periodicreporting can be set in time intervals between 1 and 3600 seconds.

Figure 5: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in parallel

visf_231.vsd

Val

ue 1

Y

tV

alue

2

Val

ue 3

Val

ue 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value Reported

Val

ue 5

Value Reported

Y1

Y2

Y5

Value Reported Value Reported

Y3Y4

t (*)


t (*) t (*) t (*)

visf_234.vsdVal

ue 1

Y

t

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Val

ue 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value ReportedValueReported

Val

ue 5

Value Reported

Y1

∆Y∆Y

ValueReported

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)


Value Reported

∆Y∆Y

Value Reported

∆Y∆Y

ValueReported

∆Y

∆Y


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 368

1.3.5 Periodic reporting with serial dead-band supervision

Periodic reporting can operate serially with the dead-band supervision.This means that the new value is reported only if the set time periodexpired AND if the dead-band limit was exceeded during the observedtime (figures 6 and 7). The amplitude dead-band and the integrating dead-band can be selected. The periodic reporting can be set in time intervalsbetween 1 and 3600 seconds.

Figure 6: Periodic reporting with amplitude dead-band supervision in series

Figure 7: Periodic reporting with integrating dead-band supervision in series

visf_211.vsdVal

ue 1

Y

t

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Val

ue 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value Reported

∆Y

∆Y

Value notReported

Val

ue 5

Value Reported

Y1

Y2

Y3

∆Y

∆Y

Value notReported

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)


visf_212.vsd

Y

t

Val

ue 1

Val

ue 2

Val

ue 3

Value Reported(1st)

Value notReported

Y1

ValueReported

A1 A2

Y2

t (*) t (*)


A1 <pre-set value

A1 + A2 >= pre-set value


1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 369

Version 2.2-00

1.3.6 Combination of periodic reportings

The reporting of the new value depends on setting parameters for thedead-band and for the periodic reporting. Table 1 presents the dependencebetween different settings and the type of reporting for the new value of ameasured quantity.

* please, refer to the setting table for the explanation

Table 1: Dependence of reporting on different setting parameters:

EnD

eadB

*

EnI

Dea

dB*

EnD

eadB

P*

Rep

Int*

Reporting of the new value

Off Off Off 0 No measured values is reported

Off On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if, dur-ing this time, the integrating dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reportingwith integrating dead-band supervision in series)

On Off On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period has expired and if,during this time, the amplitude dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic report-ing with amplitude dead-band supervision in series)

On On On t>0 The new measured value is reported only if the time t period expired and if at leastone of the dead-band limits were exceeded (periodic reporting with dead-bandsupervision in series)

Off On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when the integrated dead-band limitsare exceeded

On Off Off 0 The new measured value is reported only when the amplitude dead-band limitswere exceeded

On On Off 0 The new measured value is reported only if one of the dead-band limits wasexceeded

x x Off t>0 The new measured value is updated at least after the time t period expired. If thedead-band supervision is additionally selected, the updating also occurs when thecorresponding dead-band limit was exceeded (periodic reporting with paralleldead-band supervision)


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 370

2 Theory of operation and DesignThe design of the mA input modules follows the design of all REx 5xx-series protection, control, and monitoring terminals that have distributedfunctionality, where the decision levels are placed as closely as possible tothe process.

Each independent measuring module contains all necessary circuitry andfunctionality for measurement of six independent measuring quantitiesrelated to the corresponding measured direct currents.

On the accurate input shunt resistor (R), the direct input current (from themeasuring converter) is converted into a proportional voltage signal (thevoltage drop across the shunt resistor is in proportion to the measured cur-rent). Later, the voltage signal is processed within one differential type ofmeasuring channel (figure 8).

Figure 8: Simplified diagram for the function

The measured voltage is filtered by the low-pass analogue filter beforeentering the analogue to digital converter (A/D). Users can set the sam-pling frequency of the A/D converter between 5 Hz and 255 Hz to adaptto different application requirements as best as possible.

The digital information is filtered by the digital low-pass filter with the(sinx/x)3 response. The filter notch frequency automatically follows theselected sampling frequency. The relation between the frequency corre-sponding to the suppression of -3 dB and the filter notch frequency corre-sponds to the equation:

Using optocouplers and DC/DC conversion elements that are used sepa-rately for each measuring channel, the input circuitry of each measuringchannel is galvanically separated from:

• The internal measuring circuits

• The control microprocessor on the board

visf_241.vsd

I R UA

D

DC

DCUdc

MeasuringConverter

REx 5xx Terminal

f 3dB– 0 262, fnotch⋅=


1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 371

Version 2.2-00

A microprocessor collects the digitized information from each measuringchannel. The microprocessor serves as a communication interface to themain processing module (MPM).

All processing of the measured signal is performed on the module so thatonly the minimum amount of information is necessary to be transmitted toand from the MPM. The measuring module receives information from theMPM on setting and the command parameters; it reports the measuredvalues and additional information—according to needs and values of dif-ferent parameters.

Each measuring channel is calibrated very accurately during the produc-tion process. The continuous internal zero offset and full-scale calibrationduring the normal operation is performed by the A/D converter. The cali-bration covers almost all analogue parts of the A/D conversion, butneglects the shunt resistance.

Each measuring channel has built in a zero-value supervision, whichgreatly rejects the noise generated by the measuring transducers and otherexternal equipment. The value of the measured input current is reportedequal to zero (0) if the measured primary quantity does not exceed +0.5%of the maximum measuring range.

The complete measuring module is equipped with advanced self-supervi-sion. Only the outermost analogue circuits cannot be monitored. The A/Dconverter, optocouplers, digital circuitry, and DC/DC converters, are allsupervised on the module. Over the CAN bus, the measuring modulesends a message to the MPM for any detected errors on the supervised cir-cuitry.

3 Setting instructionsSMS and the CAP 531 configuration tool have to be used in order to setall the parameters that are related to different DC analogue quantities.

Users can set the 13 character name for each measuring channel.

All the monitoring operating values and the hysteresis can be set directlyin the mA of the measured input currents from the measuring transducers.

The measured quantities can be displayed locally and/or remotely accord-ing to the corresponding modules that are separately set for each measur-ing channel by the users (five characters).

The relation between the measured quantity in the power system and thesetting range of the direct current measuring channel corresponds to thisequation:

(Equation 1)

Where:

is the set value for the minimum operating current of a chan-nel in mA

Value ValueMin I IMin–( ) ValueMax ValueMin–IMax IMin–

--------------------------------------------------------------⋅+=

IMin


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 372

is the set value for the maximum operating current of a chan-nel in mA

is the value of the primary measuring quantity corre-sponding to the set value of minimum operating current of a channel,

is the value of the primary measuring quantity corre-sponding to the set value of maximum operating current of a chan-nel,

is the actual value of the primary measured quantity

Figure 9 shows the relationship between the direct mA current I and theactual value of the primary measured quantity, .

Figure 9: Relationship between the direct current (I) and the measured quantity primary value (Value)

The dead-band limits can be set directly in the mA of the input direct cur-rent for:

• Amplitude dead-band supervision ADBS

• Integrating dead-band supervision IDBS

The area [mAs] is defined by the following equation:

(Equation 2)

where:

is the set value of the current level for IDBS in mA

IMax

ValueMin

IMin

ValueMax

IMax

Value

Value

Value

IMin

ValueMin

ValueMin IMax - ValueMax IMin

IMax - IMin

IMax

ValueMax

I

visf_242.vsd

IDBS

IDBSIDeadB

SampRate------------------------------ IDeadB ts⋅= =

IDeadB


1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 373

Version 2.2-00

is the sampling rate (frequency) set value, in Hz

is the time between two samples in s.

If a 0.1 mA variation in the monitored quantity for 10 minutes (600 s) isthe event that should cause the trigger of the IDBS monitoring (reportingof the value because of IDBS threshold operation) and the sampling fre-quency (SampRate) of the monitored quantity is 5 Hz, than the set valuefor IDBS (IDeadB) will be 300 mA:

(Equation 3)

(Equation 4)

The polarity of connected direct current input signal can be changed bysetting the ChSign to On or Off. This way it is possible to compensate bysetting the eventually wrong connection of the direct current leedsbetween the measuring converter and the input terminals of the REx 5xxseries unit.

The setting table lists all setting parameters with additional explanation.

Note: It is important to set the time for periodic reporting and deadband inan optimised way to minimise the load on the station bus.

SampRate

ts1

SampRate------------------------------=

IDBS 0,1 600⋅ 60 mA s ][= =

IDeadB IDBS SampRate⋅ 60 5⋅ 300 mA ][= = =


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 374

4 TestingA stabilized direct current generator and mA meter with very high accu-racy for measurement of direct current is needed in order to test the dcmeasuring module. The generator operating range and the measuringrange of the mA meter must be at least between -25 and 25 mA.

Connect the current generator and mA meter to the corresponding directcurrent input terminals. Check that the values presented on the HMI mod-ule corresponds to the magnitude of input direct current within the limitsof declared accuracy. The service value is available under the submenu:

Service ReportI/O

Slotnm-MIMxMIxy-Value

where:

nm represents the serial number of a slot with tested mA input mod-ule

x represents the serial number of a mA input module in a terminal

y represents the serial number of a measuring channel on module x.

The operation of ADBS or IDBS function can be checked separately withthe setting of RepInt = 0. The value on the HMI must change only whenthe changes in input current (compared to the present value) are higherthan the set value for the selected dead band.

Configure the monitoring output signals (see the signal list) to the corre-sponding output relays. Check the operating monitoring levels by chang-ing the magnitude of input current and observing the operation of thecorresponding output relays.

The output contact changes its state when the changes in the input mea-suring quantity are higher than the set values RMAXAL, HIWARN,HIALARM, or lower than the set values LOWWARN, LOWALARM,RMINAL.


1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 375

Version 2.2-00

5 Appendix

5.1 Function blocks

MAXMOD: REx 5xx terminals can accept from one up to six indepen-dent mA input modules, depending on the case size. Refer to the technicaldata and ordering particulars for the particular terminal.

MIx1-POSITION MIx1-ERROR

Monitoring of DC analogue measurementsChannel Input 1 of Module x (x=1...MAXMOD)

visf_243.vsd

MIx1-INPUTERR

MIx1-HIALARMMIx1-HIWARN

MIx1-BLOCKMIx1-RMAXAL

MIx1-RMINALMIx1-LOWALARM

MIx1-LOWWARN

Monitoring of DC analogue measurementsChannel Inputs 2 to 6 (y) of Module x (x=1...MAXMOD)

MIxy-INPUTERR

MIxy-HIALARMMIxy-HIWARN

MIxy-BLOCK

MIxy-RMAXAL

MIxy-RMINALMIxy-LOWALARM

MIxy-LOWWARN


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 376

5.2 Signal listTable 2:


Module signals and input 1

MIx1- POSITION IN Position of module number x

MIx1- BLOCK IN Block updating of values input 1

MIx1- ERROR OUT Board Error on module number x. It signalises also the wrong module on the specified position.

MIx1- INPUTERR OUT Error on input 1

MIx1- RMAXAL OUT Rangemax Alarm input 1

MIx1- HIALARM OUT High Alarm input 1

MIx1- HIWARN OUT High Warning input 1

MIx1- LOWWARN OUT Low Warning input 1

MIx1- LOWALARM OUT Low Alarm input 1

MIx1- RMINAL OUT Rangemin Alarm input 1

Input 2

MIx2 BLOCK IN Block updating of values input 2








Input 3









Input 4









1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 377

Version 2.2-00

The x within the block name corresponds to the module number.

5.3 Setting table


Input 5









Input 6









Table 2:


Table 3: Setting table for a generic input module


Module Parameter

SampRate 5-255 Hz 5 Sampling Rate for mA Input Module x

Input 1

Name Usr def. string String MI61-Value

Use defined name for input 1. String length up to 13 charac-ters, all characters available on the HMI can be used

Operation Off, On Off Input 1 On/Off

Calib Off, On On Set to ’On’ to use production calibration for Input 1

ChSign Off, On Off Set to ’On’ if sign of Input 1 shall be changed

Unit 0-5 Unit1 State a 5 character unit name for Input 1

Hysteres 0.0-20.0 mA 1.0 Alarm hysteresis for Input 1 in mA

EnAlRem Off, On Off Immediate event when an alarm is removed for Input 1

I_Max -25.00-25.00 mA 20.00 Max current of transducer to Input 1 in mA

I_Min -25.00-25.00 mA 4.00 Min current of transducer to Input 1 in mA


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 378

EnAlarm Off, On Off Set to ’On’ to activate alarm supervision for Input 1

HiAlarm -25.00-25.00 mA 19.00 High Alarm level for Input 1 in mA

HiWarn -25.00-25.00 mA 18.00 High Warning level for Input 1 in mA

LowWarn -25.00-25.00 mA 6.00 Low warning level for Input 1 in mA

LowAlarm -25.00-25.00 mA 5.00 Low Alarm level for Input 1 in mA

RepInt 0-3600 s 0 Time between reports for Input 1 in seconds

EnDeadB Off, On Off Enable amplitude dead band supervision for Input 1

DeadBand 0.00-20.00 mA 1.00 Amplitude dead band for Input 1 in mA

EnIDeadB Off, On Off Enable integrating dead band supervision for Input 1

IDeadB 0.00-1000.00 mA 2.00 Integrating dead band for Input 1 in mA

EnDeadBP Off, On Off Enable periodic dead band reporting Input 1

MaxValue -1000.00-1000.00

(*) 20.00 Max primary value corr. to I_Max, Input 1.It determines the maximum value of the measuring transducer primary measuring quantity, which corresponds to the maxi-mum permitted input current I_Max

MinValue -1000.00-1000.00

(*) 4.00 Min primary value corr. to I_Min, Input 1.It determines the minimum value of the measuring transducer primary measuring quantity, which corresponds to the mini-mum permitted input current I_Min

Input 2

























1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 379

Version 2.2-00

MaxValue -1000.00-1000.00


MinValue -1000.00-1000.00


Input 3






















MaxValue -1000.00-1000.00


MinValue -1000.00-1000.00


Input 4








Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 380


















MaxValue -1000.00-1000.00


MinValue -1000.00-1000.00


Input 5




















1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 381

Version 2.2-00






MaxValue -1000.00-1000.00


MinValue -1000.00-1000.00


Input 6









I_Max -25.00 - 25.00 mA 20.00 Max current of transducer to Input 6 in mA

I_Min -25.00 - 25.00 mA 4.00 Min current of transducer to Input 6 in mA












MaxValue -1000.00-1000.00


MinValue -1000.00-1000.00





Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 391-XENPage 6 – 382

Note: (*) is referred to the five characters user-defined setting parametercalled “Unit” where the user can write the name of the unit of the measur-ing converter input measuring quantity.

Page 6 – 383Pulse counter

1 ApplicationThe pulse counter function provides the Substation Automation systemwith the number of pulses, which have been accumulated in the REx 5xxterminal during a defined period of time, for calculation of, for example,energy values. The pulses are captured on the Binary Input Module (BIM)that is read by the pulse counter function. The number of pulses in thecounter is then reported via LON to the station HMI or read via SPA as aservice value.

The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses for kWhand kvarh in both directions from external energy meters. Up to 12 binaryinputs in a REx 5xx can be used for this purpose with a frequency of up to40 Hz.

2 Theory of operationThe registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0−>1) on one ofthe 16 binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM).Pulse counter values are read from the station HMI with predefinedcyclicity without reset, and an analogue event is created.

The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60minutes and is synchronised with absolute system time. That means, acycle time of one minute will generate a pulse counter reading every fullminute. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be done witha command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counterscan also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI).

The pulse counter in REx 5xx supports unidirectional incrementalcounters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with arange 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialisation of the termi-nal or by turning the pulse counter operation parameter Off/On.

The reported value to station HMI over the LON bus contains Identity,Value, Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality con-sists of:

• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)• Wrapped around• Blocked• Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a servicevalue, that is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by thestation HMI from the database. The pulse counter function updates thevalue in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activatesthe NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connectedto an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the stationHMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by thefunction.


1MRK 580 394-XEN

Pulse counter

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 394-XENPage 6 – 384

3 DesignThe function can be regarded as a function block with a few inputs andoutputs. The inputs are divided into two groups: settings and connectables(configuration). The outputs are divided into three groups: signals(binary), service value for SPA, and analogue event for LON.

Figure 1: shows the pulse counter function block with connections of theinputs and outputs.

Figure 1: Overview of the pulse counter function

The BLOCK and TMIT_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Com-mand blocks, which are intended to be controlled either from the stationHMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulsecounter is blocked. The signal connected to TMIT_VAL performs oneadditional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with alength >1 second.

The BIM_CONN input is connected to the used input of the functionblock for the Binary Input Module (BIM). If BIM_CONN is connected toanother function block, the INVALID signal is activated to indicate theconfiguration error.

The NAME input is used for a user-defined name with up to 19 charac-ters.

Each pulse counter function block has four output signals: INVALID,RESTART, BLOCKED, and NEW_VAL. These signals can be connectedto an Event function block for event recording.

PulseCounterBLOCK

TMIT_VAL

BIM_CONN

NAME

SingleCmdFunc

OUTx

SingleCmdFunc

OUTx INPUTPulse

OUT

I/O-moduleBIx

“PCxx-name”

EVENT

INVALID

RESTART

BLOCKED

NEW_VAL

INPUT1

INPUT2

INPUT3

INPUT4Pulse length > 1 s

DatabasePulse counter value:0...2147483647

LON analogue event data msg(M_PC_T)*Identity*Value*Time*Pulse Counter Quality

SMS settings1. Operation = Off/On2. Cycle time = 30s...60min3. Analogue Event Mask = No/Report

Pulse counter 1MRK 580 394-XENPage 6 – 385

Version 2.2-00

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Mod-ule, where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configura-tion.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported valuedoes not comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first mes-sage after terminal start-up, in the first message after deblocking, and afterthe counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter isblocked. There are two reasons why the counter is blocked:

• The BLOCK input is set, or • The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is

inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the countervalue was updated since last report.

4 SettingFrom SMS under the “Set Pulse Counter 1...12” menu, these parameterscan be set individually for each pulse counter:

• Operation = Off/On• Cycle Time = 30s / 1min / 1min30s / 2min / 2min30s / 3min / 4min /

5min / 6min / 7min30s / 10min / 12min / 15min / 20min / 30min / 60min.

Under “Mask - Analogue Events” in SMS, the reporting of the analogueevents can be masked:

• Event Mask = No Events/Report Events

The configuration of the inputs and outputs of the pulse counter functionblock is made by the CAP 531 configuration tool.


On the Binary Input Module, the debounce filter time is fixed set to 5 ms,that is, the counter suppresses pulses with a pulse length less than 5 ms.The input oscillation blocking frequency is preset to 40 Hz. That meansthat the counter finds the input oscillating if the input frequency is greaterthan 40 Hz. The oscillation suppression is released at 30 Hz. From SMSunder the “Configure I/O-modules” menu and from the local HMI, thevalues for blocking/release of the oscillation can be changed. Note that thesetting is common for all channels on a Binary Input Module, that is, ifchanges of the limits are made for inputs not connected to the pulsecounter, the setting also influences the inputs on the same board used forpulse counting.

Pulse counter

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 394-XENPage 6 – 386

5 TestingThe test of the pulse counter function requires at least a SPA (or LON)connection to a station HMI including corresponding functionality. Aknown number of pulses are with different frequency connected to thepulse-counter input. The test should be performed for the settings opera-tion = Off/On and for blocked/deblocked function. The pulse countervalue is then read by the station HMI.

6 Appendix

6.1 Function block

6.2 Signal list

PulseCounter

BLOCKTMIT_VALBIM_CONNNAME

INVALIDRESTART

BLOCKEDNEW_VAL

PCxx

PC01- BIM_CONN IN Binary input module connection used for pulse aquisition

PC01- BLOCK IN Block aquisition

PC01- TMIT_VAL IN Asyncronous reading. Pulsing of this input makes an additional reading of the pulse input. Value is read at TMIT_VAL positive flank

PC01- BLOCKED OUT Set when BLOCK input is set or when the used BIM is inoperative

PC01- INVALID OUT Set when used BIM fails or has wrong configuration

PC01- NEW_VAL OUT New value exists. Set if counter value has changed since last read report

PC01- RESTART OUT Set if counter value does not comprise a full integration cycle for read report

PC01- NAME See settings table

Pulse counter 1MRK 580 394-XENPage 6 – 387

Version 2.2-00

6.3 Setting table


NAME User def. string

String PC01-NAME

User defined name String length up to 19 characters. Can only be set using the CAP 531 configuration tool

Operation Off, On Off Pulse counter Off/On. Can only be set from SMS

CycleTime 30s, 1min, 1min30s, 2min, 2min30s, 3min, 4min, 5min, 6min, 7min30s, 10min, 12min, 15min, 20min,30min, 60min

15min Reporting of counter value cycle time in minutes and seconds. Can only be set from SMS

EventMaskx No events, Report events

No events

Mask for analogue events from pulse counter x (x=01-12). Can only be set from SMS

Pulse counter

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 394-XENPage 6 – 388

Page 7 – 1

Contents Page

Hardware design ..................................................................................................7–3Introduction ...................................................................................................7–3Platform configurations .................................................................................7–4

Full length platform ..............................................................................7–43/4 width platform ................................................................................7–5Half width platform ...............................................................................7–6

Configuration options .................................................................7–7Construction and hardware characteristics ......................................................7–9

Modules ........................................................................................................7–9Transformer input Module (TRM) ........................................................7–9A/D-conversion Module (ADM) ..........................................................7–10Main Processing Module (MPM)........................................................7–11Signal Processing Module (SPM) ......................................................7–12Power Supply Module (PSM).............................................................7–12Input/Output modules ........................................................................7–14

Binary In/Out Module (IOM) .....................................................7–15Binary Input Module (BIM)........................................................7–16Binary Output Module (BOM) ...................................................7–17

Milliampere Input Module (MIM) ........................................................7–18Human machine interface (HMI)........................................................7–19

Remote end data communication modules .....................................................7–21Introduction .................................................................................................7–21Optical communication module...................................................................7–22

Long distance communication ...........................................................7–22Short distance communication...........................................................7–22

Galvanic communication module ................................................................7–23Carrier module ............................................................................................7–24

Serial communication module ..........................................................................7–25Hardware description ..................................................................................7–25

Hardware modules

Hardware modulesPage 7 – 2

Page 7 – 3Hardware design

1 IntroductionThe terminal is assembled in a closed case that is 1/2, 3/4 or full width ofa standard 19-inch wide rack. The height is 6U.

This terminal is made with a technology that fulfils all modern electro-magnetic interference requirements. These requirements are fulfilled byhaving a closed and partly welded steel case around the printed circuitboard assemblies. The terminal has very good separation between theinternal, sensitive signals, and the external, polluted process signals. Thisis achieved by keeping all process signals in the back of the case and theinternal signals in a mother-board where all sensitive bus communicationruns.The mother-board is located behind the front panel of the terminal.

All external serial buses for Substation Control System (SCS), StationMonitoring System (SMS) and the front-connected PC are insulated withfibre optical links to avoid disturbances. This, in combination with a gooddesign of transformers, power supply and binary inputs give a terminal,that can withstand the electromagnetic interference tests.

The product is based on harmonized standards. The standards are listed inflap 3 Product introductions, sections Requirements and technical data.

If a COMBITEST test switch is included an additional box type RHGS isused. It has the same principal design as the terminal case and the width1/4 of 19-inch. It is possible to mount the RHGS-box by the side of a REx5xx product of size 3/4x19 inch or smaller.

Figure 1: Basic block diagram

HMI unit

U

I

A/D

SP1

SP2

SP3

SP4

SP5

SP6

SP7

SP8

SP9

SP10

SP11

SP12

TRM

In

Out

In

Out

32-b

it c

ontr

olle

r

Com

mun

icat

ion

SCS

ADM SPM MPM BIO

1MRK 580 395-XEN


Hardware design

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 395-XENPage 7 – 4

2 Platform configurationsThe basic configuration of the REx 5xx terminal consists of the followingmodules:

• Main processing module. All information is processed or passed through this module before it is sent from the terminal. The module is used for configuration of the terminal and storage of all its set-tings. It is also used for communication (position S10 in the full sized rack else S9).

• Signal processing module with up to 12 digital signal processors used for all measuring functions.

• Human machine interface (HMI) built-in to the front cover and con-tains LEDs, a LCD and an optical connector for a front-connected PC. For this front communication, you need an optional special cable, with an opto-to-RS232, built-in converter.

• A Power supply containing a DC/DC converter, which provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system. The power supply consists of a two stage converter which gives a very wide input-voltage range, from 48 V up to 250 V. It delivers +5, +12 and -12 Volts. There are two different types depending on the plat-form size, see below.

2.1 Full length platform

Figure 2: Hardware structure of the full width 19” case

The basic addition to the configuration of the terminal for the full width19” case consists of the following modules:

• A power supply that can provide 30W (position S40)

• Full width 19” backplane with 13 slots available for I/O.

REx 5xx

S2 S8 S10 S12 S14 S16 S18 S20 S22 S24 S26 S28 S30 S32 S34 S36 S38 S40

C

E

visf_226

Hardware design 1MRK 580 395-XENPage 7 – 5

Version 2.2-00

2.2 3/4 width platform

Figure 3: Hardware structure of the 3/4 of full width case

The basic addition to the configuration of the terminal for the 3/4 of fullwidth case consists of the following modules:

• A power supply that can provide 20W and contains both an external CAN-port and I/O (position S13).

• A 3/4 of full width backplane with 8 slots available for I/O.

REx 5xx

S1 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19 S21 S23 S25 S27 S29

C

E

visf 227

Hardware design

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 395-XENPage 7 – 6

2.3 Half width platform

Figure 4: Hardware structure of the 1/2 of full width case

The basic addition to the configuration of the terminal for the 1/2 of fullwidth case consists of the following modules:

• A power supply that can provide 20W and contains both an external CAN-port and I/O (position S13).

• A 1/2 of full width backplane with 3 slots available for I/O.

REx 5xx

S1 S7 S9 S11 S13 S15 S17 S19

C

E

visf_228

Hardware design 1MRK 580 395-XENPage 7 – 7

Version 2.2-00

2.3.1 Configuration options

Optionally these hardware modules are available:

• Binary input/output modules, that can be of type Binary input mod-ule (16 inputs), Binary output module (24 relays or 12 command relays), and a combined Binary input/output module (8 inputs and 12 output relays).

• A Milliampere Input Module.

• One or two optical serial communication modules, intended for remote fibre optic communication. Having two modules will enable the terminal to be a part of SMS in parallel with a Substation Auto-mation System (SA). These are mounted on the Main Processing Module if used.

• RTXP 24 test switch.

• Differential communication modules. A galvanic module with five different configurations, an optical module or a carrier module with a slot for either a galvanic or an optical module. (at position S38 on the full width case, S19 on the half of full width case and S29 on the 3/4 of full width case).

• A Transformer module with five voltage and five current input trans-formers (at position S2 on the full width case else S1).

• An A/D-conversion (AD) module for up to 10 analogue inputs, oper-ating with a sampling frequency of 2000 Hz. It has a bandwidth of 250 Hz, and a dynamic range for currents, from 0,01 to 100 ⋅ Ir, and for voltages, from 0,01 to 2 ⋅ Ur (at position S8 on the full width case else S7).

Figure 5: Internal hardware structure showing a full width case configu-ration

SA

PC/SMS

SPM

C

E

ShieldShield

Shield

TRM

S2

ADM

S8

MPM

S10

BIM, BOM, IOM, MIM

numbers depending on the

rack sizeDiffcom

S38

PSM

S40

...............

CAN-bus (1 Mbit/s)

Analogue

bus

Serial

bus

HDLC-bus

HMI

HMI serial communication links

visf_229.vsd

Hardware design

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 395-XENPage 7 – 8

Page 7 – 9Construction and hardware characteristics

1 Modules

1.1 Transformer input Module (TRM)

Current and voltage input transformers form an isolating barrier betweenthe external wiring and internal circuits of the terminal. They adapt thevalues of the measuring quantities to the static circuitry and prevent thedisturbances to enter the terminalYou can connect 10 analogue inputquantities to the transformer module that consists of:

• Five voltage transformers that cover a rated range from 100 to 125 V or 220 V.

• Five current transformers in two versions - one for 1 A and one for 5 A rated current.

The TRM module also exists in a variant with only five current transformers.

The input quantities are the following:

• Three phase currents

• Residual current of the protected line

• Residual current of the parallel circuit (if any) for compensation of the effect of the zero sequence mutual impedance on the fault locator measurement or residual current of the protected line but from a par-allell core used for CT circuit supervision function or independent earthfault function.

• Three phase voltages

• Open delta voltage for the protected line (for an optional directional earth-fault protection)

• Phase voltage for an optional synchronism and energizing check.

Figure 1: Block diagram of the TRM

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Vol

tage

Inpu

t con

nect

orC

urre

nt In

put c

onne

ctor CT CT

CT

CT

CT

VT

VT

VT

VT

VT

1MRK 580 396-XEN


Construction and hardware characteristics

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 10

1.2 A/D-conversion Module (ADM)

The incoming signals from the intermediate current transformers areadapted to the electronic voltage level with shunts. To gain dynamic rangefor the current inputs, two shunts with separate A/D channels are used foreach input current. By that a 16-bit dynamic range is obtained with a12 bits A/D converter.

The next step in the signal flow is the analogue filter of the first order,with a cut-off frequency of 500 Hz. This filter is used to avoid aliasingproblems.

The A/D converter has a 12-bit resolution. It samples each input signal (5voltages and 2 . 5 currents) with a sampling frequency of 2 kHz.

Before the A/D-converted signals are transmitted to the main processingmodule, the signals are band-pass filtered and down-sampled to 1 kHz ina digital signal processor (DSP).

The filter in the DSP is a numerical filter with a cut-off frequency of250 Hz.

The transmission of data between the A/D-conversion module and theMain processing module is done on a supervised serial link ofRS485 type. This transmission is performed once every millisecond andcontains information about all incoming analogue signals.

Figure 2: Block diagram for the ADM

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Analog filters &current shunts

PLD

DS

P

A/D

-co

nver

ter

Ana

log

MU

X

Controllogic &buffers

1-5 Voltageinputs

5-7 Currentinputs


1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 11

Version 2.2-00

1.3 Main Processing Module (MPM)

The terminal is based on a pipelined multi-processor design. The 32-bitmain controller, receives the result from the Signal processing moduleevery millisecond.

All memory management are also handled by the main controller. Themodule has 8MB of disc memory and 1MB of code memory. It also has8MB of dynamic memory.

The controller also serves four serial links: one high-speed CAN bus forInput/Output modules and three serial links for the different types of HMIcommunication explained below.

The main controller makes all decisions, based on the information fromthe Signal processing module and from the binary inputs. The decisionsare sent to the different output modules and to these communication ports:

• Local HMI module including a front-connected PC, if any, for local human-machine communication

• LON communication port at the rear (option)

• SPA/IEC communication port at the rear (option)

Figure 3: Block diagram for the MPM

To allow easy upgrading of software in the field, FUT, a special connectoris used, the Download connector. The RTC on the module has beenadjusted for year 2000.

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

SP

M c

onne

ctor

Dow

nloa

dco

nnec

tor

Maincontroller

LON

CAN

DRAM (SIMM)

SP

A/IE

CLO

N

Disc Flash (8MB)

Code Flash (1MB)

8-bit Data bus

32-b

it D

ata

bus

CAN bus

SCM

SCM


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 12

1.4 Signal Processing Module (SPM)

All analogue data are received in all of the up to 12 (16 bits) digital signalprocessors (DSP). In these DSPs, the main part of the filtering and the cal-culations occur. The result from the calculations in the DSPs is sent everymillisecond on a parallel bus to the (32 bit) main controller on the Mainprocessing module.

Figure 4: Block diagram of the SPM

1.5 Power Supply Module (PSM)

There are two different types of power supply modules. The Power sup-plies contains a built-in, self-regulated DC/DC converter that provides fullisolation between the terminal and the external battery system. The wide-input voltage range of the DC/DC converter converts an input voltagerange from 48 to 250V, including a ±20% tolerance on the EL voltage.The output voltages are +5, +12 and -12 Volt.

DSP12

DSP11

DSP10 DSP8

DSP9

DSP6 DSP4 DSP1

DSP2

DSP3DSP5DSP7

MP

M-c

onne

ctor


1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 13

Version 2.2-00

The first type of PSM, used in the half and 3/4 of full width platforms, hasan external CAN-port used for the connection of two platforms and built-in I/O with four optical isolated inputs and five outputs. It can provide upto 20W.

Figure 5: Block diagram for the PSM used in the half and 3/4 of full width cases.

The second type of PSM has no CAN or I/O but it can provide 30W forthe extended number of modules in the full width platform.

Figure 6: Block diagram for the PSM used in the full width case.

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Pro

cess

con

nect

orC

AN

&de

bug

Opto isolatedinput

Opto isolatedinput

Opto isolatedinput

Opto isolatedinput

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Power supply

Micro-controller

Memory

PWM

CAN

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Inpu

t con

nect

or

PowersupplyFilter

Supervision


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 14

1.6 Input/Output modules The number of inputs or outputs in REx 5xx can be selected in a variety ofcombinations depending on the size of the rack. There are no basic I/Oconfiguration of the terminal. The table below shows the number of avail-able inputs or output modules for the different platform sizes.

Note! Standard factory configuration for REx 5xx terminals requires min-imum one binary input/output module.

A number of signals are available for signalling purposes in the terminal,and all are freely programmable. The voltage level of the input/outputmodules is selectable at order RL48, 110, or 220 (48/60 V ±20%, 110/125V ±20% or 220/250 V ±20%). The Binary in/out module and the Binaryinput module are also available in an RL 24 version (24/30 V ±20%).

For more information about IOM, BIM and BOM see figure 7, whichshows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the three volt-age levels.

Figure 7: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

These modules communicates with the Main Processing Module via theCAN-bus on the backplane.

Platform size1/1 of fullwidth

3/4 of full width

1/2 of full width

I/O slots available 13 8 3

300

176

144

8872

3832

1918

24/30VRL24

48/60VRL48

110/125VRL110

220/250VRL220

RL

Volt

Functionguaranteed

Functionuncertain

No functionguaranteed


1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 15

Version 2.2-00

The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of therelay contact connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state powerconsumption, which is shown in figure 8.

Figure 8: Current through the relay contact

1.6.1 Binary In/Out Module (IOM)

The Binary in/out module contains eight optical isolated binary inputs andtwelve binary output contacts. Ten of the output relays have contacts witha high-switching capacity (Trip and signal relays). The remaining tworelays are of reed type and for signalling purpose only. The relays aregrouped together as can be seen in the terminal diagram.

Figure 9: Block diagram for the binary input/output module

30

110ms 20ms

Time

Incoming pulse

Approx. currentin mA

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Pro

cess

con

nect

orP

roce

ss c

onne

ctor

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Rel

ay

Rel

ay

Relay Relay

Micro-controller

PWM

Memory

CA

N

Deb

ug&

isp

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 16

1.6.2 Binary Input Module (BIM)

The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. Thebinary inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the input logi-cal signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in the distur-bance recording and event-recording functions. This enables the extensivemonitoring and evaluation of operation for the terminal and for all associ-ated electrical circuits. You can select the voltage level of the Binary inputmodules (RL24, 48, 110, or 220) at order.

Figure 10: Block diagram of the Binary Input Module

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Pro

cess

con

nect

orP

roce

ss c

onne

ctor

Micro-controller

Memory

CA

N

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input


1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 17

Version 2.2-00

1.6.3 Binary Output Module (BOM)

The Binary output module has either 24 single-output relays or 12 com-mand-output relays. They are grouped together as can be seen in the blockdiagram below. All the output relays have contacts with a high switchingcapacity (Trip and signal relays).

Figure 11: Block diagram of the Binary Output Module

Two single output relays can be connected in series (which gives a com-mand output relay) in order to get a high security at operation of high volt-age apparatuses.

Figure 12: One of twelve binary output groups

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Pro

cess

con

nect

orP

roce

ss c

onne

ctor

Micro-controller

Memory

CA

N

Rel

ayRelay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Rel

ay

Rel

ay

Rel

ay

Out1

Out2

Common

Set1

Superv

Set2

Superv


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 18

The output relays are provided with a supervision function to ensure ahigh degree of security against unwanted operation. The status of the out-put contacts (on/off) is continously read back and compared with theexpected status. If any discrepancy occurs, an error is reported. This func-tion covers:

• interrupt or short circuit in an output relay coil

• failure of an output relay driver.

1.7 Milliampere Input Module (MIM)

The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analogue channelswith separated protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and opticalisolation for each input making them galvanic isolated from each otherand from the rest of the module.

The differential analogue inputs measure DC and low frequency currentsin range of up to +/- 20mA. The A/D converter has a digital filter withselectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately and storedin a non-volatile memory and the module will self-calibrate if the temper-ature should start to drift. This module communicates, like the other I/O-modules, with the Main Processing Module via the CAN-bus.

Figure 13: Block diagram of the Milliampere Input Module

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Pro

cess

con

nect

or

Micro-controller

Memory

CA

N

Protection& filter

A/D Converter

Volt-ref

Opto-isolation

DC/DC

Protection& filter

A/D Converter

Volt-ref

Opto-isolation

DC/DC

Protection& filter

A/D Converter

Volt-ref

Opto-isolation

DC/DC

Protection& filter

A/D Converter

Volt-ref

Opto-isolation

DC/DC

Protection& filter

A/D Converter

Volt-ref

Opto-isolation

DC/DC

Protection& filter

A/D Converter

Volt-ref

Opto-isolation

DC/DC


1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 19

Version 2.2-00

1.8 Human machine interface (HMI)

The local HMI module consists of three LEDs (red, yellow, and green), anLCD display with four lines, each contain 16 characters, six buttons andan optical connector for PC communication.

Figure 14: Local HMI

The LED indication module is equipped with 18 LEDs, which can light ineither red, yellow or green color. The LED is also equipped with adescription text for each of the LEDs.

Figure 15: LED indication module, front panel

E

C

green red

LEDs

yellow

Optical connectorfor local PC

Push buttons

Liquid Crystal Displayfour rows16 characters/rowREx 5xx *2.0

C = QuitE = Enter menu

Start TripReady

064.ai

Indication descriptionLED


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 396-XENPage 7 – 20

The PC is connected via a special cable, that has a built-in optical to elec-trical interface. Thus, disturbance-free local serial communication withthe personal computer is achieved. You need the SMS-BASE and SM software for this communication. A PC greatly simplifies the commu-nication with the terminal. It also gives the user additional functionalitywhich is unavailable on the HMI because of insufficient space. The LEDson the HMI display this information:

Table 1: The local HMI LED display

LED indication Information

Green:

Steady In service

Flashing Internal failure

Dark No power supply

Yellow:

Steady Disturbance Report triggered

Flashing Terminal in test mode

Red:

Steady Trip command issued from a protection function

Flashing Terminal in blocked or configuration mode

Page 7 – 21Remote end data communication modules

1 IntroductionRemote end communication can be either dedicated optical fibres, directgalvanic communication or multiplexed communication links. This can bemanaged either with dedicated modules or via a carrier module with eithera galvanic or an optical sub-module. The dedicated galvanic module canbe of five different configurations. All modules communicates with themain processing module via the CAN-bus and an HDLC-bus on the back-plane.

1MRK 580 397-XEN


Remote end data communication modules

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 397-XENPage 7 – 22

2 Optical communication module

2.1 Long distance communication

The optical communication module is designed to work with both 9/125µm single-mode fibres and 50/125 or 62,5/125 µm multimode fibres at1300 nm wavelength. The connectors are of type FC-PC (SM) or FC(MM) respectively. Two different levels of optical output power are usedto cover distances from 0 to approximately 30km. The optical power is seton the HMI. The attenuation in fibres is normally approximately 0.8dB/km for multimode and 0.4 dB/km for single-mode. Additional attenua-tion due to installation can be estimated to be 0.2dB/km for multimodeand 0.1 dB/km for single-mode fibres. For single-mode fibre and highoutput power this results in a maximum distance of 32km.

2.2 Short distance communication

The optical communication module can also be connected over a shortoptic link to an optical-to-electrical converter of type FOX6Plus orFOX20 for connection to equipments with interface according to CCITTstandard G.703, co-directional, at 64 kbits/s. The connectors are of typeST

Figure 1: Block diagram for the optical communication module.

Interfaceconverter& control

logic

Micro-controller

Memory

CAN

Fail indicator

Opto

reciever

Opto driver

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor


1MRK 580 397-XENPage 7 – 23

Version 2.2-00

3 Galvanic communication moduleThe communication module of galvanic type is intended for use togetherwith multiplexers or other communication equipment. The requirementfor this is that the protection is within the same building as the communi-cation equipment, within a distance less than 100m, and that the environ-ment is relatively free from noise. In this case the protection may beconnected directly to the multiplexer via shielded cables with twistedpairs.Both ends of the communication line must have common ground.

The equipment is available for the following interfacing recommendationsspecifying the interconnection of digital equipment to a PCM multiplexer:

• V.36 co-directional

• V.36 contra-directional

• X.21

• RS530/422 co-directional

• RS530/422 contra-directional

Note! For best performance contra-directional operation is recommendedfor V.36 and RS530/422.

Co-directional operation should only be used when operating two units ina back-to-back configuration, e.g. at laboratory testing.

V.36 also fulfills the older recommendation V.35. The connection is doneby DSub connectors, 15 pin for X.21 and 25 pin for V.36 and RS530.

Figure 2: Block diagram for the galvanic communication module

Micro-controller

Memory

CAN

Opt

o is

olat

ion

DC/DC

Trans-ceivers

Pro

cess

con

nect

or X

3P

roce

ss c

onne

ctor

X2

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor


Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 397-XENPage 7 – 24

4 Carrier moduleThe third kind of differential communication module is the carrier moduleable to connect a communication sub-module to the platform. It adds theCAN-communication and the controls with the rest of the platform. Thisadds the capability to transfer binary signals between for example two dis-tance protection units.

There are two types of sub-modules that can be added to the carrier mod-ule, one short range galvanic communication module and a short rangeoptical communication module. The carrier module senses the type ofsub-module via one of the two connectors.

The short range optical communication module can also be connectedover a short optical link to an optical-to-electrical modem of type FIBER-DATA 21-15X for connections to equipments with interface according toV.35, V.36 or FIBERDATA 21-16X for connections to equipments withinterface according to X21, RS530 or G.703 at 64 kbit/s

The short range optical module has ST type connectors. .

Figure 3: Block diagram for the carrier module.

Micro-controllerMemory

CAN

Sub-module

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Page 7 – 25Serial communication module

1 Hardware descriptionThe serial communication modules are placed in slots at the rear part ofthe Main processing module. One or two modules can be applied on theMain processing module (see “Construction and hardware characteristic”,section “Main processing module”). One slot is intended for LON com-munication and the other for SPA or IEC communication. The two serialcommunication modules enable the terminal to be a part of a SubstationAutomation system (LON or SPA), and/or a Station Monitoring System(SPA).

There are four different types of SCMs:

The serial communication module can have connectors for two plasticfibre cables or two glass fibre cables. The incoming optical fibre is con-nected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre to the TXtransmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay specialattention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. ofthe optical fibres. The modules can be identified with a number on thelabel on the module.

Table 1: SCM types

Communication: Fibre connection: Label Connection

LON Plastic, snap-in 1MRK00168-EA X15

LON ST, glass, bayonet 1MRK00168-DA X15

SPA/IEC Plastic, snap-in 1MRK00168-FA X13

SPA/IEC ST,glass, bayonet 1MRK00168-DA X13

1MRK 580 398-XEN


Serial communication module

Version 2.2-00

1MRK 580 398-XENPage 7 – 26

Page 9 – 1

AA/D-conversion module 7–10active group 5–7active power P 6–345ADM 7–10AND 5–27AR 6–209AR01-CBCLOSED 6–212AR01-CBREADY 6–213AR01-CLOSECB 6–214AR01-INHIBIT 6–213AR01-INPROGR 6–213AR01-OFF 6–212AR01-ON 6–212AR01-P1PH 6–214AR01-P3PH 6–214AR01-PLCLOST 6–213AR01-READY 6–213AR01-SP1 6–213AR01-START 6–212AR01-SYNC 6–213AR01-TP1 6–213AR01-TP2 6–213AR01-TPTRIP 6–213AR01-TRSOTF 6–213AR01-UNSUC 6–214AR01-WAIT 6–213AR01-WFMASTER 6–214ASD 6–33auto-reclosing 6–209

Bback-up trip 6–31baud rate 4–15BFP 6–29BIM 5–16, 7–16binary in/out module 7–15binary input module 5–16, 7–16binary output module 5–17, 7–17block functions 4–19BOM 5–17, 7–17breaker-failure protection 6–29buttons 4–25

CCAN bus 7–11CDxx-signal name 6–85CMxx-signal name 6–304COMBITEST 4–18command dialogue 6–83command function 6–81commissioning 4–17configurable logic 5–25configuration 4–16, 4–35configuration mode 4–16cover 4–4

cut-out sizes 4–8

DDAR 6–209data part 6–333DBLL 6–89, 6–115, 6–134, 6–156,

6–187Dead bus live line 6–89, 6–115, 6–134,

6–156, 6–187Dead line live bus 6–89, 6–115, 6–134,

6–156, 6–187dead-band supervision 6–347, 6–365DISTREP CLEARED 4–21disturbance overview 6–314disturbance report 6–313, 6–319disturbance summary 6–314DLLB 6–89, 6–115, 6–134, 6–156,

6–187DSP 7–12

Eearthing wire 4–10electrical terminals 4–10energizing check 6–113, 6–131

Ffault locator 6–341fault tracing 4–20ferrule 4–12fibre optic 4–13filter 7–10flush mounting 4–7, 4–8FreqDiff 6–87, 6–113, 6–134, 6–154,

6–184frequency f 6–345front communication 4–14

Ggasket 4–4

Hhardware design 7–9header 6–333HSAR 6–209hysteresis 6–347, 6–365

II/O system 5–15identifiers 5–4indications 6–329input/output module 5–18, 7–14installation 4–4INT-- CPUFAIL 4–20INT-- CPUWARN 4–20

Index 1MRK 580 414-XEN

Version 2.0-00September 1998

Index

Version 2.0-00

1MRK 580 414-XENPage 9 – 2

INT-- WARNING 4–20INT--ADC 4–20integrating dead-band 6–347, 6–365internal clock 5–3internal events 4–21INT--FAIL 4–20INT--IOyy 4–20INT--RTC 4–20INT--TSYNC 4–20IOM 5–18, 7–15IOP (I/O position) 5–20

Lled indications 6–329limit time 6–316LNT 4–16LON 4–14, 7–25LON Network Tool 4–16

MmA input module 5–18, 6–363main processing module 7–11maintenance 4–23man machine interface 7–19manual trig 6–318mean values 6–345measuring range 6–346mechanical installation 4–4memory 6–313, 6–331menu tree 4–41MicroSCADA 3–5MIM 5–18, 6–374MMI 4–24, 7–19MMI--BLOCKSET 4–14mounting angles 4–4mounting kits 4–4MPM 7–11

Ooptical fibre 3–5, 7–25OR 5–27

PPhaseDiff 6–87, 6–113, 6–134, 6–154,

6–184phasors 6–356post-fault recording time 6–316power supply module 7–12pre-fault recording time 6–316PSM 7–12pulse 5–30

Rrack mounting 4–4

reactive power Q 6–345receiving 4–4reclosing counters 6–211reclosing programs 6–215recording capacity 6–331recording times 6–316remote communication 4–15repair instruction 4–22restricted settings 5–11retrip 6–31, 6–34RTXP 24 4–18

Ssampling frequency 7–10screw terminals 4–9sealing strip 4–4secondary injection test 4–18self-supervision 4–20SequenceNo 6–319serial communication module 4–14,

7–25SETTING CHANGED 4–21setting group 5–7setting restriction 5–12side-by-side mounting 4–6signal processing module 7–12slave number 4–15socket 4–12SPA 4–14, 7–25SPM 7–12storage 4–4synchro-check 6–87, 6–113, 6–134,

6–154, 6–184

Tterminal identification 5–3test mode 4–17, 6–323TEST-INPUT 4–17timer 5–28transformer input module 7–9trig signals 6–318tripping logic 6–239TRM 7–9

Vvoltage connector 4–10

Wwall mounting 4–9

XXOR 5–31

Documents

Table of contents 1MRK 580 231-XEN Technical reference manual Page … · 2018-05-09 · Table of contents Technical reference manual REB 551 Version: 2.2-00 1MRK 580 231-XEN Page